Прабхупада
Та самая Гита, отпечатанная в 1972 году в издательстве Макмиллан. Оригинальный английский текст.
1972
Глава 1
धृतराष्ट्र उवाच | धर्मक्षेत्रे कुरुक्षेत्रे समवेता युयुत्सवः | मामकाः पाण्डवाश्चैव किमकुर्वत सञ्जय ||१-१||
dhṛtarāṣṭra uvāca . dharmakṣetre kurukṣetre samavetā yuyutsavaḥ . māmakāḥ pāṇḍavāścaiva kimakurvata sañjaya ||1-1||
dhrtarastra uvaca
dharma-ksetre kuru-ksetre
samaveta yuyutsavah
mamakah pandavas caiva
kim akurvata sanjaya
dhrtarastrah —King Dhrtarastra; uvaca —said; dharma-ksetre —in the place
of pilgrimage; kuru-ksetre —in the place named Kuruksetra; samavetah —
assembled; yuyutsavah —desiring to fight; mamakah —my party (sons);
pandavah —the sons of Pandu; ca —and; eva-certainly; kim —what; akurvata
— did they do; sanjaya —O Sanjaya.
Dhrtarastra said: O Sanjaya, after assembling in the place of
pilgrimage at Kuruksetra, what did my sons and the sons of Pandu do,
being desirous to fight?
सञ्जय उवाच | दृष्ट्वा तु पाण्डवानीकं व्यूढं दुर्योधनस्तदा | आचार्यमुपसंगम्य राजा वचनमब्रवीत् ||१-२||
sañjaya uvāca . dṛṣṭvā tu pāṇḍavānīkaṃ vyūḍhaṃ duryodhanastadā . ācāryamupasaṃgamya rājā vacanamabravīt ||1-2||
sanjayah —Sanjaya; uvaca —said; drstva —after seeing; tu —but; pandava-
arukam —the soldiers of the Pandavas; vyudham —arranged in military
phalanx; duryodhanah —King Duryodhana; tada —at that time; acaryam — the
teacher; upasangamya —approaching nearby; raja —the king; vacanam —
words; abravit —spoke.
Sanjaya said: O King, after looking over the army gathered by the sons
of Pandu, King Duryodhana went to his teacher and began to speak the
following words:
पश्यैतां पाण्डुपुत्राणामाचार्य महतीं चमूम् | व्यूढां द्रुपदपुत्रेण तव शिष्येण धीमता ||१-३||
paśyaitāṃ pāṇḍuputrāṇāmācārya mahatīṃ camūm . vyūḍhāṃ drupadaputreṇa tava śiṣyeṇa dhīmatā ||1-3||
pasya —behold; etam —this; pandu-putranam —of the sons of Pandu; acarya
—0 teacher; mahatim —great; camum —military force; vyudham —arranged;
drupada-putrena —by the son of Drupada; tava —your; sisyena — disciple;
dhimata —very intelligent.
O my teacher, behold the great army of the sons of Pandu, so expertly
arranged by your intelligent disciple, the son of Drupada.
अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भीमार्जुनसमा युधि | युयुधानो विराटश्च द्रुपदश्च महारथः ||१-४||
atra śūrā maheṣvāsā bhīmārjunasamā yudhi . yuyudhāno virāṭaśca drupadaśca mahārathaḥ ||1-4||
atra —here; surah —heroes; mahesvasah —mighty bowmen; bhfma-arjuna —
Bhlma and Arjuna; samah —equal; yudhi —in the fight; yuyudhanah —
Yuyudhana; viratah —Virata; ca —also; drupadah —Drupada; ca —also;
maharathah —great fighter.
Here in this army there are many heroic bowmen equal in fighting to
Bhlma and Arjuna; there are also great fighters like Yuyudhana, Virata
and Drupada.
धृष्टकेतुश्चेकितानः काशिराजश्च वीर्यवान् | पुरुजित्कुन्तिभोजश्च शैब्यश्च नरपुंगवः ||१-५||
dhṛṣṭaketuścekitānaḥ kāśirājaśca vīryavān . purujitkuntibhojaśca śaibyaśca narapuṃgavaḥ ||1-5||
dhrstaketuh —Dhrstaketu; cekitanah —Cekitana; kasirajah —Kasiraja; ca —
also; viryavan —very powerful; purujit —Purujit; kuntibhojah —Kuntibhoja; ca
—and; saibyah —Saibya; ca —and; nara-pungavah —heroes in human society.
There are also great, heroic, powerful fighters like Dhrstaketu,
Cekitana, Kasiraja, Purujit, Kuntibhoja and Saibya.
युधामन्युश्च विक्रान्त उत्तमौजाश्च वीर्यवान् | सौभद्रो द्रौपदेयाश्च सर्व एव महारथाः ||१-६||
yudhāmanyuśca vikrānta uttamaujāśca vīryavān . saubhadro draupadeyāśca sarva eva mahārathāḥ ||1-6||
yudhamanyuh —Yudhamanyu; ca —and; vikrantah —mighty; uttamaujah —
Uttamauja; ca —and; viryavan —very powerful; saubhadrah —the son of
Subhadra; draupadeyah —the sons of DraupadI; ca —and; sarve —all; eva —
certainly; maha-rathah —great chariot fighters.
There are the mighty Yudhamanyu, the very powerful Uttamauja, the
son of Subhadra and the sons of DraupadI. All these warriors are great
chariot fighters.
अस्माकं तु विशिष्टा ये तान्निबोध द्विजोत्तम | नायका मम सैन्यस्य संज्ञार्थं तान्ब्रवीमि ते ||१-७||
asmākaṃ tu viśiṣṭā ye tānnibodha dvijottama . nāyakā mama sainyasya saṃjñārthaṃ tānbravīmi te ||1-7||
asmakam —our; tu —but; visistah —especially powerful; ye—those; tan —
them; nibodha —just take note, be informed; dvijottama —the best of the
brahmanas; nayakah —captains; mama —my; sainyasya —of the soldiers;
samjha-artham —for information; tan —them; bravfmi —I am speaking; te —
your.
O best of the brahmanas, for your information, let me tell you about
the captains who are especially qualified to lead my military force.
भवान्भीष्मश्च कर्णश्च कृपश्च समितिञ्जयः | अश्वत्थामा विकर्णश्च सौमदत्तिस्तथैव च ||१-८||
bhavānbhīṣmaśca karṇaśca kṛpaśca samitiñjayaḥ . aśvatthāmā vikarṇaśca saumadattistathaiva ca ||1-8||
bhavan —yourself; bhfsmah —Grandfather Bhlsma; ca —also; karnah —
Kama; ca —and; krpah —Krpa; ca —and; samitihjayah —always victorious in
battle; asvatthama —Asvatthama; vikarnah —Vikarna; ca —as well as;
saumadattih —the son of Somadatta; tatha —and as; eva —certainly; ca —and.
There are personalities like yourself, Bhlsma, Karna, Krpa,
Asvatthama, Vikarna and the son of Somadatta called Bhurisrava, who
are always victorious in battle.
अन्ये च बहवः शूरा मदर्थे त्यक्तजीविताः | नानाशस्त्रप्रहरणाः सर्वे युद्धविशारदाः ||१-९||
anye ca bahavaḥ śūrā madarthe tyaktajīvitāḥ . nānāśastrapraharaṇāḥ sarve yuddhaviśāradāḥ ||1-9||
anye —many others; ca —also; bahavah —in great numbers; surah-heroes;
mad-arthe-for my sake; tyakta-jivitah —prepared to risk life; nana —many;
sastra-weapons; praharanah —equipped with; sarve —all of them; yuddha —
battle; visaradah —experienced in military science.
There are many other heroes who are prepared to lay down their lives
for my sake. All of them are well equipped with different kinds of
weapons, and all are experienced in military science.
अपर्याप्तं तदस्माकं बलं भीष्माभिरक्षितम् | पर्याप्तं त्विदमेतेषां बलं भीमाभिरक्षितम् ||१-१०||
aparyāptaṃ tadasmākaṃ balaṃ bhīṣmābhirakṣitam . paryāptaṃ tvidameteṣāṃ balaṃ bhīmābhirakṣitam ||1-10||
aparyaptam —immeasurable; tat —that; asmakam —of ours; balam —
strength; bhlsma —by Grandfather Bhlsma; abhiraksitam —perfectly protected;
paryaptam —limited; tu —but; idam —all these; etesam —of the Pandavas;
balam —strength; bhima —by Bhlma; abhiraksitam —carefully protected.
Our strength is immeasurable, and we are perfectly protected by
Grandfather Bhlsma, whereas the strength of the Pandavas, carefully
protected by Bhlma, is limited.
अयनेषु च सर्वेषु यथाभागमवस्थिताः | भीष्ममेवाभिरक्षन्तु भवन्तः सर्व एव हि ||१-११||
ayaneṣu ca sarveṣu yathābhāgamavasthitāḥ . bhīṣmamevābhirakṣantu bhavantaḥ sarva eva hi ||1-11||
ayanesu —in the strategic points; ca —also; sarvesu —everywhere;
yathabhagam —as they are differently arranged; avasthitah —situated;
bhismam — unto Grandfather Bhlsma; eva —certainly; abhiraksantu —support
may be given; bhavantah —all of you; sarve —respectively; eva —certainly; hi
—and exactly.
Now all of you must give full support to Grandfather Bhlsma, standing
at your respective strategic points in the phalanx of the army.
तस्य सञ्जनयन्हर्षं कुरुवृद्धः पितामहः | सिंहनादं विनद्योच्चैः शङ्खं दध्मौ प्रतापवान् ||१-१२||
tasya sañjanayanharṣaṃ kuruvṛddhaḥ pitāmahaḥ . siṃhanādaṃ vinadyoccaiḥ śaṅkhaṃ dadhmau pratāpavān ||1-12||
tasya —his; sanjanayan —increasing; harsam —cheerfulness; kuru-vrddhah
—the grandsire of the Kuru dynasty (Bhlsma); pitamahah —the grandfather;
simha-nadam —roaring sound, like a lion; vinadya —vibrating; uccaih —very
loudly; sahkham —conchshell; dadhmau —blew; pratapavan —the valiant.
Then Bhlsma, the great valiant grandsire of the Kuru dynasty, the
grandfather of the fighters, blew his conchshell very loudly like the sound
of a lion, giving Duryodhana joy.
ततः शङ्खाश्च भेर्यश्च पणवानकगोमुखाः | सहसैवाभ्यहन्यन्त स शब्दस्तुमुलोऽभवत् ||१-१३||
tataḥ śaṅkhāśca bheryaśca paṇavānakagomukhāḥ . sahasaivābhyahanyanta sa śabdastumulo.abhavat ||1-13||
tatah —thereafter; sahkhah —conchshells; ca —also; bheryah —bugles; ca —
and; panava-anaka —trumpets and drums; go-mukhah —horns; sahasa —all of
a sudden; eva —certainly; abhyahanyanta —being simultaneously sounded; sab
—that; sabdah —combined sound; tumulah —tumultuous; abhavat —became.
After that, the conchshells, bugles, trumpets, drums and horns were all
suddenly sounded, and the combined sound was tumultuous.
ततः श्वेतैर्हयैर्युक्ते महति स्यन्दने स्थितौ | माधवः पाण्डवश्चैव दिव्यौ शङ्खौ प्रदध्मतुः ||१-१४||
tataḥ śvetairhayairyukte mahati syandane sthitau . mādhavaḥ pāṇḍavaścaiva divyau śaṅkhau pradadhmatuḥ ||1-14||
tatah —thereafter; svetaih —by white; hayaih —horses; yukte —being yoked
with; mahati —in the great; syandane —chariot; sthitau —so situated; madhavah
—Krsna (the husband of the goddess of fortune); pandavah — Arjuna (the son
of Pandu); ca —also; eva —certainly; divyau —transcendental; sankhau
—conchshells; pradadhmatuh —sounded.
On the other side, both Lord Krsna and Arjuna, stationed on a great
chariot drawn by white horses, sounded their transcendental conchshells.
पाञ्चजन्यं हृषीकेशो देवदत्तं धनञ्जयः | पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं भीमकर्मा वृकोदरः ||१-१५||
pāñcajanyaṃ hṛṣīkeśo devadattaṃ dhanañjayaḥ . pauṇḍraṃ dadhmau mahāśaṅkhaṃ bhīmakarmā vṛkodaraḥ ||1-15||
pahcajanyam —the conchshell named Pancajanya; hrsikesah —Hrslkesa
(Krsna, the Lord who directs the senses of the devotees); devadattam —the
conchshell named Devadatta; dhanahjayah —Dhananjaya (Arjuna, the winner
of wealth); paundram —the conch named Paundram; dadhmau — blew; maha-
sahkham —the terrific conchshell; bhima-karma —one who performs
Herculean tasks; vrkodarah —the voracious eater (Bhlma).
Then, Lord Krsna blew His conchshell, called Pancajanya; Arjuna
blew his, the Devadatta; and Bhlma, the voracious eater and performer of
Herculean tasks, blew his terrific conchshell called Paundram.
अनन्तविजयं राजा कुन्तीपुत्रो युधिष्ठिरः | नकुलः सहदेवश्च सुघोषमणिपुष्पकौ ||१-१६||
anantavijayaṃ rājā kuntīputro yudhiṣṭhiraḥ . nakulaḥ sahadevaśca sughoṣamaṇipuṣpakau ||1-16||
sahadevah —Sahadeva; ca —and; sughosa-manipuspakau —the conches
named Sughosa and Manipuspaka; kasyah —the King of KasI (Varanasi); ca —
and; paramesvasah —the great archer; sikhandl —Sikhandl; ca —also; maha-
rathah —one who can fight alone against thousands; dhrstadyumnah —
Dhrstadyumna (the son of King Drupada); viratah —Virata (the prince who
gave shelter to the Pandavas while they were in disguise); ca —also; satyakih
—Satyaki (the same as Yuyudhana, the charioteer of Lord Krsna); ca —and;
aparajitah —who were never vanquished before; drupadah —Drupada, the
King of Pancala; draupadeyah —the sons of Draupadi; ca —also; sarvasah —
all; prthivT-pate —O King; saubhadrah —the son of Subhadra (Abhimanyu);
ca —also; maha-bahuh —greatly armed; sahkhan —conchshells; dadhmuh —
blew; prthak prthak —each separately.
King Yudhisthira, the son of KuntI, blew his conchshell, the
Anantavijaya, and Nakula and Sahadeva blew the Sughosa and
Manipuspaka. That great archer the King of KasI, the great fighter
Sikhandl, Dhrstadyumna, Virata and the unconquerable Satyaki,
Drupada, the sons of Draupadi, and the others, O King, such as the son of
Subhadra, greatly armed, all blew their respective conchshells.
काश्यश्च परमेष्वासः शिखण्डी च महारथः | धृष्टद्युम्नो विराटश्च सात्यकिश्चापराजितः ||१-१७||
kāśyaśca parameṣvāsaḥ śikhaṇḍī ca mahārathaḥ . dhṛṣṭadyumno virāṭaśca sātyakiścāparājitaḥ ||1-17||
द्रुपदो द्रौपदेयाश्च सर्वशः पृथिवीपते | सौभद्रश्च महाबाहुः शङ्खान्दध्मुः पृथक्पृथक् ||१-१८||
drupado draupadeyāśca sarvaśaḥ pṛthivīpate . saubhadraśca mahābāhuḥ śaṅkhāndadhmuḥ pṛthakpṛthak ||1-18||
स घोषो धार्तराष्ट्राणां हृदयानि व्यदारयत् | नभश्च पृथिवीं चैव तुमुलोऽभ्यनुनादयन् (or लोव्यनु) ||१-१९||
sa ghoṣo dhārtarāṣṭrāṇāṃ hṛdayāni vyadārayat . nabhaśca pṛthivīṃ caiva tumulo.abhyanunādayan (lo vyanu)||1-19||
sah —that; ghosah —vibration; dhartarastranam —of the sons of Dhrtarastra;
hrdayani —hearts; vyadarayat —shattered; nabhah —the sky; ca —also;
prthivim —the surface of the earth; ca —also; eva —certainly; tumulah —
uproarious; abhyanunadayan —by resounding.
The blowing of these different conchshells became uproarious, and
thus, vibrating both in the sky and on the earth, it shattered the hearts of
the sons of Dhrtarastra.
अथ व्यवस्थितान्दृष्ट्वा धार्तराष्ट्रान् कपिध्वजः | प्रवृत्ते शस्त्रसम्पाते धनुरुद्यम्य पाण्डवः | हृषीकेशं तदा वाक्यमिदमाह महीपते ||१-२०||
atha vyavasthitāndṛṣṭvā dhārtarāṣṭrān kapidhvajaḥ . pravṛtte śastrasampāte dhanurudyamya pāṇḍavaḥ ||1-20||
atha —thereupon; v yavasthitan —situated; drstva —looking on;
dhartarastran —the sons of Dhrtarastra; kapi-dhvajah —one whose flag is
marked with Hanuman; pravrtte —while about to be engaged; sastra-sampate
—the arrows released; dhanuh —bow; udyamya —after taking up; pandavah —
the son of Pandu (Arjuna); hrsikesam —unto Lord Krsna; tada —at that time;
vakyam —words; idam —these; aha —said; mahi-pate —O King.
O King, at that time Arjuna, the son of Pandu, who was seated in his
chariot, his flag marked with Hanuman, took up his bow and prepared to
shoot his arrows, looking at the sons of Dhrtarastra. O King, Arjuna then
spoke to Hrslkesa [Krsna] these words:
अर्जुन उवाच | सेनयोरुभयोर्मध्ये रथं स्थापय मेऽच्युत ||१-२१||
hṛṣīkeśaṃ tadā vākyamidamāha mahīpate . arjuna uvāca . senayorubhayormadhye rathaṃ sthāpaya me.acyuta ||1-21||
arjunah —Arjuna; uvaca —said; senayoh —of the armies; ubhayoh —of both
the parties; madhye —in between them; ratham —the chariot; sthapaya —
please keep; me —my; acyuta —0 infallible one; yavat —as long as; etan — all
these; nirikse —may look; aham —I; yoddhu-kaman —desiring to fight;
avasthitan —arrayed on the battlefield; kaih —with whom; maya —by me; saha
—with; yoddhavyam —to fight with; asmin —in this; rana —strife; samudyame
—in the attempt.
Arjuna said: O infallible one, please draw my chariot between the two
armies so that I may see who is present here, who is desirous of fighting,
and with whom I must contend in this great battle attempt.
यावदेतान्निरीक्षेऽहं योद्धुकामानवस्थितान् | कैर्मया सह योद्धव्यमस्मिन् रणसमुद्यमे ||१-२२||
yāvadetānnirikṣe.ahaṃ yoddhukāmānavasthitān . kairmayā saha yoddhavyamasmin raṇasamudyame ||1-22||
योत्स्यमानानवेक्षेऽहं य एतेऽत्र समागताः | धार्तराष्ट्रस्य दुर्बुद्धेर्युद्धे प्रियचिकीर्षवः ||१-२३||
yotsyamānānavekṣe.ahaṃ ya ete.atra samāgatāḥ . dhārtarāṣṭrasya durbuddheryuddhe priyacikīrṣavaḥ ||1-23||
yotsyamanan —those who will be fighting; avekse —let me see; aham —I; ye
—who; ete —those; atra —here; samagatah —assembled; dhartarastrasya — the
son of Dhrtarastra; durbuddheh —evil-minded; yuddhe —in the fight; priya
—well; cikfrsavah —wishing.
Let me see those who have come here to fight, wishing to please the
evil-minded son of Dhrtarastra.
सञ्जय उवाच | एवमुक्तो हृषीकेशो गुडाकेशेन भारत | सेनयोरुभयोर्मध्ये स्थापयित्वा रथोत्तमम् ||१-२४||
sañjaya uvāca . evamukto hṛṣīkeśo guḍākeśena bhārata . senayorubhayormadhye sthāpayitvā rathottamam ||1-24||
sahjayah —Sanjaya; uvaca —said; evam —thus; uktah —addressed; hrsTkesah
—Lord Krsna; gudakesena —by Arjuna; bharata —O descendant of Bharata;
senayoh —of armies; ubhayoh —of both; madhye —in the midst of; sthapayitva
—by placing; rathottamam —the finest chariot.
Sanjaya said: O descendant of Bharata, being thus addressed by
Arjuna, Lord Krsna drew up the fine chariot in the midst of the armies of
both parties.
भीष्मद्रोणप्रमुखतः सर्वेषां च महीक्षिताम् | उवाच पार्थ पश्यैतान्समवेतान्कुरूनिति ||१-२५||
bhīṣmadroṇapramukhataḥ sarveṣāṃ ca mahīkṣitām . uvāca pārtha paśyaitānsamavetānkurūniti ||1-25||
bhisma —Grandfather Bhisma; drona —the teacher Drona; pramukhatah —
in the front of; sarvesam —all; ca —also; mahiksitam —chiefs of the world;
uvaca —said; partha —O Partha (son of Prtha); pasya —just behold; etan —all
of them; samavetan —assembled; kurun —all the members of the Kuru
dynasty; id —thus.
In the presence of Bhlsma, Drona and all other chieftains of the world,
Hrslkesa, the Lord, said. Just behold, Partha, all the Kurus who are
assembled here.
तत्रापश्यत्स्थितान्पार्थः पितॄनथ पितामहान् | आचार्यान्मातुलान्भ्रातॄन्पुत्रान्पौत्रान्सखींस्तथा ||१-२६||
tatrāpaśyatsthitānpārthaḥ pitṝnatha pitāmahān . ācāryānmātulānbhrātṛnputrānpautrānsakhīṃstathā ||1-26||
tatra —there; apasyat —he could see; sthitan —standing; parthah —Arjuna;
pitfn —fathers; atha —also; pitamahan —grandfathers; acaryan —teachers;
matulan —maternal uncles; bhratfn —brothers; putran —sons; pautran
—grandsons; sakhm —friends; tatha —too, svasuran —fathers-in-law; suhrdah
—wellwishers; ca —also; eva —certainly; senayoh —of the armies; ubhayoh
—of both parties; api —including.
There Arjuna could see, within the midst of the armies of both parties,
his fathers, grandfathers, teachers, maternal uncles, brothers, sons,
grandsons, friends, and also his father-in-law and well-wishers—all
present there.
श्वशुरान्सुहृदश्चैव सेनयोरुभयोरपि | तान्समीक्ष्य स कौन्तेयः सर्वान्बन्धूनवस्थितान् ||१-२७||
śvaśurānsuhṛdaścaiva senayorubhayorapi . tānsamīkṣya sa kaunteyaḥ sarvānbandhūnavasthitān ||1-27||
tan —all of them; samfksya —after seeing; sah —he; kaunteyah —the son of
KuntI; sarvan —all kinds of; bandhun —relatives; avasthitan —situated; krpaya
—by compassion; par ay a —of a high grade; avistah —overwhelmed by;
visfdan —while lamenting; idam —thus; abravit —spoke.
When the son of KuntI, Arjuna, saw all these different grades of friends
and relatives, he became overwhelmed with compassion and spoke thus:
कृपया परयाविष्टो विषीदन्निदमब्रवीत् | अर्जुन उवाच | दृष्ट्वेमं स्वजनं कृष्ण युयुत्सुं समुपस्थितम् ||१-२८||
kṛpayā parayāviṣṭo viṣīdannidamabravīt . arjuna uvāca . dṛṣṭvemaṃ svajanaṃ kṛṣṇa yuyutsuṃ samupasthitam ||1-28||
arjunah —Arjuna; uvaca —said; drstva —after seeing; imam —all these;
svajanam —kinsmen; krsna —O Krsna; yuyutsum —all in fighting spirit;
samupasthitam —all present; sidanti —quivering; mama —my; gatrani —limbs
of the body; mukham —mouth; ca —also; parisusyati —drying up.
Arjuna said: My dear Krsna, seeing my friends and relatives present
before me in such a fighting spirit, I feel the limbs of my body quivering
and my mouth drying up.
सीदन्ति मम गात्राणि मुखं च परिशुष्यति | वेपथुश्च शरीरे मे रोमहर्षश्च जायते ||१-२९||
sīdanti mama gātrāṇi mukhaṃ ca pariśuṣyati . vepathuśca śarīre me romaharṣaśca jāyate ||1-29||
tvak —skin; ca —also; eva —certainly; paridahyate —burning.
My whole body is trembling, and my hair is standing on end. My bow
Gandlva is slipping from my hand, and my skin is burning.
गाण्डीवं स्रंसते हस्तात्त्वक्चैव परिदह्यते | न च शक्नोम्यवस्थातुं भ्रमतीव च मे मनः ||१-३०||
gāṇḍīvaṃ sraṃsate hastāttvakcaiva paridahyate . na ca śaknomyavasthātuṃ bhramatīva ca me manaḥ ||1-30||
na —nor; ca —also; saknomi —am I able; avasthatum —to stay; bhramati —
forgetting; iva —as; ca —and; me —my; manah —mind; nimittani —causes; ca
—also; pasyami —I foresee; viparTtani —just the opposite; kesava —O killer of
the demon KesI (Krsna).
I am now unable to stand here any longer. I am forgetting myself, and
my mind is reeling. I foresee only evil, O killer of the KesI demon.
निमित्तानि च पश्यामि विपरीतानि केशव | न च श्रेयोऽनुपश्यामि हत्वा स्वजनमाहवे ||१-३१||
nimittāni ca paśyāmi viparītāni keśava . na ca śreyo.anupaśyāmi hatvā svajanamāhave ||1-31||
na —nor; ca —also; sreyah —good; anupasyami —do I foresee; hatva —by
killing; svajanam —own kinsmen; ahave —in the fight; na —nor; kankse —do I
desire; vijayam —victory; krsna —O Krsna; na —nor; ca —also; rajyam
—kingdom; sukhani —happiness thereof; ca —also.
I do not see how any good can come from killing my own kinsmen in
this battle, nor can I, my dear Krsna, desire any subsequent victory,
kingdom, or happiness.
न काङ्क्षे विजयं कृष्ण न च राज्यं सुखानि च | किं नो राज्येन गोविन्द किं भोगैर्जीवितेन वा ||१-३२||
na kāṅkṣe vijayaṃ kṛṣṇa na ca rājyaṃ sukhāni ca . kiṃ no rājyena govinda kiṃ bhogairjīvitena vā ||1-32||
kim —what use; nah —to us; rajyena —is the kingdom; govinda —O Krsna;
kim —what; bhogaih —enjoyment; jfvitena —by living; va—either; yesam —for
whom; arthe —for the matter of; kahksitam —desired; nah —our; rajyam
—kingdom; bhogah —material enjoyment; sukhani —all happiness; ca —also;
te —all of them; ime —these; avasthitah —situated; yuddhe —in this battlefield;
pranan —lives; tyaktva —giving up; dhanani —riches; ca —also; acaryah
—teachers; pitarah —fathers; putrah —sons; tatha —as well as; eva — certainly;
ca —also; pitamahah —grandfathers; matulah —maternal uncles; svasurah
—fathers-in-law; pautrah —grandsons; syalah —brothers-in-law;
sambandhinah —relatives; tatha —as well as; etan —all these; na —never;
hantum — for killing; icchami —do I wish; ghnatah —being killed; api —even;
madhusiidana —O killer of the demon Madhu (Krsna); api —even if; trailokya
—of the three worlds; rajyasya —of the kingdoms; hetoh —in exchange; kim
—what to speak of; nu —only; mahT-krte —for the sake of earth; nihatya —by
killing; dhartarastran —the sons of Dhrtarastra; nah —our; ka —what; pritih —
pleasure; syat —will there be; janardana —O maintainer of all living entities.
O Govinda, of what avail to us are kingdoms, happiness or even life
itself when all those for whom we may desire them are now arrayed in
this battlefield? O Madhusudana, when teachers, fathers, sons,
grandfathers, maternal uncles, fathers-in-law, grandsons, brothers-in-law
and all relatives are ready to give up their lives and properties and are
standing before me, then why should I wish to kill them, though I may
survive? O maintainer of all creatures, I am not prepared to fight with
them even in exchange for the three worlds, let alone this earth.
येषामर्थे काङ्क्षितं नो राज्यं भोगाः सुखानि च | त इमेऽवस्थिता युद्धे प्राणांस्त्यक्त्वा धनानि च ||१-३३||
yeṣāmarthe kāṅkṣitaṃ no rājyaṃ bhogāḥ sukhāni ca . ta ime.avasthitā yuddhe prāṇāṃstyaktvā dhanāni ca ||1-33||
आचार्याः पितरः पुत्रास्तथैव च पितामहाः | मातुलाः श्वशुराः पौत्राः श्यालाः सम्बन्धिनस्तथा ||१-३४||
ācāryāḥ pitaraḥ putrāstathaiva ca pitāmahāḥ . mātulāḥ śvaśurāḥ pautrāḥ śyālāḥ sambandhinastathā ||1-34||
एतान्न हन्तुमिच्छामि घ्नतोऽपि मधुसूदन | अपि त्रैलोक्यराज्यस्य हेतोः किं नु महीकृते ||१-३५||
etānna hantumicchāmi ghnato.api madhusūdana . api trailokyarājyasya hetoḥ kiṃ nu mahīkṛte ||1-35||
निहत्य धार्तराष्ट्रान्नः का प्रीतिः स्याज्जनार्दन | पापमेवाश्रयेदस्मान्हत्वैतानाततायिनः ||१-३६||
nihatya dhārtarāṣṭrānnaḥ kā prītiḥ syājjanārdana . pāpamevāśrayedasmānhatvaitānātatāyinaḥ ||1-36||
papam —vices; eva —certainly; asrayet —must take upon; asman —us; hatva
—by killing; etan —all these; atatayinah —aggressors; tasmat —therefore; na —
never; arhah —deserving; vayam —us; hantum —to kill; dhartarastran —the
sons of Dhrtarastra; svabandhavan —along with friends; svajanam —kinsmen;
hi —certainly; katham —how; hatva —by killing; sukhinah —happy; syama —
become; madhava —O Krsna, husband of the goddess of fortune.
Sin will overcome us if we slay such aggressors. Therefore it is not
proper for us to kill the sons of Dhrtarastra and our friends. What should
we gain, O Krsna, husband of the goddess of fortune, and how could we
be happy by killing our own kinsmen?
तस्मान्नार्हा वयं हन्तुं धार्तराष्ट्रान्स्वबान्धवान् | स्वजनं हि कथं हत्वा सुखिनः स्याम माधव ||१-३७||
tasmānnārhā vayaṃ hantuṃ dhārtarāṣṭrānsvabāndhavān . svajanaṃ hi kathaṃ hatvā sukhinaḥ syāma mādhava ||1-37||
yadi —if; api —certainly; ete —they; na —do not; pasyanti —see; lobha —
greed; upahata —overpowered; cetasah —the hearts; kula-ksaya —in killing the
family; krtam —done; dosam —fault; mitra-drohe —quarreling with friends; ca
—also; patakam —sinful reactions; katham —why; na —shall not; jneyam —
know this; asmabhih —by us; papat —from sins; asmat —ourselves; nivartitum
—to cease; kula-ksaya —the destruction of a dynasty; krtam —by so doing;
dosam —crime; prapasyadbhih —by those who can see; janardana —O Krsna.
O Janardana, although these men, overtaken by greed, see no fault in
killing one`s family or quarreling with friends, why should we, with
knowledge of the sin, engage in these acts?
यद्यप्येते न पश्यन्ति लोभोपहतचेतसः | कुलक्षयकृतं दोषं मित्रद्रोहे च पातकम् ||१-३८||
yadyapyete na paśyanti lobhopahatacetasaḥ . kulakṣayakṛtaṃ doṣaṃ mitradrohe ca pātakam ||1-38||
कथं न ज्ञेयमस्माभिः पापादस्मान्निवर्तितुम् | कुलक्षयकृतं दोषं प्रपश्यद्भिर्जनार्दन ||१-३९||
kathaṃ na jñeyamasmābhiḥ pāpādasmānnivartitum . kulakṣayakṛtaṃ doṣaṃ prapaśyadbhirjanārdana ||1-39||
adharmah —irreligious; abhibhavati —transforms; uta —it is said.
With the destruction of dynasty, the eternal family tradition is
vanquished, and thus the rest of the family becomes involved in
irreligious practice.
कुलक्षये प्रणश्यन्ति कुलधर्माः सनातनाः | धर्मे नष्टे कुलं कृत्स्नमधर्मोऽभिभवत्युत ||१-४०||
kulakṣaye praṇaśyanti kuladharmāḥ sanātanāḥ . dharme naṣṭe kulaṃ kṛtsnamadharmo.abhibhavatyuta ||1-40||
adharma —irreligion; abhibhavat —having been predominant; krsna — O
Krsna; pradusyanti —become polluted; kula-striyah —family ladies; strTsu —of
the womanhood; dustasu —being so polluted; varsneya —O descendant of
Vrsni; jayate —it so becomes; varna-sankarah —unwanted progeny.
When irreligion is prominent in the family, O Krsna, the women of the
family become corrupt, and from the degradation of womanhood, O
descendant of Vrsni, comes unwanted progeny.
अधर्माभिभवात्कृष्ण प्रदुष्यन्ति कुलस्त्रियः | स्त्रीषु दुष्टासु वार्ष्णेय जायते वर्णसङ्करः ||१-४१||
adharmābhibhavātkṛṣṇa praduṣyanti kulastriyaḥ . strīṣu duṣṭāsu vārṣṇeya jāyate varṇasaṅkaraḥ ||1-41||
sahkarah —such unwanted children; narakaya —for hellish life; eva —
certainly; kula-ghnanam —of those who are killers of the family; kulasya — of
the family; ca —also; patanti —fall down; pitarah —forefathers; hi — certainly;
esam —of them; lupta —stopped; pinda —offerings; udaka —water; kriyah —
performance.
When there is increase of unwanted population, a hellish situation is
created both for the family and for those who destroy the family tradition.
In such corrupt families, there is no offering of oblations of food and
water to the ancestors.
सङ्करो नरकायैव कुलघ्नानां कुलस्य च | पतन्ति पितरो ह्येषां लुप्तपिण्डोदकक्रियाः ||१-४२||
saṅkaro narakāyaiva kulaghnānāṃ kulasya ca . patanti pitaro hyeṣāṃ luptapiṇḍodakakriyāḥ ||1-42||
dosaih —by such faults; etaih —all these; kula-ghnanam —of the destroyer of
a family; varna-sahkara —unwanted children; karakaih —by the doers;
utsadyante —causes devastation; jati-dharmah —community project; kula-
dharmah —family tradition; ca —also; sasvatah —eternal.
Due to the evil deeds of the destroyers of family tradition, all kinds of
community projects and family welfare activities are devastated.
दोषैरेतैः कुलघ्नानां वर्णसङ्करकारकैः | उत्साद्यन्ते जातिधर्माः कुलधर्माश्च शाश्वताः ||१-४३||
doṣairetaiḥ kulaghnānāṃ varṇasaṅkarakārakaiḥ . utsādyante jātidharmāḥ kuladharmāśca śāśvatāḥ ||1-43||
utsanna —spoiled; kula-dharmanam —of those who have the family
traditions; manusyanam —of such men; janardana —0 Krsna; narake —in hell;
niyatam —always; vasah —residence; bhavati —it so becomes; id —thus;
anususruma —I have heard by disciplic succession.
O Krsna, maintainer of the people, I have heard by disciplic succession
that those who destroy family traditions dwell always in hell.
उत्सन्नकुलधर्माणां मनुष्याणां जनार्दन | नरके नियतं वासो भवतीत्यनुशुश्रुम (or नरकेऽनियतं) ||१-४४||
utsannakuladharmāṇāṃ manuṣyāṇāṃ janārdana . narake niyataṃ vāso bhavatītyanuśuśruma ||1-44||
ahah —alas; bata —how strange it is; mahat —great; papam —sins; kartum —
to perform; v yavasitah —decided; vayam —we; yat —so that; rajya —kingdom;
sukha-lobhena —driven by greed for royal happiness; hantum —to kill;
svajanam —kinsmen; udyatah —trying for.
Alas, how strange it is that we are preparing to commit greatly sinful
acts, driven by the desire to enjoy royal happiness.
अहो बत महत्पापं कर्तुं व्यवसिता वयम् | यद्राज्यसुखलोभेन हन्तुं स्वजनमुद्यताः ||१-४५||
aho bata mahatpāpaṃ kartuṃ vyavasitā vayam . yadrājyasukhalobhena hantuṃ svajanamudyatāḥ ||1-45||
yadi —even if; mam —unto me; apratikaram —without being resistant;
asastram —without being fully equipped; sastra-panayah —those with
weapons in hand; dhartarastrah —the sons of Dhrtarastra; rane —in the
battlefield; hanyuh —may kill; tat —that; me —mine; ksemataram —better;
bhavet — become.
I would consider it better for the sons of Dhrtarastra to kill me
unarmed and unresisting, rather than fight with them.
यदि मामप्रतीकारमशस्त्रं शस्त्रपाणयः | धार्तराष्ट्रा रणे हन्युस्तन्मे क्षेमतरं भवेत् ||१-४६||
yadi māmapratīkāramaśastraṃ śastrapāṇayaḥ . dhārtarāṣṭrā raṇe hanyustanme kṣemataraṃ bhavet ||1-46||
sanjayah —Sanjaya; uvaca —said; evam —thus; uktva —saying; arjunah —
Arjuna; sankhye —in the battlefield; ratha —chariot; upasthah —situated on;
upavisat —sat down again; visrjya —keeping aside; sa-saram —along with
arrows; capam —the bow; soka —lamentation; samvigna —distressed; manasah
—within the mind.
Sanjaya said: Arjuna, having thus spoken on the battlefield, cast aside
his bow and arrows and sat down on the chariot, his mind overwhelmed
with grief.
सञ्जय उवाच | एवमुक्त्वार्जुनः सङ्ख्ये रथोपस्थ उपाविशत् | विसृज्य सशरं चापं शोकसंविग्नमानसः ||१-४७||
sañjaya uvāca . evamuktvārjunaḥ saṅkhye rathopastha upāviśat . visṛjya saśaraṃ cāpaṃ śokasaṃvignamānasaḥ ||1-47||
Глава 2
सञ्जय उवाच | तं तथा कृपयाविष्टमश्रुपूर्णाकुलेक्षणम् | विषीदन्तमिदं वाक्यमुवाच मधुसूदनः ||२-१||
sañjaya uvāca . taṃ tathā kṛpayāviṣṭamaśrupūrṇākulekṣaṇam . viṣīdantamidaṃ vākyamuvāca madhusūdanaḥ ||2-1||
sahjayah uvaca —Sanjaya said; tam —unto Arjuna; tatha —thus; krpaya — by
compassion; avistam —overwhelmed; asru-purna —full of tears; akula —
depressed; Tksanam —eyes; visTdantam —lamenting; idam —this; vakyam
—words; uvaca —said; madhusudanah —the killer of Madhu.
Sanjaya said: Seeing Arjuna full of compassion and very sorrowful, his
eyes brimming with tears, Madhusudana, Krsna, spoke the following
words.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | कुतस्त्वा कश्मलमिदं विषमे समुपस्थितम् | अनार्यजुष्टमस्वर्ग्यमकीर्तिकरमर्जुन ||२-२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . kutastvā kaśmalamidaṃ viṣame samupasthitam . anāryajuṣṭamasvargyamakīrtikaramarjuna ||2-2||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; kutah —
wherefrom; tva —unto you; kasmalam —dirtiness; idam —this lamentation;
visame —this hour of crisis; samupasthitam —arrived; anarya —persons who do
not know the value of life; justam —practiced by; asvargyam —that which does
not lead to higher planets; akfrti —infamy; karam —the cause of; arjuna —O
Arjuna.
The Supreme Person [Bhagavan] said: My dear Arjuna, how have
these impurities come upon you? They are not at all befitting a man who
knows the progressive values of life. They do not lead to higher planets,
but to infamy.
क्लैब्यं मा स्म गमः पार्थ नैतत्त्वय्युपपद्यते | क्षुद्रं हृदयदौर्बल्यं त्यक्त्वोत्तिष्ठ परन्तप ||२-३||
klaibyaṃ mā sma gamaḥ pārtha naitattvayyupapadyate . kṣudraṃ hṛdayadaurbalyaṃ tyaktvottiṣṭha parantapa ||2-3||
klaibyam —impotence; ma —do not; sma —take it; gamah —go in; partha —O
son of Prtha; na —never; etat —like this; tvayi —unto you; upapadyate —is
befitting; ksudram —very little; hrdaya —heart; daurbalyam — weakness;
tyaktva —giving up; uttistha —get up; parantapa —O chastiser of the enemies.
O son of Prtha, do not yield to this degrading impotence. It does not
become you. Give up such petty weakness of heart and arise, O chastiser
of the enemy.
अर्जुन उवाच | कथं भीष्ममहं सङ्ख्ये द्रोणं च मधुसूदन | इषुभिः प्रतियोत्स्यामि पूजार्हावरिसूदन ||२-४||
arjuna uvāca . kathaṃ bhīṣmamahaṃ saṅkhye droṇaṃ ca madhusūdana . iṣubhiḥ pratiyotsyāmi pūjārhāvarisūdana ||2-4||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; katham —how; bhismam —unto Bhisma; aham
—I; sahkhye —in the fight; dronam —unto Drona; ca —also, madhusudana —O
killer of Madhu; isubhih —with arrows; pratiyotsyami —shall counterattack;
puja-arhau —those who are worshipable; arisudana —O killer of the enemies.
Arjuna said: O killer of Madhu [Krsna], how can I counterattack with
arrows in battle men like Bhisma and Drona, who are worthy of my
worship?
गुरूनहत्वा हि महानुभावान् श्रेयो भोक्तुं भैक्ष्यमपीह लोके | हत्वार्थकामांस्तु गुरूनिहैव भुञ्जीय भोगान् रुधिरप्रदिग्धान् ||२-५||
gurūnahatvā hi mahānubhāvān śreyo bhoktuṃ bhaikṣyamapīha loke . hatvārthakāmāṃstu gurūnihaiva bhuñjīya bhogān rudhirapradigdhān ||2-5||
gurun —the superiors; ahatva —by killing; hi —certainly; maha-anubhavan —
great souls; sreyah —it is better; bhoktum —to enjoy life; bhaiksyam —begging;
api —even; iha —in this life; loke —in this world; hatva —killing; artha —gain;
kaman —so desiring; tu —but; gurun —superiors; iha —in this world; eva —
certainly; bhuhjiya —has to enjoy; bhogan —enjoyable things; rudhira —blood;
pradigdhan —tainted with.
It is better to live in this world by begging than to live at the cost of the
lives of great souls who are my teachers. Even though they are avaricious,
they are nonetheless superiors. If they are killed, our spoils will be tainted
with blood.
न चैतद्विद्मः कतरन्नो गरीयो यद्वा जयेम यदि वा नो जयेयुः | यानेव हत्वा न जिजीविषामस्- तेऽवस्थिताः प्रमुखे धार्तराष्ट्राः ||२-६||
na caitadvidmaḥ kataranno garīyo yadvā jayema yadi vā no jayeyuḥ . yāneva hatvā na jijīviṣāmaḥ te.avasthitāḥ pramukhe dhārtarāṣṭrāḥ ||2-6||
na —nor; ca —also; etat —this; vidmah —do know; katarat —which; nah —us;
gariyah —better; yat —what; va —either; jayema —conquer us; yadi —if; va —or;
nah —us; jay eyuh —conquer; yan —those; eva —certainly; hatva —by killing; na
—never; jijivisamah —want to live; te —all of them; avasthitah —are situated;
pramukhe —in the front; dhartarastrah —the sons of Dhrtarastra.
Nor do we know which is better-conquering them or being conquered
by them. The sons of Dhrtarastra, whom if we killed we should not care to
live, are now standing before us on this battlefield.
कार्पण्यदोषोपहतस्वभावः पृच्छामि त्वां धर्मसम्मूढचेताः | यच्छ्रेयः स्यान्निश्चितं ब्रूहि तन्मे शिष्यस्तेऽहं शाधि मां त्वां प्रपन्नम् ||२-७||
kārpaṇyadoṣopahatasvabhāvaḥ pṛcchāmi tvāṃ dharmasammūḍhacetāḥ . yacchreyaḥ syānniścitaṃ brūhi tanme śiṣyaste.ahaṃ śādhi māṃ tvāṃ prapannam ||2-7||
karpanya —miserly; dosa —weakness; upahata —being inflicted by;
svabhavah —characteristics; prcchami —I am asking; tvam —unto You; dharma
— religion; sammudha —bewildered; cetah —in heart; yat —what; sreyah —all¬
good; syat —may be; niscitam —confidently; bruhi —tell; tat —that; me —unto
me; sisyah —disciple; te —Your; aham —I am; sadhi —just instruct; mam —me;
tvam —unto You; prapannam —surrendered.
Now I am confused about my duty and have lost all composure because
of weakness. In this condition I am asking You to tell me clearly what is
best for me. Now I am Your disciple, and a soul surrendered unto You.
Please instruct me.
न हि प्रपश्यामि ममापनुद्याद् यच्छोकमुच्छोषणमिन्द्रियाणाम् | अवाप्य भूमावसपत्नमृद्धं राज्यं सुराणामपि चाधिपत्यम् ||२-८||
na hi prapaśyāmi mamāpanudyād yacchokamucchoṣaṇamindriyāṇām . avāpya bhūmāvasapatnamṛddhaṃ rājyaṃ surāṇāmapi cādhipatyam ||2-8||
na —do not; hi —certainly; prapasyami —I see; mama —my; apanudyat —
they can drive away; yat —that; sokam —lamentation; ucchosanam —drying up;
indriyanam —of the senses; avapya —achieving; bhumau —on the earth;
asapatnam —without rival; rddham —prosperous; rajyam —kingdom; suranam
—of the demigods; api —even; ca —also; adhipatyam —supremacy.
I can find no means to drive away this grief which is drying up my
senses. I will not be able to destroy it even if I win an unrivalled kingdom
on the earth with sovereignty like the demigods in heaven.
सञ्जय उवाच | एवमुक्त्वा हृषीकेशं गुडाकेशः परन्तप | न योत्स्य इति गोविन्दमुक्त्वा तूष्णीं बभूव ह ||२-९||
sañjaya uvāca . evamuktvā hṛṣīkeśaṃ guḍākeśaḥ parantapaḥ . na yotsya iti govindamuktvā tūṣṇīṃ babhūva ha ||2-9||
sahjayah uvaca —Sanjaya said; evam —thus; uktva —speaking; hrsTkesam —
unto Krsna, the master of the senses; gudakesah —Arjuna, the master at
curbing ignorance; parantapah —the chastiser of the enemies; na yotsye —I
shall not fight; iti —thus; govindam —unto Krsna, the giver of pleasure; uktva
—saying; tusnim —silent; babhuva —became; ha —certainly.
Sanjaya said: Having spoken thus, Arjuna, chastiser of enemies, told
Krsna, "Govinda, I shall not fight," and fell silent.
तमुवाच हृषीकेशः प्रहसन्निव भारत | सेनयोरुभयोर्मध्ये विषीदन्तमिदं वचः ||२-१०||
tamuvāca hṛṣīkeśaḥ prahasanniva bhārata . senayorubhayormadhye viṣīdantamidaṃ vacaḥ ||2-10||
tam —unto him; uvaca —said; hrsfkesah —the master of the senses, Krsna;
prahasan —smiling; iva —like that; bharata —O Dhrtarastra, descendant of
Bharata; senayoh —of the armies; ubhayoh —of both parties; madhye —
between; visTdantam —unto the lamenting one; idam —the following; vacah
—words.
O descendant of Bharata, at that time Krsna, smiling, in the midst of
both the armies, spoke the following words to the grief-stricken Arjuna.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | अशोच्यानन्वशोचस्त्वं प्रज्ञावादांश्च भाषसे | गतासूनगतासूंश्च नानुशोचन्ति पण्डिताः ||२-११||
śrībhagavānuvāca . aśocyānanvaśocastvaṃ prajñāvādāṃśca bhāṣase . gatāsūnagatāsūṃśca nānuśocanti paṇḍitāḥ ||2-11||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; asocyan —
that which is not worthy of lamentation; anvasocah —you are lamenting; tvam
—you; prajha-vadah —learned talks; ca —also; bhasase —speaking; gata —
lost; asun —life; agata —not past; asun —life; ca —also; na —never; anusocanti
— lament; panditah —the learned.
The Blessed Lord said: While speaking learned words, you are
mourning for what is not worthy of grief. Those who are wise lament
neither for the living nor the dead.
न त्वेवाहं जातु नासं न त्वं नेमे जनाधिपाः | न चैव न भविष्यामः सर्वे वयमतः परम् ||२-१२||
na tvevāhaṃ jātu nāsaṃ na tvaṃ neme janādhipāḥ . na caiva na bhaviṣyāmaḥ sarve vayamataḥ param ||2-12||
na —never; tu —but; eva —certainly; aham —I; jatu —become; na —never;
asam —existed; na —it is not so; tvam —yourself; na —not; ime —all these;
janadhipah —kings; na —never; ca —also; eva —certainly; na —not like that;
bhavisyamah —shall exist; sarve —all of us; vayam —we; atah param —
hereafter.
Never was there a time when I did not exist, nor you, nor all these
kings; nor in the future shall any of us cease to be.
देहिनोऽस्मिन्यथा देहे कौमारं यौवनं जरा | तथा देहान्तरप्राप्तिर्धीरस्तत्र न मुह्यति ||२-१३||
dehino.asminyathā dehe kaumāraṃ yauvanaṃ jarā . tathā dehāntaraprāptirdhīrastatra na muhyati ||2-13||
dehinah —of the embodied; asmin —in this; yatha —as; dehe —in the body;
kaumaram —boyhood; yauvanam —youth; jara —old age; tatha —similarly;
dehantara —transference of the body; praptih —achievement; dhTrah —the
sober; tatra —thereupon; na —never; muhyati —deluded.
As the embodied soul continually passes, in this body, from boyhood to
youth to old age, the soul similarly passes into another body at death. The
self-realized soul is not bewildered by such a change.
मात्रास्पर्शास्तु कौन्तेय शीतोष्णसुखदुःखदाः | आगमापायिनोऽनित्यास्तांस्तितिक्षस्व भारत ||२-१४||
mātrāsparśāstu kaunteya śītoṣṇasukhaduḥkhadāḥ . āgamāpāyino.anityāstāṃstitikṣasva bhārata ||2-14||
matra —sensuous; sparsah —perception; tu —only; kaunteya —O son of
KuntI; sfta —winter; usna —summer; sukha —happiness; duhkha-dah —giving
pain; agama —appearing; apayinah —disappearing; anityah —nonpermanent;
tan —all of them; titiksasva —just try to tolerate; bharata —O descendant of the
Bharata dynasty.
O son of KuntI, the nonpermanent appearance of happiness and
distress, and their disappearance in due course, are like the appearance
and disappearance of winter and summer seasons. They arise from sense
perception, O scion of Bharata, and one must learn to tolerate them
without being disturbed.
यं हि न व्यथयन्त्येते पुरुषं पुरुषर्षभ | समदुःखसुखं धीरं सोऽमृतत्वाय कल्पते ||२-१५||
yaṃ hi na vyathayantyete puruṣaṃ puruṣarṣabha . samaduḥkhasukhaṃ dhīraṃ so.amṛtatvāya kalpate ||2-15||
yam —one who; hi —certainly; na —never; vyathayanti —are distressing; ete
— all these; purusam —to a person; purusarsabha —is best among men; sama
— unaltered; duhkha —distress; sukham —happiness; dhTram —patient; sah
—he; amrtatvaya —for liberation; kalpate —is considered eligible.
O best among men [Arjuna], the person who is not disturbed by
happiness and distress and is steady in both is certainly eligible for
liberation.
नासतो विद्यते भावो नाभावो विद्यते सतः | उभयोरपि दृष्टोऽन्तस्त्वनयोस्तत्त्वदर्शिभिः ||२-१६||
nāsato vidyate bhāvo nābhāvo vidyate sataḥ . ubhayorapi dṛṣṭo.antastvanayostattvadarśibhiḥ ||2-16||
na —never; asatah —of the nonexistent; vidyate —there is; bhavah
—endurance; na —never; abhavah —changing quality; vidyate —there is; satah
—of the eternal; ubhayoh —of the two; api —verily; drstah —observed; antah —
conclusion; tu —but; anayoh —of them; tattva —truth; darsibhih —by the seers.
Those who are seers of the truth have concluded that of the nonexistent
there is no endurance, and of the existent there is no cessation. This seers
have concluded by studying the nature of both.
अविनाशि तु तद्विद्धि येन सर्वमिदं ततम् | विनाशमव्ययस्यास्य न कश्चित्कर्तुमर्हति ||२-१७||
avināśi tu tadviddhi yena sarvamidaṃ tatam . vināśamavyayasyāsya na kaścitkartumarhati ||2-17||
avinasi —imperishable; tu —but; tat —that; viddhi —know it; yena —by
whom; sarvam —all of the body; idam —this; tatam —widespread; vinasam
—destruction; avyayasya —of the imperishable; asya —of it; na kascit —no one;
kartum —to do; arhad —able.
Know that which pervades the entire body is indestructible. No one is
able to destroy the imperishable soul.
अन्तवन्त इमे देहा नित्यस्योक्ताः शरीरिणः | अनाशिनोऽप्रमेयस्य तस्माद्युध्यस्व भारत ||२-१८||
antavanta ime dehā nityasyoktāḥ śarīriṇaḥ . anāśino.aprameyasya tasmādyudhyasva bhārata ||2-18||
antavantah —perishable; ime —all these; dehah —material bodies; nityasya —
eternal in existence; uktah —it is so said; sarTrinah —the embodied souls;
anasinah —never to be destroyed; aprameyasya —immeasurable; tasmat —
therefore; yudhyasva —fight; bharata —O descendant of Bharata.
Only the material body of the indestructible, immeasurable and eternal
living entity is subject to destruction; therefore, fight, O descendant of
Bharata.
य एनं वेत्ति हन्तारं यश्चैनं मन्यते हतम् | उभौ तौ न विजानीतो नायं हन्ति न हन्यते ||२-१९||
ya enaṃ vetti hantāraṃ yaścainaṃ manyate hatam ubhau tau na vijānīto nāyaṃ hanti na hanyate ||2-19||
yah —anyone; enam —this; vetti —knows; hantaram —the killer; yah —
anyone; ca —also; enam —this; manyate —thinks; hatam —killed; ubhau —both
of them; tau —they; na —never; vijamtah —in knowledge; na —never; ayam
—this; hand —kills; na —nor; hanyate —be killed.
He who thinks that the living entity is the slayer or that he is slain, does
not understand. One who is in knowledge knows that the self slays not nor
is slain.
न जायते म्रियते वा कदाचिन् नायं भूत्वा भविता वा न भूयः | अजो नित्यः शाश्वतोऽयं पुराणो न हन्यते हन्यमाने शरीरे ||२-२०||
na jāyate mriyate vā kadācin nāyaṃ bhūtvā bhavitā vā na bhūyaḥ . ajo nityaḥ śāśvato.ayaṃ purāṇo na hanyate hanyamāne śarīre ||2-20||
na —never; jayate —takes birth; mriyate —never dies; va —either; kadacit —
at any time (past, present or future); na —never; ayam —this; bhutva —came
into being; bhavita —will come to be; va —or; na —not; bhuyah —or has come
to be; ajah —unborn; nityah —eternal; sasvatah —permanent; ayam —this;
puranah —the oldest; na —never; hanyate —is killed; hanyamane —being
killed; sarTre —by the body.
For the soul there is never birth nor death. Nor, having once been, does
he ever cease to be. He is unborn, eternal, ever-existing, undying and
primeval. He is not slain when the body is slain.
वेदाविनाशिनं नित्यं य एनमजमव्ययम् | कथं स पुरुषः पार्थ कं घातयति हन्ति कम् ||२-२१||
vedāvināśinaṃ nityaṃ ya enamajamavyayam . kathaṃ sa puruṣaḥ pārtha kaṃ ghātayati hanti kam ||2-21||
veda —in knowledge; avinasinam —indestructible; nityam —always; yah —
one who; enam —this (soul); ajam —unborn; avyayam —immutable; katham —
how; sah —he; purusah —person; partha —O Partha (Arjuna); kam —whom;
ghatayati —hurts; hand —kills; kam —whom.
O Partha, how can a person who knows that the soul is indestructible,
unborn, eternal and immutable, kill anyone or cause anyone to kill?
वासांसि जीर्णानि यथा विहाय नवानि गृह्णाति नरोऽपराणि | तथा शरीराणि विहाय जीर्णा- न्यन्यानि संयाति नवानि देही ||२-२२||
vāsāṃsi jīrṇāni yathā vihāya navāni gṛhṇāti naro.aparāṇi . tathā śarīrāṇi vihāya jīrṇāni anyāni saṃyāti navāni dehī ||2-22||
vasamsi —garments; jimani —old and worn out; yatha —as it is; vihaya —
giving up; navani —new garments; grhnati —does accept; narah —a man;
aparani —other; tatha —in the same way; sarTrani —bodies; vihaya —giving up;
jimani —old and useless; anyani —different; samyati —verily accepts; navani
—new sets; dehi —the embodied.
As a person puts on new garments, giving up old ones, similarly, the
soul accepts new material bodies, giving up the old and useless ones.
नैनं छिन्दन्ति शस्त्राणि नैनं दहति पावकः | न चैनं क्लेदयन्त्यापो न शोषयति मारुतः ||२-२३||
nainaṃ chindanti śastrāṇi nainaṃ dahati pāvakaḥ . na cainaṃ kledayantyāpo na śoṣayati mārutaḥ ||2-23||
na —never; enam —unto this soul; chindanti —can cut into pieces; sastrani
—all weapons; na —never; enam —unto this soul; dahati —burns; pavakah —
fire; na —never; ca —also; enam —unto this soul; kledayanti —moistens; apah
—water; na —never; sosayati —dries; marutah —wind.
The soul can never be cut into pieces by any weapon, nor can he be
burned by fire, nor moistened by water, nor withered by the wind.
अच्छेद्योऽयमदाह्योऽयमक्लेद्योऽशोष्य एव च | नित्यः सर्वगतः स्थाणुरचलोऽयं सनातनः ||२-२४||
acchedyo.ayamadāhyo.ayamakledyo.aśoṣya eva ca . nityaḥ sarvagataḥ sthāṇuracalo.ayaṃ sanātanaḥ ||2-24||
acchedyah —unbreakable; ayam —this soul; adahyah —cannot be burned;
ay am —this soul; akledyah —insoluble; asosyah —cannot be dried; eva
—certainly; ca —and; nityah —everlasting; sarva-gatah —all-pervading;
sthanuh — unchangeable; acalah —immovable; ayam —this soul; sanatanah
—eternally the same.
This individual soul is unbreakable and insoluble, and can be neither
burned nor dried. He is everlasting, all-pervading, unchangeable,
immovable and eternally the same.
अव्यक्तोऽयमचिन्त्योऽयमविकार्योऽयमुच्यते | तस्मादेवं विदित्वैनं नानुशोचितुमर्हसि ||२-२५||
avyakto.ayamacintyo.ayamavikāryo.ayamucyate . tasmādevaṃ viditvainaṃ nānuśocitumarhasi ||2-25||
avyaktah —invisible; ayam —this soul; acintyah —inconceivable; ayam —
this soul; avikaryah —unchangeable; ayam —this soul; ucyate —is said; tasmat
—therefore; evam —like this; viditva —knowing it well; enam —this soul; na —
do not; anusocitum —may lament over; arhasi —you deserve.
It is said that the soul is invisible, inconceivable, immutable, and
unchangeable. Knowing this, you should not grieve for the body.
अथ चैनं नित्यजातं नित्यं वा मन्यसे मृतम् | तथापि त्वं महाबाहो नैवं शोचितुमर्हसि ||२-२६||
atha cainaṃ nityajātaṃ nityaṃ vā manyase mṛtam . tathāpi tvaṃ mahābāho naivaṃ śocitumarhasi ||2-26||
atha —if, however; ca —also; enam —this soul; nitya-jatam —always born;
nityam —forever; va —either; manyase —so think; mrtam —dead; tathapi —still;
tvam —you; maha-baho —O mighty-armed one; na —never; enam —about the
soul; socitum —to lament; arhasi —deserve.
If, however, you think that the soul is perpetually born and always dies,
still you have no reason to lament, O mighty-armed.
जातस्य हि ध्रुवो मृत्युर्ध्रुवं जन्म मृतस्य च | तस्मादपरिहार्येऽर्थे न त्वं शोचितुमर्हसि ||२-२७||
jātasya hi dhruvo mṛtyurdhruvaṃ janma mṛtasya ca . tasmādaparihārye.arthe na tvaṃ śocitumarhasi ||2-27||
jatasya —one who has taken his birth; hi —certainly; dhruvah —a fact;
mrtyuh —death; dhruvam —it is also a fact; janma —birth; mrtasya —of the
dead; ca —also; tasmat —therefore; apariharye —for that which is unavoidable;
arthe —in the matter of; na —do not; tvam —you; socitum —to lament; arhasi
—deserve.
For one who has taken his birth, death is certain; and for one who is
dead, birth is certain. Therefore, in the unavoidable discharge of your
duty, you should not lament.
अव्यक्तादीनि भूतानि व्यक्तमध्यानि भारत | अव्यक्तनिधनान्येव तत्र का परिदेवना ||२-२८||
avyaktādīni bhūtāni vyaktamadhyāni bhārata . avyaktanidhanānyeva tatra kā paridevanā ||2-28||
avyaktadmi —in the beginning unmanifested; bhiitani —all that are created;
vyakta —manifested; madhyani —in the middle; bharata —0 descendant of
Bharata; avyakta —nonmanifested; nidhanani —all that are vanquished; eva —
it is all like that; tatra —therefore; ka-what; paridevana —lamentation.
All created beings are unmanifest in their beginning, manifest in their
interim state, and unmanifest again when they are annihilated. So what
need is there for lamentation?
आश्चर्यवत्पश्यति कश्चिदेन- माश्चर्यवद्वदति तथैव चान्यः | आश्चर्यवच्चैनमन्यः शृणोति श्रुत्वाप्येनं वेद न चैव कश्चित् ||२-२९||
āścaryavatpaśyati kaścidenam āścaryavadvadati tathaiva cānyaḥ . āścaryavaccainamanyaḥ śṛṇoti śrutvāpyenaṃ veda na caiva kaścit ||2-29||
ascaryavat —amazing; pasyati —see; kascit —some; enam —this soul;
ascaryavat —amazing; vadad —speak; tatha —there; eva —certainly; ca —also;
anyah —others; ascaryavat —similarly amazing; ca —also; enam —this soul;
anyah — others; srnoti —hear; srutva —having heard; api —even; enam —this
soul; veda —do know; na —never; ca —and; eva —certainly; kascit —anyone.
Some look on the soul as amazing, some describe him as amazing, and
some hear of him as amazing, while others, even after hearing about him,
cannot understand him at all.
देही नित्यमवध्योऽयं देहे सर्वस्य भारत | तस्मात्सर्वाणि भूतानि न त्वं शोचितुमर्हसि ||२-३०||
dehī nityamavadhyo.ayaṃ dehe sarvasya bhārata . tasmātsarvāṇi bhūtāni na tvaṃ śocitumarhasi ||2-30||
dehi —the owner of the material body; nityam —eternally; avadhyah —
cannot be killed; ayam —this soul; dehe —in the body; sarvasya —of everyone;
bharata —O descendant of Bharata; tasmat —therefore; sarvani —all; bhutani
—living entities (that are born); na —never; tvam —yourself; socitum —to
lament; arhasi- deserve.
O descendant of Bharata, he who dwells in the body is eternal and can
never be slain. Therefore you need not grieve for any creature.
स्वधर्ममपि चावेक्ष्य न विकम्पितुमर्हसि | धर्म्याद्धि युद्धाच्छ्रेयोऽन्यत्क्षत्रियस्य न विद्यते ||२-३१||
svadharmamapi cāvekṣya na vikampitumarhasi . dharmyāddhi yuddhācchreyo.anyatkṣatriyasya na vidyate ||2-31||
svadharmam —one`s own religious principles; api —also; ca —indeed;
aveksya —considering; na —never; vikampitum —to hesitate; arhasi —you
deserve; dharmyat —from religious principles; hi —indeed; yuddhat —of
fighting; sreyah —better engagements; any at —anything else; ksatriyasya —of
the ksatriya; na —does not; vidyate —exist.
Considering your specific duty as a ksatriya, you should know that
there is no better engagement for you than fighting on religious
principles; and so there is no need for hesitation.
यदृच्छया चोपपन्नं स्वर्गद्वारमपावृतम् | सुखिनः क्षत्रियाः पार्थ लभन्ते युद्धमीदृशम् ||२-३२||
yadṛcchayā copapannaṃ svargadvāramapāvṛtam . sukhinaḥ kṣatriyāḥ pārtha labhante yuddhamīdṛśam ||2-32||
yadrcchaya —by its own accord; ca —also; upapannam —arrived at; svarga
—heavenly planet; dvaram —door; apavrtam —wide open; sukhinah —very
happy; ksatriyah —the members of the royal order; partha —O son of Prtha;
labhante —do achieve; yuddham —war; Tdrsam —like this.
O Partha, happy are the ksatriyas to whom such fighting opportunities
come unsought, opening for them the doors of the heavenly planets.
अथ चेत्त्वमिमं धर्म्यं संग्रामं न करिष्यसि | ततः स्वधर्मं कीर्तिं च हित्वा पापमवाप्स्यसि ||२-३३||
atha cettvamimaṃ dharmyaṃ saṃgrāmaṃ na kariṣyasi . tataḥ svadharmaṃ kīrtiṃ ca hitvā pāpamavāpsyasi ||2-33||
atha —therefore; cet —if; tvam —you; imam —this; dharmyam —religious
duty; sangramam —fighting; na —do not; karisyasi —perform; tatah —then;
svadharmam —your religious duty; kfrtim —reputation; ca —also; hitva —
losing; papam —sinful reaction; avapsyasi —do gain.
If, however, you do not fight this religious war, then you will certainly
incur sins for neglecting your duties and thus lose your reputation as a
fighter.
अकीर्तिं चापि भूतानि कथयिष्यन्ति तेऽव्ययाम् | सम्भावितस्य चाकीर्तिर्मरणादतिरिच्यते ||२-३४||
akīrtiṃ cāpi bhūtāni kathayiṣyanti te.avyayām . sambhāvitasya cākīrtirmaraṇādatiricyate ||2-34||
akirtim —infamy; ca —also; api —over and above; bhutani —all people;
kathayisyanti —will speak; te-of you; avyayam —forever; sambhavitasya —for
a respectable man; ca —also; akfrtih —ill fame; maranat —than death;
atiricyate —becomes more than.
People will always speak of your infamy, and for one who has been
honored, dishonor is worse than death.
भयाद्रणादुपरतं मंस्यन्ते त्वां महारथाः | येषां च त्वं बहुमतो भूत्वा यास्यसि लाघवम् ||२-३५||
bhayādraṇāduparataṃ maṃsyante tvāṃ mahārathāḥ . yeṣāṃ ca tvaṃ bahumato bhūtvā yāsyasi lāghavam ||2-35||
bhayat —out of fear; ranat —from the battlefield; uparatam —ceased;
mamsyante —will consider; tvam —unto you; maha-rathah —the great generals;
yesam —of those who; ca —also; tvam —you; bahu-matah —in great estimation;
bhutva —will become; yasyasi —will go; laghavam —decreased in value.
The great generals who have highly esteemed your name and fame will
think that you have left the battlefield out of fear only, and thus they will
consider you a coward.
अवाच्यवादांश्च बहून्वदिष्यन्ति तवाहिताः | निन्दन्तस्तव सामर्थ्यं ततो दुःखतरं नु किम् ||२-३६||
avācyavādāṃśca bahūnvadiṣyanti tavāhitāḥ . nindantastava sāmarthyaṃ tato duḥkhataraṃ nu kim ||2-36||
avacya —unkind; vadan —fabricated words; ca —also; bahun —many;
vadisyanti —will say; tava —your; ahitah —enemies; nindantah —while
vilifying; tava —your; samarthyam —ability; tatah —thereafter; duhkhataram
—more painful; nu —of course; kim —what is there.
Your enemies will describe you in many unkind words and scorn your
ability. What could be more painful for you?
हतो वा प्राप्स्यसि स्वर्गं जित्वा वा भोक्ष्यसे महीम् | तस्मादुत्तिष्ठ कौन्तेय युद्धाय कृतनिश्चयः ||२-३७||
hato vā prāpsyasi svargaṃ jitvā vā bhokṣyase mahīm . tasmāduttiṣṭha kaunteya yuddhāya kṛtaniścayaḥ ||2-37||
hatah —being killed; va —either; prapsyasi —you gain; svargam —the
heavenly kingdom; jitva —by conquering; va —or; bhoksyase —you enjoy;
mahim —the world; tasmat —therefore; utdstha —get up; kaunteya —O son of
KuntI; yuddhaya —to fight; krta —determination; niscayah —uncertainty.
O son of KuntI, either you will be killed on the battlefield and attain the
heavenly planets, or you will conquer and enjoy the earthly kingdom.
Therefore get up and fight with determination.
सुखदुःखे समे कृत्वा लाभालाभौ जयाजयौ | ततो युद्धाय युज्यस्व नैवं पापमवाप्स्यसि ||२-३८||
sukhaduḥkhe same kṛtvā lābhālābhau jayājayau . tato yuddhāya yujyasva naivaṃ pāpamavāpsyasi ||2-38||
sukha —happiness; duhkhe —in distress; same —in equanimity; krtva — doing
so; labhalabhau —both in loss and profit; jayajayau —both in defeat and
victory; tatah —thereafter; yuddhaya —for the sake of fighting; yujyasva —do
fight; na —never; evam —in this way; papam —sinful reaction; avapsyasi —you
will gain.
Do thou fight for the sake of fighting, without considering happiness or
distress, loss or gain, victory or defeat—and, by so doing, you shall never
incur sin.
एषा तेऽभिहिता साङ्ख्ये बुद्धिर्योगे त्विमां शृणु | बुद्ध्या युक्तो यया पार्थ कर्मबन्धं प्रहास्यसि ||२-३९||
eṣā te.abhihitā sāṅkhye buddhiryoge tvimāṃ śṛṇu . buddhyā yukto yayā pārtha karmabandhaṃ prahāsyasi ||2-39||
esa —all these; te —unto you; abhihita —described; sahkhye —by analytical
study; buddhih —intelligence; yoge —work without fruitive result; tu —but;
imam-this; srnu —just hear; buddhya —by intelligence; yuktah —dovetailed;
yaya —by which; partha —O son of Prtha; karma-bandham —bondage of
reaction; prahasyasi —you can be released from.
Thus far I have declared to you the analytical knowledge of sankhya
philosophy. Now listen to the knowledge of yoga whereby one works
without fruitive result. O son of Prtha, when you act by such intelligence,
you can free yourself from the bondage of works.
नेहाभिक्रमनाशोऽस्ति प्रत्यवायो न विद्यते | स्वल्पमप्यस्य धर्मस्य त्रायते महतो भयात् ||२-४०||
nehābhikramanāśo.asti pratyavāyo na vidyate . svalpamapyasya dharmasya trāyate mahato bhayāt ||2-40||
na —there is not; iha —in this world; abhikrama —endeavoring; nasah —
loss; asti —there is; pratyavayah —diminution; na —never; vidyate —there is;
svalpam —little; api —although; asya —of this; dharmasya —of this occupation;
trayate —releases; mahatah —of very great; bhayat —from danger.
In this endeavor there is no loss or diminution, and a little advancement
on this path can protect one from the most dangerous type of fear.
व्यवसायात्मिका बुद्धिरेकेह कुरुनन्दन | बहुशाखा ह्यनन्ताश्च बुद्धयोऽव्यवसायिनाम् ||२-४१||
vyavasāyātmikā buddhirekeha kurunandana . bahuśākhā hyanantāśca buddhayo.avyavasāyinām ||2-41||
vyavasayatmika —resolute Krsna consciousness; buddhih —intelligence; eka
—only one; iha —in this world; kuru-nandana —O beloved child of the Kurus;
bahu-sakhah —various branches; hi —indeed; anantah —unlimited; ca —also;
buddhayah —intelligence; avyavasayinam —of those who are not in Krsna
consciousness.
Those who are on this path are resolute in purpose, and their aim is
one. O beloved child of the Kurus, the intelligence of those who are
irresolute is many-branched.
यामिमां पुष्पितां वाचं प्रवदन्त्यविपश्चितः | वेदवादरताः पार्थ नान्यदस्तीति वादिनः ||२-४२||
yāmimāṃ puṣpitāṃ vācaṃ pravadantyavipaścitaḥ . vedavādaratāḥ pārtha nānyadastīti vādinaḥ ||2-42||
yam imam —all these; puspitam —flowery; vacam —words; pravadand —
say; avipascitah —men with a poor fund of knowledge; veda-vada-ratah —
supposed followers of the Vedas; partha —O son of Prtha; na —never; anyat
—anything else; asd —there is; id —this; vadinah —advocates; kama- atmanah
—desirous of sense gratification; svarga-parah —aiming to achieve heavenly
planets; janma-karma-phala-pradam —resulting in fruitive action, good birth,
etc.; kriya-visesa —pompous ceremonies; bahulam —various; bhoga —sense
enjoyment; aisvarya —opulence; gatim —progress; prati — towards.
Men of small knowledge are very much attached to the flowery words
of the Vedas, which recommend various fruitive activities for elevation to
heavenly planets, resultant good birth, power, and so forth. Being
desirous of sense gratification and opulent life, they say that there is
nothing more than this.
कामात्मानः स्वर्गपरा जन्मकर्मफलप्रदाम् | क्रियाविशेषबहुलां भोगैश्वर्यगतिं प्रति ||२-४३||
kāmātmānaḥ svargaparā janmakarmaphalapradām . kriyāviśeṣabahulāṃ bhogaiśvaryagatiṃ prati ||2-43||
भोगैश्वर्यप्रसक्तानां तयापहृतचेतसाम् | व्यवसायात्मिका बुद्धिः समाधौ न विधीयते ||२-४४||
bhogaiśvaryaprasaktānāṃ tayāpahṛtacetasām . vyavasāyātmikā buddhiḥ samādhau na vidhīyate ||2-44||
bhoga —material enjoyment; aisvarya —opulence; prasaktanam —those who
are so attached; tayd —by such things; apahrta-cetasam —bewildered in mind;
vyavasayatmika —fixed determination; buddhih —devotional service of the
Lord; samadhau —in the controlled mind; na —never; vidhTyate —does take
place.
In the minds of those who are too attached to sense enjoyment and
material opulence, and who are bewildered by such things, the resolute
determination of devotional service to the Supreme Lord does not take
place.
त्रैगुण्यविषया वेदा निस्त्रैगुण्यो भवार्जुन | निर्द्वन्द्वो नित्यसत्त्वस्थो निर्योगक्षेम आत्मवान् ||२-४५||
traiguṇyaviṣayā vedā nistraiguṇyo bhavārjuna . nirdvandvo nityasattvastho niryogakṣema ātmavān ||2-45||
traigunya —pertaining to the three modes of material nature; visayah — on
the subject matter; vedah —Vedic literatures; nistraigunyah —in a pure state of
spiritual existence; bhava —be; arjuna-0 Arjuna; nirdvandvah —free from the
pains of opposites; nitya-sattva-sthah —ever remaining in sattva (goodness);
niryoga-ksemah —free from (the thought of) acquisition and preservation;
atmavan —established in the Self.
The Vedas mainly deal with the subject of the three modes of material
nature. Rise above these modes, O Arjuna. Be transcendental to all of
them. Be free from all dualities and from all anxieties for gain and safety,
and be established in the Self.
यावानर्थ उदपाने सर्वतः सम्प्लुतोदके | तावान्सर्वेषु वेदेषु ब्राह्मणस्य विजानतः ||२-४६||
yāvānartha udapāne sarvataḥ samplutodake . tāvānsarveṣu vedeṣu brāhmaṇasya vijānataḥ ||2-46||
yavan —all that; arthah —is meant; udapane —in a well of water; sarvatah
—in all respects; sampluta-udake —in a great reservoir of water; tavan
—similarly; sarvesu —in all; vedesu —Vedic literatures; brahmanasya —of the
man who knows the Supreme Brahman; vijanatah —of one who is in complete
knowledge.
All purposes that are served by the small pond can at once be served by
the great reservoirs of water. Similarly, all the purposes of the Vedas can
be served to one who knows the purpose behind them.
कर्मण्येवाधिकारस्ते मा फलेषु कदाचन | मा कर्मफलहेतुर्भूर्मा ते सङ्गोऽस्त्वकर्मणि ||२-४७||
karmaṇyevādhikāraste mā phaleṣu kadācana . mā karmaphalaheturbhūrmā te saṅgo.astvakarmaṇi ||2-47||
karmani —prescribed duties; eva —certainly; adhikarah —right; te—of you;
ma —never; phalesu —in the fruits; kadacana —at any time; ma —never; karma-
phala —in the result of the work; hetuh —cause; bhuh —become; ma — never; te
—of you; sangah —attachment; astu —be there; akarmani —in not doing.
You have a right to perform your prescribed duty, but you are not
entitled to the fruits of action. Never consider yourself to be the cause of
the results of your activities, and never be attached to not doing your
duty.
योगस्थः कुरु कर्माणि सङ्गं त्यक्त्वा धनञ्जय | सिद्ध्यसिद्ध्योः समो भूत्वा समत्वं योग उच्यते ||२-४८||
yogasthaḥ kuru karmāṇi saṅgaṃ tyaktvā dhanañjaya . siddhyasiddhyoḥ samo bhūtvā samatvaṃ yoga ucyate ||2-48||
yoga-sthah —steadfast in yoga; kuru —perform; karmani —your duty;
saiigam —attachment; tyaktva —having abandoned; dhananjaya —O
Dhananjaya; siddhi-asiddhyoh —in success and failure; samah —the same;
bhutva —having become; samatvam —evenness of mind; yogah-yoga; ucyate
—is called.
Be steadfast in yoga, O Arjuna. Perform your duty and abandon all
attachment to success or failure. Such evenness of mind is called yoga.
दूरेण ह्यवरं कर्म बुद्धियोगाद्धनञ्जय | बुद्धौ शरणमन्विच्छ कृपणाः फलहेतवः ||२-४९||
dūreṇa hyavaraṃ karma buddhiyogāddhanañjaya . buddhau śaraṇamanviccha kṛpaṇāḥ phalahetavaḥ ||2-49||
durena —by discarding it at a long distance; hi —certainly; avaram —
abominable; karma —activities; buddhi-yogat —on the strength of Krsna
consciousness; dhananjaya —O conqueror of wealth; buddhau —in such
consciousness; saranam —full surrender; anviccha —desire; krpanah —the
misers; phala-hetavah —those desiring fruitive action.
O Dhananjaya, rid yourself of all fruitive activities by devotional
service, and surrender fully to that consciousness. Those who want to
enjoy the fruits of their work are misers.
बुद्धियुक्तो जहातीह उभे सुकृतदुष्कृते | तस्माद्योगाय युज्यस्व योगः कर्मसु कौशलम् ||२-५०||
buddhiyukto jahātīha ubhe sukṛtaduṣkṛte . tasmādyogāya yujyasva yogaḥ karmasu kauśalam ||2-50||
buddhi-yuktah —one who is engaged in devotional service; jahati —can get
rid of; iha —in this life; ubhe —in both; sukrta-duskrte —in good and bad
results; tasmat —therefore; yogaya —for the sake of devotional service;
yujyasva —be so engaged; yogah —Krsna consciousness; karmasu —in all
activities; kausalam —art.
A man engaged in devotional service rids himself of both good and bad
actions even in this life. Therefore strive for yoga, O Arjuna, which is the
art of all work.
कर्मजं बुद्धियुक्ता हि फलं त्यक्त्वा मनीषिणः | जन्मबन्धविनिर्मुक्ताः पदं गच्छन्त्यनामयम् ||२-५१||
karmajaṃ buddhiyuktā hi phalaṃ tyaktvā manīṣiṇaḥ . janmabandhavinirmuktāḥ padaṃ gacchantyanāmayam ||2-51||
karma-jam —because of fruitive activities; buddhi-yuktah —being done in
devotional service; hi —certainly; phalam —results; tyaktva —giving up;
mamsinah —devotees who are great sages; janma-bandha —the bondage of
birth and death; vinirmuktah —liberated souls; padam —position; gacchanti
—reach; anamayam —without miseries.
The wise, engaged in devotional service, take refuge in the Lord, and
free themselves from the cycle of birth and death by renouncing the fruits
of action in the material world. In this way they can attain that state
beyond all miseries.
यदा ते मोहकलिलं बुद्धिर्व्यतितरिष्यति | तदा गन्तासि निर्वेदं श्रोतव्यस्य श्रुतस्य च ||२-५२||
yadā te mohakalilaṃ buddhirvyatitariṣyati . tadā gantāsi nirvedaṃ śrotavyasya śrutasya ca ||2-52||
yada —when; te —your; moha —illusory; kalilam —dense forest; buddhih —
transcendental service with intelligence; vyatitarisyati —surpasses; tada —at
that time; gantasi —you shall go; nirvedam —callousness; srotavyasya —all that
is to be heard; srutasya —all that is already heard; ca —also.
When your intelligence has passed out of the dense forest of delusion,
you shall become indifferent to all that has been heard and all that is to be
heard.
श्रुतिविप्रतिपन्ना ते यदा स्थास्यति निश्चला | समाधावचला बुद्धिस्तदा योगमवाप्स्यसि ||२-५३||
śrutivipratipannā te yadā sthāsyati niścalā . samādhāvacalā buddhistadā yogamavāpsyasi ||2-53||
sruti —Vedic revelation; vipratipanna —without being influenced by the
fruitive results of the Vedas; te —your; yada —when; sthasyati —remains;
niscala —unmoved; samadhau —in transcendental consciousness, or Krsna
consciousness; acala —unflinching; buddhih —intelligence; tada —at that time;
yogam —self-realization; avapsyasi —you will achieve.
When your mind is no longer disturbed by the flowery language of the
Vedas, and when it remains fixed in the trance of self-realization, then you
will have attained the Divine consciousness.
अर्जुन उवाच | स्थितप्रज्ञस्य का भाषा समाधिस्थस्य केशव | स्थितधीः किं प्रभाषेत किमासीत व्रजेत किम् ||२-५४||
arjuna uvāca . sthitaprajñasya kā bhāṣā samādhisthasya keśava . sthitadhīḥ kiṃ prabhāṣeta kimāsīta vrajeta kim ||2-54||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; sthita-prajnasya —of one who is situated in
fixed Krsna consciousness; ka —what; bhasa —language; samadhi-sthasya —of
one situated in trance; kesava —O Krsna; sthita-dhTh —one fixed in Krsna
consciousness; kim —what; prabhaseta —speak; kim —how; asTta —does
remain; vrajeta —walk; kim —how.
Arjuna said: What are the symptoms of one whose consciousness is
thus merged in Transcendence? How does he speak, and what is his
language? How does he sit, and how does he walk?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | प्रजहाति यदा कामान्सर्वान्पार्थ मनोगतान् | आत्मन्येवात्मना तुष्टः स्थितप्रज्ञस्तदोच्यते ||२-५५||
śrībhagavānuvāca . prajahāti yadā kāmānsarvānpārtha manogatān . ātmanyevātmanā tuṣṭaḥ sthitaprajñastadocyate ||2-55||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; prajahati
—gives up; yada —when; kaman —desires for sense gratification; sarvan —of
all varieties; partha —O son of Prtha; manah-gatan —of mental concoction;
atmani —in the pure state of the soul; eva —certainly; atmana —by the purified
mind; tustah —satisfied; sthita-prajhah —transcendentally situated; tada —at
that time; ucyate —is said.
The Blessed Lord said: O Partha, when a man gives up all varieties of
sense desire which arise from mental concoction, and when his mind finds
satisfaction in the self alone, then he is said to be in pure transcendental
consciousness.
दुःखेष्वनुद्विग्नमनाः सुखेषु विगतस्पृहः | वीतरागभयक्रोधः स्थितधीर्मुनिरुच्यते ||२-५६||
duḥkheṣvanudvignamanāḥ sukheṣu vigataspṛhaḥ . vītarāgabhayakrodhaḥ sthitadhīrmunirucyate ||2-56||
duhkhesu —in the threefold miseries; anudvigna-manah —without being
agitated in mind; sukhesu —in happiness; vigata-sprhah —without being too
interested; vita —free from; raga —attachment; bhaya —fear; krodhah —anger;
sthita-dhih —one who is steady; munih —sage; ucyate —is called.
One who is not disturbed in spite of the threefold miseries, who is not
elated when there is happiness, and who is free from attachment, fear and
anger, is called a sage of steady mind.
यः सर्वत्रानभिस्नेहस्तत्तत्प्राप्य शुभाशुभम् | नाभिनन्दति न द्वेष्टि तस्य प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठिता ||२-५७||
yaḥ sarvatrānabhisnehastattatprāpya śubhāśubham . nābhinandati na dveṣṭi tasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā ||2-57||
yah —one who; sarvatra —everywhere; anabhisnehah —without affection;
tat —that; tat —that; prapya —achieving; subha —good; asubham —evil; na
—never; abhinandati —prays; na —never; dvesti —envies; tasya —his; prajha
—perfect knowledge; pratisthita —fixed.
He who is without attachment, who does not rejoice when he obtains
good, nor lament when he obtains evil, is firmly fixed in perfect
knowledge.
यदा संहरते चायं कूर्मोऽङ्गानीव सर्वशः | इन्द्रियाणीन्द्रियार्थेभ्यस्तस्य प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठिता ||२-५८||
yadā saṃharate cāyaṃ kūrmo.aṅgānīva sarvaśaḥ . indriyāṇīndriyārthebhyastasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā ||2-58||
yada —when; samharate —winds up; ca —also; ayam —all these; kurmah —
tortoise; ahgani —limbs; iva —like; sarvasah —altogether; indriyani —senses;
indriya-arthebhyah —from the sense objects; tasya —his; prajna
—consciousness; pradsthita —fixed up.
One who is able to withdraw his senses from sense objects, as the
tortoise draws his limbs within the shell, is to be understood as truly
situated in knowledge.
विषया विनिवर्तन्ते निराहारस्य देहिनः | रसवर्जं रसोऽप्यस्य परं दृष्ट्वा निवर्तते ||२-५९||
viṣayā vinivartante nirāhārasya dehinaḥ . rasavarjaṃ raso.apyasya paraṃ dṛṣṭvā nivartate ||2-59||
visayah —objects for sense enjoyment; vinivartante —are practiced to be
refrained from; niraharasya —by negative restrictions; dehinah —for the
embodied; rasa-varjam —giving up the taste; rasah —sense of enjoyment; api
—although there is; asya —his; param —far superior things; drstva —by
experiencing; nivartate —ceases from.
The embodied soul may be restricted from sense enjoyment, though the
taste for sense objects remains. But, ceasing such engagements by
experiencing a higher taste, he is fixed in consciousness.
यततो ह्यपि कौन्तेय पुरुषस्य विपश्चितः | इन्द्रियाणि प्रमाथीनि हरन्ति प्रसभं मनः ||२-६०||
yatato hyapi kaunteya puruṣasya vipaścitaḥ . indriyāṇi pramāthīni haranti prasabhaṃ manaḥ ||2-60||
yatatah —while endeavoring; hi —certainly; api —in spite of; kaunteya —O
son of KuntI; purusasya —of the man; vipascitah —full of discriminating
knowledge; indriyani —the senses; pramathmi —stimulated; haranti —throws
forcefully; prasabham —by force; manah —the mind.
The senses are so strong and impetuous, O Arjuna, that they forcibly
carry away the mind even of a man of discrimination who is endeavoring
to control them.
तानि सर्वाणि संयम्य युक्त आसीत मत्परः | वशे हि यस्येन्द्रियाणि तस्य प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठिता ||२-६१||
tāni sarvāṇi saṃyamya yukta āsīta matparaḥ . vaśe hi yasyendriyāṇi tasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā ||2-61||
tani —those senses; sarvani —all; samyamya —keeping under control; yuktah
—being engaged; asTta —being so situated; mat-parah —in relationship with
Me; vase —in full subjugation; hi —certainly; yasya —one whose; indriyani
—senses; tasya —his; prajha —consciousness; pradsthita —fixed.
One who restrains his senses and fixes his consciousness upon Me is
known as a man of steady intelligence.
ध्यायतो विषयान्पुंसः सङ्गस्तेषूपजायते | सङ्गात्सञ्जायते कामः कामात्क्रोधोऽभिजायते ||२-६२||
dhyāyato viṣayānpuṃsaḥ saṅgasteṣūpajāyate . saṅgātsañjāyate kāmaḥ kāmātkrodho.abhijāyate ||2-62||
dhyayatah —while contemplating; visayan —sense objects; pumsah —of the
person; saiigah —attachment; tesu —in the sense objects; upajayate —develops;
saiigat —attachment; sanjayate —develops; kamah —desire; kamat —from
desire; krodhah —anger; abhijayate —becomes manifest.
While contemplating the objects of the senses, a person develops
attachment for them, and from such attachment lust develops, and from
lust anger arises.
क्रोधाद्भवति सम्मोहः सम्मोहात्स्मृतिविभ्रमः | स्मृतिभ्रंशाद् बुद्धिनाशो बुद्धिनाशात्प्रणश्यति ||२-६३||
krodhādbhavati sammohaḥ sammohātsmṛtivibhramaḥ . smṛtibhraṃśād buddhināśo buddhināśātpraṇaśyati ||2-63||
krodhat —from anger; bhavati —takes place; sammohah —perfect illusion;
sammohat —from illusion; smrti —of memory; vibhramah —bewilderment;
smrti-bhramsat —after bewilderment of memory; buddhi-nasah —loss of
intelligence; buddhi-nasat —and from loss of intelligence; pranasyati —falls
down.
From anger, delusion arises, and from delusion bewilderment of
memory. When memory is bewildered, intelligence is lost, and when
intelligence is lost, one falls down again into the material pool.
रागद्वेषविमुक्तैस्तु विषयानिन्द्रियैश्चरन् | (or वियुक्तैस्तु) आत्मवश्यैर्विधेयात्मा प्रसादमधिगच्छति ||२-६४||
rāgadveṣavimuktaistu viṣayānindriyaiścaran . orviyuktaistu ātmavaśyairvidheyātmā prasādamadhigacchati ||2-64||
raga —attachment; dvesa —detachment; vimuktaih —by one who has been
free from such things; tu —but; visayan —sense objects; indriyaih —by the
senses; caran —acting; atma-vasyaih —one who has control over; vidheyatma
—one who follows regulated freedom; prasadam —the mercy of the Lord;
adhigacchad —attains.
One who can control his senses by practicing the regulated principles of
freedom can obtain the complete mercy of the Lord and thus become free
from all attachment and aversion.
प्रसादे सर्वदुःखानां हानिरस्योपजायते | प्रसन्नचेतसो ह्याशु बुद्धिः पर्यवतिष्ठते ||२-६५||
prasāde sarvaduḥkhānāṃ hānirasyopajāyate . prasannacetaso hyāśu buddhiḥ paryavatiṣṭhate ||2-65||
prasade —on achievement of the causeless mercy of the Lord; sarva —all;
duhkhanam —material miseries; hanih —destruction; asya —his; upajayate —
takes place; prasanna-cetasah —of the happy-minded; hi —certainly; asu —
very soon; buddhih —intelligence; pari —sufficiently; avadsthate —established.
For one who is so situated in the Divine consciousness, the threefold
miseries of material existence exist no longer; in such a happy state, one`s
intelligence soon becomes steady.
नास्ति बुद्धिरयुक्तस्य न चायुक्तस्य भावना | न चाभावयतः शान्तिरशान्तस्य कुतः सुखम् ||२-६६||
nāsti buddhirayuktasya na cāyuktasya bhāvanā . na cābhāvayataḥ śāntiraśāntasya kutaḥ sukham ||2-66||
na asti —there cannot be; buddhih —transcendental intelligence; ayuktasya
—of one who is not connected (with Krsna consciousness); na —neither; ca
—and; ayuktasya —of one devoid of Krsna consciousness; bhavana —mind
fixed in happiness; na —neither; ca —and; abhavayatah —one who is not fixed;
santih —peace; asantasya —of the unpeaceful; kutah —where is; sukham —
happiness.
One who is not in transcendental consciousness can have neither a
controlled mind nor steady intelligence, without which there is no
possibility of peace. And how can there be any happiness without peace?
इन्द्रियाणां हि चरतां यन्मनोऽनुविधीयते | तदस्य हरति प्रज्ञां वायुर्नावमिवाम्भसि ||२-६७||
indriyāṇāṃ hi caratāṃ yanmano.anuvidhīyate . tadasya harati prajñāṃ vāyurnāvamivāmbhasi ||2-67||
indriyanam —of the senses; hi —certainly; caratam —while herding over; yat
—that; manah —mind; anuvidhiyate —becomes constantly engaged; tat — that;
asya —his; harati —takes away; prajham —intelligence; vayuh —wind; navam
—a boat; iva —like; ambhasi —on the water.
As a boat on the water is swept away by a strong wind, even one of the
senses on which the mind focuses can carry away a man`s intelligence.
तस्माद्यस्य महाबाहो निगृहीतानि सर्वशः | इन्द्रियाणीन्द्रियार्थेभ्यस्तस्य प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठिता ||२-६८||
tasmādyasya mahābāho nigṛhītāni sarvaśaḥ . indriyāṇīndriyārthebhyastasya prajñā pratiṣṭhitā ||2-68||
tasmat —therefore; yasya —of one`s; maha-baho —O mighty-armed one;
nigrhTtani —so curbed down; sarvasah —all around; indriyani —the senses;
indriya-arthebhyah —for the sake of sense objects; tasya —his; prajna —
intelligence; pratisthita —fixed.
Therefore, O mighty-armed, one whose senses are restrained from their
objects is certainly of steady intelligence.
या निशा सर्वभूतानां तस्यां जागर्ति संयमी | यस्यां जाग्रति भूतानि सा निशा पश्यतो मुनेः ||२-६९||
yā niśā sarvabhūtānāṃ tasyāṃ jāgarti saṃyamī . yasyāṃ jāgrati bhūtāni sā niśā paśyato muneḥ ||2-69||
ya —what; nisa —is night; sarva —all; bhutanam —of living entities; tasyam
in that; jagarti —wakeful; sarhyamT —the self-controlled; yasyam —in which;
jagrati —awake; bhutani —all beings; sa —that is; nisa —night; pasyatah —for
the introspective; muneh —sage.
What is night for all beings is the time of awakening for the self-
controlled; and the time of awakening for all beings is night for the
introspective sage.
आपूर्यमाणमचलप्रतिष्ठं समुद्रमापः प्रविशन्ति यद्वत् | तद्वत्कामा यं प्रविशन्ति सर्वे स शान्तिमाप्नोति न कामकामी ||२-७०||
āpūryamāṇamacalapratiṣṭhaṃ samudramāpaḥ praviśanti yadvat . tadvatkāmā yaṃ praviśanti sarve sa śāntimāpnoti na kāmakāmī ||2-70||
apuryamanam —always filled; acala-pratistham —steadily situated;
samudram —the ocean; apah —water; pravisanti —enter; yadvat —as; tadvat
—so; kamah —desires; yam —unto one; pravisanti —enter; sarve —all; sah
—that person; santim —peace; apnoti —achieves; na —not; kama-kamT —one
who desires to fulfill desires.
A person who is not disturbed by the incessant flow of desires—that
enter like rivers into the ocean which is ever being filled but is always still
— can alone achieve peace, and not the man who strives to satisfy such
desires.
विहाय कामान्यः सर्वान्पुमांश्चरति निःस्पृहः | निर्ममो निरहङ्कारः स शान्तिमधिगच्छति ||२-७१||
vihāya kāmānyaḥ sarvānpumāṃścarati niḥspṛhaḥ . nirmamo nirahaṅkāraḥ sa śāntimadhigacchati ||2-71||
vihaya —after giving up; kaman —all material desires for sense gratification;
yah —the person; sarvan —all; pumdn —a person; carad —lives; nihsprhah —
desireless; nirmamah —without a sense of proprietorship; nirahahkarah —
without false ego; sah —all; sandm —perfect peace; adhigacchad —attains.
A person who has given up all desires for sense gratification, who lives
free from desires, who has given up all sense of proprietorship and is
devoid of false ego-he alone can attain real peace.
एषा ब्राह्मी स्थितिः पार्थ नैनां प्राप्य विमुह्यति | स्थित्वास्यामन्तकालेऽपि ब्रह्मनिर्वाणमृच्छति ||२-७२||
eṣā brāhmī sthitiḥ pārtha naināṃ prāpya vimuhyati . sthitvāsyāmantakāle.api brahmanirvāṇamṛcchati ||2-72||
esa —this; brahmi —spiritual; sthitih —situation; partha —O son of Prtha; na
—never; enam —this; prapya —achieving; vimuhyati —bewilders; sthitva —
being so situated; asyam —being so; anta-kale —at the end of life; api —also;
brahma-nirvanam —spiritual (kingdom of God); rcchati —attains.
That is the way of the spiritual and godly life, after attaining which a
man is not bewildered. Being so situated, even at the hour of death, one
can enter into the kingdom of God.
Глава 3
अर्जुन उवाच | ज्यायसी चेत्कर्मणस्ते मता बुद्धिर्जनार्दन | तत्किं कर्मणि घोरे मां नियोजयसि केशव ||३-१||
arjuna uvāca . jyāyasī cetkarmaṇaste matā buddhirjanārdana . tatkiṃ karmaṇi ghore māṃ niyojayasi keśava ||3-1||
arjunah —Arjuna; uvaca —said; jyayasT —speaking very highly; cet —
although; karmanah —than fruitive action; te —your; mata —opinion; buddhih
—intelligence; janardana —O Krsna; tat —therefore; kim —why; karmani —in
action; ghore —ghastly; mam —me; niyojayasi —engaging me; kesava —O
Krsna.
Arjuna said: O Janardana, O Kesava, why do You urge me to engage in
this ghastly warfare, if You think that intelligence is better than fruitive
work?
व्यामिश्रेणेव वाक्येन बुद्धिं मोहयसीव मे | तदेकं वद निश्चित्य येन श्रेयोऽहमाप्नुयाम् ||३-२||
vyāmiśreṇeva vākyena buddhiṃ mohayasīva me . tadekaṃ vada niścitya yena śreyo.ahamāpnuyām ||3-2||
vyamisrena —by equivocal; iva —as; vakyena —words; buddhim
—intelligence; mohayasi —bewildering; iva —as; me —my; tat —therefore;
ekam —only one; vada —please tell; niscitya —ascertaining; yena —by which;
sreyah —real benefit; aham —I; apnuyam —may have it.
My intelligence is bewildered by Your equivocal instructions.
Therefore, please tell me decisively what is most beneficial for me.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | लोकेऽस्मिन् द्विविधा निष्ठा पुरा प्रोक्ता मयानघ | ज्ञानयोगेन साङ्ख्यानां कर्मयोगेन योगिनाम् ||३-३||
śrībhagavānuvāca . loke.asmina dvividhā niṣṭhā purā proktā mayānagha . jñānayogena sāṅkhyānāṃ karmayogena yoginām ||3-3||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; loke —in
the world; asmin —this; dvi-vidha —two kinds of; nistha —faith; pura —
formerly; prokta —was said; maya —by Me; anagha —O sinless one; jnana-
yogena —by the linking process of knowledge; sahkhydnam —of the empiric
philosophers; karma-yogena —by the linking process of devotion; yoginam
—of the devotees.
The Blessed Lord said: O sinless Arjuna, I have already explained that
there are two classes of men who realize the Self. Some are inclined to
understand Him by empirical, philosophical speculation, and others are
inclined to know Him by devotional work.
न कर्मणामनारम्भान्नैष्कर्म्यं पुरुषोऽश्नुते | न च संन्यसनादेव सिद्धिं समधिगच्छति ||३-४||
na karmaṇāmanārambhānnaiṣkarmyaṃ puruṣo.aśnute . na ca saṃnyasanādeva siddhiṃ samadhigacchati ||3-4||
na —without; karmanam —of the prescribed duties; anarambhat —non¬
performance; naiskarmyam —freedom from reaction; purusah —man; asnute
—achieve; na —nor; ca —also; sannyasanat —by renunciation; eva —simply;
siddhim —success; samadhigacchati —attain.
Not by merely abstaining from work can one achieve freedom from
reaction, nor by renunciation alone can one attain perfection.
न हि कश्चित्क्षणमपि जातु तिष्ठत्यकर्मकृत् | कार्यते ह्यवशः कर्म सर्वः प्रकृतिजैर्गुणैः ||३-५||
na hi kaścitkṣaṇamapi jātu tiṣṭhatyakarmakṛt . kāryate hyavaśaḥ karma sarvaḥ prakṛtijairguṇaiḥ ||3-5||
na —nor; hi —certainly; kascit —anyone; ksanam —even a moment; api —
also; jatu —even; tisthati —stands; akarma-krt —without doing something;
karyate —forced to work; hi —certainly; avasah —helplessly; karma —work;
sarvah —everything; prakrti-jaih —out of the modes of material nature;
gunaih —by the qualities.
All men are forced to act helplessly according to the impulses born of
the modes of material nature; therefore no one can refrain from doing
something, not even for a moment.
कर्मेन्द्रियाणि संयम्य य आस्ते मनसा स्मरन् | इन्द्रियार्थान्विमूढात्मा मिथ्याचारः स उच्यते ||३-६||
karmendriyāṇi saṃyamya ya āste manasā smaran . indriyārthānvimūḍhātmā mithyācāraḥ sa ucyate ||3-6||
karma-indriyani —the five working sense organs; samyamya —controlling;
yah —anyone who; aste —remains; manasa —by mind; smaran —thinking;
indriya-arthan —sense objects; vimudha —foolish; atma —soul; mithya-acarah
—pretender; sah —he; ucyate —is called.
One who restrains the senses and organs of action, but whose mind
dwells on sense objects, certainly deludes himself and is called a
pretender.
यस्त्विन्द्रियाणि मनसा नियम्यारभतेऽर्जुन | कर्मेन्द्रियैः कर्मयोगमसक्तः स विशिष्यते ||३-७||
yastvindriyāṇi manasā niyamyārabhate.arjuna . karmendriyaiḥ karmayogamasaktaḥ sa viśiṣyate ||3-7||
yah —one who; tu —but; indriyani —senses; manasa —by the mind; niyamya
—regulating; arabhate —begins; arjuna —O Arjuna; karma-indriyaih —by the
active sense organs; karma-yogam —devotion; asaktah —without attachment;
sah —he; visisyate —by far the better.
On the other hand, he who controls the senses by the mind and engages
his active organs in works of devotion, without attachment, is by far
superior.
नियतं कुरु कर्म त्वं कर्म ज्यायो ह्यकर्मणः | शरीरयात्रापि च ते न प्रसिद्ध्येदकर्मणः ||३-८||
niyataṃ kuru karma tvaṃ karma jyāyo hyakarmaṇaḥ . śarīrayātrāpi ca te na prasiddhyedakarmaṇaḥ ||3-8||
niyatam —prescribed; kuru —do; karma —duties; tvam —you; karma —work;
jyayah —better; hi —than; akarmanah —without work; sarira —bodily; yatra —
maintenance; api —even; ca —also; te —your; na —never; prasiddhyet —
effected; akarmanah —without work.
Perform your prescribed duty, for action is better than inaction. A man
cannot even maintain his physical body without work.
यज्ञार्थात्कर्मणोऽन्यत्र लोकोऽयं कर्मबन्धनः | तदर्थं कर्म कौन्तेय मुक्तसङ्गः समाचर ||३-९||
yajñārthātkarmaṇo.anyatra loko.ayaṃ karmabandhanaḥ . tadarthaṃ karma kaunteya muktasaṅgaḥ samācara ||3-9||
yajha-arthat —only for the sake of Yajna, or Visnu; karmanah —work done;
anyatra —otherwise; lokah —this world; ayam —this; karma-bandhanah —
bondage by work; tat —Him; artham —for the sake of; karma —work; kaunteya
—O son of KuntX; mukta-saiigah —liberated from association; samacara —do
it perfectly.
Work done as a sacrifice for Visnu has to be performed, otherwise
work binds one to this material world. Therefore, O son of KuntI,
perform your prescribed duties for His satisfaction, and in that way you
will always remain unattached and free from bondage.
सहयज्ञाः प्रजाः सृष्ट्वा पुरोवाच प्रजापतिः | अनेन प्रसविष्यध्वमेष वोऽस्त्विष्टकामधुक् ||३-१०||
sahayajñāḥ prajāḥ sṛṣṭvā purovāca prajāpatiḥ . anena prasaviṣyadhvameṣa vo.astviṣṭakāmadhuk ||3-10||
saha —along with; yajhah —sacrifices; prajah —generations; srstva —by
creating; pura —anciently; uvaca —said; praja-patih —the Lord of creatures;
anena —by this; prasavisyadhvam —be more and more prosperous; esah —
certainly; vah —your; astu —let it be; ista —all desirable; kama-dhuk —
bestower.
In the beginning of creation, the Lord of all creatures sent forth
generations of men and demigods, along with sacrifices for Visnu, and
blessed them by saying, "Be thou happy by this yajna [sacrifice] because
its performance will bestow upon you all desirable things."
देवान्भावयतानेन ते देवा भावयन्तु वः | परस्परं भावयन्तः श्रेयः परमवाप्स्यथ ||३-११||
devānbhāvayatānena te devā bhāvayantu vaḥ . parasparaṃ bhāvayantaḥ śreyaḥ paramavāpsyatha ||3-11||
devan —demigods; bhavayata —having been pleased; anena —by this
sacrifice; te —those; devah —the demigods; bhavayantu —will please; vah
—you; parasparam —mutual; bhavayantah —pleasing one another; sreyah
—benediction; param —the supreme; avapsyatha —do you achieve.
The demigods, being pleased by sacrifices, will also please you; thus
nourishing one another, there will reign general prosperity for all.
इष्टान्भोगान्हि वो देवा दास्यन्ते यज्ञभाविताः | तैर्दत्तानप्रदायैभ्यो यो भुङ्क्ते स्तेन एव सः ||३-१२||
iṣṭānbhogānhi vo devā dāsyante yajñabhāvitāḥ . tairdattānapradāyaibhyo yo bhuṅkte stena eva saḥ ||3-12||
istan —desired; bhogan —necessities of life; hi —certainly; vah —unto you;
devah —the demigods; dasyante —award; yajha-bhavitah —being satisfied by
the performance of sacrifices; taih —by them; dattan —things given; apradaya
—without offering; ebhyah —to the demigods; yah —he who; bhuhkte —enjoys;
stenah —thief; eva —certainly; sah —is he.
In charge of the various necessities of life, the demigods, being satisfied
by the performance of yajna [sacrifice], supply all necessities to man. But
he who enjoys these gifts, without offering them to the demigods in
return, is certainly a thief.
यज्ञशिष्टाशिनः सन्तो मुच्यन्ते सर्वकिल्बिषैः | भुञ्जते ते त्वघं पापा ये पचन्त्यात्मकारणात् ||३-१३||
yajñaśiṣṭāśinaḥ santo mucyante sarvakilbiṣaiḥ . bhuñjate te tvaghaṃ pāpā ye pacantyātmakāraṇāt ||3-13||
yajha-sista —food taken after performance of yajna; asinah —eaters; santah
—the devotees; mucyante —get relief from; sarva —all kinds of; kilbisaih
—sins; bhunjate —enjoy; te —they; tu —but; agham —grievous sins; papah
—sinners; ye —those; pacanti —prepare food; atma-karanat —for sense
enjoyment.
The devotees of the Lord are released from all kinds of sins because
they eat food which is offered first for sacrifice. Others, who prepare food
for personal sense enjoyment, verily eat only sin.
अन्नाद्भवन्ति भूतानि पर्जन्यादन्नसम्भवः | यज्ञाद्भवति पर्जन्यो यज्ञः कर्मसमुद्भवः ||३-१४||
annādbhavanti bhūtāni parjanyādannasambhavaḥ . yajñādbhavati parjanyo yajñaḥ karmasamudbhavaḥ ||3-14||
annat —from grains; bhavanti —grow; bhutani —the material bodies;
parjanyat —from rains; anna —food grains; sambhavah —are made possible;
yajhat —from the performance of sacrifice; bhavati —becomes possible;
parjanyah —rains; yajhah —performance of yajha; karma —prescribed duties;
samudbhavah —born of.
All living bodies subsist on food grains, which are produced from rain.
Rains are produced by performance of yajna [sacrifice], and yajna is
born of prescribed duties.
कर्म ब्रह्मोद्भवं विद्धि ब्रह्माक्षरसमुद्भवम् | तस्मात्सर्वगतं ब्रह्म नित्यं यज्ञे प्रतिष्ठितम् ||३-१५||
karma brahmodbhavaṃ viddhi brahmākṣarasamudbhavam . tasmātsarvagataṃ brahma nityaṃ yajñe pratiṣṭhitam ||3-15||
karma —work; brahma-Vedas; udbhavam —produced from; viddhi —one
should know; brahma —the Vedas; aksara —the Supreme Brahman
(Personality of Godhead); samudbhavam; directly manifested; tasmat
—therefore; sarva-gatam —all-pervading; brahma —Transcendence; nityam
—eternally; yajhe —in sacrifice; pratisthitam —situated.
Regulated activities are prescribed in the Vedas, and the Vedas are
directly manifested from the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Consequently the all-pervading Transcendence is eternally situated in
acts of sacrifice.
एवं प्रवर्तितं चक्रं नानुवर्तयतीह यः | अघायुरिन्द्रियारामो मोघं पार्थ स जीवति ||३-१६||
evaṃ pravartitaṃ cakraṃ nānuvartayatīha yaḥ . aghāyurindriyārāmo moghaṃ pārtha sa jīvati ||3-16||
evam —thus prescribed; pravartitam —established by the Vedas; cakram —
cycle; na —does not; anuvartayati —adopt; iha —in this life; yah —one who;
aghayuh —life full of sins; indriya-aramah —satisfied in sense gratification;
mogham —useless; partha —O son of Prtha (Arjuna); sah —one who does so;
jivati —lives.
My dear Arjuna, a man who does not follow this prescribed Vedic
system of sacrifice certainly leads a life of sin, for a person delighting only
in the senses lives in vain.
यस्त्वात्मरतिरेव स्यादात्मतृप्तश्च मानवः | आत्मन्येव च सन्तुष्टस्तस्य कार्यं न विद्यते ||३-१७||
yastvātmaratireva syādātmatṛptaśca mānavaḥ . ātmanyeva ca santuṣṭastasya kāryaṃ na vidyate ||3-17||
yah —one who; tu —but; atma-ratih —takes pleasure; eva —certainly; syat —
remains; atma-trptah —self-illuminated; ca —and; manavah —a man; atmani —
in himself; eva —only; ca —and; santustah —perfectly satiated; tasya —his;
karyam —duty; na —does not; vidyate —exist.
One who is, however, taking pleasure in the self, who is illumined in the
self, who rejoices in and is satisfied with the self only, fully satiated—for
him there is no duty.
नैव तस्य कृतेनार्थो नाकृतेनेह कश्चन | न चास्य सर्वभूतेषु कश्चिदर्थव्यपाश्रयः ||३-१८||
naiva tasya kṛtenārtho nākṛteneha kaścana . na cāsya sarvabhūteṣu kaścidarthavyapāśrayaḥ ||3-18||
na —never; eva —certainly; tasya —his; krtena —by discharge of duty; arthah
—purpose; na —nor; akrtena —without discharge of duty; iha —in this world;
kascana —whatever; na —never; ca —and; asya —of him; sarva-bhutesu —in
all living beings; kascit —any; artha —purpose; v yapa-asrayah —taking shelter
of.
A self-realized man has no purpose to fulfill in the discharge of his
prescribed duties, nor has he any reason not to perform such work. Nor
has he any need to depend on any other living being.
तस्मादसक्तः सततं कार्यं कर्म समाचर | असक्तो ह्याचरन्कर्म परमाप्नोति पूरुषः ||३-१९||
tasmādasaktaḥ satataṃ kāryaṃ karma samācara . asakto hyācarankarma paramāpnoti pūruṣaḥ ||3-19||
tasmat —therefore; asaktah —without attachment; satatam —constantly;
karyam —as duty; karma —work; samacara —perform; asaktah
—nonattachment; hi —certainly; acaran —performing; karma —work; param
—the Supreme; apnoti —achieves; purusah —a man.
Therefore, without being attached to the fruits of activities, one should
act as a matter of duty; for by working without attachment, one attains
the Supreme.
कर्मणैव हि संसिद्धिमास्थिता जनकादयः | लोकसंग्रहमेवापि सम्पश्यन्कर्तुमर्हसि ||३-२०||
karmaṇaiva hi saṃsiddhimāsthitā janakādayaḥ . lokasaṃgrahamevāpi sampaśyankartumarhasi ||3-20||
karmana —by work; eva —even; hi —certainly; samsiddhim —perfection;
asthitah —situated; janaka-adayah —kings like Janaka and others; loka-
sahgraham —educating the people in general; eva —also; api —for the sake of;
sampasyan —by considering; kartum —to act; arhasi —deserve.
Even kings like Janaka and others attained the perfectional stage by
performance of prescribed duties. Therefore, just for the sake of
educating the people in general, you should perform your work.
यद्यदाचरति श्रेष्ठस्तत्तदेवेतरो जनः | स यत्प्रमाणं कुरुते लोकस्तदनुवर्तते ||३-२१||
yadyadācarati śreṣṭhastattadevetaro janaḥ . sa yatpramāṇaṃ kurute lokastadanuvartate ||3-21||
yat —whatever; yat —and whichever; acarati —does he act; sresthah —
respectable leader; tat —that; tat —and that alone; eva —certainly; itarah —
common; janah —person; sah —he; yat —whichever; pramanam —evidence;
kurute —does perform; lokah —all the world; tat —that; anuvartate —follow in
the footsteps.
Whatever action is performed by a great man, common men follow in
his footsteps. And whatever standards he sets by exemplary acts, all the
world pursues.
न मे पार्थास्ति कर्तव्यं त्रिषु लोकेषु किञ्चन | नानवाप्तमवाप्तव्यं वर्त एव च कर्मणि ||३-२२||
na me pārthāsti kartavyaṃ triṣu lokeṣu kiñcana . nānavāptamavāptavyaṃ varta eva ca karmaṇi ||3-22||
na —none; me —Mine; partha —O son of Prtha; asti —there is; kartavyam —
any prescribed duty; trisu —in the three; lokesu —planetary systems; kincana
—anything; na —no; anavaptam —in want; avaptavyam —to be gained; varte
—engaged; eva —certainly; ca —also; karmani —in one`s prescribed duty.
O son of Prtha, there is no work prescribed for Me within all the three
planetary systems. Nor am I in want of anything, nor have I need to
obtain anything—and yet I am engaged in work.
यदि ह्यहं न वर्तेयं जातु कर्मण्यतन्द्रितः | मम वर्त्मानुवर्तन्ते मनुष्याः पार्थ सर्वशः ||३-२३||
yadi hyahaṃ na varteyaṃ jātu karmaṇyatandritaḥ . mama vartmānuvartante manuṣyāḥ pārtha sarvaśaḥ ||3-23||
yadi —if; hi —certainly; aham —I; na —do not; varteyam —thus engage; jatu
—ever; karmani —in the performance of prescribed duties; atandritah —with
great care; mama —My; vartma —path; anuvartante —would follow; manusyah
—all men; partha —O son of Prtha; sarvasah —in all respects.
For, if I did not engage in work, O Partha, certainly all men would
follow My path.
उत्सीदेयुरिमे लोका न कुर्यां कर्म चेदहम् | सङ्करस्य च कर्ता स्यामुपहन्यामिमाः प्रजाः ||३-२४||
utsīdeyurime lokā na kuryāṃ karma cedaham . saṅkarasya ca kartā syāmupahanyāmimāḥ prajāḥ ||3-24||
utsideyuh —put into ruin; ime —all these; lokah —worlds; na —do not;
kuryam —perform; karma —prescribed duties; cet —if; aham —I; sankarasya —
of unwanted population; ca —and; karta —creator; syam —shall be; upahanyam
—destroy; imah —all these; prajah —living entities.
If I should cease to work, then all these worlds would be put to
ruination. I would also be the cause of creating unwanted population, and
I would thereby destroy the peace of all sentient beings.
सक्ताः कर्मण्यविद्वांसो यथा कुर्वन्ति भारत | कुर्याद्विद्वांस्तथासक्तश्चिकीर्षुर्लोकसंग्रहम् ||३-२५||
saktāḥ karmaṇyavidvāṃso yathā kurvanti bhārata . kuryādvidvāṃstathāsaktaścikīrṣurlokasaṃgraham ||3-25||
saktah —being attached; karmani —prescribed duties; avidvamsah —the
ignorant; yatha —as much as; kurvanti —do it; bharata —O descendant of
Bharata; kuryat —must do; vidvan —the learned; tatha —thus; asaktah —
without attachment; cikfrsuh —desiring to; loka-sahgraham —leading the
people in general.
As the ignorant perform their duties with attachment to results,
similarly the learned may also act, but without attachment, for the sake of
leading people on the right path.
न बुद्धिभेदं जनयेदज्ञानां कर्मसङ्गिनाम् | जोषयेत्सर्वकर्माणि विद्वान्युक्तः समाचरन् ||३-२६||
na buddhibhedaṃ janayedajñānāṃ karmasaṅginām . joṣayetsarvakarmāṇi vidvānyuktaḥ samācaran ||3-26||
na —do not; buddhi-bhedam —disrupt the intelligence; janayet —do;
ajnanam —of the foolish; karma-sanginam —attached to fruitive work; josayet
—dovetailed; sarva —all; karmani —work; vidvan —learned; yuktah — all
engaged; samacaran —practicing.
Let not the wise disrupt the minds of the ignorant who are attached to
fruitive action. They should not be encouraged to refrain from work, but
to engage in work in the spirit of devotion.
प्रकृतेः क्रियमाणानि गुणैः कर्माणि सर्वशः | अहङ्कारविमूढात्मा कर्ताहमिति मन्यते ||३-२७||
prakṛteḥ kriyamāṇāni guṇaiḥ karmāṇi sarvaśaḥ . ahaṅkāravimūḍhātmā kartāhamiti manyate ||3-27||
prakrteh —of material nature; kriyamanani —all being done; gunaih —by the
modes; karmani —activities; sarvasah —all kinds of; ahahkara-vimudha —
bewildered by false ego; atma —the spirit soul; karta —doer; aham —I; iti —
thus; manyate —thinks.
The bewildered spirit soul, under the influence of the three modes of
material nature, thinks himself to be the doer of activities, which are in
actuality carried out by nature.
तत्त्ववित्तु महाबाहो गुणकर्मविभागयोः | गुणा गुणेषु वर्तन्त इति मत्वा न सज्जते ||३-२८||
tattvavittu mahābāho guṇakarmavibhāgayoḥ . guṇā guṇeṣu vartanta iti matvā na sajjate ||3-28||
tattvavit —the knower of the Absolute Truth; tu —but; maha-baho —O
mighty-armed one; guna-karma —works under material influence; vibhagayoh
—differences; gunah —senses; gunesu —in sense gratification; vartante —
being engaged; id —thus; matva —thinking; na —never; sajjate —becomes
attached.
One who is in knowledge of the Absolute Truth, O mighty-armed, does
not engage himself in the senses and sense gratification, knowing well the
differences between work in devotion and work for fruitive results.
प्रकृतेर्गुणसम्मूढाः सज्जन्ते गुणकर्मसु | तानकृत्स्नविदो मन्दान्कृत्स्नविन्न विचालयेत् ||३-२९||
prakṛterguṇasammūḍhāḥ sajjante guṇakarmasu . tānakṛtsnavido mandānkṛtsnavinna vicālayet ||3-29||
prakrteh —impelled by the material modes; guna-sammudhah —befooled by
material identification; sajjante —become engaged; guna-karmasu —in
material activities; tan —all those; akrtsna-vidah —persons with a poor fund of
knowledge; mandan —lazy to understand self-realization; krtsna-vit —one who
is in factual knowledge; na —may not; vicalayet —try to agitate.
Bewildered by the modes of material nature, the ignorant fully engage
themselves in material activities and become attached. But the wise
should not unsettle them, although these duties are inferior due to the
performers` lack of knowledge.
मयि सर्वाणि कर्माणि संन्यस्याध्यात्मचेतसा | निराशीर्निर्ममो भूत्वा युध्यस्व विगतज्वरः ||३-३०||
mayi sarvāṇi karmāṇi saṃnyasyādhyātmacetasā . nirāśīrnirmamo bhūtvā yudhyasva vigatajvaraḥ ||3-30||
mayi —unto Me; sarvani —all sorts of; karmani —activities; sannyasya —
giving up completely; adhyatma —with full knowledge of the self; cetasa —
consciousness; nirasih —without desire for profit; nirmamah —without
ownership; bhutva —so being; yudhyasva —fight; vigata-jvarah —without
being lethargic.
Therefore, O Arjuna, surrendering all your works unto Me, with mind
intent on Me, and without desire for gain and free from egoism and
lethargy, fight.
ये मे मतमिदं नित्यमनुतिष्ठन्ति मानवाः | श्रद्धावन्तोऽनसूयन्तो मुच्यन्ते तेऽपि कर्मभिः ||३-३१||
ye me matamidaṃ nityamanutiṣṭhanti mānavāḥ . śraddhāvanto.anasūyanto mucyante te.api karmabhiḥ ||3-31||
ye —those; me —My; matam —injunctions; idam —this; nityam —eternal
function; anutisthanti —execute regularly; manavah —humankind;
sraddhavantah —with faith and devotion; anasuyantah —without envy;
mucyante — become free; te —all of them; api —even; karmabhih —from the
bondage of the law of fmitive action.
One who executes his duties according to My injunctions and who
follows this teaching faithfully, without envy, becomes free from the
bondage of fruitive actions.
ये त्वेतदभ्यसूयन्तो नानुतिष्ठन्ति मे मतम् | सर्वज्ञानविमूढांस्तान्विद्धि नष्टानचेतसः ||३-३२||
ye tvetadabhyasūyanto nānutiṣṭhanti me matam . sarvajñānavimūḍhāṃstānviddhi naṣṭānacetasaḥ ||3-32||
ye —those; tu —however; etat —this; abhyasuyantah —out of envy; na —do
not; anutisthanti —regularly perform; me —My; matam —injunction; sarva-
jhana —all sorts of knowledge; vimudhan —perfectly befooled; tan —they are;
viddhi —know it well; nastan —all ruined; acetasah —without Krsna
consciousness.
But those who, out of envy, disregard these teachings and do not
practice them regularly, are to be considered bereft of all knowledge,
befooled, and doomed to ignorance and bondage.
सदृशं चेष्टते स्वस्याः प्रकृतेर्ज्ञानवानपि | प्रकृतिं यान्ति भूतानि निग्रहः किं करिष्यति ||३-३३||
sadṛśaṃ ceṣṭate svasyāḥ prakṛterjñānavānapi . prakṛtiṃ yānti bhūtāni nigrahaḥ kiṃ kariṣyati ||3-33||
sadrsam —accordingly; cestate —tries; svasyah —in one`s own nature;
prakrteh —modes; jnanavan —the learned; api —although; prakrtim —nature;
yanti —undergo; bhutani —all living entities; nigrahah —suppression; kim —
what; karisyati —can do.
Even a man of knowledge acts according to his own nature, for
everyone follows his nature. What can repression accomplish?
इन्द्रियस्येन्द्रियस्यार्थे रागद्वेषौ व्यवस्थितौ | तयोर्न वशमागच्छेत्तौ ह्यस्य परिपन्थिनौ ||३-३४||
indriyasyendriyasyārthe rāgadveṣau vyavasthitau . tayorna vaśamāgacchettau hyasya paripanthinau ||3-34||
indriyasya —of the senses; indriyasya arthe —in the sense objects; raga —
attachment; dvesau —also in detachment; vyavasthitau —put under regulations;
tayoh —of them; na —never; vasam —control; agacchet —one should come; tau
—those; hi —certainly are; asya —his; paripanthinau —stumbling blocks.
Attraction and repulsion for sense objects are felt by embodied beings,
but one should not fall under the control of senses and sense objects
because they are stumbling blocks on the path of self-realization.
श्रेयान्स्वधर्मो विगुणः परधर्मात्स्वनुष्ठितात् | स्वधर्मे निधनं श्रेयः परधर्मो भयावहः ||३-३५||
śreyānsvadharmo viguṇaḥ paradharmātsvanuṣṭhitāt . svadharme nidhanaṃ śreyaḥ paradharmo bhayāvahaḥ ||3-35||
sreyan —far better; sva-dharmah —one`s prescribed duties; vigunah —even
faulty; para-dharmat —from duties mentioned for others; svanusthitat —than
perfectly done; sva-dharme —in one`s prescribed duties; nidhanam —
destruction; sreyah —better; para-dharmah —duties prescribed for others;
bhaya-avahah —dangerous.
It is far better to discharge one`s prescribed duties, even though they
may be faulty, than another`s duties. Destruction in the course of
performing one`s own duty is better than engaging in another`s duties, for
to follow another`s path is dangerous.
अर्जुन उवाच | अथ केन प्रयुक्तोऽयं पापं चरति पूरुषः | अनिच्छन्नपि वार्ष्णेय बलादिव नियोजितः ||३-३६||
arjuna uvāca . atha kena prayukto.ayaṃ pāpaṃ carati pūruṣaḥ . anicchannapi vārṣṇeya balādiva niyojitaḥ ||3-36||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; atha —hereafter; kena —by what; prayuktah —
impelled; ayam —one; papam —sins; carati —acts; purusah —a man; anicchan
— without desiring; api —although; varsneya —O descendant of Vrsni; balat
—by force; iva —as if; niyojitah —engaged.
Arjuna said: O descendant of Vrsni, by what is one impelled to sinful
acts, even unwillingly, as if engaged by force?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | काम एष क्रोध एष रजोगुणसमुद्भवः | महाशनो महापाप्मा विद्ध्येनमिह वैरिणम् ||३-३७||
śrībhagavānuvāca . kāma eṣa krodha eṣa rajoguṇasamudbhavaḥ . mahāśano mahāpāpmā viddhyenamiha vairiṇam ||3-37||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Personality of Godhead said; kamah —lust; esah
—all these; krodhah —wrath; esah —all these; rajo-guna —the mode of
passion; samudbhavah —born of; maha-sanah —all-devouring; maha-papma
—greatly sinful; viddhi —know; enam —this; iha —in the material world;
vairinam — greatest enemy.
The Blessed Lord said: It is lust only, Arjuna, which is born of contact
with the material modes of passion and later transformed into wrath, and
which is the all-devouring, sinful enemy of this world.
धूमेनाव्रियते वह्निर्यथादर्शो मलेन च | यथोल्बेनावृतो गर्भस्तथा तेनेदमावृतम् ||३-३८||
dhūmenāvriyate vahniryathādarśo malena ca . yatholbenāvṛto garbhastathā tenedamāvṛtam ||3-38||
dhumena —by smoke; avriyate —covered; vahnih —fire; yatha —just as;
adarsah —mirror; malena —by dust; ca —also; yatha —just as; ulbena —by the
womb; avrtah —is covered; garbhah —embryo; tatha-so; tena —by that lust;
idam —this; avrtam —is covered.
As fire is covered by smoke, as a mirror is covered by dust, or as the
embryo is covered by the womb, similarly, the living entity is covered by
different degrees of this lust.
आवृतं ज्ञानमेतेन ज्ञानिनो नित्यवैरिणा | कामरूपेण कौन्तेय दुष्पूरेणानलेन च ||३-३९||
āvṛtaṃ jñānametena jñānino nityavairiṇā . kāmarūpeṇa kaunteya duṣpūreṇānalena ca ||3-39||
avrtam —covered; jnanam —pure consciousness; etena —by this; jnaninah —
of the knower; nitya-vairina —eternal enemy; kama-rupena —in the form of
lust; kaunteya — O son of KuntI; duspurena —never to be satisfied; analena —
by the fire; ca —also.
Thus, a man`s pure consciousness is covered by his eternal enemy in the
form of lust, which is never satisfied and which burns like fire.
इन्द्रियाणि मनो बुद्धिरस्याधिष्ठानमुच्यते | एतैर्विमोहयत्येष ज्ञानमावृत्य देहिनम् ||३-४०||
indriyāṇi mano buddhirasyādhiṣṭhānamucyate . etairvimohayatyeṣa jñānamāvṛtya dehinam ||3-40||
indriyani —the senses; manah —the mind; buddhih —the intelligence; asya
—of the lust; adhisthanam —sitting place; ucyate —called; etaih —by all these;
vimohayati —bewilders; esah —of this; jnanam —knowledge; avrtya
—covering; dehinam —the embodied.
The senses, the mind and the intelligence are the sitting places of this
lust, which veils the real knowledge of the living entity and bewilders him.
तस्मात्त्वमिन्द्रियाण्यादौ नियम्य भरतर्षभ | पाप्मानं प्रजहि ह्येनं ज्ञानविज्ञाननाशनम् ||३-४१||
tasmāttvamindriyāṇyādau niyamya bharatarṣabha . pāpmānaṃ prajahi hyenaṃ jñānavijñānanāśanam ||3-41||
tasmat —therefore; tvam-you; indriyani —senses; adau —in the beginning;
niyamya —by regulating; bharatarsabha —O chief amongst the descendants of
Bharata; papmanam —the great symbol of sin; prajahi —curb; hi —certain ly;
enam —this; jhana —knowledge; vijhana —scientific knowledge of the pure
soul; nasanam —destroyer.
Therefore, O Arjuna, best of the Bharatas, in the very beginning curb
this great symbol of sin [lust] by regulating the senses, and slay this
destroyer of knowledge and self-realization.
इन्द्रियाणि पराण्याहुरिन्द्रियेभ्यः परं मनः | मनसस्तु परा बुद्धिर्यो बुद्धेः परतस्तु सः ||३-४२||
indriyāṇi parāṇyāhurindriyebhyaḥ paraṃ manaḥ . manasastu parā buddhiryo buddheḥ paratastu saḥ ||3-42||
indriyanT —senses; parani —superior; ahuh —is said; indriyebhyah —more
than the senses; param —superior; manah —the mind; manasah —more than the
mind; tu —also; para —superior; buddhih —intelligence; yah —one which;
buddheh —more than the intelligence; paratah —superior; tu —but; sah —he.
The working senses are superior to dull matter; mind is higher than the
senses; intelligence is still higher than the mind; and he [the soul] is even
higher than the intelligence.
एवं बुद्धेः परं बुद्ध्वा संस्तभ्यात्मानमात्मना | जहि शत्रुं महाबाहो कामरूपं दुरासदम् ||३-४३||
evaṃ buddheḥ paraṃ buddhvā saṃstabhyātmānamātmanā . jahi śatruṃ mahābāho kāmarūpaṃ durāsadam ||3-43||
evam —thus; buddheh —of intelligence; param —superior; buddhva —so
knowing; samstabhya —by steadying; atmanam —the mind; atmana —by
deliberate intelligence; jahi —conquer; satrum —the enemy; maha-baho —O
mighty-armed one; kama-rupam —the form of lust; durasadam —formidable.
Thus knowing oneself to be transcendental to material senses, mind
and intelligence, one should control the lower self by the higher self and
thus— by spiritual strength—conquer this insatiable enemy known as
lust.
Глава 4
श्रीभगवानुवाच | इमं विवस्वते योगं प्रोक्तवानहमव्ययम् | विवस्वान्मनवे प्राह मनुरिक्ष्वाकवेऽब्रवीत् ||४-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . imaṃ vivasvate yogaṃ proktavānahamavyayam . vivasvānmanave prāha manurikṣvākave.abravīt ||4-1||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; imam —
this; vivasvate —unto the sun-god; yogam —the science of one`s relationship to
the Supreme; proktavan —instructed; aham —I; avyayam —imperishable;
vivasvan —Vivasvan (the sun-god`s name); manave —unto the father of
mankind (of the name Vaivasvata); praha —told; manuh —the father of
mankind; iksvakave —unto King Iksvaku; abravit —said.
The Blessed Lord said: I instructed this imperishable science of yoga to
the sun-god, Vivasvan, and Vivasvan instructed it to Manu, the father of
mankind, and Manu in turn instructed it to Iksvaku.
एवं परम्पराप्राप्तमिमं राजर्षयो विदुः | स कालेनेह महता योगो नष्टः परन्तप ||४-२||
evaṃ paramparāprāptamimaṃ rājarṣayo viduḥ . sa kāleneha mahatā yogo naṣṭaḥ parantapa ||4-2||
evam —thus; parampara —disciplic succession; praptam —received; imam —
this science; rajarsayah —the saintly kings; viduh —understood; sah —that
knowledge; kalena —in the course of time; iha —in this world; mahata —by
great; yogah —the science of one`s relationship with the Supreme; nastah —
scattered; parantapa —O Arjuna, subduer of the enemies.
This supreme science was thus received through the chain of disciplic
succession, and the saintly kings understood it in that way. But in course
of time the succession was broken, and therefore the science as it is
appears to be lost.
स एवायं मया तेऽद्य योगः प्रोक्तः पुरातनः | भक्तोऽसि मे सखा चेति रहस्यं ह्येतदुत्तमम् ||४-३||
sa evāyaṃ mayā te.adya yogaḥ proktaḥ purātanaḥ . bhakto.asi me sakhā ceti rahasyaṃ hyetaduttamam ||4-3||
sah —the same ancient; eva —certainly; ayam —this; maya —by Me; te —unto
you; adya —today; yogah —the science of yoga; proktah —spoken; puratanah
—very old; bhaktah —devotee; asi —you are; me —My; sakha — friend; ca
—also; id —therefore; rahasyam —mystery; hi —certainly; etat —this; uttamam
—transcendental.
That very ancient science of the relationship with the Supreme is today
told by Me to you because you are My devotee as well as My friend;
therefore you can understand the transcendental mystery of this science.
अर्जुन उवाच | अपरं भवतो जन्म परं जन्म विवस्वतः | कथमेतद्विजानीयां त्वमादौ प्रोक्तवानिति ||४-४||
arjuna uvāca . aparaṃ bhavato janma paraṃ janma vivasvataḥ . kathametadvijānīyāṃ tvamādau proktavāniti ||4-4||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; aparam —junior; bhavatah —Your; janma —
birth; param —superior; janma —birth; vivasvatah —of the sun-god; katham —
how; etat —this; vijamyam —shall I understand; tvam —You; adau —in the
beginning; proktavan —instructed; id —thus.
Arjuna said: The sun-god Vivasvan is senior by birth to You. How am I
to understand that in the beginning You instructed this science to him?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | बहूनि मे व्यतीतानि जन्मानि तव चार्जुन | तान्यहं वेद सर्वाणि न त्वं वेत्थ परन्तप ||४-५||
śrībhagavānuvāca . bahūni me vyatītāni janmāni tava cārjuna . tānyahaṃ veda sarvāṇi na tvaṃ vettha parantapa ||4-5||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Personality of Godhead said; bahuni —many; me
—of Mine; vyatitani —have passed; janmani —births; tava —of yours; ca — and
also; arjuna —O Arjuna; tani —all those; aham —I; veda —do know; sarvani
—all; na —not; tvam —yourself; vettha —know; parantapa —O subduer of the
enemy.
The Blessed Lord said: Many, many births both you and I have passed.
I can remember all of them, but you cannot, O subduer of the enemy!
अजोऽपि सन्नव्ययात्मा भूतानामीश्वरोऽपि सन् | प्रकृतिं स्वामधिष्ठाय सम्भवाम्यात्ममायया ||४-६||
ajo.api sannavyayātmā bhūtānāmīśvaro.api san . prakṛtiṃ svāmadhiṣṭhāya sambhavāmyātmamāyayā ||4-6||
ajah —unborn; api —although; san —being so; avyaya —without
deterioration; atma —body; bhutanam —all those who are born; Tsvarah —the
Supreme Lord; api —although; san —being so; prakrtim —transcendental form;
svam — of Myself; adhisthaya —being so situated; sambhavami —I do
incarnate; atma-mayaya —by My internal energy.
Although I am unborn and My transcendental body never deteriorates,
and although I am the Lord of all sentient beings, I still appear in every
millennium in My original transcendental form.
यदा यदा हि धर्मस्य ग्लानिर्भवति भारत | अभ्युत्थानमधर्मस्य तदात्मानं सृजाम्यहम् ||४-७||
yadā yadā hi dharmasya glānirbhavati bhārata . abhyutthānamadharmasya tadātmānaṃ sṛjāmyaham ||4-7||
yada —whenever; yada —wherever; hi —certainly; dharmasya —of religion;
glanih —discrepancies; bhavati —manifested, becomes; bharata —O
descendant of Bharata; abhyutthanam —predominance; adharmasya —of
irreligion; tada —at that time; atmanam —self; srjami —manifest; aham —I.
Whenever and wherever there is a decline in religious practice, O
descendant of Bharata, and a predominant rise of irreligion—at that time
I descend Myself.
परित्राणाय साधूनां विनाशाय च दुष्कृताम् | धर्मसंस्थापनार्थाय सम्भवामि युगे युगे ||४-८||
paritrāṇāya sādhūnāṃ vināśāya ca duṣkṛtām . dharmasaṃsthāpanārthāya sambhavāmi yuge yuge ||4-8||
paritranaya —for the deliverance; sadhunam —of the devotees; vinasaya —
for the annihilation; ca —also; duskrtam —of the miscreants; dharma
—principles of religion; sarhsthapana-arthaya —to reestablish; sambhavami —I
do appear; yuge —millennium; yuge —after millennium.
In order to deliver the pious and to annihilate the miscreants, as well as
to reestablish the principles of religion, I advent Myself millennium after
millennium.
जन्म कर्म च मे दिव्यमेवं यो वेत्ति तत्त्वतः | त्यक्त्वा देहं पुनर्जन्म नैति मामेति सोऽर्जुन ||४-९||
janma karma ca me divyamevaṃ yo vetti tattvataḥ . tyaktvā dehaṃ punarjanma naiti māmeti so.arjuna ||4-9||
janma —birth; karma —work; ca —also; me —of Mine; divyam
—transcendental; evam —like this; yah —anyone who; vetti —knows; tattvatah
—in reality; tyaktva —leaving aside; deham —this body; punah —again; janma
—birth; na —never; eti —does attain; mam —unto Me; eti —does attain; sah
—he; arjuna —O Arjuna.
One who knows the transcendental nature of My appearance and
activities does not, upon leaving the body, take his birth again in this
material world, but attains My eternal abode, O Arjuna.
वीतरागभयक्रोधा मन्मया मामुपाश्रिताः | बहवो ज्ञानतपसा पूता मद्भावमागताः ||४-१०||
vītarāgabhayakrodhā manmayā māmupāśritāḥ . bahavo jñānatapasā pūtā madbhāvamāgatāḥ ||4-10||
vita —freed from; raga —attachment; bhaya —fear; krodhah —anger; mat-
maya —fully in Me; mam —unto Me; upasritah —being fully situated; bahavah
—many; jhana —knowledge; tapasa —by penance; putah —being purified;
mat-bhavam —transcendental love for Me; agatah —attained.
Being freed from attachment, fear and anger, being fully absorbed in
Me and taking refuge in Me, many, many persons in the past became
purified by knowledge of Me—and thus they all attained transcendental
love for Me.
ये यथा मां प्रपद्यन्ते तांस्तथैव भजाम्यहम् | मम वर्त्मानुवर्तन्ते मनुष्याः पार्थ सर्वशः ||४-११||
ye yathā māṃ prapadyante tāṃstathaiva bhajāmyaham . mama vartmānuvartante manuṣyāḥ pārtha sarvaśaḥ ||4-11||
ye —all of them; yatha —as; mam —unto Me; prapadyante —surrender; tan
—unto them; tatha —so; eva —certainly; bhajami —do I reward; aham —I;
mama —My; vartma —path; anuvartante —do follow; manusyah —all men;
partha —O son of Prtha; sarvasah —in all respects.
All of them—as they surrender unto Me—I reward accordingly.
Everyone follows My path in all respects, O son of Prtha.
काङ्क्षन्तः कर्मणां सिद्धिं यजन्त इह देवताः | क्षिप्रं हि मानुषे लोके सिद्धिर्भवति कर्मजा ||४-१२||
kāṅkṣantaḥ karmaṇāṃ siddhiṃ yajanta iha devatāḥ . kṣipraṃ hi mānuṣe loke siddhirbhavati karmajā ||4-12||
kahksantah —desiring; karmanam —of fruitive activities; siddhim
—perfection; yajante —worship by sacrifices; iha —in the material world;
devatah —the demigods; ksipram —very quickly; hi —certainly; manuse —in
human society; loke —within this world; siddhih bhavati —becomes successful;
karmaja —the fruitive worker.
Men in this world desire success in fruitive activities, and therefore
they worship the demigods. Quickly, of course, men get results from
fruitive work in this world.
चातुर्वर्ण्यं मया सृष्टं गुणकर्मविभागशः | तस्य कर्तारमपि मां विद्ध्यकर्तारमव्ययम् ||४-१३||
cāturvarṇyaṃ mayā sṛṣṭaṃ guṇakarmavibhāgaśaḥ . tasya kartāramapi māṃ viddhyakartāramavyayam ||4-13||
catur-varnyam —the four divisions of human society; maya —by Me; srstam
—created; guna —quality; karma —work; vibhagasah —in terms of division;
tasya —of that; kartaram —the father; api —although; mam —Me; viddhi —you
may know; akartaram —as the non-doer; avyayam —being unchangeable.
According to the three modes of material nature and the work ascribed
to them, the four divisions of human society were created by Me. And,
although I am the creator of this system, you should know that I am yet
the non-doer, being unchangeable.
न मां कर्माणि लिम्पन्ति न मे कर्मफले स्पृहा | इति मां योऽभिजानाति कर्मभिर्न स बध्यते ||४-१४||
na māṃ karmāṇi limpanti na me karmaphale spṛhā . iti māṃ yo.abhijānāti karmabhirna sa badhyate ||4-14||
na —never; mam —unto Me; karmani —all kinds of work; limpanti —do
affect; na —nor; me —My; karma-phale —in fruitive action; sprha —aspiration;
iti —thus; mam —unto Me; yah —one who; abhijanati —does know; karmabhih
—by the reaction of such work; na —never does; sah —he; badhyate —become
entangled.
There is no work that affects Me; nor do I aspire for the fruits of
action. One who understands this truth about Me also does not become
entangled in the fruitive reactions of work.
एवं ज्ञात्वा कृतं कर्म पूर्वैरपि मुमुक्षुभिः | कुरु कर्मैव तस्मात्त्वं पूर्वैः पूर्वतरं कृतम् ||४-१५||
evaṃ jñātvā kṛtaṃ karma pūrvairapi mumukṣubhiḥ . kuru karmaiva tasmāttvaṃ pūrvaiḥ pūrvataraṃ kṛtam ||4-15||
evam —thus; jnatva —knowing well; krtam —performed; karma —work;
purvaih —by past authorities; api —although; mumuksubhih —who attained
liberation; kuru —just perform; karma —prescribed duty; eva —certainly;
tasmat —therefore; tvam —you; purvaih —by the predecessors; purvataram —
ancient predecessors; krtam —as performed.
All the liberated souls in ancient times acted with this understanding
and so attained liberation. Therefore, as the ancients, you should perform
your duty in this divine consciousness.
किं कर्म किमकर्मेति कवयोऽप्यत्र मोहिताः | तत्ते कर्म प्रवक्ष्यामि यज्ज्ञात्वा मोक्ष्यसेऽशुभात् ||४-१६||
kiṃ karma kimakarmeti kavayo.apyatra mohitāḥ . tatte karma pravakṣyāmi yajjñātvā mokṣyase.aśubhāt ||4-16||
kim —what is; karma —action; kim —what is; akarma —inaction; iti —thus;
kavayah —the intelligent; api —also; atra —in this matter; mohitah
—bewildered; tat —that; te —unto you; karma —work; pravaksyami —I shall
explain; yat —which; jnatva —knowing; moksyase —be liberated; asubhat
—from ill fortune.
Even the intelligent are bewildered in determining what is action and
what is inaction. Now I shall explain to you what action is, knowing which
you shall be liberated from all sins.
कर्मणो ह्यपि बोद्धव्यं बोद्धव्यं च विकर्मणः | अकर्मणश्च बोद्धव्यं गहना कर्मणो गतिः ||४-१७||
karmaṇo hyapi boddhavyaṃ boddhavyaṃ ca vikarmaṇaḥ . akarmaṇaśca boddhavyaṃ gahanā karmaṇo gatiḥ ||4-17||
karmanah —working order; hi —certainly; api —also; boddhavyam —should
be understood; boddhavyam —to be understood; ca —also; vikarmanah —
forbidden work; akarmanah —inaction; ca —also; boddhavyam —should be
understood; gahana —very difficult; karmanah —working order; gatih —to
enter into.
The intricacies of action are very hard to understand. Therefore one
should know properly what action is, what forbidden action is, and what
inaction is.
कर्मण्यकर्म यः पश्येदकर्मणि च कर्म यः | स बुद्धिमान्मनुष्येषु स युक्तः कृत्स्नकर्मकृत् ||४-१८||
karmaṇyakarma yaḥ paśyedakarmaṇi ca karma yaḥ . sa buddhimānmanuṣyeṣu sa yuktaḥ kṛtsnakarmakṛt ||4-18||
karmani —in action; akarma —inaction; yah —one who; pasyet —observes;
akarmani —in inaction; ca —also; karma —fruitive action; yah —one who; sah
—he; buddhiman —is intelligent; manusyesu —in human society; sah —he;
yuktah —is in the transcendental position; krtsna-karma-krt —although
engaged in all activities.
One who sees inaction in action, and action in inaction, is intelligent
among men, and he is in the tranecendental position, although engaged in
all sorts of activities.
यस्य सर्वे समारम्भाः कामसङ्कल्पवर्जिताः | ज्ञानाग्निदग्धकर्माणं तमाहुः पण्डितं बुधाः ||४-१९||
yasya sarve samārambhāḥ kāmasaṅkalpavarjitāḥ . jñānāgnidagdhakarmāṇaṃ tamāhuḥ paṇḍitaṃ budhāḥ ||4-19||
yasya —one whose; sarve —all sorts of; samarambhah —in all attempts;
kama —desire for sense gratification; sahkalpa —determination; varjitah —are
devoid of; jhana —of perfect knowledge; agni —fire; dagdha —being burnt by;
karmanam —the performer; tarn —him; ahuh —declare; panditam —learned;
budhah —those who know.
One is understood to be in full knowledge whose every act is devoid of
desire for sense gratification. He is said by sages to be a worker whose
fruitive action is burned up by the fire of perfect knowledge.
त्यक्त्वा कर्मफलासङ्गं नित्यतृप्तो निराश्रयः | कर्मण्यभिप्रवृत्तोऽपि नैव किञ्चित्करोति सः ||४-२०||
tyaktvā karmaphalāsaṅgaṃ nityatṛpto nirāśrayaḥ . karmaṇyabhipravṛtto.api naiva kiñcitkaroti saḥ ||4-20||
tyaktva —having given up; karma-phala-asahgam —attachment for fruitive
results; nitya —always; trptah —being satisfied; nirasrayah —without any
center; karmani —in activity; abhipravrttah —being fully engaged; api —in
spite of; na —does not; eva —certainly; kincit —anything; karoti —do; sah —he.
Abandoning all attachment to the results of his activities, ever satisfied
and independant, he performs no fruitive action, although engaged in all
kinds of undertakings.
निराशीर्यतचित्तात्मा त्यक्तसर्वपरिग्रहः | शारीरं केवलं कर्म कुर्वन्नाप्नोति किल्बिषम् ||४-२१||
nirāśīryatacittātmā tyaktasarvaparigrahaḥ . śārīraṃ kevalaṃ karma kurvannāpnoti kilbiṣam ||4-21||
nirasTh —without desire for the results; yata —controlled; citta-atma —mind
and intelligence; tyakta —giving up; sarva —all; parigrahah —sense of
proprietorship over all possessions; sarTram —in keeping body and soul
together; kevalam —only; karma —work; kurvan —doing so; na —never; apnoti
does not acquire; kilbisam —sinful reactions.
Such a man of understanding acts with mind and intelligence perfectly
controlled, gives up all sense of proprietorship over his possessions and
acts only for the bare necessities of life. Thus working, he is not affected
by sinful reactions.
यदृच्छालाभसन्तुष्टो द्वन्द्वातीतो विमत्सरः | समः सिद्धावसिद्धौ च कृत्वापि न निबध्यते ||४-२२||
yadṛcchālābhasantuṣṭo dvandvātīto vimatsaraḥ . samaḥ siddhāvasiddhau ca kṛtvāpi na nibadhyate ||4-22||
yadrccha —out of its own accord; labha —gain; santustah —satisfied;
dvandva —duality; atitah —surpassed; vimatsarah —free from envy; samah —
steady; siddhau —in success; asiddhau —failure; ca —also; krtva —doing; api —
although; na —never; nibadhyate —is affected.
He who is satisfied with gain which comes of its own accord, who is free
from duality and does not envy, who is steady both in success and failure,
is never entangled, although performing actions.
गतसङ्गस्य मुक्तस्य ज्ञानावस्थितचेतसः | यज्ञायाचरतः कर्म समग्रं प्रविलीयते ||४-२३||
gatasaṅgasya muktasya jñānāvasthitacetasaḥ . yajñāyācarataḥ karma samagraṃ pravilīyate ||4-23||
gata-sahgasya —unattached to the modes of material nature; muktasya —of
the liberated; jnana-avasthita —situated in transcendence; cetasah —of such
wisdom; yajhaya —for the sake of Yajna (Krsna); acaratah —so acting; karma
—work; samagram —in total; pravilTyate —merges entirely.
The work of a man who is unattached to the modes of material nature
and who is fully situated in transcendental knowledge merges entirely
into transcendence.
ब्रह्मार्पणं ब्रह्म हविर्ब्रह्माग्नौ ब्रह्मणा हुतम् | ब्रह्मैव तेन गन्तव्यं ब्रह्मकर्मसमाधिना ||४-२४||
brahmārpaṇaṃ brahma havirbrahmāgnau brahmaṇā hutam . brahmaiva tena gantavyaṃ brahmakarmasamādhinā ||4-24||
brahma —spiritual nature; arpanam —contribution; brahma —the Supreme;
havih —butter; brahma —spiritual; agnau —in the fire of consummation;
brahmana —by the spirit soul; hutam —offered; brahma —spiritual kingdom;
eva —certainly; tena —by him; gantavyam —to be reached; brahma —spiritual;
karma —activities; samadhina —by complete absorption.
A person who is fully absorbed in Krsna consciousness is sure to attain
the spiritual kingdom because of his full contribution to spiritual
activities, in which the consummation is absolute and that which is
offered is of the same spiritual nature.
दैवमेवापरे यज्ञं योगिनः पर्युपासते | ब्रह्माग्नावपरे यज्ञं यज्ञेनैवोपजुह्वति ||४-२५||
daivamevāpare yajñaṃ yoginaḥ paryupāsate . brahmāgnāvapare yajñaṃ yajñenaivopajuhvati ||4-25||
daivam —in worshiping the demigods; eva —like this; apare —some; yajnam
—sacrifices; yoginah —the mystics; paryupasate —worship perfectly; brahma
—the Absolute Truth; agnau —in the fire of; apare —others; yajnam —sacrifice;
yajhena —by sacrifice; eva —thus; upajuhvati —worship.
Some yogis perfectly worship the demigods by offering different
sacrifices to them, and some of them offer sacrffices in the fire of the
Supreme Brahman.
श्रोत्रादीनीन्द्रियाण्यन्ये संयमाग्निषु जुह्वति | शब्दादीन्विषयानन्य इन्द्रियाग्निषु जुह्वति ||४-२६||
śrotrādīnīndriyāṇyanye saṃyamāgniṣu juhvati . śabdādīnviṣayānanya indriyāgniṣu juhvati ||4-26||
srotra-admi —hearing process; indriyani —senses; anye —others; samyama —
of restraint; agnisu —in the fire; juhvati —offers; sabda-adm —sound vibration,
etc.; visayan —objects of sense gratification; anye —others: indriya —of sense
organs; agnisu —in the fire; juhvati —sacrifice.
Some of them sacrifice the hearing process and the senses in the fire of
the controlled mind, and others sacrifice the objects of the senses, such as
sound, in the fire of sacrifice.
सर्वाणीन्द्रियकर्माणि प्राणकर्माणि चापरे | आत्मसंयमयोगाग्नौ जुह्वति ज्ञानदीपिते ||४-२७||
sarvāṇīndriyakarmāṇi prāṇakarmāṇi cāpare . ātmasaṃyamayogāgnau juhvati jñānadīpite ||4-27||
sarvani —all; indriya —senses; karmani —functions; prana-karmani
—functions of the life breath; ca —also; apare —others; atma-samyama
—controlling the mind; yoga —linking process; agnau —in the fire of; juhvati
—offers; jhana-dipite —because of the urge for self-realization.
Those who are interested in self-realization, in terms of mind and sense
control, offer the functions of all the senses, as well as the vital force
[breath], as oblations into the fire of the controlled mind.
द्रव्ययज्ञास्तपोयज्ञा योगयज्ञास्तथापरे | स्वाध्यायज्ञानयज्ञाश्च यतयः संशितव्रताः ||४-२८||
dravyayajñāstapoyajñā yogayajñāstathāpare . svādhyāyajñānayajñāśca yatayaḥ saṃśitavratāḥ ||4-28||
dravya-yajhah —sacrificing one`s possessions; tapo-yajhah —sacrifice in
austerities; yoga-yajhah —sacrifice in eightfold mysticism; tatha —thus; apare
—others; svadhyaya —sacrifice in the study of the Vedas; jhana- yajhah
—sacrifice in advancement of transcendental knowledge; ca —also; yatayah
—enlightened; samsita —taken to strict; vratah-vows.
There are others who, enlightened by sacrificing their material
possessions in severe austerities, take strict vows and practice the yoga of
eightfold mysticism, and others study the Vedas for the advancement of
transcendental knowledge.
अपाने जुह्वति प्राणं प्राणेऽपानं तथापरे | प्राणापानगती रुद्ध्वा प्राणायामपरायणाः ||४-२९||
apāne juhvati prāṇaṃ prāṇe.apānaṃ tathāpare . prāṇāpānagatī ruddhvā prāṇāyāmaparāyaṇāḥ ||4-29||
apane —air which acts downward; juhvati —offers; pranam —air which acts
outward; prane —in the air going outward; apanam —air going downward;
tatha —as also; apare —others; prana —air going outward; apana —air going
downward; gatT —movement; ruddhva —checking; pranayama —trance
induced by stopping all breathing; parayanah —so inclined; apare —others;
niyata —controlled; aharah —eating; pranan —outgoing air; pranesu —in the
outgoing air; juhvati —sacrifices.
And there are even others who are inclined to the process of breath
restraint to remain in trance, and they practice stopping the movement of
the outgoing breath into the incoming, and incoming breath into the
outgoing, and thus at last remain in trance, stopping all breathing. Some
of them, curtailing the eating process, offer the outgoing breath into itself,
as a sacrifice.
अपरे नियताहाराः प्राणान्प्राणेषु जुह्वति | सर्वेऽप्येते यज्ञविदो यज्ञक्षपितकल्मषाः ||४-३०||
apare niyatāhārāḥ prāṇānprāṇeṣu juhvati . sarve.apyete yajñavido yajñakṣapitakalmaṣāḥ ||4-30||
sarve —all; api —although apparently different; ete —all these; yajha-vidah
—conversant with the purpose of performing; yajha —sacrifices; ksapita —
being cleansed of the result of such performances; kalmasah —sinful reactions;
yajha-sista —as a result of such performances of yajha; amrta-bhujah —those
who have tasted such nectar; yanti —do approach; brahma —the supreme;
sanatanam —eternal atmosphere.
All these performers who know the meaning of sacrifice become
cleansed of sinful reaction, and, having tasted the nectar of the remnants
of such sacrifice, they go to the supreme eternal atmosphere.
यज्ञशिष्टामृतभुजो यान्ति ब्रह्म सनातनम् | नायं लोकोऽस्त्ययज्ञस्य कुतोऽन्यः कुरुसत्तम ||४-३१||
yajñaśiṣṭāmṛtabhujo yānti brahma sanātanam . nāyaṃ loko.astyayajñasya kuto.anyaḥ kurusattama ||4-31||
na —never; ayam —this; lokah —planet; asd —there is; ayajnasya —of the
foolish; kutah —where is; anyah —the other; kuru-sattama —O best amongst
the Kurus.
O best of the Kuril dynasty, without sacrifice one can never live happily
on this planet or in this life: what then of the next?
एवं बहुविधा यज्ञा वितता ब्रह्मणो मुखे | कर्मजान्विद्धि तान्सर्वानेवं ज्ञात्वा विमोक्ष्यसे ||४-३२||
evaṃ bahuvidhā yajñā vitatā brahmaṇo mukhe . karmajānviddhi tānsarvānevaṃ jñātvā vimokṣyase ||4-32||
evam —thus; bahu-vidhah —various kinds of; yajhah —sacrifices; vitatah —
widespread; brahmanah —of the Vedas; mukhe —in the face of; karma-jan —
born of work; viddhi —you should know; tan —them; sarvan —all; evam —thus;
jhatva —knowing; vimoksyase —be liberated.
All these different types of sacrifice are approved by the Vedas, and all
of them are born of different types of work. Knowing them as such, you
will become liberated.
श्रेयान्द्रव्यमयाद्यज्ञाज्ज्ञानयज्ञः परन्तप | सर्वं कर्माखिलं पार्थ ज्ञाने परिसमाप्यते ||४-३३||
śreyāndravyamayādyajñājjñānayajñaḥ parantapa . sarvaṃ karmākhilaṃ pārtha jñāne parisamāpyate ||4-33||
sreyan —greater; dravyamayat —than the sacrifice of material possessions;
yajnat —knowledge; jnana-yajnah —sacrifice in knowledge; parantapa —O
chastiser of the enemy; sarvam —all; karma —activities; akhilam —in totality;
partha —O son of Prtha; jnane —in knowledge; parisamapyate —ends in.
O chastiser of the enemy, the sacrifice of knowledge is greater than the
sacrifice of material possessions. O son of Prtha, after all, the sacrifice of
work culminates in transcendental knowledge.
तद्विद्धि प्रणिपातेन परिप्रश्नेन सेवया | उपदेक्ष्यन्ति ते ज्ञानं ज्ञानिनस्तत्त्वदर्शिनः ||४-३४||
tadviddhi praṇipātena paripraśnena sevayā . upadekṣyanti te jñānaṃ jñāninastattvadarśinaḥ ||4-34||
tat —that knowledge of different sacrifices; viddhi —try to understand;
pranipatena —by approaching a spiritual master; pariprasnena —by
submissive inquiries; sevaya —by the rendering of service; upadeksyand
—initiate; te —unto you; jhanam —knowledge; jhaninah —the self-realized;
tattva —truth; darsinah —the seers.
Just try to learn the truth by approaching a spiritual master. Inquire
from him submissively and render service unto him. The self-realized soul
can impart knowledge unto you because he has seen the truth.
यज्ज्ञात्वा न पुनर्मोहमेवं यास्यसि पाण्डव | येन भूतान्यशेषेण द्रक्ष्यस्यात्मन्यथो मयि (var अशेषाणि) ||४-३५||
yajjñātvā na punarmohamevaṃ yāsyasi pāṇḍava . yena bhūtānyaśeṣāṇi drakṣyasyātmanyatho mayi ||4-35||
yat —which; jnatva —knowing; na —never; punah —again; moham —illusion;
evam —like this; yasyasi —you shall go; pandava —O son of Pandu; yena —by
which; bhutani —all living entities; asesani —totally; draksyasi —you will see;
atmani —in the Supreme Soul; atho —or in other words; mayi —in Me.
And when you have thus learned the truth, you will know that all living
beings are but part of Me-and that they are in Me, and are Mine.
अपि चेदसि पापेभ्यः सर्वेभ्यः पापकृत्तमः | सर्वं ज्ञानप्लवेनैव वृजिनं सन्तरिष्यसि ||४-३६||
api cedasi pāpebhyaḥ sarvebhyaḥ pāpakṛttamaḥ . sarvaṃ jñānaplavenaiva vṛjinaṃ santariṣyasi ||4-36||
api —even; cet —if; asi —you are; papebhyah —of sinners; sarvebhyah —of
all; papa-krttamah —the greatest sinner; sarvam —all such sinful actions;
jhana-plavena —by the boat of transcendental knowledge; eva —certainly;
vrjinam —the ocean of miseries; santarisyasi —you will cross completely.
Even if you are considered to be the most sinful of all sinners, when you
are situated in the boat of transcendental knowledge, you will be able to
cross over the ocean of miseries.
यथैधांसि समिद्धोऽग्निर्भस्मसात्कुरुतेऽर्जुन | ज्ञानाग्निः सर्वकर्माणि भस्मसात्कुरुते तथा ||४-३७||
yathaidhāṃsi samiddho.agnirbhasmasātkurute.arjuna . jñānāgniḥ sarvakarmāṇi bhasmasātkurute tathā ||4-37||
yatha —just as; edhamsi —firewood; samiddhah —blazing; agnih —fire;
bhasmasat —turns into ashes; kurute —so does; arjuna —O Arjuna; jhana-
agnih —the fire of knowledge; sarva-karmani —all reactions to material
activities; bhasmasat —to ashes; kurute —it so does; tatha —similarly.
As the blazing fire turns firewood to ashes, O Arjuna, so does the fire of
knowledge burn to ashes all reactions to material activities.
न हि ज्ञानेन सदृशं पवित्रमिह विद्यते | तत्स्वयं योगसंसिद्धः कालेनात्मनि विन्दति ||४-३८||
na hi jñānena sadṛśaṃ pavitramiha vidyate . tatsvayaṃ yogasaṃsiddhaḥ kālenātmani vindati ||4-38||
na —never; hi —certainly; jhanena —with knowledge; sadrsam —in
comparison; pavitram —sanctified; iha —in this world; vidyate —exists; tat
—that; svayam —itself; yoga —devotion; samsiddhah —matured; kalena —in
course of time; atmani —in himself; vindati —enjoys.
In this world, there is nothing so sublime and pure as transcendental
knowledge. Such knowledge is the mature fruit of all mysticism. And one
who has achieved this enjoys the self within himself in due course of time.
श्रद्धावाँल्लभते ज्ञानं तत्परः संयतेन्द्रियः | ज्ञानं लब्ध्वा परां शान्तिमचिरेणाधिगच्छति ||४-३९||
śraddhāvā.Nllabhate jñānaṃ tatparaḥ saṃyatendriyaḥ . jñānaṃ labdhvā parāṃ śāntimacireṇādhigacchati ||4-39||
sraddhavan —a faithful man; labhate —achieves; jhanam —knowledge; tat-
parah —very much attached to it; samyata —controlled; indriyah —senses;
jhanam —knowledge; labdhva —having achieved; param —transcendental;
santim —peace; acirena —very soon; adhigacchati —attains.
A faithful man who is absorbed in transcendental knowledge and who
subdues his senses quickly attains the supreme spiritual peace.
अज्ञश्चाश्रद्दधानश्च संशयात्मा विनश्यति | नायं लोकोऽस्ति न परो न सुखं संशयात्मनः ||४-४०||
ajñaścāśraddadhānaśca saṃśayātmā vinaśyati . nāyaṃ loko.asti na paro na sukhaṃ saṃśayātmanaḥ ||4-40||
ajnah —fools who have no knowledge in standard scriptures; ca —and;
asraddadhanah —without faith in revealed scriptures; ca —also; samsaya —
doubts; atma —person; vinasyati —falls back; na —never; ayam —this; lokah —
world; asti —there is; na —neither; parah —next life; na —not; sukham —
happiness; samsaya —doubtful; atmanah —of the person.
But ignorant and faithless persons who doubt the revealed scriptures
do not attain God consciousness. For the doubting soul there is happiness
neither in this world nor in the next.
योगसंन्यस्तकर्माणं ज्ञानसञ्छिन्नसंशयम् | आत्मवन्तं न कर्माणि निबध्नन्ति धनञ्जय ||४-४१||
yogasaṃnyastakarmāṇaṃ jñānasañchinnasaṃśayam . ātmavantaṃ na karmāṇi nibadhnanti dhanañjaya ||4-41||
yoga —devotional service in karma-yoga; sannyasta —renounced;
karmanam —of the performers; jhana —knowledge; sahchinna —cut by the
advancement of knowledge; samsayam —doubts; atma-vantam —situated in
the self; na —never; karmani —work; nibadhnanti —do bind up; dhananjaya —
O conquerer of riches.
Therefore, one who has renounced the fruits of his action, whose doubts
are destroyed by transcendental knowledge, and who is situated firmly in
the self, is not bound by works, O conqueror of riches.
तस्मादज्ञानसम्भूतं हृत्स्थं ज्ञानासिनात्मनः | छित्त्वैनं संशयं योगमातिष्ठोत्तिष्ठ भारत ||४-४२||
tasmādajñānasambhūtaṃ hṛtsthaṃ jñānāsinātmanaḥ . chittvainaṃ saṃśayaṃ yogamātiṣṭhottiṣṭha bhārata ||4-42||
tasmat —therefore; ajhana-sambhiitam —outcome of ignorance; hrt-stham
—situated in the heart; jhana —knowledge; asina —by the weapon of; atmanah
—of the self; chittva —cutting off; enam —this; samsayam —doubt; yogam —in
yoga; atistha —be situated; uttistha —stand up to fight; bharata — O
descendant of Bharata.
Therefore the doubts which have arisen in your heart out of ignorance
should be slashed by the weapon of knowledge. Armed with yoga, O
Bharata, stand and fight.
Глава 5
अर्जुन उवाच | संन्यासं कर्मणां कृष्ण पुनर्योगं च शंससि | यच्छ्रेय एतयोरेकं तन्मे ब्रूहि सुनिश्चितम् ||५-१||
arjuna uvāca . saṃnyāsaṃ karmaṇāṃ kṛṣṇa punaryogaṃ ca śaṃsasi . yacchreya etayorekaṃ tanme brūhi suniścitam ||5-1||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; sannyasam —renunciation; karmanam —of all
activities; krsna —O Krsna; punah —again; yogam —devotional service; ca
—also; samsasi —You are praising; yat —which; sreyah —is beneficial; etayoh
—of these two; ekam —one; tat —that; me —unto me; bruhi —please tell;
suniscitam —definitely.
Arjuna said: O Krsna, first of all You ask me to renounce work, and
then again You recommend work with devotion. Now will You kindly tell
me definitely which of the two is more beneficial?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | संन्यासः कर्मयोगश्च निःश्रेयसकरावुभौ | तयोस्तु कर्मसंन्यासात्कर्मयोगो विशिष्यते ||५-२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . saṃnyāsaḥ karmayogaśca niḥśreyasakarāvubhau . tayostu karmasaṃnyāsātkarmayogo viśiṣyate ||5-2||
sri bhagavan uvaca —the Personality of Godhead said; sannyasah —
renunciation of work; karma-yogah —work in devotion; ca —also; nihsreyasa-
karau —all leading to the path of liberation; ubhau —both; tayoh —of the two;
tu —but; karma-sannyasat —in comparison to the renunciation of fruitive
work; karma-yogah —work in devotion; visisyate —is better.
The Blessed Lord said: The renunciation of work and work in devotion
are both good for liberation. But, of the two, work in devotional service is
better than renunciation of works.
ज्ञेयः स नित्यसंन्यासी यो न द्वेष्टि न काङ्क्षति | निर्द्वन्द्वो हि महाबाहो सुखं बन्धात्प्रमुच्यते ||५-३||
jñeyaḥ sa nityasaṃnyāsī yo na dveṣṭi na kāṅkṣati . nirdvandvo hi mahābāho sukhaṃ bandhātpramucyate ||5-3||
jneyah —should be known; sah —he; nitya —always; sannyasT —renouncer;
yah —who; na —never; dvesti —abhors; na —nor; kanksati —desires;
nirdvandvah —free from all dualities; hi —certainly; maha-baho —O mighty-
armed one; sukham —happily; bandhat —from bondage; pramucyate
—completely liberated.
One who neither hates nor desires the fruits of his activities is known to
be always renounced. Such a person, liberated from all dualities, easily
overcomes material bondage and is completely liberated, O mighty-
armed Arjuna.
साङ्ख्ययोगौ पृथग्बालाः प्रवदन्ति न पण्डिताः | एकमप्यास्थितः सम्यगुभयोर्विन्दते फलम् ||५-४||
sāṅkhyayogau pṛthagbālāḥ pravadanti na paṇḍitāḥ . ekamapyāsthitaḥ samyagubhayorvindate phalam ||5-4||
sankhya —analytical study of the material world; yogau —work in
devotional service; prthak —different; balah —less intelligent; pravadanti —do
talk; na —never; panditah —the learned; ekam —in one; api —even though;
asthitah —being situated; samyak —complete; ubhayoh —of both; vindate —
enjoys; phalam —result.
Only the ignorant speak of karma-yoga and devotional service as being
different from the analytical study of the material world [sankhya]. Those
who are actually learned say that he who applies himself well to one of
these paths achieves the results of both.
यत्साङ्ख्यैः प्राप्यते स्थानं तद्योगैरपि गम्यते | एकं साङ्ख्यं च योगं च यः पश्यति स पश्यति ||५-५||
yatsāṅkhyaiḥ prāpyate sthānaṃ tadyogairapi gamyate . ekaṃ sāṅkhyaṃ ca yogaṃ ca yaḥ paśyati sa paśyati ||5-5||
yat —what; sahkhyaih —by means of sahkhya philosophy; prapyate —is
achieved; sthanam —place; tat —that; yogaih —by devotional service; api —
also; gamyate —one can attain; ekam —one; sahkhyam —analytical study; ca
—and; yogam —action in devotion; ca —and; yah —one who; pasyati —sees;
sah —he; pasyati —actually sees.
One who knows that the position reached by means of renunciation can
also be attained by works in devotional service and who therefore sees
that the path of works and the path of renunciation are one, sees things as
they are.
संन्यासस्तु महाबाहो दुःखमाप्तुमयोगतः | योगयुक्तो मुनिर्ब्रह्म नचिरेणाधिगच्छति ||५-६||
saṃnyāsastu mahābāho duḥkhamāptumayogataḥ . yogayukto munirbrahma nacireṇādhigacchati ||5-6||
sannyasah —the renounced order of life; tu —but; maha-baho —O mighty-
armed one; duhkham —distress; aptum —to be afflicted with; ayogatah —
without devotional service; yoga-yuktah —one engaged in devotional service;
munih —thinker; brahma —Supreme; na —without; cirena —delay;
adhigacchati —attains.
Unless one is engaged in the devotional service of the Lord, mere
renunciation of activities cannot make one happy. The sages, purified by
works of devotion, achieve the Supreme without delay.
योगयुक्तो विशुद्धात्मा विजितात्मा जितेन्द्रियः | सर्वभूतात्मभूतात्मा कुर्वन्नपि न लिप्यते ||५-७||
yogayukto viśuddhātmā vijitātmā jitendriyaḥ . sarvabhūtātmabhūtātmā kurvannapi na lipyate ||5-7||
yoga-yuktah —engaged in devotional service; visuddha-atma —a purified
soul; vijita-atma —self-controlled; jita-indriyah —having conquered the senses;
sarvabhuta-atmabhuta-atma —compassionate to all living entities; kurvan api
—although engaged in work; na —never; lipyate —is entangled.
One who works in devotion, who is a pure soul, and who controls his
mind and senses, is dear to everyone, and everyone is dear to him.
Though always working, such a man is never entangled.
नैव किञ्चित्करोमीति युक्तो मन्येत तत्त्ववित् | पश्यञ्शृण्वन्स्पृशञ्जिघ्रन्नश्नन्गच्छन्स्वपञ्श्वसन् ||५-८||
naiva kiñcitkaromīti yukto manyeta tattvavit . paśyañśruṇvanspṛśañjighrannaśnangacchansvapañśvasan ||5-8||
na —never; eva —certainly; kincit —anything; karomi —do I do; iti —thus;
yuktah —engaged in the divine consciousness; manyeta —thinks; tattvavit —
one who knows the truth; pasyan —by seeing; smvan —by hearing; sprsan —by
touching; jighran —by smelling; asnan —by eating; gacchan —by going;
svapan —by dreaming; svasan —by breathing; pralapan —by talking; visrjan —
by giving up; grhnan —by accepting; unmisan —opening; nimisan —closing;
api —in spite of; indriyani —the senses; indriya-arthesu —in sense gratification;
vartante —let them be so engaged; iti —thus; dharayan —considering.
A person in the divine consciousness, although engaged in seeing,
hearing, touching, smelling, eating, moving about, sleeping, and
breathing, always knows within himself that he actually does nothing at
all. Because while speaking, evacuating, receiving, opening or closing his
eyes, he always knows that only the material senses are engaged with
their objects and that he is aloof from them.
प्रलपन्विसृजन्गृह्णन्नुन्मिषन्निमिषन्नपि | इन्द्रियाणीन्द्रियार्थेषु वर्तन्त इति धारयन् ||५-९||
pralapanvisṛjangṛhṇannunmiṣannimiṣannapi . indriyāṇīndriyārtheṣu vartanta iti dhārayan ||5-9||
ब्रह्मण्याधाय कर्माणि सङ्गं त्यक्त्वा करोति यः | लिप्यते न स पापेन पद्मपत्रमिवाम्भसा ||५-१०||
brahmaṇyādhāya karmāṇi saṅgaṃ tyaktvā karoti yaḥ . lipyate na sa pāpena padmapatramivāmbhasā ||5-10||
brahmani —the Supreme Personality of Godhead; adhaya —resigning unto;
karmani —all works; sahgam —attachment; tyaktva —giving up; karoti
—performs; yah —who; lipyate —is affected; na —never; sah —he; papena —by
sin; padma-patram —lotus leaf; iva —like; ambhasa —in the water.
One who performs his duty without attachment, surrendering the
results unto the Supreme God, is not affected by sinful action, as the lotus
leaf is untouched by water.
कायेन मनसा बुद्ध्या केवलैरिन्द्रियैरपि | योगिनः कर्म कुर्वन्ति सङ्गं त्यक्त्वात्मशुद्धये ||५-११||
kāyena manasā buddhyā kevalairindriyairapi . yoginaḥ karma kurvanti saṅgaṃ tyaktvātmaśuddhaye ||5-11||
kayena —with the body; manasa —with the mind; buddhya —with the
intelligence; kevalaih —purified; indriyaih —with the senses; api —even with;
yoginah —the Krsna conscious persons; karma —actions; kurvanti —they act;
sahgam —attachment; tyaktva —giving up; atma —self; suddhaye —for the
purpose of purification.
The yogis, abandoning attachment, act with body, mind, intelligence,
and even with the senses, only for the purpose of purification.
युक्तः कर्मफलं त्यक्त्वा शान्तिमाप्नोति नैष्ठिकीम् | अयुक्तः कामकारेण फले सक्तो निबध्यते ||५-१२||
yuktaḥ karmaphalaṃ tyaktvā śāntimāpnoti naiṣṭhikīm . ayuktaḥ kāmakāreṇa phale sakto nibadhyate ||5-12||
yuktah —one who is engaged in devotional service; karma-phalam —the
results of all activities; tyaktva —giving up; santim —perfect peace; apnoti —
achieves; naisthikfm —unflinching; ayuktah —one who is not in Krsna
consciousness; kama-karena —for enjoying the result of work; phale —in the
result; saktah —attached; nibadhyate —becomes entangled.
The steadily devoted soul attains unadulterated peace because he offers
the result of all activities to Me; whereas a person who is not in union
with the Divine, who is greedy for the fruits of his labor, becomes
entangled.
सर्वकर्माणि मनसा संन्यस्यास्ते सुखं वशी | नवद्वारे पुरे देही नैव कुर्वन्न कारयन् ||५-१३||
sarvakarmāṇi manasā saṃnyasyāste sukhaṃ vaśī . navadvāre pure dehī naiva kurvanna kārayan ||5-13||
sarva —all; karmani —activities; manasa —by the mind; sannyasya —giving
up; aste —remains; sukham —in happiness; vasT—one who is controlled; nava-
dvare —in the place where there are nine gates; pure —in the city; dehT —the
embodied soul; na —never; eva —certainly; kurvan —doing anything; na —not;
karayan —causing to be done.
When the embodied living being controls his nature and mentally
renounces all actions, he resides happily in the city of nine gates [the
material body], neither working nor causing work to be done.
न कर्तृत्वं न कर्माणि लोकस्य सृजति प्रभुः | न कर्मफलसंयोगं स्वभावस्तु प्रवर्तते ||५-१४||
na kartṛtvaṃ na karmāṇi lokasya sṛjati prabhuḥ . na karmaphalasaṃyogaṃ svabhāvastu pravartate ||5-14||
na —never; kartrtvam —proprietorship; na —nor; karmani —activities;
lokasya —of the people; srjati —creates; prabhuh —the master of the city of the
body; na —nor; karma-phala —results of activities; sarhyogam —connection;
svabhavah —modes of material nature; tu —but; pravartate —acts.
The embodied spirit, master of the city of his body, does not create
activities, nor does he induce people to act, nor does he create the fruits of
action. All this is enacted by the modes of material nature.
नादत्ते कस्यचित्पापं न चैव सुकृतं विभुः | अज्ञानेनावृतं ज्ञानं तेन मुह्यन्ति जन्तवः ||५-१५||
nādatte kasyacitpāpaṃ na caiva sukṛtaṃ vibhuḥ . ajñānenāvṛtaṃ jñānaṃ tena muhyanti jantavaḥ ||5-15||
na —never; adatte —accepts; kasyacit —anyone`s; papam —sin; na —nor; ca
— also; eva —certainly; sukrtam —pious activities; vibhuh —the Supreme Lord;
ajhanena —by ignorance; avrtam —covered; jnanam —knowledge; tena —by
that; muhyanti —bewildered; jantavah —the living entities.
Nor does the Supreme Spirit assume anyone`s sinful or pious activities.
Embodied beings, however, are bewildered because of the ignorance
which covers their real knowledge.
ज्ञानेन तु तदज्ञानं येषां नाशितमात्मनः | तेषामादित्यवज्ज्ञानं प्रकाशयति तत्परम् ||५-१६||
jñānena tu tadajñānaṃ yeṣāṃ nāśitamātmanaḥ . teṣāmādityavajjñānaṃ prakāśayati tatparam ||5-16||
jhanena —by knowledge; tu —but; tat —that; ajhanam —nescience; yesam
—of those; nasitam —is destroyed; atmanah —of the living entity; tesam —of
their; adityavat —like the rising sun; jhanam —knowledge; prakasayad
—discloses; tat param —in Krsna consciousness.
When, however, one is enlightened with the knowledge by which
nescience is destroyed, then his knowledge reveals everything, as the sun
lights up everything in the daytime.
तद्बुद्धयस्तदात्मानस्तन्निष्ठास्तत्परायणाः | गच्छन्त्यपुनरावृत्तिं ज्ञाननिर्धूतकल्मषाः ||५-१७||
tadbuddhayastadātmānastanniṣṭhāstatparāyaṇāḥ . gacchantyapunarāvṛttiṃ jñānanirdhūtakalmaṣāḥ ||5-17||
tad-buddhayah —one whose intelligence is always in the Supreme; tad-
atmanah —one whose mind is always in the Supreme; tat-nisthah —whose
mind is only meant for the Supreme; tat-parayanah —who has completely
taken shelter of Him; gacchanti —goes; apunah-avrtdm —liberation; jhana —
knowledge; nirdhiita —cleanses; kalmasah —misgivings.
When one`s intelligence, mind, faith and refuge are all fixed in the
Supreme, then one becomes fully cleansed of misgivings through complete
knowledge and thus proceeds straight on the path of liberation.
विद्याविनयसम्पन्ने ब्राह्मणे गवि हस्तिनि | शुनि चैव श्वपाके च पण्डिताः समदर्शिनः ||५-१८||
vidyāvinayasampanne brāhmaṇe gavi hastini . śuni caiva śvapāke ca paṇḍitāḥ samadarśinaḥ ||5-18||
vidya —education; vinaya —gentleness; sampanne —fully equipped;
brahmane —in the brahmana; gavi —in the cow; hastini —in the elephant; suni
—in the dog; ca —and; eva —certainly; svapake —in the dog-eater (the
outcaste); ca —respectively; panditah-those who are so wise; sama-darsinah
—do see with equal vision.
The humble sage, by virtue of true knowledge, sees with equal vision a
learned and gentle brahmana, a cow, an elephant, a dog and a dog-eater
[outcaste] .
इहैव तैर्जितः सर्गो येषां साम्ये स्थितं मनः | निर्दोषं हि समं ब्रह्म तस्माद् ब्रह्मणि ते स्थिताः ||५-१९||
ihaiva tairjitaḥ sargo yeṣāṃ sāmye sthitaṃ manaḥ . nirdoṣaṃ hi samaṃ brahma tasmād brahmaṇi te sthitāḥ ||5-19||
iha —in this life; eva —certainly; taih —by them; jitah —conquered; sargah —
birth and death; yesam —of those; samye —in equanimity; sthitam —so situated;
manah —mind; nirdosam —flawless; hi —certainly; samam —in equanimity;
brahma —the Supreme; tasmat —therefore; brahmani —in the Supreme; te
—they; sthitah —are situated.
Those whose minds are established in sameness and equanimity have
already conquered the conditions of birth and death. They are flawless
like Brahman, and thus they are already situated in Brahman.
न प्रहृष्येत्प्रियं प्राप्य नोद्विजेत्प्राप्य चाप्रियम् | स्थिरबुद्धिरसम्मूढो ब्रह्मविद् ब्रह्मणि स्थितः ||५-२०||
na prahṛṣyetpriyaṃ prāpya nodvijetprāpya cāpriyam . sthirabuddhirasammūḍho brahmavid brahmaṇi sthitaḥ ||5-20||
na —never; prahrsyet —rejoice; priyam —pleasant; prapya —achieving; na —
does not; udvijet —agitated; prapya —obtaining; ca —also; apriyam
—unpleasant; sthira-buddhih —self-intelligent; asammudhah —unbewildered;
brahmavit — one who knows the Supreme perfectly; brahmani —in the
Transcendence; sthitah —situated.
A person who neither rejoices upon achieving something pleasant nor
laments upon obtaining something unpleasant, who is self-intelligent,
unbewildered, and who knows the science of God, is to be understood as
already situated in Transcendence.
बाह्यस्पर्शेष्वसक्तात्मा विन्दत्यात्मनि यत्सुखम् | स ब्रह्मयोगयुक्तात्मा सुखमक्षयमश्नुते ||५-२१||
bāhyasparśeṣvasaktātmā vindatyātmani yatsukham . sa brahmayogayuktātmā sukhamakṣayamaśnute ||5-21||
bahya-sparsesu —in external sense pleasure; asakta-atma —one who is not
so attached; vindati —enjoys; atmani —in the self; yat —that which; sukham
—happiness; sah —that; brahma-yoga —concentrated in Brahman; yukta- atma
—self-connected; sukham —happiness; aksayam —unlimited; asnute — enjoys.
Such a liberated person is not attracted to material sense pleasure or
external objects but is always in trance, enjoying the pleasure within. In
this way the self-realized person enjoys unlimited happiness, for he
concentrates on the Supreme.
ये हि संस्पर्शजा भोगा दुःखयोनय एव ते | आद्यन्तवन्तः कौन्तेय न तेषु रमते बुधः ||५-२२||
ye hi saṃsparśajā bhogā duḥkhayonaya eva te . ādyantavantaḥ kaunteya na teṣu ramate budhaḥ ||5-22||
ye —those; hi —certainly; samsparsajah —by contact with the material
senses; bhogah —enjoyment; duhkha —distress; yonayah —sources of; eva —
certainly; te —they are; adi —in the beginning; antavantah —subject to;
kaunteya —O son of Kunti; na —never; tesu —in those; ramate —take delight;
budhah —the intelligent.
An intelligent person does not take part in the sources of misery, which
are due to contact with the material senses. O son of Kunti, such
pleasures have a beginning and an end, and so the wise man does not
delight in them.
शक्नोतीहैव यः सोढुं प्राक्शरीरविमोक्षणात् | कामक्रोधोद्भवं वेगं स युक्तः स सुखी नरः ||५-२३||
śaknotīhaiva yaḥ soḍhuṃ prākśarīravimokṣaṇāt . kāmakrodhodbhavaṃ vegaṃ sa yuktaḥ sa sukhī naraḥ ||5-23||
saknoti —able to do; iha eva —in the present body; yah —one who; sodhum
—to tolerate; prak —before; sarTra —body; vimoksanat —giving up; kama
—desire; krodha —anger; udbhavam —generated from; vegam —urge; sah —he;
yuktah —in trance; sah —he; sukhT —happy; narah —human being.
Before giving up this present body, if one is able to tolerate the urges of
the material senses and check the force of desire and anger, he is a yogi
and is happy in this world.
योऽन्तःसुखोऽन्तरारामस्तथान्तर्ज्योतिरेव यः | स योगी ब्रह्मनिर्वाणं ब्रह्मभूतोऽधिगच्छति ||५-२४||
yo.antaḥsukho.antarārāmastathāntarjyotireva yaḥ . sa yogī brahmanirvāṇaṃ brahmabhūto.adhigacchati ||5-24||
yah —one who; antah-sukhah —happy from within; antah-aramah —active
within; tatha —as well as; antah-jyotih —aiming within; eva —certainly; yah
—anyone; sah —he; yogi —mystic; brahma-nirvanam —liberated in the
Supreme; brahma-bhutah —self-realized; adhigacchati —attains.
One whose happiness is within, who is active within, who rejoices
within and is illumined within, is actually the perfect mystic. He is
liberated in the Supreme, and ultimately he attains the Supreme.
लभन्ते ब्रह्मनिर्वाणमृषयः क्षीणकल्मषाः | छिन्नद्वैधा यतात्मानः सर्वभूतहिते रताः ||५-२५||
labhante brahmanirvāṇamṛṣayaḥ kṣīṇakalmaṣāḥ . chinnadvaidhā yatātmānaḥ sarvabhūtahite ratāḥ ||5-25||
labhante —achieve; brahma-nirvanam —liberation in the Supreme; rsayah
—those who are active within; ksma-kalmasah —who are devoid of all sins;
chinna —torn off; dvaidhah —duality; yata-atmanah —engaged in self-
realization; sarva-bhiita —in all living entities; hite —in welfare work; ratah —
engaged.
One who is beyond duality and doubt, whose mind is engaged within,
who is always busy working for the welfare of all sentient beings, and who
is free from all sins, achieves liberation in the Supreme.
कामक्रोधवियुक्तानां यतीनां यतचेतसाम् | अभितो ब्रह्मनिर्वाणं वर्तते विदितात्मनाम् ||५-२६||
kāmakrodhaviyuktānāṃ yatīnāṃ yatacetasām . abhito brahmanirvāṇaṃ vartate viditātmanām ||5-26||
kama —desires; krodha —anger; vimuktanam —of those who are so liberated;
yatmam —of the saintly persons; yata-cetasam —of persons who have full
control over the mind; abhitah —assured in the near future; brahma- nirvanam
—liberation in the Supreme; vartate —is there; vidita-atmanam —of those who
are self-realized.
Those who are free from anger and all material desires, who are
selfrealized, self-disciplined and constantly endeavoring for perfection,
are assured of liberation in the Supreme in the very near future.
स्पर्शान्कृत्वा बहिर्बाह्यांश्चक्षुश्चैवान्तरे भ्रुवोः | प्राणापानौ समौ कृत्वा नासाभ्यन्तरचारिणौ ||५-२७||
sparśānkṛtvā bahirbāhyāṃścakṣuścaivāntare bhruvoḥ . prāṇāpānau samau kṛtvā nāsābhyantaracāriṇau ||5-27||
sparsan —external sense objects, such as sound, etc.; krtva —doing so; bahih
—external; bahyan —unnecessary; caksuh —eyes; ca —also; eva —certainly;
antare —within; bhruvoh —of the eyebrows; prana-apanau —up-and down-
moving air; samau —in suspension; krtva —doing so; nasa-abhyantara
—within the nostrils; carinau —blowing; yata —controlled; indriya —senses;
manah —mind; buddhih —intelligence; munih —the transcendentalist; moksa —
liberation; parayanah —being so destined; vigata —discarded; iccha —wishes;
bhaya —fear; krodhah —anger; yah —one who; sada —always; muktah
—liberated; eva —certainly; sah —he is.
Shutting out all external sense objects, keeping the eyes and vision
concentrated between the two eyebrows, suspending the inward and
outward breaths within the nostrils-thus controlling the mind, senses and
intelligence, the tranecendentalist becomes free from desire, fear and
anger. One who is always in this state is certainly liberated.
यतेन्द्रियमनोबुद्धिर्मुनिर्मोक्षपरायणः | विगतेच्छाभयक्रोधो यः सदा मुक्त एव सः ||५-२८||
yatendriyamanobuddhirmunirmokṣaparāyaṇaḥ . vigatecchābhayakrodho yaḥ sadā mukta eva saḥ ||5-28||
भोक्तारं यज्ञतपसां सर्वलोकमहेश्वरम् | सुहृदं सर्वभूतानां ज्ञात्वा मां शान्तिमृच्छति ||५-२९||
bhoktāraṃ yajñatapasāṃ sarvalokamaheśvaram . suhṛdaṃ sarvabhūtānāṃ jñātvā māṃ śāntimṛcchati ||5-29||
bhoktaram —beneficiary; yajha —sacrifices; tapasam —of penances and
austerities; sarva-loka —all planets and the demigods thereof; mahesvaram —
the Supreme Lord; suhrdam —benefactor; sarva —all; bhutanam —of the living
entities; jnatva —thus knowing; mam —Me (Lord Krsna); santim — relief from
material pangs; rcchati —achieves.
The sages, knowing Me as the ultimate purpose of all sacrifices and
austerities, the Supreme Lord of all planets and demigods and the
benefactor and well-wisher of all living entities, attain peace from the
pangs of material miseries.
Глава 6
श्रीभगवानुवाच | अनाश्रितः कर्मफलं कार्यं कर्म करोति यः | स संन्यासी च योगी च न निरग्निर्न चाक्रियः ||६-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . anāśritaḥ karmaphalaṃ kāryaṃ karma karoti yaḥ . sa saṃnyāsī ca yogī ca na niragnirna cākriyaḥ ||6-1||
sri bhagavan uvaca —the Lord said; anasritah —without shelter; karma-
phalam —the result of work; karyam —obligatory; karma —work; karoti —
performs; yah —one who; sah —he; sannyasT —in the renounced order; ca —
also; yogi —mystic; ca —also; na —not; nir —without; agnih —fire; na —nor; ca
—also; akriyah —without duty.
The Blessed Lord said: One who is unattached to the fruits of his work
and who works as he is obligated is in the renounced order of life, and he
is the true mystic: not he who lights no fire and performs no work.
यं संन्यासमिति प्राहुर्योगं तं विद्धि पाण्डव | न ह्यसंन्यस्तसङ्कल्पो योगी भवति कश्चन ||६-२||
yaṃ saṃnyāsamiti prāhuryogaṃ taṃ viddhi pāṇḍava . na hyasaṃnyastasaṅkalpo yogī bhavati kaścana ||6-2||
yam —what; sannyasam —renunciation; id —thus; prahuh —they say; yogam
—linking with the Supreme; tarn —that; viddhi —you must know; pandava —O
son of Pandu; na —never; hi —certainly; asannyasta —without giving up;
sahkalpah —self-satisfaction; yogi —a mystic transcendentalist; bhavad
—becomes; kascana —anyone.
What is called renunciation is the same as yoga, or linking oneself with
the Supreme, for no one can become a yogi unless he renounces the desire
for sense gratification.
आरुरुक्षोर्मुनेर्योगं कर्म कारणमुच्यते | योगारूढस्य तस्यैव शमः कारणमुच्यते ||६-३||
ārurukṣormuneryogaṃ karma kāraṇamucyate . yogārūḍhasya tasyaiva śamaḥ kāraṇamucyate ||6-3||
aruruksoh —of one who has just begun yoga; muneh —of the sage; yogam
—the eightfold yoga system; karma —work; karanam —the cause; ucyate —is
said to be; yoga —eightfold yoga; arudhasya —one who has attained; tasya —
his; eva —certainly; samah —cessation of all material activities; karanam —the
cause; ucyate —is said to be.
For one who is a neophyte in the eightfold yoga system, work is said to
be the means; and for one who has already attained to yoga, cessation of
all material activities is said to be the means.
यदा हि नेन्द्रियार्थेषु न कर्मस्वनुषज्जते | सर्वसङ्कल्पसंन्यासी योगारूढस्तदोच्यते ||६-४||
yadā hi nendriyārtheṣu na karmasvanuṣajjate . sarvasaṅkalpasaṃnyāsī yogārūḍhastadocyate ||6-4||
yada —when; hi —certainly; na —not; indriya-arthesu —in sense
gratification; na —never; karmasu —in fruitive activities; anusajjate —does
necessarily engage; sarva-sahkalpa —all material desires; sannyasT
—renouncer; yoga- arudhah —elevated in yoga; tada —at that time; ucyate —is
said to be.
A person is said to have attained to yoga when, having renounced all
material desires, he neither acts for sense gratification nor engages in
fruitive activities.
उद्धरेदात्मनात्मानं नात्मानमवसादयेत् | आत्मैव ह्यात्मनो बन्धुरात्मैव रिपुरात्मनः ||६-५||
uddharedātmanātmānaṃ nātmānamavasādayet . ātmaiva hyātmano bandhurātmaiva ripurātmanaḥ ||6-5||
uddharet —one must deliver; atmana —by the mind; atmanam —the
conditioned soul; na —never; atmanam —the conditioned soul; avasadayet
—put into degradation; atma —mind; eva —certainly; hi —indeed; atmanah —of
the conditioned soul; bandhuh —friend; atma —mind; eva —certainly; ripuh —
enemy; atmanah —of the conditioned soul.
A man must elevate himself by his own mind, not degrade himself. The
mind is the friend of the conditioned soul, and his enemy as well.
बन्धुरात्मात्मनस्तस्य येनात्मैवात्मना जितः | अनात्मनस्तु शत्रुत्वे वर्तेतात्मैव शत्रुवत् ||६-६||
bandhurātmātmanastasya yenātmaivātmanā jitaḥ . anātmanastu śatrutve vartetātmaiva śatruvat ||6-6||
bandhuh —friend; atma —mind; atmanah —of the living entity; tasya —of
him; yena —by whom; atma —mind; eva —certainly; atmana —by the living
entity; jitah —conquered; anatmanah —of one who has failed to control the
mind; tu —but; satrutve —because of enmity; varteta —remains; atma eva —the
very mind; satruvat —as an enemy.
For him who has conquered the mind, the mind is the best of friends;
but for one who has failed to do so, his very mind will be the greatest
enemy.
जितात्मनः प्रशान्तस्य परमात्मा समाहितः | शीतोष्णसुखदुःखेषु तथा मानापमानयोः ||६-७||
jitātmanaḥ praśāntasya paramātmā samāhitaḥ . śītoṣṇasukhaduḥkheṣu tathā mānāpamānayoḥ ||6-7||
jita-atmanah —of one who has conquered his mind; prasantasya —of one
who has attained tranquility by such control over the mind; paramatma —the
Supersoul; samahitah —approached completely; sita —cold; usna —heat; sukha
—in happiness; duhkhesu —in distress; tatha —also; mana —honor;
apamanayoh —in dishonor.
For one who has conquered the mind, the Supersoul is already reached,
for he has attained tranquility. To such a man happiness and distress,
heat and cold, honor and dishonor are all the same.
ज्ञानविज्ञानतृप्तात्मा कूटस्थो विजितेन्द्रियः | युक्त इत्युच्यते योगी समलोष्टाश्मकाञ्चनः ||६-८||
jñānavijñānatṛptātmā kūṭastho vijitendriyaḥ . yukta ityucyate yogī samaloṣṭāśmakāñcanaḥ ||6-8||
jnana —acquired knowledge; vijnana —realized knowledge; trpta —satisfied;
atma —living entity; kutasthah —spiritually situated; vijita-indriyah —sensually
controlled; yuktah —competent for self-realization; id —thus; ucyate —is said;
yogi —the mystic; sama —equiposed; lostra —pebbles; asma —stone; kancanah
—gold.
A person is said to be established in self-realization and is called a yogi
[or mystic] when he is fully satisfied by virtue of acquired knowledge and
realization. Such a person is situated in transcendence and is self-
controlled. He sees everything—whether it be pebbles, stones or gold—as
the same.
सुहृन्मित्रार्युदासीनमध्यस्थद्वेष्यबन्धुषु | साधुष्वपि च पापेषु समबुद्धिर्विशिष्यते ||६-९||
suhṛnmitrāryudāsīnamadhyasthadveṣyabandhuṣu . sādhuṣvapi ca pāpeṣu samabuddhirviśiṣyate ||6-9||
suhrt —by nature a well-wisher; mitra —benefactor with affection; ari —
enemy; udasma —neutral between the belligerents; madhyastha —mediator
between the belligerents; dvesya —envious; bandhusu —among the relatives or
well-wishers; sadhusu —unto the pious; api —as well as; ca —and; papesu —
unto the sinners; sama-buddhih —having equal intelligence; visisyate —is far
advanced.
A person is said to be still further advanced when he regards all—the
honest well-wisher, friends and enemies, the envious, the pious, the sinner
and those who are indifferent and impartial-with an equal mind.
योगी युञ्जीत सततमात्मानं रहसि स्थितः | एकाकी यतचित्तात्मा निराशीरपरिग्रहः ||६-१०||
yogī yuñjīta satatamātmānaṃ rahasi sthitaḥ . ekākī yatacittātmā nirāśīraparigrahaḥ ||6-10||
yogi —a transcendentalist; yunjita —must concentrate in Krsna
consciousness; satatam —constantly; atmanam —himself (by the body, mind
and self); rahasi —in a secluded place; sthitah —being so situated; ekakT
—alone; yata-cittatma —always careful in mind; nirasTh —without being
attracted by anything else; aparigrahah —free from the feeling of
possessiveness.
A transcendentalist should always try to concentrate his mind on the
Supreme Self; he should live alone in a secluded place and should always
carefully control his mind. He should be free from desires and feelings of
possessiveness.
शुचौ देशे प्रतिष्ठाप्य स्थिरमासनमात्मनः | नात्युच्छ्रितं नातिनीचं चैलाजिनकुशोत्तरम् ||६-११||
śucau deśe pratiṣṭhāpya sthiramāsanamātmanaḥ . nātyucchritaṃ nātinīcaṃ cailājinakuśottaram ||6-11||
sucau —in sanctified; dese —in the land; pratisthapya —placing; sthiram —
firm; asanam —seat; atmanah —self-dependant; na —not; ad —too; ucchritam
—high; na —nor; ad —too; nfcam —low; caila-ajna —soft cloth and deerskin;
kusottaram-kusa grass; tatra —thereupon; ekagram —one attention; manah —
mind; krtva —doing so; yata-citta —controlling the mind; indriya —senses;
kriyah —activities; upavisya —sitting on; asane —on the seat; yuhjyat —
execute; yogam —yoga practice; atma —heart; visuddhaye —for clarifying.
To practice yoga, one should go to a secluded place and should lay
kusa-grass on the ground and then cover it with a deerskin and a soft
cloth. The seat should neither be too high nor too low and should be
situated in a sacred place. The yogi should then sit on it very firmly and
should practice yoga by controlling the mind and the senses, purifying the
heart and fixing the mind on one point.
तत्रैकाग्रं मनः कृत्वा यतचित्तेन्द्रियक्रियः | उपविश्यासने युञ्ज्याद्योगमात्मविशुद्धये ||६-१२||
tatraikāgraṃ manaḥ kṛtvā yatacittendriyakriyaḥ . upaviśyāsane yuñjyādyogamātmaviśuddhaye ||6-12||
समं कायशिरोग्रीवं धारयन्नचलं स्थिरः | सम्प्रेक्ष्य नासिकाग्रं स्वं दिशश्चानवलोकयन् ||६-१३||
samaṃ kāyaśirogrīvaṃ dhārayannacalaṃ sthiraḥ . samprekṣya nāsikāgraṃ svaṃ diśaścānavalokayan ||6-13||
samam —straight; kaya-sirah —body and head; grivam —neck; dharayan —
holding; acalam —unmoved; sthirah —still; sampreksya —looking; nasika —
nose; agram —tip; svam —own; disah —all sides; ca —also; anavalokayan —not
seeing; prasanta —unagitated; atma —mind; vigata-bhih —devoid of fear;
brahmacari-vrate —in the vow of celibacy; sthitah —situated; manah —mind;
samyamya —completely subdued; mat —unto Me (Krsna); cittah
—concentrated; yuktah —actual yogi; asTta —being so; mat —unto Me; parah
—ultimate goal.
One should hold one`s body, neck and head erect in a straight line and
stare steadily at the tip of the nose. Thus with an unagitated, subdued
mind, devoid of fear, completely free from sex life, one should meditate
upon Me within the heart and make Me the ultimate goal of life.
प्रशान्तात्मा विगतभीर्ब्रह्मचारिव्रते स्थितः | मनः संयम्य मच्चित्तो युक्त आसीत मत्परः ||६-१४||
praśāntātmā vigatabhīrbrahmacārivrate sthitaḥ . manaḥ saṃyamya maccitto yukta āsīta matparaḥ ||6-14||
युञ्जन्नेवं सदात्मानं योगी नियतमानसः | शान्तिं निर्वाणपरमां मत्संस्थामधिगच्छति ||६-१५||
yuñjannevaṃ sadātmānaṃ yogī niyatamānasaḥ . śāntiṃ nirvāṇaparamāṃ matsaṃsthāmadhigacchati ||6-15||
yuhjan —practicing like this; evam —as mentioned above; sada —constantly;
atmanam —body, mind and soul; yogi —the mystic transcendentalist; niyata-
manasah —regulated mind; santim —peace; nirvana-paramam —cessation of
material existence; mat-samstham —in the spiritual sky (the kingdom of God);
adhigacchad —does attain.
Thus practicing control of the body, mind and activities, the mystic
transcendentalist attains to the kingdom of God [or the abode of Krsna]
by cessation of material existence.
नात्यश्नतस्तु योगोऽस्ति न चैकान्तमनश्नतः | न चातिस्वप्नशीलस्य जाग्रतो नैव चार्जुन ||६-१६||
nātyaśnatastu yogo.asti na caikāntamanaśnataḥ . na cātisvapnaśīlasya jāgrato naiva cārjuna ||6-16||
na —never; ad —too much; asnatah —of one who eats so; tu —but; yogah —
linking with the Supreme; asd —there is; na —nor; ca —also; ekantam —very
low; anasnatah —abstaining from eating; na —nor; ca —also; ad —too much;
svapna-silasya —of one who sleeps too much; jagratah —or one who keeps
night watch too much; na —not; eva —ever; ca —and; arjuna —O Arjuna.
There is no possibility of one`s becoming a yogi, O Arjuna, if one eats
too much, or eats too little, sleeps too much or does not sleep enough.
युक्ताहारविहारस्य युक्तचेष्टस्य कर्मसु | युक्तस्वप्नावबोधस्य योगो भवति दुःखहा ||६-१७||
yuktāhāravihārasya yuktaceṣṭasya karmasu . yuktasvapnāvabodhasya yogo bhavati duḥkhahā ||6-17||
yukta —regulated; ahara —eating; viharasya —recreation; yukta —regulated;
cestasya —of one who works for maintenance; karmasu —in discharging
duties; yukta —regulated; svapna-avabodhasya —regulated sleep and
wakefulness; yogah —practice of yoga; bhavati —becomes; duhkha-ha
—diminishing pains.
He who is temperate in his habits of eating, sleeping, working and
recreation can mitigate all material pains by practicing the yoga system.
यदा विनियतं चित्तमात्मन्येवावतिष्ठते | निःस्पृहः सर्वकामेभ्यो युक्त इत्युच्यते तदा ||६-१८||
yadā viniyataṃ cittamātmanyevāvatiṣṭhate . niḥspṛhaḥ sarvakāmebhyo yukta ityucyate tadā ||6-18||
yada —when; viniyatam —particularly disciplined; cittam —the mind and its
activities; atmani —in the Transcendence; eva —certainly; avatisthate —
becomes situated; nisprhah —devoid of; sarva —all kinds of; kamebhyah —
material desires; yuktah —well situated in yoga; id —thus; ucyate —is said to
be; tada —at that time.
When the yogi, by practice of yoga, disciplines his mental activities and
becomes situated in Transcendence—devoid of all material desires—he is
said to have attained yoga.
यथा दीपो निवातस्थो नेङ्गते सोपमा स्मृता | योगिनो यतचित्तस्य युञ्जतो योगमात्मनः ||६-१९||
yathā dīpo nivātastho neṅgate sopamā smṛtā . yogino yatacittasya yuñjato yogamātmanaḥ ||6-19||
yatha —as; dTpah —a lamp; nivatasthah —in a place without wind; na —does
not; iiigate —waver; sa upama —compared to that; smrta —likened; yoginah —
of the yogi; yata-cittasya —whose mind is controlled; yuhjatah —constantly
engaged in; yogam —meditation; atmanah —on Transcendence.
As a lamp in a windless place does not waver, so the transcendentalism
whose mind is controlled, remains always steady in his meditation on the
transcendent Self.
यत्रोपरमते चित्तं निरुद्धं योगसेवया | यत्र चैवात्मनात्मानं पश्यन्नात्मनि तुष्यति ||६-२०||
yatroparamate cittaṃ niruddhaṃ yogasevayā . yatra caivātmanātmānaṃ paśyannātmani tuṣyati ||6-20||
yatra —in that state of affairs; uparamate —when one feels transcendental
happiness; cittam —mental activities; niruddham —restrained from matter;
yoga-sevaya —by performance of yoga; yatra —in that; ca —also; eva
—certainly; atmana —by the pure mind; atmanam —self; pasyan —realizing the
position; atmani —in the self; tusyati —becomes satisfied; sukham —happiness;
atyantikam —supreme; yat —in which; tat —that; buddhi —intelligence;
grahyam —acceptable; atmdriyam —transcendental; vetti —knows; yatra —
wherein; na —never; ca —also; eva —certainly; ayam —in this; sthitah
—situated; calati —moves; tattvatah —from the truth; yam —that which;
labdhva —by attainment; ca —also; aparam —any other; labham —gain;
manyate —does not mind; na —never; adhikam —more than that; tatah —from
that; yasmin —in which; sthitah —being situated; na —never; duhkhena —by
miseries; gurunapi —even though very difficult; vicalyate —becomes shaken;
tarn —that; vidyat —you must know; duhkha-samyoga —miseries of material
contact; viyogam —extermination; yoga-samjnitam —trance in yoga.
The stage of perfection is called trance, or samadhi, when one`s mind is
completely restrained from material mental activities by practice of yoga.
This is characterized by one`s ability to see the self by the pure mind and
to relish and rejoice in the self. In that joyous state, one is situated in
boundless transcendental happiness and enjoys himself through
transcendental senses. Established thus, one never departs from the truth,
and upon gaining this he thinks there is no greater gain. Being situated in
such a position, one is never shaken, even in the midst of greatest
difficulty. This indeed is actual freedom from all miseries arising from
material contact.
सुखमात्यन्तिकं यत्तद् बुद्धिग्राह्यमतीन्द्रियम् | वेत्ति यत्र न चैवायं स्थितश्चलति तत्त्वतः ||६-२१||
sukhamātyantikaṃ yattad buddhigrāhyamatīndriyam . vetti yatra na caivāyaṃ sthitaścalati tattvataḥ ||6-21||
यं लब्ध्वा चापरं लाभं मन्यते नाधिकं ततः | यस्मिन्स्थितो न दुःखेन गुरुणापि विचाल्यते ||६-२२||
yaṃ labdhvā cāparaṃ lābhaṃ manyate nādhikaṃ tataḥ . yasminsthito na duḥkhena guruṇāpi vicālyate ||6-22||
तं विद्याद् दुःखसंयोगवियोगं योगसंज्ञितम् | स निश्चयेन योक्तव्यो योगोऽनिर्विण्णचेतसा ||६-२३||
taṃ vidyād duḥkhasaṃyogaviyogaṃ yogasaṃjñitam . sa niścayena yoktavyo yogo.anirviṇṇacetasā ||6-23||
सङ्कल्पप्रभवान्कामांस्त्यक्त्वा सर्वानशेषतः | मनसैवेन्द्रियग्रामं विनियम्य समन्ततः ||६-२४||
saṅkalpaprabhavānkāmāṃstyaktvā sarvānaśeṣataḥ . manasaivendriyagrāmaṃ viniyamya samantataḥ ||6-24||
sah —that yoga system; niscayena —with firm determination; yoktavyah —
must be practiced; yogah —in such practice; anirvinna-cetasa —without
deviation; sankalpa —material desires; prabhavan —born of; kaman —sense
gratification; tyaktva —giving up; sarvan —all; asesatah —completely; manasa
—by the mind; eva —certainly; indriya-gramam —the full set of senses;
viniyamya —regulating; samantatah —from all sides.
One should engage oneself in the practice of yoga with undeviating
determination and faith. One should abandon, without exception, all
material desires born of false ego and thus control all the senses on all
sides by the mind.
शनैः शनैरुपरमेद् बुद्ध्या धृतिगृहीतया | आत्मसंस्थं मनः कृत्वा न किञ्चिदपि चिन्तयेत् ||६-२५||
śanaiḥ śanairuparamed buddhyā dhṛtigṛhītayā . ātmasaṃsthaṃ manaḥ kṛtvā na kiñcidapi cintayet ||6-25||
sanaih —gradually; sanaih —step by step; uparamet —hesitated; buddhya —
by intelligence; dhrti-grhTtaya —carrying the conviction; atma-samstham —
placed in transcendence; manah —mind; krtva —doing so; na —nothing; kihcit
—anything else; api —even; cintayet —be thinking of.
Gradually, step by step, with full conviction, one should become
situated in trance by means of intelligence, and thus the mind should be
fixed on the Self alone and should think of nothing else.
यतो यतो निश्चरति मनश्चञ्चलमस्थिरम् | ततस्ततो नियम्यैतदात्मन्येव वशं नयेत् ||६-२६||
yato yato niścarati manaścañcalamasthiram . tatastato niyamyaitadātmanyeva vaśaṃ nayet ||6-26||
yatah —whatever; yatah —wherever; niscalati —verily agitated; manah —
the mind; cancalam —flickering; asthiram —unsteady; tatah —from there;
tatah — and thereafter; niyamya —regulating; etat —this; atmani —in the self;
eva — certainly; vasam —control; nayet —must bring in.
From whatever and wherever the mind wanders due to its flickering
and unsteady nature, one must certainly withdraw it and bring it back
under the control of the Self.
प्रशान्तमनसं ह्येनं योगिनं सुखमुत्तमम् | उपैति शान्तरजसं ब्रह्मभूतमकल्मषम् ||६-२७||
praśāntamanasaṃ hyenaṃ yoginaṃ sukhamuttamam . upaiti śāntarajasaṃ brahmabhūtamakalmaṣam ||6-27||
prasanta —mind fixed on the lotus feet of Krsna; manasam —of one whose
mind is so fixed; hi —certainly; enam —this; yoginam —the yogi; sukham
—happiness; uttamam —the highest; upaiti —attains; santa-rajasam —pacified
passion; brahma-bhutam —liberated by identification with the Absolute;
akalmasam —freed from all past sinful reaction.
The yog! whose mind is fixed on Me verily attains the highest
happiness. By virtue of his identity with Brahman, he is liberated; his
mind is peaceful, his passions are quieted, and he is freed from sin.
युञ्जन्नेवं सदात्मानं योगी विगतकल्मषः | सुखेन ब्रह्मसंस्पर्शमत्यन्तं सुखमश्नुते ||६-२८||
yuñjannevaṃ sadātmānaṃ yogī vigatakalmaṣaḥ . sukhena brahmasaṃsparśamatyantaṃ sukhamaśnute ||6-28||
yuhjan —thus being engaged in yoga practice; evam —thus; sada —always;
atmanam —self; yogi —one who is in touch with the Supreme Self; vigata —is
freed from; kalmasah —all material contamination; sukhena —in transcendental
happiness; brahma-samsparsam —being in constant touch with the Supreme;
atyantam —highest; sukham —happiness; asnute —attains.
Steady in the Self, being freed from all material contamination, the yogi
achieves the highest perfectional stage of happiness in touch with the
Supreme Consciousness.
सर्वभूतस्थमात्मानं सर्वभूतानि चात्मनि | ईक्षते योगयुक्तात्मा सर्वत्र समदर्शनः ||६-२९||
sarvabhūtasthamātmānaṃ sarvabhūtāni cātmani . īkṣate yogayuktātmā sarvatra samadarśanaḥ ||6-29||
sarva-bhuta-stham —situated in all beings; atmanam —the Supersoul; sarva
—all; bhutani —entities; ca —also; atmani —in the Self; Tksate —does see; yoga-
yukta-atma —one who is dovetailed in Krsna consciousness; sarvatra —
everywhere; sama-darsanah —seeing equally.
A true yog! observes Me in all beings, and also sees every being in Me.
Indeed, the self-realized man sees Me everywhere.
यो मां पश्यति सर्वत्र सर्वं च मयि पश्यति | तस्याहं न प्रणश्यामि स च मे न प्रणश्यति ||६-३०||
yo māṃ paśyati sarvatra sarvaṃ ca mayi paśyati . tasyāhaṃ na praṇaśyāmi sa ca me na praṇaśyati ||6-30||
yah —whoever; mam —Me; pasyati —sees; sarvatra —everywhere; sarvam
everything; ca —and; mayi —in Me; pasyati —he sees; tasya —his; aham —I; na
—not; pranasyami —am lost; sah —he; ca —also; me —to Me; na —nor;
pranasyad —is lost.
For one who sees Me everywhere and sees everything in Me, I am never
lost, nor is he ever lost to Me.
सर्वभूतस्थितं यो मां भजत्येकत्वमास्थितः | सर्वथा वर्तमानोऽपि स योगी मयि वर्तते ||६-३१||
sarvabhūtasthitaṃ yo māṃ bhajatyekatvamāsthitaḥ . sarvathā vartamāno.api sa yogī mayi vartate ||6-31||
sarva-bhuta-sthitam —situated in everyone`s heart; yah —he who; mam —
unto Me; bhajati —serves in devotional service; ekatvam —oneness; asthitah
—thus situated; sarvatha —in all respects; vartamanah —being situated; api —
in spite of; sah —he; yogi —transcendentalist; mayi —unto Me; vartate —
remains.
The yogi who knows that I and the Supersoul within all creatures are
one worships Me and remains always in Me in all circumstances.
आत्मौपम्येन सर्वत्र समं पश्यति योऽर्जुन | सुखं वा यदि वा दुःखं स योगी परमो मतः ||६-३२||
ātmaupamyena sarvatra samaṃ paśyati yo.arjuna . sukhaṃ vā yadi vā duḥkhaṃ sa yogī paramo mataḥ ||6-32||
atma —self; aupamyena —by comparison; sarvatra —everywhere; samam —
equality; pasyati —sees; yah —he who; arjuna —O Arjuna; sukham
—happiness; va —or; yadi —if; va — or; duhkham —distress; sah —such; yogi —
transcendentalist; paramah —perfect; matah —considered.
He is a perfect yogi who, by comparison to his own self, sees the true
equality of all beings, both in their happiness and distress, O Arjuna!
अर्जुन उवाच | योऽयं योगस्त्वया प्रोक्तः साम्येन मधुसूदन | एतस्याहं न पश्यामि चञ्चलत्वात्स्थितिं स्थिराम् ||६-३३||
arjuna uvāca . yo.ayaṃ yogastvayā proktaḥ sāmyena madhusūdana . etasyāhaṃ na paśyāmi cañcalatvātsthitiṃ sthirām ||6-33||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; yah —the system; ayam —this; yogah —
mysticism; tvaya —by You; proktah —described; samyena —generally;
madhusiidana —O killer of the demon Madhu; etasya —of this; aham —I; na —
do not; pasyami —see; cancalatvat —due to being restless; sthitim —situation;
sthiram —stable.
Arjuna said: O Madhusiidana, the system of yoga which you have
summarized appears impractical and unendurable to me, for the mind is
restless and unsteady.
चञ्चलं हि मनः कृष्ण प्रमाथि बलवद् दृढम् | तस्याहं निग्रहं मन्ये वायोरिव सुदुष्करम् ||६-३४||
cañcalaṃ hi manaḥ kṛṣṇa pramāthi balavad dṛḍham . tasyāhaṃ nigrahaṃ manye vāyoriva suduṣkaram ||6-34||
cancalam —flickering; hi —certainly; manah —mind; krsna —O Krsna;
pramathi —agitating; balavat —strong; drdham —obstinate; tasya —its; aham
—I; nigraham —subduing; manye —think; vayoh —of the wind; iva —like;
suduskaram —difficult.
For the mind is restless, turbulent, obstinate and very strong, O Krsna,
and to subdue it is, it seems to me, more difficult than controlling the
wind.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | असंशयं महाबाहो मनो दुर्निग्रहं चलम् | अभ्यासेन तु कौन्तेय वैराग्येण च गृह्यते ||६-३५||
śrībhagavānuvāca . asaṃśayaṃ mahābāho mano durnigrahaṃ calam . abhyāsena tu kaunteya vairāgyeṇa ca gṛhyate ||6-35||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Personality of Godhead said; asamsayam —
undoubtedly; maha-baho —O mighty-armed one; manah —mind; durnigraham
—difficult to curb; calam —flickering; abhyasena —by practice; tu —but;
kaunteya —O son of KuntI; vairagyena —by detachment; ca —also; grhyate —
can be so controlled.
The Blessed Lord said: O mighty-armed son of KuntI, it is undoubtedly
very difficult to curb the restless mind, but it is possible by constant
practice and by detachment.
असंयतात्मना योगो दुष्प्राप इति मे मतिः | वश्यात्मना तु यतता शक्योऽवाप्तुमुपायतः ||६-३६||
asaṃyatātmanā yogo duṣprāpa iti me matiḥ . vaśyātmanā tu yatatā śakyo.avāptumupāyataḥ ||6-36||
asamyata —unbridled; atmana —by the mind; yogah —self-realization;
dusprapah —difficult to obtain; iti —thus; me —My; matih —opinion; vasya —
controlled; atmana —by the mind; tu —but; yatata —while endeavoring; sakyah
—practical; avaptum —to achieve; upayatah —appropriate means.
For one whose mind is unbridled, self-realization is difficult work. But
he whose mind is controlled and who strives by right means is assured of
success. That is My opinion.
अर्जुन उवाच | अयतिः श्रद्धयोपेतो योगाच्चलितमानसः | अप्राप्य योगसंसिद्धिं कां गतिं कृष्ण गच्छति ||६-३७||
arjuna uvāca . ayatiḥ śraddhayopeto yogāccalitamānasaḥ . aprāpya yogasaṃsiddhiṃ kāṃ gatiṃ kṛṣṇa gacchati ||6-37||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; ayatih —unsuccessful transcendentalist;
sraddhaya —with faith; upetah —engaged; yogat —from the mystic link; calita
—deviated; manasah —of one who has such a mind; aprapya —failing; yoga-
samsiddhim —highest perfection in mysticism; kam —which; gatim —
destination; krsna —O Krsna; gacchati —achieves.
Arjuna said: What is the destination of the man of faith who does not
persevere, who in the beginning takes to the process of self-realization but
who later desists due to worldly- mindedness and thus does not attain
perfection in mysticism?
कच्चिन्नोभयविभ्रष्टश्छिन्नाभ्रमिव नश्यति | अप्रतिष्ठो महाबाहो विमूढो ब्रह्मणः पथि ||६-३८||
kaccinnobhayavibhraṣṭaśchinnābhramiva naśyati . apratiṣṭho mahābāho vimūḍho brahmaṇaḥ pathi ||6-38||
kaccit —whether; na —not; ubhaya —both; vibhrastah —deviated from;
chinna —fallen; abhram —cloud; iva —likened; nasyati —perishes; apratisthah
—without any position; maha-baho —O mighty-armed Krsna; vimudhah —
bewildered; brahmanah —of Transcendence; pathi —on the path.
O mighty-armed Krsna, does not such a man, being deviated from the
path of Transcendence, perish like a riven cloud, with no position in any
sphere?
एतन्मे संशयं कृष्ण छेत्तुमर्हस्यशेषतः | त्वदन्यः संशयस्यास्य छेत्ता न ह्युपपद्यते ||६-३९||
etanme saṃśayaṃ kṛṣṇa chettumarhasyaśeṣataḥ . tvadanyaḥ saṃśayasyāsya chettā na hyupapadyate ||6-39||
etat —this is; me —my; samsayam —doubt; krsna —O Krsna; chettum —to
dispel; arhasi —requested to do; asesatah —completely; tvat —Yourself; anyah
—without; samsayasya —of the doubt; asya —of this; chetta —remover; na
—never; hi —certainly; upapadyate —to be found.
This is my doubt O Krsna, and I ask You to dispel it completely. But for
Yourself, no one is to be found who can destroy this doubt.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | पार्थ नैवेह नामुत्र विनाशस्तस्य विद्यते | न हि कल्याणकृत्कश्चिद् दुर्गतिं तात गच्छति ||६-४०||
śrībhagavānuvāca . pārtha naiveha nāmutra vināśastasya vidyate . na hi kalyāṇakṛtkaścid durgatiṃ tāta gacchati ||6-40||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; partha —O
son of Prtha; na eva —never is it so; iha —in this material world; na —never;
amutra —in the next life; vinasah —destruction; tasya —his; vidyate —exists;
na —never; hi —certainly; kalyana-krt —one who is engaged in auspicious
activities; kascit —anyone; durgatim —degradation; tata —thereafter; gacchati
—going.
The Blessed Lord said: Son of Prtha, a transcendentalist engaged in
auspicious activities does not meet with destruction either in this world or
in the spiritual world; one who does good, My friend, is never overcome
by evil.
प्राप्य पुण्यकृतां लोकानुषित्वा शाश्वतीः समाः | शुचीनां श्रीमतां गेहे योगभ्रष्टोऽभिजायते ||६-४१||
prāpya puṇyakṛtāṃ lokānuṣitvā śāśvatīḥ samāḥ . śucīnāṃ śrīmatāṃ gehe yogabhraṣṭo.abhijāyate ||6-41||
prapya —after achieving; punya-krtam —of those who performed pious
activities; lokan —planets; usitva —after dwelling; sasvatih —many; samah —
years; Surinam —of the pious; srimatam —of the prosperous; gehe —in the
house of; yoga-bhrastah —one who is fallen from the path of self-realization;
abhijayate —takes his birth.
The unsuccessful yogi, after many, many years of enjoyment on the
planets of the pious living entities, is born into a family of righteous
people, or into a family of rich aristocracy.
अथवा योगिनामेव कुले भवति धीमताम् | एतद्धि दुर्लभतरं लोके जन्म यदीदृशम् ||६-४२||
athavā yogināmeva kule bhavati dhīmatām . etaddhi durlabhataraṃ loke janma yadīdṛśam ||6-42||
athava —or; yoginam —of learned transcendentalists; eva —certainly; kule —
in the family of; bhavati —takes birth; dhTmatam —of those who are endowed
with great wisdom; etat —this; hi —certainly; durlabhataram —very rare; loke
—in this world; janma —birth; yat —that which; Tdrsam —like this.
Or he takes his birth in a family of transcendentalists who are surely
great in wisdom. Verily, such a birth is rare in this world.
तत्र तं बुद्धिसंयोगं लभते पौर्वदेहिकम् | यतते च ततो भूयः संसिद्धौ कुरुनन्दन ||६-४३||
tatra taṃ buddhisaṃyogaṃ labhate paurvadehikam . yatate ca tato bhūyaḥ saṃsiddhau kurunandana ||6-43||
tatra —thereupon; tam —that; buddhi-samyogam —revival of such
consciousness; labhate —regains; paurva —previous; dehikam —bodily
consciousness; yatate —endeavors; ca —also; tatah —thereafter; bhuyah
—again; samsiddhau —for perfection; kuru-nandana —O son of Kuru.
On taking such a birth, he again revives the divine consciousness of his
previous life, and he tries to make further progress in order to achieve
complete success, O son of Kuru.
पूर्वाभ्यासेन तेनैव ह्रियते ह्यवशोऽपि सः | जिज्ञासुरपि योगस्य शब्दब्रह्मातिवर्तते ||६-४४||
pūrvābhyāsena tenaiva hriyate hyavaśo.api saḥ . jijñāsurapi yogasya śabdabrahmātivartate ||6-44||
purva —previous; abhyasena —practice; tena —by the influence of that; eva
—certainly; hriyate —is attracted; hi —surely; avasah —helpless; api —also;
sah —he; jijhasuh —willing to know; api —so; yogasya —of yoga; sabda-
brahma — ritualistic principles of scripture; advartate —transcends.
By virtue of the divine consciousness of his previous life, he
automatically becomes attracted to the yogic principles—even without
seeking them. Such an inquisitive transcendentalist, striving for yoga,
stands always above the ritualistic principles of the scriptures.
प्रयत्नाद्यतमानस्तु योगी संशुद्धकिल्बिषः | अनेकजन्मसंसिद्धस्ततो याति परां गतिम् ||६-४५||
prayatnādyatamānastu yogī saṃśuddhakilbiṣaḥ . anekajanmasaṃsiddhastato yāti parāṃ gatim ||6-45||
prayatnat —by rigid practice; yatamanah —one who endeavors; tu —but;
yogi —such a transcendentalist; sarhsuddha —washed off; kilbisah —all kinds
of sins; aneka —many, many; janma —births; samsiddhah —so achieved
perfection; tatah —thereafter; yati —attains; param —highest; gatim —
destination.
But when the yog! engages himself with sincere endeavor in making
further progress, being washed of all contaminations, then ultimately,
after many, many births of practice, he attains the supreme goal.
तपस्विभ्योऽधिको योगी ज्ञानिभ्योऽपि मतोऽधिकः | कर्मिभ्यश्चाधिको योगी तस्माद्योगी भवार्जुन ||६-४६||
tapasvibhyo.adhiko yogī jñānibhyo.api mato.adhikaḥ . karmibhyaścādhiko yogī tasmādyogī bhavārjuna ||6-46||
tapasvibhyah —than the ascetic; adhikah —greater; yogi —the yogi ;
jhanibhyah —than the wise; api —also; matah —considered; adhikah —greater
than; karmibhyah —than the fruitive worker; ca —also; adhikah —greater than;
yogi —the yogi; tasmat —therefore; yogi —a transcendentalist; bhava —just
become; arjuna —O Arjuna.
A yogi is greater than the ascetic, greater than the empiricist and
greater than the fruitive worker. Therefore, O Arjuna, in all
circumstances, be a yogi.
योगिनामपि सर्वेषां मद्गतेनान्तरात्मना | श्रद्धावान्भजते यो मां स मे युक्ततमो मतः ||६-४७||
yogināmapi sarveṣāṃ madgatenāntarātmanā . śraddhāvānbhajate yo māṃ sa me yuktatamo mataḥ ||6-47||
yoginam —of all yogis; api —also; sarvesam —all types of; mat-gatena —
abiding in Me; antah-atmana —always thinking of Me within; sraddhavan —in
full faith; bhajate —renders transcendental loving service; yah —one who;
mam —Me (the Supreme Lord); sah —he; me —Mine; yuktatamah —the greatest
yogi; matah —is considered.
And of all yogis, he who always abides in Me with great faith,
worshiping Me in transcendental loving service, is most intimately united
with Me in yoga and is the highest of all.
Глава 7
श्रीभगवानुवाच | मय्यासक्तमनाः पार्थ योगं युञ्जन्मदाश्रयः | असंशयं समग्रं मां यथा ज्ञास्यसि तच्छृणु ||७-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . mayyāsaktamanāḥ pārtha yogaṃ yuñjanmadāśrayaḥ . asaṃśayaṃ samagraṃ māṃ yathā jñāsyasi tacchṛṇu ||7-1||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Lord said; mayi —unto Me; asakta-
manah —mind attached; partha —O son of Prtha; yogam —self-realization;
yuhjan — so practicing; mat-asrayah —in consciousness of Me (Krsna
consciousness); asamsayam —without doubt; samagram —completely; mam —
unto Me; yatha —as much as; jnasyasi —you can know; tat —that; srnu —try
to hear.
Now hear, O son of Prtha [Arjuna], how by practicing yoga in full
consciousness of Me, with mind attached to Me, you can know Me in full,
free from doubt.
ज्ञानं तेऽहं सविज्ञानमिदं वक्ष्याम्यशेषतः | यज्ज्ञात्वा नेह भूयोऽन्यज्ज्ञातव्यमवशिष्यते ||७-२||
jñānaṃ te.ahaṃ savijñānamidaṃ vakṣyāmyaśeṣataḥ . yajjñātvā neha bhūyo.anyajjñātavyamavaśiṣyate ||7-2||
jhanam —phenomenal knowledge; te —unto you; aham —I; sa —with;
vijhanam —noumenal knowledge; idam —this; vaksyami —shall explain;
asesatah —in full; yat —which; jnatva —knowing; na —not; iha —in this
world; bhuyah —further; anyat —anything more; jnatavyam —knowable;
avasisyate — remains to be known.
I shall now declare unto you in full this knowledge both phenomenal
and noumenal, by knowing which there shall remain nothing further to
be known.
मनुष्याणां सहस्रेषु कश्चिद्यतति सिद्धये | यततामपि सिद्धानां कश्चिन्मां वेत्ति तत्त्वतः ||७-३||
manuṣyāṇāṃ sahasreṣu kaścidyatati siddhaye . yatatāmapi siddhānāṃ kaścinmāṃ vetti tattvataḥ ||7-3||
manusyanam —of men; sahasresu —out of many thousands; kascit
—someone; yatati —endeavors; siddhaye —for perfection; yatatam —of those
so endeavoring; api —indeed; siddhanam —of those who have achieved
perfection; kascit —someone; mam —Me; vetd —does know; tattvatah —in fact.
Out of many thousands among men, one may endeavor for perfection,
and of those who have achieved perfection, hardly one knows Me in truth.
भूमिरापोऽनलो वायुः खं मनो बुद्धिरेव च | अहंकार इतीयं मे भिन्ना प्रकृतिरष्टधा ||७-४||
bhūmirāpo.analo vāyuḥ khaṃ mano buddhireva ca . ahaṃkāra itīyaṃ me bhinnā prakṛtiraṣṭadhā ||7-4||
bhumih —earth; apah —water; analah —fire; vayuh —air; kham —ether;
manah —mind; buddhih —intelligence; eva —certainly; ca —and; ahahkarah —
false ego; iti —thus; iyam —all these; me —My; bhinna —separated; prakrtih —
energies; astadha —total eight.
Earth, water, fire, air, ether, mind, intelligence and false ego—
altogether these eight comprise My separated material energies.
अपरेयमितस्त्वन्यां प्रकृतिं विद्धि मे पराम् | जीवभूतां महाबाहो ययेदं धार्यते जगत् ||७-५||
apareyamitastvanyāṃ prakṛtiṃ viddhi me parām . jīvabhūtāṃ mahābāho yayedaṃ dhāryate jagat ||7-5||
apara —inferior; iyam —this; itah —besides this; tu —but; anyam —another;
prakrtim —energy; viddhi —just try to understand; me —My; param —superior;
jiva-bhutam —the living entities; maha-baho —O mighty-armed one; yaya —by
whom; idam —this; dharyate —being utilized or exploited; jagat —the material
world.
Besides this inferior nature, O mighty-armed Arjuna, there is a
superior energy of Mine, which are all living entities who are struggling
with material nature and are sustaining the universe.
एतद्योनीनि भूतानि सर्वाणीत्युपधारय | अहं कृत्स्नस्य जगतः प्रभवः प्रलयस्तथा ||७-६||
etadyonīni bhūtāni sarvāṇītyupadhāraya . ahaṃ kṛtsnasya jagataḥ prabhavaḥ pralayastathā ||7-6||
etat —these two natures; yonini —source of birth; bhutani —everything
created; sarvani —all; id —thus; upadharaya —know; aham —I; krtsnasya —
all-inclusive; jagatah —of the world; prabhavah —source of manifestation;
pralayah —annihilation; tatha —as well as.
Of all that is material and all that is spiritual in this world, know for
certain that I am both its origin and dissolution.
मत्तः परतरं नान्यत्किञ्चिदस्ति धनञ्जय | मयि सर्वमिदं प्रोतं सूत्रे मणिगणा इव ||७-७||
mattaḥ parataraṃ nānyatkiñcidasti dhanañjaya . mayi sarvamidaṃ protaṃ sūtre maṇigaṇā iva ||7-7||
mattah —beyond Myself; parataram —superior; na —not; anyat —anything
else; kihcit —something; asti —there is; dhananjaya —O conquerer of wealth;
mayi —in Me; sarvam —all that be; idam —which we see; protam —strung;
sutre —on a thread; mani-ganah —pearls; iva —likened.
O conquerer of wealth [Arjuna], there is no Truth superior to Me.
Everything rests upon Me, as pearls are strung on a thread.
रसोऽहमप्सु कौन्तेय प्रभास्मि शशिसूर्ययोः | प्रणवः सर्ववेदेषु शब्दः खे पौरुषं नृषु ||७-८||
raso.ahamapsu kaunteya prabhāsmi śaśisūryayoḥ . praṇavaḥ sarvavedeṣu śabdaḥ khe pauruṣaṃ nṛṣu ||7-8||
rasah —taste; aham —I; apsu —in water; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; prabha
asmi —I am the light; sasi-suryayoh —in the sun and the moon; pranavah —the
three letters A.U.M.; sarva —in all; vedesu —in the Vedas; sab dah —sound
vibration; khe —in the ether; paurusam —ability; nrsu —in man.
O son of Kunti [Arjuna], I am the taste of water, the light of the sun
and the moon, the syllable om in the Vedic mantras; I am the sound in
ether and ability in man.
पुण्यो गन्धः पृथिव्यां च तेजश्चास्मि विभावसौ | जीवनं सर्वभूतेषु तपश्चास्मि तपस्विषु ||७-९||
puṇyo gandhaḥ pṛthivyāṃ ca tejaścāsmi vibhāvasau . jīvanaṃ sarvabhūteṣu tapaścāsmi tapasviṣu ||7-9||
tejah —temperature; ca —also; asmi —I am; vibhavasau —in the fire; jivanam
—life; sarva —all; bhutesu —living entities; tapah —penance; ca —also; asmi —I
am; tapasvisu —in those who practice penance.
I am the original fragrance of the earth, and I am the heat in fire. I am
the life of all that lives, and I am the penances of all ascetics.
बीजं मां सर्वभूतानां विद्धि पार्थ सनातनम् | बुद्धिर्बुद्धिमतामस्मि तेजस्तेजस्विनामहम् ||७-१०||
bījaṃ māṃ sarvabhūtānāṃ viddhi pārtha sanātanam . buddhirbuddhimatāmasmi tejastejasvināmaham ||7-10||
bijam —seed; mam —unto Me; sarva-bhutanam —of all living entities; viddhi
—try to understand; partha —O son of Prtha; sanatanam —original, eternal;
buddhih —intelligence; buddhimatam —of the intelligent; asmi —I am; tejah
—prowess; tejasvinam —of the powerful; aham —I am.
O son of Prtha, know that I am the original seed of all existences, the
intelligence of the intelligent, and the prowess of all powerful men.
बलं बलवतां चाहं कामरागविवर्जितम् | धर्माविरुद्धो भूतेषु कामोऽस्मि भरतर्षभ ||७-११||
balaṃ balavatāṃ cāhaṃ kāmarāgavivarjitam . dharmāviruddho bhūteṣu kāmo.asmi bharatarṣabha ||7-11||
balam —strength; balavatam —of the strong; ca —and; aham —I am; kama —
passion; raga —attachment; vivarjitam —devoid of; dharma-aviruddha —not
against the religious principles; bhiitesu —in all beings; kamah —sex-life; asmi
—I am; bharatarsabha —O lord of the Bharatas.
I am the strength of the strong, devoid of passion and desire. I am sex
life which is not contrary to religious principles, O Lord of the Bharatas
[Arjuna].
ये चैव सात्त्विका भावा राजसास्तामसाश्च ये | मत्त एवेति तान्विद्धि न त्वहं तेषु ते मयि ||७-१२||
ye caiva sāttvikā bhāvā rājasāstāmasāśca ye . matta eveti tānviddhi na tvahaṃ teṣu te mayi ||7-12||
ye —all those; ca —and; eva —certainly; sattvikah —in goodness; bhavah —
states of being; rajasah —mode of passion; tamasah —mode of ignorance; ca
—also; ye—although; mattah —from Me; eva —certainly; iti —thus; tan —
those; viddhi —try to know; na —not; tu —but; aham —I; tesu —in those; te —
they; mayi —unto Me.
All states of being-be they of goodness, passion or ignorance—are
manifested by My energy. I am, in one sense, everything—but I am
independent. I am not under the modes of this material nature.
त्रिभिर्गुणमयैर्भावैरेभिः सर्वमिदं जगत् | मोहितं नाभिजानाति मामेभ्यः परमव्ययम् ||७-१३||
tribhirguṇamayairbhāvairebhiḥ sarvamidaṃ jagat . mohitaṃ nābhijānāti māmebhyaḥ paramavyayam ||7-13||
tribhih —three; gunamayaih —by the three gunas; bhavaih —state of being;
ebhih —all this; sarvam —the whole world; idam —in this world; jagat —
universe; mohitam —deluded; na abhijanati —do not know; mam —unto Me;
ebhyah —above these; param —the Supreme; avyayam —inexhaustible.
Deluded by the three modes [goodness, passion and ignorance], the
whole world does not know Me who am above the modes and
inexhaustible.
दैवी ह्येषा गुणमयी मम माया दुरत्यया | मामेव ये प्रपद्यन्ते मायामेतां तरन्ति ते ||७-१४||
daivī hyeṣā guṇamayī mama māyā duratyayā . māmeva ye prapadyante māyāmetāṃ taranti te ||7-14||
dam —transcendental; hi —certainly; esa —this; gunamayT —consisting of the
three modes of material nature; mama —My; maya —energy; duratyaya —very
difficult to overcome; mam —unto Me; eva —certainly; ye —those; prapadyante
—surrender; mayam etam —this illusory energy; taranti —overcome; te —they.
This divine energy of Mine, consisting of the three modes of material
nature, is difficult to overcome. But those who have surrendered unto Me
can easily cross beyond it.
न मां दुष्कृतिनो मूढाः प्रपद्यन्ते नराधमाः | माययापहृतज्ञाना आसुरं भावमाश्रिताः ||७-१५||
na māṃ duṣkṛtino mūḍhāḥ prapadyante narādhamāḥ . māyayāpahṛtajñānā āsuraṃ bhāvamāśritāḥ ||7-15||
na —not; mam —unto Me; duskrtinah —miscreants; mudhah —foolish;
prapadyante —surrender; naradhamah —lowest among mankind; mayaya — by
the illusory energy; apahrta —stolen by illusion; jhanah —knowledge; asuram
—demonic; bhavam —nature; asritah —accepting.
Those miscreants who are grossly foolish, lowest among mankind,
whose knowledge is stolen by illusion, and who partake of the atheistic
nature of demons, do not surrender unto Me.
चतुर्विधा भजन्ते मां जनाः सुकृतिनोऽर्जुन | आर्तो जिज्ञासुरर्थार्थी ज्ञानी च भरतर्षभ ||७-१६||
caturvidhā bhajante māṃ janāḥ sukṛtino.arjuna . ārto jijñāsurarthārthī jñānī ca bharatarṣabha ||7-16||
janah —persons; sukrtinah —those who are pious; arjuna —O Arjuna; artah —
the distressed; jijhasuh —the inquisitive; artha-arthi— one who desires
material gain; jhanT —one who knows things as they are; ca —also;
bharatarsabha —O great one amongst the descendants of Bharata.
O best among the Bharatas [Arjuna], four kinds of pious men render
devotional service unto Me—the distressed, the desirer of wealth, the
inquisitive, and he who is searching for knowledge of the Absolute.
तेषां ज्ञानी नित्ययुक्त एकभक्तिर्विशिष्यते | प्रियो हि ज्ञानिनोऽत्यर्थमहं स च मम प्रियः ||७-१७||
teṣāṃ jñānī nityayukta ekabhaktirviśiṣyate . priyo hi jñānino.atyarthamahaṃ sa ca mama priyaḥ ||7-17||
tesam —out of them; jnanT —one in full knowledge; nitya-yuktah —always
engaged; eka —only one; bhaktih —devotional service; visisyate —especially;
priyah —very dear; hi —certainly; jhaninah —person in knowledge; atyartham
—highly; aham —I am; sah —he; ca —also; mama —Mine; priyah —dear.
Of these, the wise one who is in full knowledge in union with Me
through pure devotional service is the best. For I am very dear to him,
and he is dear to Me.
उदाराः सर्व एवैते ज्ञानी त्वात्मैव मे मतम् | आस्थितः स हि युक्तात्मा मामेवानुत्तमां गतिम् ||७-१८||
udārāḥ sarva evaite jñānī tvātmaiva me matam . āsthitaḥ sa hi yuktātmā māmevānuttamāṃ gatim ||7-18||
udarah —magnanimous; sarve —all; eva —certainly; ete —these; jharu —one
who is in knowledge; tu —but; atma eva —just like Myself; me —Mine; matam
—opinion; asthitah —situated; sah —he; hi —certainly; yukta-atma —engaged in
devotional service; mam —unto Me; eva —certainly; anuttamam —the highest
goal; gatim —destination.
All these devotees are undoubtedly magnanimous souls, but he who is
situated in knowledge of Me I consider verily to dwell in Me. Being
engaged in My transcendental service, he attains Me.
बहूनां जन्मनामन्ते ज्ञानवान्मां प्रपद्यते | वासुदेवः सर्वमिति स महात्मा सुदुर्लभः ||७-१९||
bahūnāṃ janmanāmante jñānavānmāṃ prapadyate . vāsudevaḥ sarvamiti sa mahātmā sudurlabhaḥ ||7-19||
bahunam —many; janmanam —births; ante —after; jnanavan —he possessing
knowledge; mam —unto Me; prapadyate —surrenders; vasudevah —cause of all
causes; sarvam —all; iti —thus; sah —such; mahatma —great soul; sudurlabhah
—very rare.
After many births and deaths, he who is actually in knowledge
surrenders unto Me, knowing Me to be the cause of all causes and all that
is. Such a great soul is very rare.
कामैस्तैस्तैर्हृतज्ञानाः प्रपद्यन्तेऽन्यदेवताः | तं तं नियममास्थाय प्रकृत्या नियताः स्वया ||७-२०||
kāmaistaistairhṛtajñānāḥ prapadyante.anyadevatāḥ . taṃ taṃ niyamamāsthāya prakṛtyā niyatāḥ svayā ||7-20||
kamaih —by desires; taih —by those; taih —by those; hrta —distorted; jhanah
—knowledge; prapadyante —surrender; anya —other; devatah —demigods; tam
—that; tam —that; niyamam —rules; asthaya —following; prakrtya —by nature;
niyatah —controlled; svaya —by their own.
Those whose minds are distorted by material desires surrender unto
demigods and follow the particular rules and regulations of worship
according to their own natures.
यो यो यां यां तनुं भक्तः श्रद्धयार्चितुमिच्छति | तस्य तस्याचलां श्रद्धां तामेव विदधाम्यहम् ||७-२१||
yo yo yāṃ yāṃ tanuṃ bhaktaḥ śraddhayārcitumicchati . tasya tasyācalāṃ śraddhāṃ tāmeva vidadhāmyaham ||7-21||
yah —that; yah —that; yam —which; yam —which; tanum —form of the
demigods; bhaktah —devotee; sraddhaya —with faith; arcitum —to worship;
icchati —desires; tasya —of that; tasya —of that; acalam —steady; sraddham —
faith; tarn —him; eva —surely; vidadhami —give; aham —I.
I am in everyone`s heart as the Supersoul. As soon as one desires to
worship the demigods, I make his faith steady so that he can devote
himself to some particular deity.
स तया श्रद्धया युक्तस्तस्याराधनमीहते | लभते च ततः कामान्मयैव विहितान्हि तान् ||७-२२||
sa tayā śraddhayā yuktastasyārādhanamīhate . labhate ca tataḥ kāmānmayaivavihitānhi tān ||7-22||
sah —he; taya —with that; sraddhaya —with faith; yuktah —endowed; tasya
—his; aradhanam —worship; Thate —seeks; labhate —obtains; ca —and; tatah
—from which; kaman —desires; maya —by Me; eva —alone; vihitan —
regulated; hi —for; tan —those.
Endowed with such a faith, he seeks favors of a particular demigod and
obtains his desires. But in actuality these benefits are bestowed by Me
alone.
अन्तवत्तु फलं तेषां तद्भवत्यल्पमेधसाम् | देवान्देवयजो यान्ति मद्भक्ता यान्ति मामपि ||७-२३||
antavattu phalaṃ teṣāṃ tadbhavatyalpamedhasām . devāndevayajo yānti madbhaktā yānti māmapi ||7-23||
antavat tu —limited and temporary; phalam —fruits; tesam —their; tat — that;
bhavati —becomes; alpa-medhasam —of those of small intelligence; devan
—demigods` planets; deva-yajah —worshipers of demigods; yanti — achieve;
mat —My; bhaktah —devotees; yanti —attain; mam —unto Me; api — surely.
Men of small intelligence worship the demigods, and their fruits are
limited and temporary. Those who worship the demigods go to the planets
of the demigods, but My devotees ultimately reach My supreme planet.
अव्यक्तं व्यक्तिमापन्नं मन्यन्ते मामबुद्धयः | परं भावमजानन्तो ममाव्ययमनुत्तमम् ||७-२४||
avyaktaṃ vyaktimāpannaṃ manyante māmabuddhayaḥ . paraṃ bhāvamajānanto mamāvyayamanuttamam ||7-24||
avyaktam —nonmanifested; vyaktim —personality; apannam —achieved;
manyante —think; mam —unto Me; abuddhayah —less intelligent persons;
param —supreme; bhavam —state of being; ajanantah —without knowing;
mama —My; avyayam —imperishable; anuttamam —the finest.
Unintelligent men, who know Me not, think that I have assumed this
form and personality. Due to their small knowledge, they do not know My
higher nature, which is changeless and supreme.
नाहं प्रकाशः सर्वस्य योगमायासमावृतः | मूढोऽयं नाभिजानाति लोको मामजमव्ययम् ||७-२५||
nāhaṃ prakāśaḥ sarvasya yogamāyāsamāvṛtaḥ . mūḍho.ayaṃ nābhijānāti loko māmajamavyayam ||7-25||
na —nor; aham —I; prakasah —manifest; sarvasya —to everyone; yoga-maya
—internal potency; samavrtah —covered; mudhah —foolish; ayam —this; na —
not; abhijanati —can understand; lokah —such less intelligent persons; mam —
Me; ajam —unborn; avyayam —inexhaustible.
I am never manifest to the foolish and unintelligent. For them I am
covered by My eternal creative potency [yoga-maya]; and so the deluded
world knows Me not, who am unborn and infallible.
वेदाहं समतीतानि वर्तमानानि चार्जुन | भविष्याणि च भूतानि मां तु वेद न कश्चन ||७-२६||
vedāhaṃ samatītāni vartamānāni cārjuna . bhaviṣyāṇi ca bhūtāni māṃ tu veda na kaścana ||7-26||
veda —know; aham —I; sama —equally; atitani —past; vartamanani
—present; ca —and; arjuna —O Arjuna; bhavisyani —future; ca —also; bhutani
— living entities; mam —Me; tu —but; veda —knows; na —not; kascana
—anyone.
O Arjuna, as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, I know everything
that has happened in the past, all that is happening in the present, and all
things that are yet to come. I also know all living entities; but Me no one
knows.
इच्छाद्वेषसमुत्थेन द्वन्द्वमोहेन भारत | सर्वभूतानि सम्मोहं सर्गे यान्ति परन्तप ||७-२७||
icchādveṣasamutthena dvandvamohena bhārata . sarvabhūtāni sammohaṃ sarge yānti parantapa ||7-27||
iccha —desire; dvesa —hate; samutthena —born; dvandva —duality; mohena
—overcome; bharata —O scion of Bharata; sarva —all; bhutani —living
entities; sammoham —into delusion; sarge —in creation; yanti —go; parantapa
—O conquerer of enemies.
O scion of Bharata [Arjuna], O conquerer of the foe, all living entities
are born into delusion, overcome by the dualities of desire and hate.
येषां त्वन्तगतं पापं जनानां पुण्यकर्मणाम् | ते द्वन्द्वमोहनिर्मुक्ता भजन्ते मां दृढव्रताः ||७-२८||
yeṣāṃ tvantagataṃ pāpaṃ janānāṃ puṇyakarmaṇām . te dvandvamohanirmuktā bhajante māṃ dṛḍhavratāḥ ||7-28||
yesam —whose; tu —but; anta-gatam —completely eradicated; papam —sin;
jananam —of the persons; punya —pious; karmanam —previous activities; te
—they; dvandva —duality; moha —delusion; nirmuktah —free from; bhajante
—worship; mam —Me; drdha-vratah —with determination.
Persons who have acted piously in previous lives and in this life, whose
sinful actions are completely eradicated and who are freed from the
duality of delusion, engage themselves in My service with determination.
जरामरणमोक्षाय मामाश्रित्य यतन्ति ये | ते ब्रह्म तद्विदुः कृत्स्नमध्यात्मं कर्म चाखिलम् ||७-२९||
jarāmaraṇamokṣāya māmāśritya yatanti ye . te brahma tadviduḥ kṛtsnamadhyātmaṃ karma cākhilam ||7-29||
jara —old age; marana —death; moksaya —for the purpose of liberation;
mam —unto Me; asritya —taking shelter of; yatanti —endeavor; ye —all those;
te —such persons; brahma —Brahman; tat —actually that; viduh —they know;
krtsnam —everything; adhyatmam —transcendental; karma —fruitive activities;
ca —also; akhilam —entirely.
Intelligent persons who are endeavoring for liberation from old age and
death take refuge in Me in devotional service. They are actually Brahman
because they entirely know everything about transcendental and fruitive
activities.
साधिभूताधिदैवं मां साधियज्ञं च ये विदुः | प्रयाणकालेऽपि च मां ते विदुर्युक्तचेतसः ||७-३०||
sādhibhūtādhidaivaṃ māṃ sādhiyajñaṃ ca ye viduḥ . prayāṇakāle.api ca māṃ te viduryuktacetasaḥ ||7-30||
sa-adhibhuta —the governing principle of the material manifestation;
adhidaivam —underlying all the demigods; mam —Me; sa-adhiyajham
—sustaining all sacrifices; ca —and; ye —those; viduh —know; prayana —of
death; kale —at the time; api —even; ca —and; mam —Me; te —they; viduh —
know; yukta-cetasah —with steadfast mind.
Those who know Me as the Supreme Lord, as the governing principle
of the material manifestation, who know Me as the one underlying all the
demigods and as the one sustaining all sacrifices, can, with steadfast
mind, understand and know Me even at the time of death.
Глава 8
अर्जुन उवाच | किं तद् ब्रह्म किमध्यात्मं किं कर्म पुरुषोत्तम | अधिभूतं च किं प्रोक्तमधिदैवं किमुच्यते ||८-१||
arjuna uvāca . kiṃ tad brahma kimadhyātmaṃ kiṃ karma puruṣottama . adhibhūtaṃ ca kiṃ proktamadhidaivaṃ kimucyate ||8-1||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; kim —what; tat —that; brahma —Brahman; kim
—what; adhyatmam —the self; kim —what; karma —fruitive activities;
purusottama —O Supreme Person; adhibhutam —the material manifestation;
ca —and; kim —what; proktam —is called; adhidaivam —the demigods; kim —
what; ucyate —is called.
Arjuna inquired: O my Lord, O Supreme Person, what is Brahman?
What is the self? What are fruitive activities? What is this material
manifestation? And what are the demigods? Please explain this to me.
अधियज्ञः कथं कोऽत्र देहेऽस्मिन्मधुसूदन | प्रयाणकाले च कथं ज्ञेयोऽसि नियतात्मभिः ||८-२||
adhiyajñaḥ kathaṃ ko.atra dehe.asminmadhusūdana . prayāṇakāle ca kathaṃ jñeyo.asi niyatātmabhiḥ ||8-2||
adhiyajhah —the Lord of sacrifice; katham —how; kah —who; atra —here;
dehe —in the body; asmin —in this; madhusudana —O Madhusudana; prayana-
kale —at the time of death; ca —and; katham —how; jheyah —be known; asi
—You can; niyata-atmabhih —by the self-controlled.
How does this Lord of sacrifice live in the body, and in which part does
He live, O Madhusudana? And how can those engaged in devotional
service know You at the time of death?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | अक्षरं ब्रह्म परमं स्वभावोऽध्यात्ममुच्यते | भूतभावोद्भवकरो विसर्गः कर्मसंज्ञितः ||८-३||
śrībhagavānuvāca . akṣaraṃ brahma paramaṃ svabhāvo.adhyātmamucyate . bhūtabhāvodbhavakaro visargaḥ karmasaṃjñitaḥ ||8-3||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; aksaram —
indestructible; brahma —Brahman; paramam —transcendental; svabhavah —
eternal nature; adhyatmam —the self; ucyate —is called; bhuta-bhava-
udbhava-karah —action producing the material bodies of the living entities;
visargah —creation; karma —fruitive activities; sarhjhitah —is called.
The Supreme Lord said, The indestructible, transcendental living
entity is called Brahman, and his eternal nature is called the self. Action
pertaining to the development of these material bodies is called karma, or
fruitive activities.
अधिभूतं क्षरो भावः पुरुषश्चाधिदैवतम् | अधियज्ञोऽहमेवात्र देहे देहभृतां वर ||८-४||
adhibhūtaṃ kṣaro bhāvaḥ puruṣaścādhidaivatam . adhiyajño.ahamevātra dehe dehabhṛtāṃ vara ||8-4||
adhibhutam —the physical manifestation; ksarah —constantly changing;
bhavah —nature; purusah —the universal form; ca —and; adhidaivatam —
including all demigods like the sun and moon; adhiyajhah —the Supersoul;
aham —I (Krsna); eva —certainly; atra —in this; dehe —body; deha-bhrtam —
of the embodied; vara —the Supreme.
Physical nature is known to be endlessly mutable. The universe is the
cosmic form of the Supreme Lord, and I am that Lord represented as the
Supersoul, dwelling in the heart of every embodied being.
अन्तकाले च मामेव स्मरन्मुक्त्वा कलेवरम् | यः प्रयाति स मद्भावं याति नास्त्यत्र संशयः ||८-५||
antakāle ca māmeva smaranmuktvā kalevaram . yaḥ prayāti sa madbhāvaṃ yāti nāstyatra saṃśayaḥ ||8-5||
anta-kale —at the end of life; ca —also; mam —unto Me; eva —certainly;
smaran —remembering; muktva —quitting; kalevaram —the body; yah —he
who; prayati —goes; sah —he; mad-bhavam —My nature; yati —achieves; na —
not; asti —there is; atra —here; samsayah —doubt.
And whoever, at the time of death, quits his body, remembering Me
alone, at once attains My nature. Of this there is no doubt.
यं यं वापि स्मरन्भावं त्यजत्यन्ते कलेवरम् | तं तमेवैति कौन्तेय सदा तद्भावभावितः ||८-६||
yaṃ yaṃ vāpi smaranbhāvaṃ tyajatyante kalevaram . taṃ tamevaiti kaunteya sadā tadbhāvabhāvitaḥ ||8-6||
yam yam —whatever; va —either; api —also; smaran —remembering;
bhavam —nature; tyajati —give up; ante —at the end; kalevaram —this body;
tarn tarn —similar; eva —certainly; eti —gets; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; sada
—always; tat —that; bhava —state of being; bhavitah —remembering.
Whatever state of being one remembers when he quits his body, that
state he will attain without fail.
तस्मात्सर्वेषु कालेषु मामनुस्मर युध्य च | मय्यर्पितमनोबुद्धिर्मामेवैष्यस्यसंशयः (orसंशयम्) ||८-७||
tasmātsarveṣu kāleṣu māmanusmara yudhya ca . mayyarpitamanobuddhirmāmevaiṣyasyasaṃśayaḥ ||8-7||
tasmat —therefore; sarvesu —always; kalesu —time; mam —unto Me;
anusmara —go on remembering; yudhya —fight; ca —also; mayi —unto Me;
arpita —surrender; manah —mind; buddhih —intellect; mam —unto Me; eva —
surely; esyasi —will attain; asamsayah —beyond a doubt.
Therefore, Arjuna, you should always think of Me in the form of Krsna
and at the same time carry out your prescribed duty of fighting. With
your activities dedicated to Me and your mind and intelligence fixed on
Me, you will attain Me without doubt.
अभ्यासयोगयुक्तेन चेतसा नान्यगामिना | परमं पुरुषं दिव्यं याति पार्थानुचिन्तयन् ||८-८||
orsaṃśayama abhyāsayogayuktena cetasā nānyagāminā . paramaṃ puruṣaṃ divyaṃ yāti pārthānucintayan ||8-8||
abhyasa —practice; yoga-yuktena —being engaged in meditation; cetasa —
by the mind and intelligence; na anya-gamina —without being deviated;
paramam —the Supreme; purusam —Personality of Godhead; divyam —
transcendental; yati —achieves; partha —O son of Prtha; anucintayan
—constantly thinking of.
He who meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, his mind
constantly engaged in remembering Me, undeviated from the path, he, O
Partha [Arjuna], is sure to reach Me.
कविं पुराणमनुशासितार- मणोरणीयंसमनुस्मरेद्यः | सर्वस्य धातारमचिन्त्यरूप- मादित्यवर्णं तमसः परस्तात् ||८-९||
kaviṃ purāṇamanuśāsitāraṃ aṇoraṇīyaṃsamanusmaredyaḥ . sarvasya dhātāramacintyarūpaṃ ādityavarṇaṃ tamasaḥ parastāt ||8-9||
kavim —one who knows everything; puranam —the oldest; anusasitaram —
the controller; anoh —of the atom; amyamsam —smaller than; anusmaret —
always thinking; yah —one who; sarvasya —of everything; dhataram
—maintainer; acintya —inconceivable; rupam —form; aditya-varnam
—illuminated like the sun; tamasah —of the darkness; parastat —
transcendental.
One should meditate upon the Supreme Person as the one who knows
everything, as He who is the oldest, who is the controller, who is smaller
than the smallest, who is the maintainer of everything, who is beyond all
material conception, who is inconceivable, and who is always a person. He
is luminous like the sun and, being transcendental, is beyond this material
nature.
प्रयाणकाले मनसाऽचलेन भक्त्या युक्तो योगबलेन चैव | भ्रुवोर्मध्ये प्राणमावेश्य सम्यक् स तं परं पुरुषमुपैति दिव्यम् ||८-१०||
prayāṇakāle manasā.acalena bhaktyā yukto yogabalena caiva . bhruvormadhye prāṇamāveśya samyak sa taṃ paraṃ puruṣamupaiti divyam ||8-10||
prayana-kale —at the time of death; manasa —by the mind; acalena —
without being deviated; bhaktya —in full devotion; yuktah —engaged; yoga-
balena —by the power of mystic yoga; ca —also; eva —certainly; bhruvoh —
between the two eyebrows; madhye —in; pranam —the life air; avesya —
establishing; samyak —completely; sah —he; tarn —that; param —
transcendental; purusam —Personality of Godhead; upaiti —achieves; divyam
—in the spiritual kingdom.
One who, at the time of death, fixes his life air between the eyebrows
and in full devotion engages himself in remembering the Supreme Lord,
will certainly attain to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
यदक्षरं वेदविदो वदन्ति विशन्ति यद्यतयो वीतरागाः | यदिच्छन्तो ब्रह्मचर्यं चरन्ति तत्ते पदं संग्रहेण प्रवक्ष्ये ||८-११||
yadakṣaraṃ vedavido vadanti viśanti yadyatayo vītarāgāḥ . yadicchanto brahmacaryaṃ caranti tatte padaṃ saṃgraheṇa pravakṣye ||8-11||
yat —that which; aksaram —inexhaustible; veda-vidah —a person conversant
with the Vedas; vadanti —say; visanti —enters; yat —in which; yatayah —great
sages; vita-ragah —in the renounced order of life; yat —that which; icchantah
—desiring; brahmacaryam —celibacy; caranti —practices; tat —that; te —unto
you; padam —situation; sangrahena —in summary; pravaksye —I shall explain.
Persons learned in the Vedas, who utter omkara and who are great
sages in the renounced order, enter into Brahman. Desiring such
perfection, one practices celibacy. I shall now explain to you this process
by which one may attain salvation.
सर्वद्वाराणि संयम्य मनो हृदि निरुध्य च | मूध्न्यार्धायात्मनः प्राणमास्थितो योगधारणाम् ||८-१२||
sarvadvārāṇi saṃyamya mano hṛdi nirudhya ca . mūdhnyā^^rdhāyātmanaḥ prāṇamāsthito yogadhāraṇām ||8-12||
sarva-dvarani —all the doors of the body; samyamya —controlling; manah
—mind; hrdi —in the heart; nirudhya —confined; ca —also; murdhni —on the
head; adhaya —fixed; atmanah —soul; pranam —the life air; asthitah
—situated; yoga-dharanam —the yogic situation.
The yogic situation is that of detachment from all sensual engagements.
Closing all the doors of the senses and fixing the mind on the heart and
the life air at the top of the head, one establishes himself in yoga.
ओमित्येकाक्षरं ब्रह्म व्याहरन्मामनुस्मरन् | यः प्रयाति त्यजन्देहं स याति परमां गतिम् ||८-१३||
omityekākṣaraṃ brahma vyāharanmāmanusmaran . yaḥ prayāti tyajandehaṃ sa yāti paramāṃ gatim ||8-13||
om —the combination of letters, omkara; id —thus; eka-aksaram —
supreme, indestructible; brahma —absolute; vyaharan —vibrating; mam —Me
(Krsna); anusmaran —remembering; yah —anyone; prayati —leaves; tyajan —
quitting; deham —this body; sah —he; yati —achieves; paramam —supreme;
gatim — destination.
After being situated in this yoga practice and vibrating the sacred
syllable om, the supreme combination of letters, if one thinks of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and quits his body, he will certainly
reach the spiritual planets.
अनन्यचेताः सततं यो मां स्मरति नित्यशः | तस्याहं सुलभः पार्थ नित्ययुक्तस्य योगिनः ||८-१४||
ananyacetāḥ satataṃ yo māṃ smarati nityaśaḥ . tasyāhaṃ sulabhaḥ pārtha nityayuktasya yoginaḥ ||8-14||
ananya-cetah —without deviation; satatam —always; yah —anyone; mam —
Me (Krsna); smarati —remembers; nityasah —regularly; tasya —to him; aham
—I am; sulabhah —very easy to achieve; partha —O son of Prtha; nitya —
regularly; yuktasya —engaged; yoginah —of the devotee.
For one who remembers Me without deviation, I am easy to obtain, O
son of Prtha, because of his constant engagement in devotional service.
मामुपेत्य पुनर्जन्म दुःखालयमशाश्वतम् | नाप्नुवन्ति महात्मानः संसिद्धिं परमां गताः ||८-१५||
māmupetya punarjanma duḥkhālayamaśāśvatam . nāpnuvanti mahātmānaḥ saṃsiddhiṃ paramāṃ gatāḥ ||8-15||
mam —unto Me; upetya —achieving; punah —again; janma —birth; duhkha-
alayam —place of miseries; asasvatam —temporary; na —never; apnuvanti —
attain; mahatmanah —the great souls; samsiddhim —perfection; paramam
—ultimate; gatah —achieved.
After attaining Me, the great souls, who are yogis in devotion, never
return to this temporary world, which is full of miseries, because they
have attained the highest perfection.
आब्रह्मभुवनाल्लोकाः पुनरावर्तिनोऽर्जुन | मामुपेत्य तु कौन्तेय पुनर्जन्म न विद्यते ||८-१६||
ābrahmabhuvanāllokāḥ punarāvartino.arjuna . māmupetya tu kaunteya punarjanma na vidyate ||8-16||
abrahma —up to the Brahmaloka planet; bhuvanat —from the planetary
systems; lokah —planets; punah —again; avartinah —returning; arjuna —O
Arjuna; mam —unto Me; upetya —arriving; tu —but; kaunteya —O son of
KuntI; punah janma —rebirth; na —never; vidyate —takes to.
From the highest planet in the material world down to the lowest, all
are places of misery wherein repeated birth and death take place. But one
who attains to My abode, O son of KuntI, never takes birth again.
सहस्रयुगपर्यन्तमहर्यद् ब्रह्मणो विदुः | रात्रिं युगसहस्रान्तां तेऽहोरात्रविदो जनाः ||८-१७||
sahasrayugaparyantamaharyad brahmaṇo viduḥ . rātriṃ yugasahasrāntāṃ te.ahorātravido janāḥ ||8-17||
sahasra —thousand; yuga —millenniums; prayantam —including; ahah —
day; yat —that; brahmanah —of Brahma; viduh —know it; ratrim —night; yuga
—millenniums; sahasra-antam —similarly, at the end of one thousand; te
—that; ahah-ratra —day and night; vidah —understand; janah —people.
By human calculation, a thousand ages taken together is the duration
of Brahma`s one day. And such also is the duration of his night.
अव्यक्ताद् व्यक्तयः सर्वाः प्रभवन्त्यहरागमे | रात्र्यागमे प्रलीयन्ते तत्रैवाव्यक्तसंज्ञके ||८-१८||
avyaktād vyaktayaḥ sarvāḥ prabhavantyaharāgame . rātryāgame pralīyante tatraivāvyaktasaṃjñake ||8-18||
avyaktat —from the unmanifest; vyaktayah —living entities; sarvah —all;
prabhavanti —come into being; ahah-agame —at the beginning of the day;
ratri-agame —at the fall of night; pralTyante —are annihilated; tatra —there;
eva —certainly; avyakta —the unmanifest; samjhake —called.
When Brahma`s day is manifest, this multitude of living entities comes
into being, and at the arrival of Brahma`s night they are all annihilated.
भूतग्रामः स एवायं भूत्वा भूत्वा प्रलीयते | रात्र्यागमेऽवशः पार्थ प्रभवत्यहरागमे ||८-१९||
bhūtagrāmaḥ sa evāyaṃ bhūtvā bhūtvā pralīyate . rātryāgame.avaśaḥ pārtha prabhavatyaharāgame ||8-19||
ratri —night; agame —on arrival; avasah —automatically; partha —O son of
Prtha; prabhavanti —manifest; ahah —during daytime; agame —on arrival.
Again and again the day conies, and this host of beings is active; and
again the night falls, O Partha, and they are helplessly dissolved.
परस्तस्मात्तु भावोऽन्योऽव्यक्तोऽव्यक्तात्सनातनः | यः स सर्वेषु भूतेषु नश्यत्सु न विनश्यति ||८-२०||
parastasmāttu bhāvo.anyo.avyakto.avyaktātsanātanaḥ . yaḥ sa sarveṣu bhūteṣu naśyatsu na vinaśyati ||8-20||
par ah —transcendental; tasmat —from that; tu —but; bhavah —nature; any ah
—another; avyaktah —unmanifest; avyaktat —from the unmanifest; sanatanah
—eternal; yah —that; sah —which; sarvesu —all; bhutesu —manifestation;
nasyatsu —being annihilated; na —never; vinasyati —annihilated.
Yet there is another nature, which is eternal and is transcendental to
this manifested and unmanifested matter. It is supreme and is never
annihilated. When all in this world is annihilated, that part remains as it
is.
अव्यक्तोऽक्षर इत्युक्तस्तमाहुः परमां गतिम् | यं प्राप्य न निवर्तन्ते तद्धाम परमं मम ||८-२१||
avyakto.akṣara ityuktastamāhuḥ paramāṃ gatim . yaṃ prāpya na nivartante taddhāma paramaṃ mama ||8-21||
avyaktah —unmanifested; aksarah —infallible; iti —thus; uktah —said; tam
—that which; ahuh —is known; paramam —ultimate; gatim —destination; yam
—that which; prapya —gaining; na —never; nivartante —comes back; tat-
dhama —that abode; paramam —supreme; mama —Mine.
That supreme abode is called unmanifested and infallible, and it is the
supreme destination. When one goes there, he never comes back. That is
My supreme abode.
पुरुषः स परः पार्थ भक्त्या लभ्यस्त्वनन्यया | यस्यान्तःस्थानि भूतानि येन सर्वमिदं ततम् ||८-२२||
puruṣaḥ sa paraḥ pārtha bhaktyā labhyastvananyayā . yasyāntaḥsthāni bhūtāni yena sarvamidaṃ tatam ||8-22||
purusah —the Supreme Personality; sah —He; parah —the Supreme, than
whom no one is greater; partha —O son of Prtha; bhaktya —by devotional
service; labhyah —can be achieved; tu —but; ananyaya —unalloyed,
undeviating devotion; yasya —His; antahsthani —within; bhutani —all this
material manifestation; yena —by whom; sarvam —all; idam —whatever we can
see; tatam —distributed.
The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than all, is
attainable by unalloyed devotion. Although He is present in His abode. He
is all-pervading, and everything is situated within Him.
यत्र काले त्वनावृत्तिमावृत्तिं चैव योगिनः | प्रयाता यान्ति तं कालं वक्ष्यामि भरतर्षभ ||८-२३||
yatra kāle tvanāvṛttimāvṛttiṃ caiva yoginaḥ . prayātā yānti taṃ kālaṃ vakṣyāmi bharatarṣabha ||8-23||
yatra —in that; kale —time; tu —but; anavrttim —no return; avrttim — return;
ca —also; eva —certainly; yoginah —of different kinds of mystics; prayatah
—one who goes; yanti —departs; tam —that; kalam —time; vaksyami —
describing; bharatarsabha —O best of the Bharatas.
O best of the Bharatas, I shall now explain to you the different times at
which, passing away from this world, one does or does not come back.
अग्निर्जोतिरहः शुक्लः षण्मासा उत्तरायणम् | तत्र प्रयाता गच्छन्ति ब्रह्म ब्रह्मविदो जनाः ||८-२४||
agnirjotirahaḥ śuklaḥ ṣaṇmāsā uttarāyaṇam . tatra prayātā gacchanti brahma brahmavido janāḥ ||8-24||
agnih —fire; jyotih —light; ahah —day; suklah —white; sat-masah —six
months; uttarayanam —when the sun passes on the northern side; tatra —
there; prayatah —one who goes; gacchanti —passes away; brahma —the
Absolute; brahma-vidah —one who knows the Absolute; janah —person.
Those who know the Supreme Brahman pass away from the world
during the influence of the fiery god, in the light, at an auspicious
moment, during the fortnight of the moon and the six months when the
sun travels in the north.
धूमो रात्रिस्तथा कृष्णः षण्मासा दक्षिणायनम् | तत्र चान्द्रमसं ज्योतिर्योगी प्राप्य निवर्तते ||८-२५||
dhūmo rātristathā kṛṣṇaḥ ṣaṇmāsā dakṣiṇāyanam . tatra cāndramasaṃ jyotiryogī prāpya nivartate ||8-25||
dhumah —smoke; ratrih —night; tatha —also; krsnah —the fortnight of the
dark moon; sat-masah —the six months; daksina-ayanam —when the sun
passes on the southern side; tatra —there; candramasam —the moon planet;
jyotih —light, yogi —the mystic; prapya —achieves; nivartate —comes back.
The mystic who passes away from this world during the smoke, the
night, the moonlight fortnight, or in the six months when the sun passes to
the south, or who reaches the moon planet, again comes back.
शुक्लकृष्णे गती ह्येते जगतः शाश्वते मते | एकया यात्यनावृत्तिमन्ययावर्तते पुनः ||८-२६||
śuklakṛṣṇe gatī hyete jagataḥ śāśvate mate . ekayā yātyanāvṛttimanyayāvartate punaḥ ||8-26||
sukla —light; krsne —darkness; gatT —passing away; hi —certainly; ete —all
these; jagatah —of the material world; sasvate —the Vedas; mate —in the
opinion; ekaya —by one; yati —goes; anavrttim —no return; anyaya —by the
other; avartate —comes back; punah —again.
According to the Vedas, there are two ways of passing from this world
—one in light and one in darkness. When one passes in light, he does not
come back; but when one passes in darkness, he returns.
नैते सृती पार्थ जानन्योगी मुह्यति कश्चन | तस्मात्सर्वेषु कालेषु योगयुक्तो भवार्जुन ||८-२७||
naite sṛtī pārtha jānanyogī muhyati kaścana . tasmātsarveṣu kāleṣu yogayukto bhavārjuna ||8-27||
na —never; ete —all these; srtT —different paths; partha —O son of Prtha;
janan —even if they know; yogi —the devotees of the Lord; muhyati —
bewildered; kascana —anyone; tasmat —therefore; sarvesu kalesu —always;
yoga-yuktah —being engaged in Krsna consciousness; bhava —just become;
arjuna —O Arjuna.
The devotees who know these two paths, O Arjuna, are never
bewildered. Therefore be always fixed in devotion.
वेदेषु यज्ञेषु तपःसु चैव दानेषु यत्पुण्यफलं प्रदिष्टम् | अत्येति तत्सर्वमिदं विदित्वा योगी परं स्थानमुपैति चाद्यम् ||८-२८||
vedeṣu yajñeṣu tapaḥsu caiva dāneṣu yatpuṇyaphalaṃ pradiṣṭam . atyeti tatsarvamidaṃ viditvā yogī paraṃ sthānamupaiti cādyam ||8-28||
vedesu —in the study of the Vedas; yajnesu —in the performances of yajha,
sacrifice; tapahsu —undergoing different types of austerities; ca —also; eva
—certainly; danesu —in giving charities; yat —that which; puny a- phalam —the
result of pious work; pradistam —directed; atyed —surpasses; tat —all those;
sarvam idam —all those described above; viditva —knowing; yogi —the
devotee; param —supreme; sthanam —abode; upaid —achieved peace; ca
—also; adyam —original.
A person who accepts the path of devotional service is not bereft of the
results derived from studying the Vedas, performing austere sacrifices,
giving charity or pursuing philosophical and fruitive activities. At the end
he reaches the supreme abode.
Глава 9
श्रीभगवानुवाच | इदं तु ते गुह्यतमं प्रवक्ष्याम्यनसूयवे | ज्ञानं विज्ञानसहितं यज्ज्ञात्वा मोक्ष्यसेऽशुभात् ||९-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . idaṃ tu te guhyatamaṃ pravakṣyāmyanasūyave . jñānaṃ vijñānasahitaṃ yajjñātvā mokṣyase.aśubhāt ||9-1||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; idam —
this; tu —but; te —unto you; guhyatamam —most confidential; pravaksyami —I
am speaking; anasuyave —to the nonenvious; jhanam —knowledge; vijhana
—realized knowledge; sahitam —with; yat —which; jnatva —knowing;
moksyase —be released; asubhat —from this miserable material existence.
The Supreme Lord said: My dear Arjuna, because you are never
envious of Me, I shall impart to you this most secret wisdom, knowing
which you shall be relieved of the miseries of material existence.
राजविद्या राजगुह्यं पवित्रमिदमुत्तमम् | प्रत्यक्षावगमं धर्म्यं सुसुखं कर्तुमव्ययम् ||९-२||
rājavidyā rājaguhyaṃ pavitramidamuttamam . pratyakṣāvagamaṃ dharmyaṃ susukhaṃ kartumavyayam ||9-2||
raja-vidya —the king of education; raja-guhyam —the king of confidential
knowledge; pavitram —the purest; idam —this; uttamam —transcendental;
pratyaksa —directly experienced; avagamam —understood; dharmyam —the
principle of religion; susukham —very happy; kartum —to execute; avyayam
—everlasting.
This knowledge is the king of education, the most secret of all secrets. It
is the purest knowledge, and because it gives direct perception of the self
by realization, it is the perfection of religion. It is everlasting, and it is
joyfully performed.
अश्रद्दधानाः पुरुषा धर्मस्यास्य परन्तप | अप्राप्य मां निवर्तन्ते मृत्युसंसारवर्त्मनि ||९-३||
aśraddadhānāḥ puruṣā dharmasyāsya parantapa . aprāpya māṃ nivartante mṛtyusaṃsāravartmani ||9-3||
asraddadhanah —those who are faithless; purusah —such persons;
dharmasya —of this process of religion; asya —of it; parantapa —O killer of
the enemies; aprapya —without obtaining; mam —Me; nivartante —come back;
mrtyu —death; samsara —material existence; vartmani —on the path of.
Those who are not faithful on the path of devotional service cannot
attain Me, O conqueror of foes, but return to birth and death in this
material world.
मया ततमिदं सर्वं जगदव्यक्तमूर्तिना | मत्स्थानि सर्वभूतानि न चाहं तेष्ववस्थितः ||९-४||
mayā tatamidaṃ sarvaṃ jagadavyaktamūrtinā . matsthāni sarvabhūtāni na cāhaṃ teṣvavasthitaḥ ||9-4||
maya —by Me; tatam —spread; idam —all these manifestations; sarvam —
all; jagat —cosmic manifestation; avyakta-murtind —unmanifested form; mat-
sthani —unto Me; sarva-bhutani —all living entities; na —not; ca —also; aham
— I; tesu —in them; avasthitah —situated.
By Me, in My unmanifested form, this entire universe is pervaded. All
beings are in Me, but I am not in them.
न च मत्स्थानि भूतानि पश्य मे योगमैश्वरम् | भूतभृन्न च भूतस्थो ममात्मा भूतभावनः ||९-५||
na ca matsthāni bhūtāni paśya me yogamaiśvaram . bhūtabhṛnna ca bhūtastho mamātmā bhūtabhāvanaḥ ||9-5||
na —never; ca —also; mat-sthani —situated in Me; bhutani —all creation;
pasya —just see; me —My; yogam aisvaram —inconceivable mystic power;
bhuta-bhrt —maintainer of all living entities; na —never; ca —also; bhuta-
sthah —in the cosmic manifestation; mama —My; atma —Self; bhuta-
bhavanah —isthe source of all manifestations.
And yet everything that is created does not rest in Me. Behold My
mystic opulence! Although I am the maintainer of all living entities, and
although I am everywhere, still My Self is the very source of creation.
यथाकाशस्थितो नित्यं वायुः सर्वत्रगो महान् | तथा सर्वाणि भूतानि मत्स्थानीत्युपधारय ||९-६||
yathākāśasthito nityaṃ vāyuḥ sarvatrago mahān . tathā sarvāṇi bhūtāni matsthānītyupadhāraya ||9-6||
yatha —as much as; akasa-sthitah —situated in space; nityam —always;
vayuh —wind; sarvatra-gah —blowing everywhere; mahan —great; tatha —
similarly; sarvani —everything, bhutani —created beings; mat-sthani —situated
in Me; id —thus; upadharaya —try to understand.
As the mighty wind, blowing everywhere, always rests in ethereal
space, know that in the same manner all beings rest in Me.
सर्वभूतानि कौन्तेय प्रकृतिं यान्ति मामिकाम् | कल्पक्षये पुनस्तानि कल्पादौ विसृजाम्यहम् ||९-७||
sarvabhūtāni kaunteya prakṛtiṃ yānti māmikām . kalpakṣaye punastāni kalpādau visṛjāmyaham ||9-7||
sarva-bhutani —all created entities; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; prakrtim —
nature; yanti —enter; mamikam —unto Me; kalpa-ksaye —at the end of the
millennium; punah —again; tani —all those; kalpa-adau —in the beginning of
the millennium; visrjami —I create; aham —I.
O son of KuntI, at the end of the millennium every material
manifestation enters into My nature, and at the beginning of another
millennium, by My potency I again create.
प्रकृतिं स्वामवष्टभ्य विसृजामि पुनः पुनः | भूतग्राममिमं कृत्स्नमवशं प्रकृतेर्वशात् ||९-८||
prakṛtiṃ svāmavaṣṭabhya visṛjāmi punaḥ punaḥ . bhūtagrāmamimaṃ kṛtsnamavaśaṃ prakṛtervaśāt ||9-8||
prakrtim —material nature; svam —of My personal self; avastabhya —enter
in; visrjami —create; punah punah —again, again; bhuta-gramam —all these
cosmic manifestations; imam —this; krtsnam —total; avasam —automatically;
prakrteh —by the force of nature; vasat —under obligation.
The whole cosmic order is under Me. By My will it is manifested again
and again, and by My will it is annihilated at the end.
न च मां तानि कर्माणि निबध्नन्ति धनञ्जय | उदासीनवदासीनमसक्तं तेषु कर्मसु ||९-९||
na ca māṃ tāni karmāṇi nibadhnanti dhanañjaya . udāsīnavadāsīnamasaktaṃ teṣu karmasu ||9-9||
na —never; ca —also; mam —Me; tani —all those; karmani —activities;
nibadhnanti —bind; dhananjaya —O conquerer of riches; udasmavat —as
neutral; asmam —situated; asaktam —without attraction; tesu —in them;
karmasu —in activities.
O Dhananjaya, all this work cannot bind Me. I am ever detached,
seated as though neutral.
मयाध्यक्षेण प्रकृतिः सूयते सचराचरम् | हेतुनानेन कौन्तेय जगद्विपरिवर्तते ||९-१०||
mayādhyakṣeṇa prakṛtiḥ sūyate sacarācaram . hetunānena kaunteya jagadviparivartate ||9-10||
maya —by Me; adhyaksena —by superintendence; prakrdh —material
nature; suyate —manifest; sa —with; caracaram —moving and nonmoving;
hetuna —for this reason; anena —this; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; jagat —the
cosmic manifestation; viparivartate —is working.
This material nature is working under My direction, O son of KuntI,
and it is producing all moving and unmoving beings. By its rule this
manifestation is created and annihilated again and again.
अवजानन्ति मां मूढा मानुषीं तनुमाश्रितम् | परं भावमजानन्तो मम भूतमहेश्वरम् ||९-११||
avajānanti māṃ mūḍhā mānuṣīṃ tanumāśritam . paraṃ bhāvamajānanto mama bhūtamaheśvaram ||9-11||
avajananti —deride; mam —Me; mudhah —foolish men; manusim —in a
human form; tanum —body; asritam —assuming; param —transcendental;
bhavam —nature; ajanantah —not knowing; mama —Mine; bhuta —everything
that be; mahesvaram —supreme proprietor.
Fools deride Me when I descend in the human form. They do not know
My transcendental nature and My supreme dominion over all that be.
मोघाशा मोघकर्माणो मोघज्ञाना विचेतसः | राक्षसीमासुरीं चैव प्रकृतिं मोहिनीं श्रिताः ||९-१२||
moghāśā moghakarmāṇo moghajñānā vicetasaḥ . rākṣasīmāsurīṃ caiva prakṛtiṃ mohinīṃ śritāḥ ||9-12||
moghasah —baffled hope; mogha-karmanah —baffled in fruitive activities;
mogha-jnanah —baffled in knowledge; vicetasah —bewildered; raksasim —
demonic; asurim —atheistic; ca —and; eva —certainly; prakrtim —nature;
mohimm —bewildering; sritah —taking shelter of.
Those who are thus bewildered are attracted by demonic and atheistic
views. In that deluded condition, their hopes for liberation, their fruitive
activities, and their culture of knowledge are all defeated.
महात्मानस्तु मां पार्थ दैवीं प्रकृतिमाश्रिताः | भजन्त्यनन्यमनसो ज्ञात्वा भूतादिमव्ययम् ||९-१३||
mahātmānastu māṃ pārtha daivīṃ prakṛtimāśritāḥ . bhajantyananyamanaso jñātvā bhūtādimavyayam ||9-13||
mahatmanah —the great souls; tu —but; mam —unto Me; partha —O son of
Prtha; daivim —divine; prakrtim —nature; asritah —taken shelter of; bhajanti
—render service; ananya-manasah —without deviation of the mind; jnatva
—knowing; bhuta —creation; adim —original; avyayam —inexhaustible.
O son of Prtha, those who are not deluded, the great souls, are under
the protection of the divine nature. They are fully engaged in devotional
service because they know Me as the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
original and inexhaustible.
सततं कीर्तयन्तो मां यतन्तश्च दृढव्रताः | नमस्यन्तश्च मां भक्त्या नित्ययुक्ता उपासते ||९-१४||
satataṃ kīrtayanto māṃ yatantaśca dṛḍhavratāḥ . namasyantaśca māṃ bhaktyā nityayuktā upāsate ||9-14||
satatam —always; kirtayantah —chanting; mam —Me; yatantah ca —fully
endeavoring also; drdha-vratah —with determination; namasyantah ca —
offering obeisances; mam —unto Me; bhaktya —in devotion; nitya-yuktah
—perpetually engaged; upasate —worship.
Always chanting My glories, endeavoring with great determination,
bowing down before Me, these great souls perpetually worship Me with
devotion.
ज्ञानयज्ञेन चाप्यन्ये यजन्तो मामुपासते | एकत्वेन पृथक्त्वेन बहुधा विश्वतोमुखम् ||९-१५||
jñānayajñena cāpyanye yajanto māmupāsate . ekatvena pṛthaktvena bahudhā viśvatomukham ||9-15||
jhana-yajhena —by cultivation of knowledge; ca —also; api —certainly; anye
—others; yajantah —worshiping; mam —Me; upasate —worship; ekatvena —in
oneness; prthaktvena —in duality; bahudha —diversity; visvatah-mukham —in
the universal form.
Others, who are engaged in the cultivation of knowledge, worship the
Supreme Lord as the one without a second, diverse in many, and in the
universal form.
अहं क्रतुरहं यज्ञः स्वधाहमहमौषधम् | मन्त्रोऽहमहमेवाज्यमहमग्निरहं हुतम् ||९-१६||
ahaṃ kraturahaṃ yajñaḥ svadhāhamahamauṣadham . mantro.ahamahamevājyamahamagnirahaṃ hutam ||9-16||
aham —I; kratuh —ritual; aham —I; yajnah —sacrifice; svadha —oblation;
aham —I ; aham —I; ausadham —healing herb ; mantrah —transcendental
chant; aham —I; aham —I; eva —certainly; ajyam —melted butter; aham —I;
agnih — fire; aham —I; hutam —offering.
But it is I who am the ritual, I the sacrifice, the offering to the
ancestors, the healing herb, the transcendental chant. I am the butter and
the fire and the offering.
पिताहमस्य जगतो माता धाता पितामहः | वेद्यं पवित्रमोंकार ऋक्साम यजुरेव च ||९-१७||
pitāhamasya jagato mātā dhātā pitāmahaḥ . vedyaṃ pavitramoṃkāra ṛksāma yajureva ca ||9-17||
pita —father; aham —I; asya —of this; jagatah —of the universe; mata —
mother; dhata —supporter; pitamahah —grandfather; vedyam —what is to be
known; pavitram —that which purifies; omkarah —the syllable om; rk —the Rg-
veda; sama —the Sama-veda; yajuh —the Yajur-veda; eva —certainly; ca —
and.
I am the father of this universe, the mother, the support, and the
grandsire. I am the object of knowledge, the purifier and the syllable om.
I am also the Rk, the Sama, and the Yajur [Vedas].
गतिर्भर्ता प्रभुः साक्षी निवासः शरणं सुहृत् | प्रभवः प्रलयः स्थानं निधानं बीजमव्ययम् ||९-१८||
gatirbhartā prabhuḥ sākṣī nivāsaḥ śaraṇaṃ suhṛt . prabhavaḥ pralayaḥ sthānaṃ nidhānaṃ bījamavyayam ||9-18||
gatih —goal; bharta —sustainer; prabhuh —Lord; saksi— witness; nivasah —
abode; saranam —refuge; suhrt —most intimate friend; prabhavah —creation;
pralayah —dissolution; sthanam —ground; nidhanam —resting place; bijam —
seed; avyayam —imperishable.
I am the goal, the sustainer, the master, the witness, the abode, the
refuge and the most dear friend. I am the creation and the annihilation,
the basis of everything, the resting place and the eternal seed.
तपाम्यहमहं वर्षं निगृह्णाम्युत्सृजामि च | अमृतं चैव मृत्युश्च सदसच्चाहमर्जुन ||९-१९||
tapāmyahamahaṃ varṣaṃ nigṛhṇāmyutsṛjāmi ca . amṛtaṃ caiva mṛtyuśca sadasaccāhamarjuna ||9-19||
tapami —give heat; aham —I; aham —I; varsam —rain; nigrhnami —withold;
utsrjami —send forth; ca —and; amrtam —immortality; ca —and; eva
—certainly; mrtyuh —death; ca —and; sat —being; asat —nonbeing; ca —and;
aham —I; arjuna —O Arjuna.
O Arjuna, I control heat, the rain and the drought. I am immortality,
and I am also death personified. Both being and nonbeing are in Me.
त्रैविद्या मां सोमपाः पूतपापा यज्ञैरिष्ट्वा स्वर्गतिं प्रार्थयन्ते | ते पुण्यमासाद्य सुरेन्द्रलोक- मश्नन्ति दिव्यान्दिवि देवभोगान् ||९-२०||
traividyā māṃ somapāḥ pūtapāpā yajñairiṣṭvā svargatiṃ prārthayante . te puṇyamāsādya surendralokaṃ aśnanti divyāndivi devabhogān ||9-20||
trai-vidyah —the knowers of the three Vedas; mam —unto Me; soma-pah —
drinkers of soma juice; puta —purified; papah —sins; yajhaih —with
sacrifices; istva —after worshiping; svargatim —passage to heaven;
prarthayante —pray; te —they; punyam —virtue; asadya —enjoying; surendra
—of Indra; lokam —world; asnanti —enjoy; divyan —celestial; divi —in heaven;
deva-bhogan — pleasures of the gods.
Those who study the Vedas and drink the soma juice, seeking the
heavenly planets, worship Me indirectly. They take birth on the planet of
Indra, where they enjoy godly delights.
ते तं भुक्त्वा स्वर्गलोकं विशालं क्षीणे पुण्ये मर्त्यलोकं विशन्ति | एवं त्रयीधर्ममनुप्रपन्ना गतागतं कामकामा लभन्ते ||९-२१||
te taṃ bhuktvā svargalokaṃ viśālaṃ kṣīṇe puṇye martyalokaṃ viśanti . evaṃ trayīdharmamanuprapannā gatāgataṃ kāmakāmā labhante ||9-21||
te —they; tarn —that; bhuktva —enjoying; svarga-lokam —heaven; visalam —
vast; ksme —being exhausted; punye —merits; martya-lokam —mortal earth;
visanti —fall down; evam —thus; trayT —three Vedas; dharmam —doctrines;
anuprapannah —following; gata-agatam —death and birth; kama-kamah —
desiring sense enjoyments; labhante —attain.
When they have thus enjoyed heavenly sense pleasure, they return to
this mortal planet again. Thus, through the Vedic principles, they achieve
only flickering happiness.
अनन्याश्चिन्तयन्तो मां ये जनाः पर्युपासते | तेषां नित्याभियुक्तानां योगक्षेमं वहाम्यहम् ||९-२२||
ananyāścintayanto māṃ ye janāḥ paryupāsate . teṣāṃ nityābhiyuktānāṃ yogakṣemaṃ vahāmyaham ||9-22||
ananyah —no other; cintayantah —concentrating; mam —unto Me; ye —
who; janah —persons; paryupasate —properly worship; tesam —their; nitya —
always abhiyuktanam —fixed in devotion; yoga-ksemam —requirements;
vahami — carry; aham —I.
But those who worship Me with devotion, meditating on My
transcendental form-to them I carry what they lack and preserve what
they have.
येऽप्यन्यदेवता भक्ता यजन्ते श्रद्धयान्विताः | तेऽपि मामेव कौन्तेय यजन्त्यविधिपूर्वकम् ||९-२३||
ye.apyanyadevatābhaktā yajante śraddhayānvitāḥ . te.api māmeva kaunteya yajantyavidhipūrvakam ||9-23||
ye —those; api —also; anya —other; devata —demigods; bhaktah —devotees;
yajante —worship; sraddhaya-anvitah —with faith; te —they; api —also; mam
— Me; eva —even; kaunteya-O son of KuntI; yajanti —sacrifice; avidhi-
purvakam —in a wrong way.
Whatever a man may sacrifice to other gods, O son of KuntI, is really
meant for Me alone, but it is offered without true understanding.
अहं हि सर्वयज्ञानां भोक्ता च प्रभुरेव च | न तु मामभिजानन्ति तत्त्वेनातश्च्यवन्ति ते ||९-२४||
ahaṃ hi sarvayajñānāṃ bhoktā ca prabhureva ca . na tu māmabhijānanti tattvenātaścyavanti te ||9-24||
aham —I; hi —surely; sarva —of all; yajhanam —sacrifices; bhokta —enjoyer;
ca —and; prabhuh —Lord; eva —also; ca —and; na —not; tu —but; mam —Me;
abhijananti —know; tattvena —in reality; atah —therefore; cyavanti —fall
down; te —they.
I am the only enjoyer and the only object of sacrifice. Those who do not
recognize My true transcendental nature fall down.
यान्ति देवव्रता देवान्पितॄन्यान्ति पितृव्रताः | भूतानि यान्ति भूतेज्या यान्ति मद्याजिनोऽपि माम् ||९-२५||
yānti devavratā devānpitṝnyānti pitṛvratāḥ . bhūtāni yānti bhūtejyā yānti madyājino.api mām ||9-25||
yanti —achieve; deva-vratah —worshipers of demigods; devan —to
demigods; pitfn —to ancestors; yanti —go; pitr-vratah —worshipers of
ancestors; bhutani —to ghosts and spirits; yanti —go; bhutejyah —worshipers of
ghosts and spirits; yanti —go; mat — My; yajinah —devotees; api —also; mam —
unto Me.
Those who worship the demigods will take birth among the demigods;
those who worship ghosts and spirits will take birth among such beings;
those who worship ancestors go to the ancestors; and those who worship
Me will live with Me.
पत्रं पुष्पं फलं तोयं यो मे भक्त्या प्रयच्छति | तदहं भक्त्युपहृतमश्नामि प्रयतात्मनः ||९-२६||
patraṃ puṣpaṃ phalaṃ toyaṃ yo me bhaktyā prayacchati . tadahaṃ bhaktyupahṛtamaśnāmi prayatātmanaḥ ||9-26||
patram —a leaf; puspam —a flower; phalam —a fruit; toyam —water; yah —
whoever; me —unto Me; bhaktya —with devotion; prayacchati —offers; tat
—that; aham —I; bhakti-upahrtam —offered in devotion; asnami —accept;
prayata-atmanah —of one in pure consciousness.
If one offers Me with love and devotion a leaf, a flower, fruit or water, I
will accept it.
यत्करोषि यदश्नासि यज्जुहोषि ददासि यत् | यत्तपस्यसि कौन्तेय तत्कुरुष्व मदर्पणम् ||९-२७||
yatkaroṣi yadaśnāsi yajjuhoṣi dadāsi yat . yattapasyasi kaunteya tatkuruṣva madarpaṇam ||9-27||
yat —what; karosi —you do; yat —whatever; asnasi —you eat; yat —
whatever; juhosi —you offer; dadasi —you give away; yat —whatever; yat —
whatever; tapasyasi —austerities you perform; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; tat
—that; kurusva —make; mat —unto Me; arpanam —offering.
O son of KuntI, all that you do, all that you eat, all that you offer and
give away, as well as all austerities that you may perform, should be done
as an offering unto Me.
शुभाशुभफलैरेवं मोक्ष्यसे कर्मबन्धनैः | संन्यासयोगयुक्तात्मा विमुक्तो मामुपैष्यसि ||९-२८||
śubhāśubhaphalairevaṃ mokṣyase karmabandhanaiḥ . saṃnyāsayogayuktātmā vimukto māmupaiṣyasi ||9-28||
subha —good; asubha —evil; phalaih —results; evam —thus; moksyase —free;
karma —action; bandhanaih —bondage; sarmyasa —of renunciation; yoga —
the yoga; yukta-atma —having the mind firmly set on; vimuktah —liberated;
mam —to Me; upaisyasi —you will attain.
In this way you will be freed from all reactions to good and evil deeds,
and by this principle of renunciation you will be liberated and come to
Me.
समोऽहं सर्वभूतेषु न मे द्वेष्योऽस्ति न प्रियः | ये भजन्ति तु मां भक्त्या मयि ते तेषु चाप्यहम् ||९-२९||
samo.ahaṃ sarvabhūteṣu na me dveṣyo.asti na priyaḥ . ye bhajanti tu māṃ bhaktyā mayi te teṣu cāpyaham ||9-29||
samah —equally disposed; aham —I; sarva-bhutesu —to all living entities; na
—no one; me —Mine; dvesyah —hateful; asti —is; na —nor; priyah —dear; ye
—those; bhajanti —render transcendental service; tu —yet; mam —unto Me;
bhaktya —in devotion; mayi —unto Me; te —such persons; tesu —in them; ca
—also; api —certainly; aham —I.
I envy no one, nor am I partial to anyone. I am equal to all. But
whoever renders service unto Me in devotion is a friend, is in Me, and I
am also a friend to him.
अपि चेत्सुदुराचारो भजते मामनन्यभाक् | साधुरेव स मन्तव्यः सम्यग्व्यवसितो हि सः ||९-३०||
api cetsudurācāro bhajate māmananyabhāk . sādhureva sa mantavyaḥ samyagvyavasito hi saḥ ||9-30||
api —in spite of; cet —although; suduracarah —one committing the most
abominable actions; bhajate —engaged in devotional service; mam —unto Me;
ananya-bhak —without deviation; sadhuh —saint; eva —certainly; sah —he;
mantavyah —to be considered; samyak —completely; vyavasitah —situated; hi
—certainly; sah —he.
Even if one commits the most abominable actions, if he is engaged in
devotional service, he is to be considered saintly because he is properly
situated.
क्षिप्रं भवति धर्मात्मा शश्वच्छान्तिं निगच्छति | कौन्तेय प्रतिजानीहि न मे भक्तः प्रणश्यति ||९-३१||
kṣipraṃ bhavati dharmātmā śaśvacchāntiṃ nigacchati . kaunteya pratijānīhi na me bhaktaḥ praṇaśyati ||9-31||
ksipram —very soon; bhavati —becomes; dharma-atma —righteous; sasvat-
santim —lasting peace; nigacchati —attains; kaunteya —O son of KuntI;
pratijamhi —justly declare; na —never; me —Mine; bhaktah —devotee;
pranasyati —perishes.
He quickly becomes righteous and attains lasting peace. O son of KuntI,
declare it boldly that My devotee never perishes.
मां हि पार्थ व्यपाश्रित्य येऽपि स्युः पापयोनयः | स्त्रियो वैश्यास्तथा शूद्रास्तेऽपि यान्ति परां गतिम् ||९-३२||
māṃ hi pārtha vyapāśritya ye.api syuḥ pāpayonayaḥ . striyo vaiśyāstathā śūdrāste.api yānti parāṃ gatim ||9-32||
mam —unto Me; hz-certainly; partha —O son of Prtha; vyapasritya —
particularly taking shelter; ye —anyone; api —also; syuh—becomes; papa-
yonayah —born of a lower family; striyah —women; vaisyah —mercantile
people; tatha —also; sudrah —lower class men; te api —even they; yanti —go;
param —supreme; gatim —destination.
O son of Prtha, those who take shelter in Me, though they be of lower
birth—women, vaisyas [merchants], as well as sudras [workers]—can
approach the supreme destination.
किं पुनर्ब्राह्मणाः पुण्या भक्ता राजर्षयस्तथा | अनित्यमसुखं लोकमिमं प्राप्य भजस्व माम् ||९-३३||
kiṃ punarbrāhmaṇāḥ puṇyā bhaktā rājarṣayastathā . anityamasukhaṃ lokamimaṃ prāpya bhajasva mām ||9-33||
kim —how much; punah —again; brahmanah-brahmanas; punyah
—righteous ;bhaktah —devotees; rajarsayah —saintly kings; tatha —also;
anityam — temporary; asukham —sorrowful; lokam —planets; imam —this;
prapya — gaining; bhajasva —are engaged in loving service; mam —unto Me.
How much greater then are the brahmanas, the righteous, the devotees
and saintly kings who in this temporary miserable world engage in loving
service unto Me.
मन्मना भव मद्भक्तो मद्याजी मां नमस्कुरु | मामेवैष्यसि युक्त्वैवमात्मानं मत्परायणः ||९-३४||
manmanā bhava madbhakto madyājī māṃ namaskuru . māmevaiṣyasi yuktvaivamātmānaṃ matparāyaṇaḥ ||9-34||
mat-manah —always thinking of Me; bhava —become; mat —My; bhaktah
— devotee; mat —My; yaji —worshiper; mam —unto Me; namaskuru —offer
obeisances; mam —unto Me; eva —completely; esyasi —come; yuktva evam —
being absorbed; atmanam —your soul; mat-parayanah —devoted to Me.
Engage your mind always in thinking of Me, offer obeisances and
worship Me. Being completely absorbed in Me, surely you will come to
Me.
Глава 10
श्रीभगवानुवाच | भूय एव महाबाहो शृणु मे परमं वचः | यत्तेऽहं प्रीयमाणाय वक्ष्यामि हितकाम्यया ||१०-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . bhūya eva mahābāho śṛṇu me paramaṃ vacaḥ . yatte.ahaṃ prīyamāṇāya vakṣyāmi hitakāmyayā ||10-1||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; bhuyah
—again; eva —certainly; maha-baho —O mighty-armed; smu —just hear; me
—My; paramam —supreme; vacah —information; yat —that which; te —to you;
aham —I; priyamanaya —thinking you dear to Me; vaksyami —say; hita-
kamyaya —for your benefit.
The Supreme Lord said: My dear friend, mighty-armed Arjuna, listen
again to My supreme word, which I shall impart to you for your benefit
and which will give you great joy.
न मे विदुः सुरगणाः प्रभवं न महर्षयः | अहमादिर्हि देवानां महर्षीणां च सर्वशः ||१०-२||
na me viduḥ suragaṇāḥ prabhavaṃ na maharṣayaḥ . ahamādirhi devānāṃ maharṣīṇāṃ ca sarvaśaḥ ||10-2||
na —never; me —My; viduh —knows; sura-ganah —demigods; prabhavam
— opulences; na —never; maharsayah —great sages; aham —I am; adih —the
origin; hi —certainly; devanam —of the demigods; maharsTnam —of the great
sages; ca —also; sarvasah —in all respects.
Neither the hosts of demigods nor the great sages know My origin, for,
in every respect, I am the source of the demigods and the sages.
यो मामजमनादिं च वेत्ति लोकमहेश्वरम् | असम्मूढः स मर्त्येषु सर्वपापैः प्रमुच्यते ||१०-३||
yo māmajamanādiṃ ca vetti lokamaheśvaram . asammūḍhaḥ sa martyeṣu sarvapāpaiḥ pramucyate ||10-3||
yah —anyone; mam —unto Me; ajam —unborn; anddim —without beginning;
ca —also; vetti —knows; loka —the planets; mahesvaram —supreme master;
asammudhah —without doubt; sah —he; martyesu —among those subject to
death; sarva-papaih —from all sinful reactions; pramucyate —is delivered.
He who knows Me as the unborn, as the beginningless, as the Supreme
Lord of all the worlds-he, undeluded among men, is freed from all sins.
बुद्धिर्ज्ञानमसम्मोहः क्षमा सत्यं दमः शमः | सुखं दुःखं भवोऽभावो भयं चाभयमेव च ||१०-४||
buddhirjñānamasammohaḥ kṣamā satyaṃ damaḥ śamaḥ . sukhaṃ duḥkhaṃ bhavo.abhāvo bhayaṃ cābhayameva ca ||10-4||
buddhih —intelligence; jhanam —knowledge; asam-mohah —freedom from
doubt; ksama —forgiveness; satyam —truthfulness; damah —control of the
senses; samah —control of the mind; sukham —happiness; duhkham —distress;
bhavah —birth; abhavah —death; bhayam —fear; ca —also; abhayam—without
fear; eva —also; ca —and; ahimsa —nonviolence; samata —equilibrium; tustih
— satisfaction; tapah —penance; danam —charity; yasah —fame; ayasah —
infamy; bhavanti —become; bhavah —natures; bhutanam —of living entities;
mattah —from Me; eva —certainly; prthak-vidhah —differently arranged.
Intelligence, knowledge, freedom from doubt and delusion, forgiveness,
truthfulness, self-control and calmness, pleasure and pain, birth, death,
fear, fearlessness, nonviolence, equanimity, satisfaction, austerity, charity,
fame and infamy are created by Me alone.
अहिंसा समता तुष्टिस्तपो दानं यशोऽयशः | भवन्ति भावा भूतानां मत्त एव पृथग्विधाः ||१०-५||
ahiṃsā samatā tuṣṭistapo dānaṃ yaśo.ayaśaḥ . bhavanti bhāvā bhūtānāṃ matta eva pṛthagvidhāḥ ||10-5||
महर्षयः सप्त पूर्वे चत्वारो मनवस्तथा | मद्भावा मानसा जाता येषां लोक इमाः प्रजाः ||१०-६||
maharṣayaḥ sapta pūrve catvāro manavastathā . madbhāvā mānasā jātā yeṣāṃ loka imāḥ prajāḥ ||10-6||
maharsayah —the great sages; sapta —seven; purve —before; catvarah
—four; manavah —Manus; tatha —also; mat-bhavah —born of Me; manasah
—from the mind; jatah —born; yesam —of them; loke —the planets; imah —all
this; prajah —population.
The seven great sages and before them the four other great sages and
the Manus [progenitors of mankind] are born out of My mind, and all
creatures in these planets descend from them.
एतां विभूतिं योगं च मम यो वेत्ति तत्त्वतः | सोऽविकम्पेन योगेन युज्यते नात्र संशयः ||१०-७||
etāṃ vibhūtiṃ yogaṃ ca mama yo vetti tattvataḥ . so.avikampena yogena yujyate nātra saṃśayaḥ ||10-7||
etam —all this; vibhutim —opulence; yogam ca —also mystic power; mama
—of Mine; yah —anyone; vetti —knows; tattvatah —factually; sah —he;
avikalpena —without division; yogena —in devotional service; yujyate
—engaged; na —never; atra —here; samsayah —doubt.
He who knows in truth this glory and power of Mine engages in
unalloyed devotional service; of this there is no doubt.
अहं सर्वस्य प्रभवो मत्तः सर्वं प्रवर्तते | इति मत्वा भजन्ते मां बुधा भावसमन्विताः ||१०-८||
ahaṃ sarvasya prabhavo mattaḥ sarvaṃ pravartate . iti matvā bhajante māṃ budhā bhāvasamanvitāḥ ||10-8||
aham —I; sarvasya —of all; prabhavah —source of generation; mattah
from Me; sarvam —everything; pravartate —emanates; iti —thus; matva —
knowing; bhajante —becomes devoted; mam —unto Me; budhah —learned;
bhava- samanvitah —with great attention.
I am the source of all spiritual and material worlds. Everything
emanates from Me. The wise who know this perfectly engage in My
devotional service and worship Me with all their hearts.
मच्चित्ता मद्गतप्राणा बोधयन्तः परस्परम् | कथयन्तश्च मां नित्यं तुष्यन्ति च रमन्ति च ||१०-९||
maccittā madgataprāṇā bodhayantaḥ parasparam . kathayantaśca māṃ nityaṃ tuṣyanti ca ramanti ca ||10-9||
mat-cittah —minds fully engaged in Me; mat-gata-pranah —lives devoted to
the service of Krsna; bodhayantah —preaching; parasparam —among
themselves; kathayantah ca —talking also; mam —about Me; nityam —
perpetually; tusyanti —are pleased; ca —also; ramanti —enjoy transcendental
bliss; ca —also.
The thoughts of My pure devotees dwell in Me, their lives are
surrendered to Me, and they derive great satisfaction and bliss
enlightening one another and conversing about Me.
तेषां सततयुक्तानां भजतां प्रीतिपूर्वकम् | ददामि बुद्धियोगं तं येन मामुपयान्ति ते ||१०-१०||
teṣāṃ satatayuktānāṃ bhajatāṃ prītipūrvakam . dadāmi buddhiyogaṃ taṃ yena māmupayānti te ||10-10||
tesam —unto them; satata-yuktanam —always engaged; bhajatam —in
devotional service; priti-purvakam —in loving ecstasy; dadami —I give;
buddhi-yogam —real intelligence; tarn —that; yena —by which; mam —unto Me;
upayanti—come; te —they.
To those who are constantly devoted and worship Me with love, I give
the understanding by which they can come to Me.
तेषामेवानुकम्पार्थमहमज्ञानजं तमः | नाशयाम्यात्मभावस्थो ज्ञानदीपेन भास्वता ||१०-११||
teṣāmevānukampārthamahamajñānajaṃ tamaḥ . nāśayāmyātmabhāvastho jñānadīpena bhāsvatā ||10-11||
tesam —for them; eva —certainly; anukampa-artham —to show special
mercy; aham —I; ajhana-jam —due to ignorance; tamah —darkness; nasayami
—dispel; atma —within; bhavasthah —themselves; jhana —of knowledge;
dTpena —with the lamp; bhasvata —glowing.
Out of compassion for them, I, dwelling in their hearts, destroy with the
shining lamp of knowledge the darkness born of ignorance.
अर्जुन उवाच | परं ब्रह्म परं धाम पवित्रं परमं भवान् | पुरुषं शाश्वतं दिव्यमादिदेवमजं विभुम् ||१०-१२||
arjuna uvāca . paraṃ brahma paraṃ dhāma pavitraṃ paramaṃ bhavān . puruṣaṃ śāśvataṃ divyamādidevamajaṃ vibhum ||10-12||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; param —supreme; brahma —truth; param —
supreme; dhama —sustenance; pavitram —purest; paramam —supreme;
bhavan —Yourself; purusam —personality; sasvatam —original; divyam
—transcendental; adi-devam —original Lord; ajam —unborn; vibhum
—greatest; ahuh — say; tvam —unto You; rsayah —sages; sarve —all; devarsih
—the sage among the demigods; naradah —Narada; tatha —also; asitah —
Asita; devalah —Devala; vyasah —Vyasa; svayam —personally; ca —also; eva
—certainly; bravTsi —explaining; me —unto me.
Arjuna said: You are the Supreme Brahman, the ultimate, the supreme
abode and purifier, the Absolute Truth and the eternal divine person. You
are the primal God, transcendental and original, and You are the unborn
and all-pervading beauty. All the great sages such as Narada, Asita,
Devala, and Vyasa proclaim this of You, and now You Yourself are
declaring it to me.
आहुस्त्वामृषयः सर्वे देवर्षिर्नारदस्तथा | असितो देवलो व्यासः स्वयं चैव ब्रवीषि मे ||१०-१३||
āhustvāmṛṣayaḥ sarve devarṣirnāradastathā . asito devalo vyāsaḥ svayaṃ caiva bravīṣi me ||10-13||
सर्वमेतदृतं मन्ये यन्मां वदसि केशव | न हि ते भगवन्व्यक्तिं विदुर्देवा न दानवाः ||१०-१४||
sarvametadṛtaṃ manye yanmāṃ vadasi keśava . na hi te bhagavanvyaktiṃ vidurdevā na dānavāḥ ||10-14||
sarvam —all; etat —these; rtam —truths; manye —accept; yat —which; mam —
unto me; vadasi —You tell; kesava —O Krsna; na —never; hi —certainly; te —
Your; bhagavan —O Personality of Godhead; vyaktim —revelation; viduh —
can know; devah —the demigods; na —nor; danavah —the demons.
O Krsna, I totally accept as truth all that You have told me. Neither the
gods nor demons, O Lord, know Thy personality.
स्वयमेवात्मनात्मानं वेत्थ त्वं पुरुषोत्तम | भूतभावन भूतेश देवदेव जगत्पते ||१०-१५||
svayamevātmanātmānaṃ vettha tvaṃ puruṣottama . bhūtabhāvana bhūteśa devadeva jagatpate ||10-15||
svayam —personality; eva —certainly; atmana —by Yourself; atmanam
—Yourself; vettha —know; tvam —You; purusottama —O greatest of all
persons; bhuta-bhavana —O origin of everything; bhutesa —O Lord of
everything; deva-deva —O Lord of all demigods; jagat-pate —O Lord of the
entire universe.
Indeed, You alone know Yourself by Your own potencies, O origin of
all. Lord of all beings, God of gods, O Supreme Person, Lord of the
universe!
वक्तुमर्हस्यशेषेण दिव्या ह्यात्मविभूतयः | याभिर्विभूतिभिर्लोकानिमांस्त्वं व्याप्य तिष्ठसि ||१०-१६||
vaktumarhasyaśeṣeṇa divyā hyātmavibhūtayaḥ . yābhirvibhūtibhirlokānimāṃstvaṃ vyāpya tiṣṭhasi ||10-16||
vaktum —to say; arhasi —deserve; asesena —in detail; divya —divine; hi —
certainly; atma —Yourself; vibhutayah —opulences; yabhih —by which;
vibhutibhih —opulences; lokan —all the planets; iman —these; tvam —You;
vyapya —pervading; tisthasi —remain.
Please tell me in detail of Your divine powers by which You pervade all
these worlds and abide in them.
कथं विद्यामहं योगिंस्त्वां सदा परिचिन्तयन् | केषु केषु च भावेषु चिन्त्योऽसि भगवन्मया ||१०-१७||
kathaṃ vidyāmahaṃ yogiṃstvāṃ sadā paricintayan . keṣu keṣu ca bhāveṣu cintyo.asi bhagavanmayā ||10-17||
katham —how; vidyam aham —shall I know; yogin —O supreme mystic;
tvam —You; sada —always; paricintayan —thinking; kesu —in which; kesu — in
which; ca —also; bhavesu —nature; cintyah asi —You are remembered;
bhagavan —O Supreme; maya —by me.
How should I meditate on You? In what various forms are You to be
contemplated, O Blessed Lord?
विस्तरेणात्मनो योगं विभूतिं च जनार्दन | भूयः कथय तृप्तिर्हि शृण्वतो नास्ति मेऽमृतम् ||१०-१८||
vistareṇātmano yogaṃ vibhūtiṃ ca janārdana . bhūyaḥ kathaya tṛptirhi śṛṇvato nāsti me.amṛtam ||10-18||
vistarena —in description; atmanah —of Yourself; yogam —mystic power;
vibhutim —opulences; ca —also; janardana —O killer of the atheists; bhuyah
—again; kathaya —describe; trptih —satisfaction; hi —certainly; srnvatah
—hearing; na asti —there is no; me —my; amrtam —nectar.
Tell me again in detail, O Janardana [Krsna], of Your mighty potencies
and glories, for I never tire of hearing Your ambrosial words.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | हन्त ते कथयिष्यामि दिव्या ह्यात्मविभूतयः | प्राधान्यतः कुरुश्रेष्ठ नास्त्यन्तो विस्तरस्य मे ||१०-१९||
śrībhagavānuvāca . hanta te kathayiṣyāmi divyā hyātmavibhūtayaḥ . prādhānyataḥ kuruśreṣṭha nāstyanto vistarasya me ||10-19||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; hanta
—yes; te —unto you; kathayisyami —I shall speak; divyah —divine; hi —
certainly; atma-vibhutayah —personal opulences; pradhanyatah —principally;
kurusrestha —O best of the Kurus; na asti —there is no; antah —limit;
vistarasya — to the extent; me —My.
The Blessed Lord said: Yes, I will tell you of My splendorous
manifestations, but only of those which are prominent, O Arjuna, for My
opulence is limitless.
अहमात्मा गुडाकेश सर्वभूताशयस्थितः | अहमादिश्च मध्यं च भूतानामन्त एव च ||१०-२०||
ahamātmā guḍākeśa sarvabhūtāśayasthitaḥ . ahamādiśca madhyaṃ ca bhūtānāmanta eva ca ||10-20||
aham —I; atma —soul; gudakesa —O Arjuna; sarva-bhiita —all living
entities; asaya-sthitah —situated within; aham —I am; adih —origin; ca —also;
madhyam —middle; ca —also; bhutanam —all living entities; antah —end; eva
—certainly; ca —and.
I am the Self, O Gudakesa, seated in the hearts of all creatures. I am
the beginning, the middle and the end of all beings.
आदित्यानामहं विष्णुर्ज्योतिषां रविरंशुमान् | मरीचिर्मरुतामस्मि नक्षत्राणामहं शशी ||१०-२१||
ādityānāmahaṃ viṣṇurjyotiṣāṃ raviraṃśumān . marīcirmarutāmasmi nakṣatrāṇāmahaṃ śaśī ||10-21||
adityanam —of the Adityas; aham —I am; visnuh —the Supreme Lord;
jyotisam —of all luminaries; ravih —the sun; amsuman —radiant; marTcih —
Marlci; marutam —of the Marutas; asmi —I am; naksatranam —of stars; aham
—I am; sasT —the moon.
Of the Adityas I am Visnu, of lights I am the radiant sun, I am Marici
of the Maruts, and among the stars I am the moon.
वेदानां सामवेदोऽस्मि देवानामस्मि वासवः | इन्द्रियाणां मनश्चास्मि भूतानामस्मि चेतना ||१०-२२||
vedānāṃ sāmavedo.asmi devānāmasmi vāsavaḥ . indriyāṇāṃ manaścāsmi bhūtānāmasmi cetanā ||10-22||
vedanam —of all the Vedas; sama-vedah —the Sama-veda; asmi —I am;
devanam —of all the demigods; asmi —I am; vasavah —heavenly king;
indriyanam —of all the senses; manah —the mind; ca —also; asmi —I am;
bhutanam —of all living entities; asmi —I am; cetana —the living force.
Of the Vedas I am the Sama-veda; of the demigods I am Indra; of the
senses I am the mind, and in living beings I am the living force
[knowledge].
रुद्राणां शङ्करश्चास्मि वित्तेशो यक्षरक्षसाम् | वसूनां पावकश्चास्मि मेरुः शिखरिणामहम् ||१०-२३||
rudrāṇāṃ śaṅkaraścāsmi vitteśo yakṣarakṣasām . vasūnāṃ pāvakaścāsmi meruḥ śikhariṇāmaham ||10-23||
rudranam —of all the Rudras; sahkarah —Lord Siva; ca —also; asmi —I am;
vittesah —the lord of the treasury; yaksa-raksasam —of the Yaksas and
Raksasas; vasiindm —of the Vasus; pavakah —fire; ca —also; asmi —I am;
meruh —Meru; sikharinam —of all mountains; aham —I am.
Of all the Rudras I am Lord Siva; of the Yaksas and Raksasas I am the
lord of wealth [Kuvera]; of the Vasus I am fire [Agni], and of the
mountains I am Meru.
पुरोधसां च मुख्यं मां विद्धि पार्थ बृहस्पतिम् | सेनानीनामहं स्कन्दः सरसामस्मि सागरः ||१०-२४||
purodhasāṃ ca mukhyaṃ māṃ viddhi pārtha bṛhaspatim . senānīnāmahaṃ skandaḥ sarasāmasmi sāgaraḥ ||10-24||
purodhasam —of all priests; ca —also; mukhyam —chief; mam —Me; viddhi
—understand; partha —0 son of Prtha; brhaspadm —Brhaspati; senanmam —
of all commanders; aham —I am; skandah —Kartikeya; sarasam —of all
reservoirs of water; asmi —I am; sagarah —the ocean.
Of priests, O Arjuna, know Me to be the chief, Brhaspati, the lord of
devotion. Of generals I am Skanda, the lord of war; and of bodies of
water I am the ocean.
महर्षीणां भृगुरहं गिरामस्म्येकमक्षरम् | यज्ञानां जपयज्ञोऽस्मि स्थावराणां हिमालयः ||१०-२५||
maharṣīṇāṃ bhṛgurahaṃ girāmasmyekamakṣaram . yajñānāṃ japayajño.asmi sthāvarāṇāṃ himālayaḥ ||10-25||
maharsmam —among the great sages; bhrguh —Bhrgu; aham —I am; giram
—of vibrations; asmi —I am; ekam aksaram-pranava; yajnanam —of
sacrifices; japa-yajnah —chanting; asmi —I am; sthavaranam —of immovable
things; himalayah —the Himalayan mountains.
Of the great sages I am Bhrgu; of vibrations I am the transcendental
om. Of sacrifices I am the chanting of the holy names [japa], and of
immovable things I am the Himalayas.
अश्वत्थः सर्ववृक्षाणां देवर्षीणां च नारदः | गन्धर्वाणां चित्ररथः सिद्धानां कपिलो मुनिः ||१०-२६||
aśvatthaḥ sarvavṛkṣāṇāṃ devarṣīṇāṃ ca nāradaḥ . gandharvāṇāṃ citrarathaḥ siddhānāṃ kapilo muniḥ ||10-26||
asvatthah —the banyan tree; sarva-vrksanam —of all trees; devarsmam —of
all the sages amongst the demigods; ca —and; naradah —Narada; gandharva-
nam —the citizens of the Gandharva planet; citrarathah —Citraratha;
siddhanam —of all those who are perfected; kapilah munih —Kapila Muni.
Of all trees I am the holy fig tree, and amongst sages and demigods I
am Narada. Of the singers of the gods [Gandharvas] I am Citraratha, and
among perfected beings I am the sage Kapila.
उच्चैःश्रवसमश्वानां विद्धि माममृतोद्भवम् | ऐरावतं गजेन्द्राणां नराणां च नराधिपम् ||१०-२७||
uccaiḥśravasamaśvānāṃ viddhi māmamṛtodbhavam . airāvataṃ gajendrāṇāṃ narāṇāṃ ca narādhipam ||10-27||
uccaihsravasam —Uccaihsrava; asvanam —among horses; viddhi —know;
mam —Me; amrta-udbhavam —produced from the churning of the ocean;
airavatam —Airavata; gajendranam —of elephants; naranam —among human
beings; ca —and; naradhipam —the king.
Of horses know Me to be Uccaihsrava, who rose out of the ocean, born
of the elixir of immortality; of lordly elephants I am Airavata, and among
men I am the monarch.
आयुधानामहं वज्रं धेनूनामस्मि कामधुक् | प्रजनश्चास्मि कन्दर्पः सर्पाणामस्मि वासुकिः ||१०-२८||
āyudhānāmahaṃ vajraṃ dhenūnāmasmi kāmadhuk . prajanaścāsmi kandarpaḥ sarpāṇāmasmi vāsukiḥ ||10-28||
ayudhanam —of all weapons; aham —I am; vajram —the thunderbolt;
dhenunam —of cows; asmi —I am; kamadhuk —the surabhi cows; prajanah —
for begetting children; ca —and; asmi —I am; kandarpah —Cupid; sarpanam —
of all snakes; asmi —I am; vasukih —Vasuki.
Of weapons I am the thunderbolt; among cows I am the surabhi, givers
of abundant milk. Of procreators I am Kandarpa, the god of love, and of
serpents I am Vasuki, the chief.
अनन्तश्चास्मि नागानां वरुणो यादसामहम् | पितॄणामर्यमा चास्मि यमः संयमतामहम् ||१०-२९||
anantaścāsmi nāgānāṃ varuṇo yādasāmaham . pitṝṇāmaryamā cāsmi yamaḥ saṃyamatāmaham ||10-29||
anantah —Ananta; ca —also; asmi —I am; naganam —of all serpents;
varunah —the demigod controlling the water; yadasam —of all aquatics; aham
—I am; pitrnam —of the ancestors; aryama —Aryama; ca —also; asmi —I am;
yamah —the controller of death; samyamatam —of all regulators; aham —I am.
Of the celestial Naga snakes I am Ananta; of the aquatic deities I am
Varuna. Of departed ancestors I am Aryama, and among the dispensers
of law I am Yama, lord of death.
प्रह्लादश्चास्मि दैत्यानां कालः कलयतामहम् | मृगाणां च मृगेन्द्रोऽहं वैनतेयश्च पक्षिणाम् ||१०-३०||
prahlādaścāsmi daityānāṃ kālaḥ kalayatāmaham . mṛgāṇāṃ ca mṛgendro.ahaṃ vainateyaśca pakṣiṇām ||10-30||
prahladah —Prahlada; ca —also; asmi —I am; daityanam —of the demons;
kalah —time; kalayatam —of subduers; aham —I am; mrganam —of animals; ca
—and; mrgendrah —the lion; aham —I am; vainateyah —Garuda; ca —also;
paksinam —of birds.
Among the Daitya demons I am the devoted Prahlada; among subduers
I am time; among the beasts I am the lion, and among birds I am Garuda,
the feathered carrier of Visnu.
पवनः पवतामस्मि रामः शस्त्रभृतामहम् | झषाणां मकरश्चास्मि स्रोतसामस्मि जाह्नवी ||१०-३१||
pavanaḥ pavatāmasmi rāmaḥ śastrabhṛtāmaham . jhaṣāṇāṃ makaraścāsmi srotasāmasmi jāhnavī ||10-31||
pavanah —the wind; pavatam —of all that purifies; asmi —I am; ramah —
Rama; sastra-bhrtam —of the carriers of weapons; aham —I am; jhasanam —
of all aquatics; makarah —shark; ca asmi —I am also; srotasam —of flowing
rivers; asmi —I am; jahnavT —the River Ganges.
Of purifiers I am the wind; of the wielders of weapons I am Rama; of
fishes I am the shark, and of flowing rivers I am the Ganges.
सर्गाणामादिरन्तश्च मध्यं चैवाहमर्जुन | अध्यात्मविद्या विद्यानां वादः प्रवदतामहम् ||१०-३२||
sargāṇāmādirantaśca madhyaṃ caivāhamarjuna . adhyātmavidyā vidyānāṃ vādaḥ pravadatāmaham ||10-32||
sarganam —of all creations; adih —beginning; antah —end; ca —and;
madhyam —middle; ca —also; eva —certainly; aham —I am; arjuna —O
Arjuna; adhyatma-vidya —spiritual knowledge; vidyanam —of all education;
vadah —natural conclusion; pravadatam —of arguments; aham —I am.
Of all creations I am the beginning and the end and also the middle, O
Arjuna. Of all sciences I am the spiritual science of the Self, and among
logicians I am the conclusive truth.
अक्षराणामकारोऽस्मि द्वन्द्वः सामासिकस्य च | अहमेवाक्षयः कालो धाताहं विश्वतोमुखः ||१०-३३||
akṣarāṇāmakāro.asmi dvandvaḥ sāmāsikasya ca . ahamevākṣayaḥ kālo dhātāhaṃ viśvatomukhaḥ ||10-33||
aksaranam —of letters; akarah —the first; asmi —I am; dvandvah —dual;
samasikasya —compounds; ca —and; aham —I am; eva —certainly; aksayah —
eternal; kalah —time; dhata —creator; aham —I am; visvato-mukhah —
Brahma.
Of letters I am the letter A, and among compounds I am the dual word.
I am also inexhaustable time, and of creators I am Brahma, whose
manifold faces turn everywhere.
मृत्युः सर्वहरश्चाहमुद्भवश्च भविष्यताम् | कीर्तिः श्रीर्वाक्च नारीणां स्मृतिर्मेधा धृतिः क्षमा ||१०-३४||
mṛtyuḥ sarvaharaścāhamudbhavaśca bhaviṣyatām . kīrtiḥ śrīrvākca nārīṇāṃ smṛtirmedhā dhṛtiḥ kṣamā ||10-34||
mrtyuh —death; sarva-harah —all-devouring; ca —also; aham —I am;
udbhavah —generation; ca —also; bhavisyatam —of the future; kfrtih —fame;
srfh vak —beautiful speech; ca —also; narmarh —of women; smrtih —memory;
medha —intelligence; dhrtih —faithfulness; ksama —patience.
I am all-devouring death, and I am the generator of all things yet to be.
Among women I am fame, fortune, speech, memory, intelligence,
faithfulness and patience.
बृहत्साम तथा साम्नां गायत्री छन्दसामहम् | मासानां मार्गशीर्षोऽहमृतूनां कुसुमाकरः ||१०-३५||
bṛhatsāma tathā sāmnāṃ gāyatrī chandasāmaham . māsānāṃ mārgaśīrṣo.ahamṛtūnāṃ kusumākaraḥ ||10-35||
brhat-sama —the Brhat-sama; tatha —also; samnam —of the Sama-veda
song; gayatrT —the GayatrT hymns; chandasam —of all poetry; aham —I am;
masanam —of months; marga-sirso `ham —the month of November-December;
aham —I am; rtiindm —of all seasons; kusumakarah —spring.
Of hymns I am the Brhat-sama sung to the Lord Indra, and of poetry I
am the GayatrT verse, sung daily by brahmanas. Of months I am
November and December, and of seasons I am flower-bearing spring.
द्यूतं छलयतामस्मि तेजस्तेजस्विनामहम् | जयोऽस्मि व्यवसायोऽस्मि सत्त्वं सत्त्ववतामहम् ||१०-३६||
dyūtaṃ chalayatāmasmi tejastejasvināmaham . jayo.asmi vyavasāyo.asmi sattvaṃ sattvavatāmaham ||10-36||
dyutam —gambling; chalayatam —of all cheats; asmi —I am; tejah —
splendid; tejasvinam —of everything splendid; aham —I am; jayah —victory;
asmi —I am; vyavasayah —adventure; asmi —I am; sattvam —strength;
sattvavatam —of all the strong; aham —I am.
I am also the gambling of cheats, and of the splendid I am the splendor.
I am victory, I am adventure, and I am the strength of the strong.
वृष्णीनां वासुदेवोऽस्मि पाण्डवानां धनञ्जयः | मुनीनामप्यहं व्यासः कवीनामुशना कविः ||१०-३७||
vṛṣṇīnāṃ vāsudevo.asmi pāṇḍavānāṃ dhanañjayaḥ . munīnāmapyahaṃ vyāsaḥ kavīnāmuśanā kaviḥ ||10-37||
vrsnmam —of the descendants of Vrsni; vasudevah —Krsna in Dvaraka;
asmi —I am; pandavanam —of the Pandavas; dhananjayah —Arjuna; munmam
—of the sages; api —also; aham —I am; vyasah —Vyasa, the compiler of
allVedic literature; kavmam —of all great thinkers; usana —Usana; kavih —the
thinker.
Of the descendants of Vrsni I am Vasudeva, and of the Pandavas I am
• • • ` • •
Arjuna. Of the sages I am Vyasa, and among great thinkers I am Usana.
दण्डो दमयतामस्मि नीतिरस्मि जिगीषताम् | मौनं चैवास्मि गुह्यानां ज्ञानं ज्ञानवतामहम् ||१०-३८||
daṇḍo damayatāmasmi nītirasmi jigīṣatām . maunaṃ caivāsmi guhyānāṃ jñānaṃ jñānavatāmaham ||10-38||
dandah —punishment; damayatam —of all separation; asmi —I am; nftih
—morality; asmi —I am; jigfsatam —of the victorious; maunam —silence; ca
—and; eva —also; asmi —I am; guhyanam —of secrets; jhanam —knowledge;
jnanavatam —of the wise; aham —I am.
Among punishments I am the rod of chastisement, and of those who
seek victory, I am morality. Of secret things I am silence, and of the wise I
am wisdom.
यच्चापि सर्वभूतानां बीजं तदहमर्जुन | न तदस्ति विना यत्स्यान्मया भूतं चराचरम् ||१०-३९||
yaccāpi sarvabhūtānāṃ bījaṃ tadahamarjuna . na tadasti vinā yatsyānmayā bhūtaṃ carācaram ||10-39||
yat —whatever; ca —also; api —may be; sarva-bhutanam —of all creations;
bijam —the seed; tat —that; aham —I am; arjuna —O Arjuna; na —not; tat
—that; asti —there is; vina —without; yat —that; syat —exists; maya —by Me;
bhutam —created; caracaram —moving and unmoving.
Furthermore, O Arjuna, I am the generating seed of all existences.
There is no being-moving or unmoving-that can exist without Me.
नान्तोऽस्ति मम दिव्यानां विभूतीनां परन्तप | एष तूद्देशतः प्रोक्तो विभूतेर्विस्तरो मया ||१०-४०||
nānto.asti mama divyānāṃ vibhūtīnāṃ parantapa . eṣa tūddeśataḥ prokto vibhūtervistaro mayā ||10-40||
na —nor; antah —a limit; asti —isthere; mama —of My; divyanam —divine;
vibhutmam —opulences; parantapa —O conquerer of the enemies; esah —all
this; tu —that; uddesatah —examples; proktah —spoken; vibhuteh —opulences;
vistarah —expanded; maya —by Me.
O mighty conqueror of enemies, there is no end to My divine
manifestations. What I have spoken to you is but a mere indication of My
infinite opulences.
यद्यद्विभूतिमत्सत्त्वं श्रीमदूर्जितमेव वा | तत्तदेवावगच्छ त्वं मम तेजोंऽशसम्भवम् ||१०-४१||
yadyadvibhūtimatsattvaṃ śrīmadūrjitameva vā . tattadevāvagaccha tvaṃ mama tejoṃśasambhavam ||10-41||
yat yat —whatever; vibhuti —opulences; mat —having; sattvam —existence;
srimat —beautiful; urjitam —glorious; eva —certainly; va—or; tat tat —all
those; eva —certainly; avagaccha —you must know; tvam —you; mama —My;
tejah —splendor; arhsa —partly; sambhavam —born of.
Know that all beautiful, glorious, and mighty creations spring from but
a spark of My splendor.
अथवा बहुनैतेन किं ज्ञातेन तवार्जुन | विष्टभ्याहमिदं कृत्स्नमेकांशेन स्थितो जगत् ||१०-४२||
athavā bahunaitena kiṃ jñātena tavārjuna . viṣṭabhyāhamidaṃ kṛtsnamekāṃśena sthito jagat ||10-42||
athava —or; bahuna —many; etena —by this kind; kim —what; jnatena
—knowing; tava —you; arjuna —O Arjuna; vistabhya —entire; aham —I; idam
—this; krtsnam —all manifestations; eka —one; amsena —part; sthithah
—situated; jagat —in the universe.
But what need is there, Arjuna, for all this detailed knowledge? With a
single fragment of Myself I pervade and support this entire universe.
Глава 11
अर्जुन उवाच | मदनुग्रहाय परमं गुह्यमध्यात्मसंज्ञितम् | यत्त्वयोक्तं वचस्तेन मोहोऽयं विगतो मम ||११-१||
arjuna uvāca . madanugrahāya paramaṃ guhyamadhyātmasaṃjñitam . yattvayoktaṃ vacastena moho.ayaṃ vigato mama ||11-1||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; mat-anugrahaya —just to show me favor;
paramam —supreme; guhyam —confidential; adhyatma —spiritual; samjnitam
—in the matter of; yat —what; tvaya —by You; uktam —said; vacah —words;
tena —by that; mohah —illusion; ayam —this; vigatah —iseducated; mama —
my.
Arjuna said: I have heard Your instruction on confidential spiritual
matters which You have so kindly delivered unto me, and my illusion is
now dispelled.
भवाप्ययौ हि भूतानां श्रुतौ विस्तरशो मया | त्वत्तः कमलपत्राक्ष माहात्म्यमपि चाव्ययम् ||११-२||
bhavāpyayau hi bhūtānāṃ śrutau vistaraśo mayā . tvattaḥ kamalapatrākṣa māhātmyamapi cāvyayam ||11-2||
bhava —appearance; apyayau —disappearance; hi —certainly; bhutanam —of
all living entities; srutau —have heard; vistarasah —detail; maya —by me;
tvattah —from You; kamala-patraksa —O lotus-eyed one; mahatmyam
—glories; api —also; ca —and; avyayam —inexhaustible.
O lotus-eyed one, I have heard from You in detail about the appearance
and disappearance of every living entity, as realized through Your
inexhaustible glories.
एवमेतद्यथात्थ त्वमात्मानं परमेश्वर | द्रष्टुमिच्छामि ते रूपमैश्वरं पुरुषोत्तम ||११-३||
evametadyathāttha tvamātmānaṃ parameśvara . draṣṭumicchāmi te rūpamaiśvaraṃ puruṣottama ||11-3||
evam —that; etat —this; yathattha —as it is; tvam —You; atmanam —the soul;
paramesvara —the Supreme Lord; drastum —to see; icchami —I wish; te —You;
rupam —form; aisvaram —divine; purusottama —O best of personalities.
O greatest of all personalities, O supreme form, though I see here
before me Your actual position, I yet wish to see how You have entered
into this cosmic manifestation. I want to see that form of Yours.
मन्यसे यदि तच्छक्यं मया द्रष्टुमिति प्रभो | योगेश्वर ततो मे त्वं दर्शयात्मानमव्ययम् ||११-४||
manyase yadi tacchakyaṃ mayā draṣṭumiti prabho . yogeśvara tato me tvaṃ darśayātmānamavyayam ||11-4||
manyase —if You think; yadi —if; tat —that; sakyam —able to see; maya —by
me; drastum —to see; iti —thus; prabho —O Lord; yogesvara —the Lord of all
mystic power; tatah —then; me —unto me; tvam —You; darsaya —show;
atmanam —Yourself; avyayam —eternal.
If You think that I am able to behold Your cosmic form, O my Lord, O
master of all mystic power, then kindly show me that universal self.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | पश्य मे पार्थ रूपाणि शतशोऽथ सहस्रशः | नानाविधानि दिव्यानि नानावर्णाकृतीनि च ||११-५||
śrībhagavānuvāca . paśya me pārtha rūpāṇi śataśo.atha sahasraśaḥ . nānāvidhāni divyāni nānāvarṇākṛtīni ca ||11-5||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; pasya —
just see; me —Mine; partha —O son of Prtha; rupani —forms; satasah
—hundreds; atha —also; sahasrasah —thousands; nana-vidhani —variegated;
divyani — divine; nana —variegated; varna —colored; akrtmi —forms; ca —
also.
The Blessed Lord said: My dear Arjuna, O son of Prtha, behold now
My opulences, hundreds of thousands of varied divine forms,
multicolored like the sea.
पश्यादित्यान्वसून्रुद्रानश्विनौ मरुतस्तथा | बहून्यदृष्टपूर्वाणि पश्याश्चर्याणि भारत ||११-६||
paśyādityānvasūnrudrānaśvinau marutastathā . bahūnyadṛṣṭapūrvāṇi paśyāścaryāṇi bhārata ||11-6||
pasya —see; adityan —the twelve sons of Aditi; vasun —the eight Vasus;
rudran —the eleven forms of Rudra; asvinau —the two Asvins; marutah —the
forty-nine Maruts (demigods of the wind); tatha —also; bahuni —many; adrsta
—that you have not heard or seen; purvani —before; pasya —there see;
ascaryani —all the wonderful; bharata —O best of the Bharatas.
O best of the Bharatas, see here the different manifestations of Adityas,
Rudras, and all the demigods. Behold the many things which no one has
ever seen or heard before.
इहैकस्थं जगत्कृत्स्नं पश्याद्य सचराचरम् | मम देहे गुडाकेश यच्चान्यद् द्रष्टुमिच्छसि ||११-७||
ihaikasthaṃ jagatkṛtsnaṃ paśyādya sacarācaram . mama dehe guḍākeśa yaccānyad draṣṭumicchasi ||11-7||
iha —in this; ekastham —in one; jagat —the universe; krtsnam —completely;
pasya —see; adya —immediately; sa —with; cara —moving; acaram —not
moving; mama —My; dehe —in this body; gudakesa —O Arjuna; yat —that; ca
— also; anyat —other; drastum —to see; icchasi —you like.
Whatever you wish to see can be seen all at once in this body. This
universal form can show you all that you now desire, as well as whatever
you may desire in the future. Everything is here completely.
न तु मां शक्यसे द्रष्टुमनेनैव स्वचक्षुषा | दिव्यं ददामि ते चक्षुः पश्य मे योगमैश्वरम् ||११-८||
na tu māṃ śakyase draṣṭumanenaiva svacakṣuṣā . divyaṃ dadāmi te cakṣuḥ paśya me yogamaiśvaram ||11-8||
na —never; tu —but; mam —Me; sakyase —able; drastum —to see; anena —
by this; eva —certainly; sva-caksusa —with your own eyes; divyam —divine;
dadami —I give; te —you; caksuh —eyes; pasya —see; me —My; yogam
aisvaram —inconceivable mystic power.
But you cannot see Me with your present eyes. Therefore I give to you
divine eyes by which you can behold My mystic opulence.
सञ्जय उवाच | एवमुक्त्वा ततो राजन्महायोगेश्वरो हरिः | दर्शयामास पार्थाय परमं रूपमैश्वरम् ||११-९||
sañjaya uvāca . evamuktvā tato rājanmahāyogeśvaro hariḥ . darśayāmāsa pārthāya paramaṃ rūpamaiśvaram ||11-9||
sahjayah uvaca —Sanjaya said; evam —thus; uktva —saying; tatah —
thereafter; rajan —O King; maha-yogesvarah —the most powerful mystic;
harih —the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna; darsayamasa —showed;
parthaya —unto Arjuna; paramam —divine; rupam —universal form; aisvaram
— opulences.
Sanjaya said: O King, speaking thus, the Supreme, the Lord of all
mystic power, the Personality of Godhead, displayed His universal form
to Arjuna.
अनेकवक्त्रनयनमनेकाद्भुतदर्शनम् | अनेकदिव्याभरणं दिव्यानेकोद्यतायुधम् ||११-१०||
anekavaktranayanamanekādbhutadarśanam . anekadivyābharaṇaṃ divyānekodyatāyudham ||11-10||
aneka —various; vaktra —mouths; nayanam —eyes; aneka —various;
adbhuta —wonderful; darsanam —sight; aneka —many; divya —divine;
abharanam —ornaments; divya —divine; aneka —various; udyata —uplifted;
ayudham weapons; divya —divine; malya —garlands; ambara-dharam —
covered with the dresses; divya —divine; gandha —fragrance; anulepanam —
smeared; sarva — all; ascaryamayam —wonderful; devam —shining; anantam
—unlimited; visvatah-mukham —all-pervading.
Arjuna saw in that universal form unlimited mouths and unlimited
eyes. It was all wondrous. The form was decorated with divine, dazzling
ornaments and arrayed in many garbs. He was garlanded gloriously, and
there were many scents smeared over His body. All was magnificent, all¬
expanding, unlimited. This was seen by Arjuna.
दिव्यमाल्याम्बरधरं दिव्यगन्धानुलेपनम् | सर्वाश्चर्यमयं देवमनन्तं विश्वतोमुखम् ||११-११||
divyamālyāmbaradharaṃ divyagandhānulepanam . sarvāścaryamayaṃ devamanantaṃ viśvatomukham ||11-11||
दिवि सूर्यसहस्रस्य भवेद्युगपदुत्थिता | यदि भाः सदृशी सा स्याद्भासस्तस्य महात्मनः ||११-१२||
divi sūryasahasrasya bhavedyugapadutthitā . yadi bhāḥ sadṛśī sā syādbhāsastasya mahātmanaḥ ||11-12||
divi —in the sky; surya —sun; sahasrasya —of many thousands; bhavet —
there were; yugapat —simultaneously; utthita —present; yadi —if; bhah —light;
sadrsT— like that; sa —that; syat —may be; bhasah —effulgence; tasya —there
is; mahatmanah —of the great Lord.
If hundreds of thousands of suns rose up at once into the sky, they
might resemble the effulgence of the Supreme Person in that universal
form.
तत्रैकस्थं जगत्कृत्स्नं प्रविभक्तमनेकधा | अपश्यद्देवदेवस्य शरीरे पाण्डवस्तदा ||११-१३||
tatraikasthaṃ jagatkṛtsnaṃ pravibhaktamanekadhā . apaśyaddevadevasya śarīre pāṇḍavastadā ||11-13||
tatra —there; ekastham —one place; jagat —universe; krtsnam —completely;
pravibhaktam —divided in; anekadha —many kinds; apasyat —could see; deva-
devasya —of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; sarTre —in the universal
form; pandavah —Arjuna; tada —at that time.
At that time Arjuna could see in the universal form of the Lord the
unlimited expansions of the universe situated in one place although
divided into many, many thousands.
ततः स विस्मयाविष्टो हृष्टरोमा धनञ्जयः | प्रणम्य शिरसा देवं कृताञ्जलिरभाषत ||११-१४||
tataḥ sa vismayāviṣṭo hṛṣṭaromā dhanañjayaḥ . praṇamya śirasā devaṃ kṛtāñjalirabhāṣata ||11-14||
tatah —thereafter; sah —he; vismayavistah —being overwhelmed with
wonder; hrsta-roma —with his bodily hairs standing on end due to his great
ecstasy; dhananjayah —Arjuna ; pranamya —offering obeisances; sirasa —with
the head; devam —to the Supreme Personality of Godhead; krtahjalih — with
folded hands; abhasata —began to say.
Then, bewildered and astonished, his hair standing on end, Arjuna
began to pray with folded hands, offering obeisances to the Supreme
Lord.
अर्जुन उवाच | पश्यामि देवांस्तव देव देहे सर्वांस्तथा भूतविशेषसङ्घान् | ब्रह्माणमीशं कमलासनस्थ- मृषींश्च सर्वानुरगांश्च दिव्यान् ||११-१५||
arjuna uvāca . paśyāmi devāṃstava deva dehe sarvāṃstathā bhūtaviśeṣasaṅghān . brahmāṇamīśaṃ kamalāsanasthaṃ ṛṣīṃśca sarvānuragāṃśca divyān ||11-15||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; pasyami —I see; devan —all the demigods;
tava —Your; deva —O Lord; dehe —in the body; sarvan —all; tatha —also;
bhiita —living entities; visesa-sahghan —specifically assembled; brahmanam
— Lord Brahma; Tsam —Lord Siva; kamala-asana-stham —sitting on the lotus
flower; rsm —great sages; ca —also; sarvan —all; uragan —serpents; ca —also;
divyan —divine.
Arjuna said: My dear Lord Krsna, I see assembled together in Your
body all the demigods and various other living entities. I see Brahma
sitting on the lotus flower as well as Lord Siva and many sages and divine
serpents.
अनेकबाहूदरवक्त्रनेत्रं पश्यामि त्वां सर्वतोऽनन्तरूपम् | नान्तं न मध्यं न पुनस्तवादिं पश्यामि विश्वेश्वर विश्वरूप ||११-१६||
anekabāhūdaravaktranetraṃ paśyāmi tvāṃ sarvato.anantarūpam . nāntaṃ na madhyaṃ na punastavādiṃ paśyāmi viśveśvara viśvarūpa ||11-16||
aneka —many; bahu —arms; udara —bellies; vaktra —mouths; netram —
eyes; pasyami —I see; tvam —unto You; sarvatah —from all sides; ananta-
rupam —unlimited form; na antam —there is no end; na madhyam —there is no
middle; na punah —nor again; tava —Your; adim —beginning; pasyami — I see;
visvesvara —O Lord of the universe; visva-rupa —in the form of the universe.
O Lord of the universe, I see in Your universal body many, many forms
—bellies, mouths, eyes—expanded without limit. There is no end, there is
no beginning, and there is no middle to all this.
किरीटिनं गदिनं चक्रिणं च तेजोराशिं सर्वतो दीप्तिमन्तम् | पश्यामि त्वां दुर्निरीक्ष्यं समन्ताद् दीप्तानलार्कद्युतिमप्रमेयम् ||११-१७||
kirīṭinaṃ gadinaṃ cakriṇaṃ ca tejorāśiṃ sarvato dīptimantam . paśyāmi tvāṃ durnirīkṣyaṃ samantād dīptānalārkadyutimaprameyam ||11-17||
kirTtinam —with helmets; gadinam —with maces; cakrinam —with discs; ca
—and; tejorasim —effulgence; sarvatah —all sides; diptimantam —glowing;
pasyami —I see; tvam —You; dumiriksyam —difficult to see; samantat —
spreading; dipta-anala —blazing fire; arka —sun; dyutim —sunshine;
aprameyam —immeasurable.
Your form, adorned with various crowns, clubs and discs, is difficult to
see because of its glaring effulgence, which is fiery and immeasurable like
the sun.
त्वमक्षरं परमं वेदितव्यं त्वमस्य विश्वस्य परं निधानम् | त्वमव्ययः शाश्वतधर्मगोप्ता सनातनस्त्वं पुरुषो मतो मे ||११-१८||
tvamakṣaraṃ paramaṃ veditavyaṃ tvamasya viśvasya paraṃ nidhānam . tvamavyayaḥ śāśvatadharmagoptā sanātanastvaṃ puruṣo mato me ||11-18||
tvam —You; aksaram —inexhaustible; paramam —supreme; veditavyam —to
be understood; tvam —You; asya —of this; visvasya —of the universe; param
—supreme; nidhanam —basis; tvam —You are; avyayah —inexhaustible;
sasvata-dharma-gopta —maintainer of the eternal religion; sanatanah —
eternal; tvam —You; purusah —Supreme Personality; matah me —ismy opinion.
You are the supreme primal objective; You are the best in all the
universes; You are inexhaustible, and You are the oldest; You are the
maintainer of religion, the eternal Personality of Godhead.
अनादिमध्यान्तमनन्तवीर्य- मनन्तबाहुं शशिसूर्यनेत्रम् | पश्यामि त्वां दीप्तहुताशवक्त्रं स्वतेजसा विश्वमिदं तपन्तम् ||११-१९||
anādimadhyāntamanantavīryam anantabāhuṃ śaśisūryanetram . paśyāmi tvāṃ dīptahutāśavaktraṃ svatejasā viśvamidaṃ tapantam ||11-19||
anadi —without beginning; madhya —without middle; antam —without end;
ananta —unlimited; viryam —glorious; ananta —unlimited; bahum —arms; sasi
—moon; surya —sun; netram —eyes; pasyami —I see; tvam —You; dipta —
blazing; hutasa-vaktram —fire coming out of Your mouth; sva-tejasa —by
Your; visvam —this universe; idam —this; tapantam —heating.
You are the origin without beginning, middle or end. You have
numberless arms, and the sun and moon are among Your great unlimited
eyes. By Your own radiance You are heating this entire universe.
द्यावापृथिव्योरिदमन्तरं हि व्याप्तं त्वयैकेन दिशश्च सर्वाः | दृष्ट्वाद्भुतं रूपमुग्रं तवेदं लोकत्रयं प्रव्यथितं महात्मन् ||११-२०||
dyāvāpṛthivyoridamantaraṃ hi vyāptaṃ tvayaikena diśaśca sarvāḥ . dṛṣṭvādbhutaṃ rūpamugraṃ tavedaṃ lokatrayaṃ pravyathitaṃ mahātman ||11-20||
dyau —in outer space; aprthivyoh —of the earth; idam —this; antaram —in
between; hi —certainly; vyaptam —pervaded; tvaya —by You; ekena —by one;
disah —directions; ca —and; sarvah —all; drstva —by seeing; adbhutam —
wonderful; rupam —form; ugram —terrible; tava —Your; idam —this; loka
—planetary system; trayam —three; pravyathitam —perturbed; mahatman —O
great one.
Although You are one. You are spread throughout the sky and the
planets and all space between. O great one, as I behold this terrible form,
I see that all the planetary systems are perplexed.
अमी हि त्वां सुरसङ्घा विशन्ति केचिद्भीताः प्राञ्जलयो गृणन्ति | स्वस्तीत्युक्त्वा महर्षिसिद्धसङ्घाः स्तुवन्ति त्वां स्तुतिभिः पुष्कलाभिः ||११-२१||
amī hi tvāṃ surasaṅghā viśanti kecidbhītāḥ prāñjalayo gṛṇanti . svastītyuktvā maharṣisiddhasaṅghāḥ stuvanti tvāṃ stutibhiḥ puṣkalābhiḥ ||11-21||
ami— all those; hi —certainly; tvam —unto You; sura-sahghah —groups of
demigods; visanti —entering; kecit —some of them; bhitah —out of fear;
prahjalayah —with folded hands; grnanti —offering prayers unto; svasti —all
peace; id —thus; uktva —speaking like that; maharsi —great sages; siddha-
sahghah —perfect sages; stuvanti —singing hymns; tvam —unto You; stutibhih
—with prayers; puskalabhih —Vedic hymns.
All the demigods are surrendering and entering into You. They are
very much afraid, and with folded hands they are singing the Vedic
hymns.
रुद्रादित्या वसवो ये च साध्या विश्वेऽश्विनौ मरुतश्चोष्मपाश्च | गन्धर्वयक्षासुरसिद्धसङ्घा वीक्षन्ते त्वां विस्मिताश्चैव सर्वे ||११-२२||
rudrādityā vasavo ye ca sādhyā viśve.aśvinau marutaścoṣmapāśca . gandharvayakṣāsurasiddhasaṅghā vīkṣante tvāṃ vismitāścaiva sarve ||11-22||
rudra —manifestations of Lord Siva; adityah —the Adityas; vasavah —the
Vasus; ye —all those; ca —and; sadhyah —the Sadhyas; visve —the Visvadevas;
asvinau —the Asvinlkumaras; marutah —the Maruts; ca —and; usmapah —the
forefathers; ca —and; gandharva —the Gandharvas; yaksa —the Yaksas; asura-
siddha —the demons and the perfected demigods; sanghah —assemblies;
viksante —are seeing; tvam —You; vismitah —in wonder; ca —also; eva
—certainly; sarve —all.
The different manifestations of Lord Siva, the Adityas, the Vasus, the
Sadhyas, the Visvadevas, the two Asvins, the Maruts, the forefathers and
the Gandharvas, the Yaksas, Asuras, and all perfected demigods are
beholding You in wonder.
रूपं महत्ते बहुवक्त्रनेत्रं महाबाहो बहुबाहूरुपादम् | बहूदरं बहुदंष्ट्राकरालं दृष्ट्वा लोकाः प्रव्यथितास्तथाहम् ||११-२३||
rūpaṃ mahatte bahuvaktranetraṃ mahābāho bahubāhūrupādam . bahūdaraṃ bahudaṃṣṭrākarālaṃ dṛṣṭvā lokāḥ pravyathitāstathāham ||11-23||
rupam —form; mahat —very great; te —of You; bahu —many; vaktra —faces;
netram —eyes; maha-baho —O mighty-armed one; bahu —many; bahu —arms;
uru —thighs; padam —legs; bahu-udaram —many bellies; babu-damstra
—many teeth; karalam —horrible; drstva —seeing; lokah —all the planets;
pravyathitah —perturbed; tatha —similarly; aham —I.
O mighty-armed one, all the planets with their demigods are disturbed
at seeing Your many faces, eyes, arms, bellies and legs and Your terrible
teeth, and as they are disturbed, so am I.
नभःस्पृशं दीप्तमनेकवर्णं व्यात्ताननं दीप्तविशालनेत्रम् | दृष्ट्वा हि त्वां प्रव्यथितान्तरात्मा धृतिं न विन्दामि शमं च विष्णो ||११-२४||
nabhaḥspṛśaṃ dīptamanekavarṇaṃ vyāttānanaṃ dīptaviśālanetram . dṛṣṭvā hi tvāṃ pravyathitāntarātmā dhṛtiṃ na vindāmi śamaṃ ca viṣṇo ||11-24||
nabhah sprsam —touching the sky; diptam —glowing; aneka —many;
varnam —color; vyatta —open; ananam —mouth; dipta —glowing; visala —
very great; netram —eyes; drstva —by seeing; hi —certainly; tvam —You;
pravyathita —perturbed; antah —within; atma —soul; dhrtim —steadiness; na
—no; vindami —and have; samam —mental tranquility; ca —also; visno —O
Lord Visnu.
O all-pervading Visnu, I can no longer maintain my equilibrium.
Seeing Your radiant colors fill the skies and beholding Your eyes and
mouths, I am afraid.
दंष्ट्राकरालानि च ते मुखानि दृष्ट्वैव कालानलसन्निभानि | दिशो न जाने न लभे च शर्म प्रसीद देवेश जगन्निवास ||११-२५||
daṃṣṭrākarālāni ca te mukhāni dṛṣṭvaiva kālānalasannibhāni . diśo na jāne na labhe ca śarma prasīda deveśa jagannivāsa ||11-25||
damstra —teeth; karalani —like that; ca —also; te —Your; mukhani —faces;
drstva —seeing; eva —thus; kalanala —the fire of death; sannibhani —as if
blazing; disah —directions; na jane —do not know; na labhe —nor obtain; ca
sarma —and grace; prasida —be pleased; devesa —O Lord of all lords; jagat-
nivasa —refuge of the worlds.
O Lord of lords, O refuge of the worlds, please be gracious to me. I
cannot keep my balance seeing thus Your blazing deathlike faces and
awful teeth. In all directions I am bewildered.
अमी च त्वां धृतराष्ट्रस्य पुत्राः सर्वे सहैवावनिपालसङ्घैः | भीष्मो द्रोणः सूतपुत्रस्तथासौ सहास्मदीयैरपि योधमुख्यैः ||११-२६||
amī ca tvāṃ dhṛtarāṣṭrasya putrāḥ sarve sahaivāvanipālasaṅghaiḥ . bhīṣmo droṇaḥ sūtaputrastathāsau sahāsmadīyairapi yodhamukhyaiḥ ||11-26||
ami —all those; ca —also; tvam —You; dhrtarastasya —of Dhrtarastra;
putrah —sons; sarva —all; saha eva —along with; avanipala —warrior kings;
sahghaih —with the groups; bhismah —Bhlsmadeva; dronah —Dronacarya;
suta-putrah —Kama; tatha —also; asau —that; saha —with; asmadiyaih —our;
api —also; yodha-mukhyaih —chief among the warriors; vaktrani —mouths; te
—Your; tvaramanah —fearful; visanti —entering; darhstra —teeth; karalani —
terrible; bhayanakani —very fearful; kecit —some of them; vilagnah —being
attacked; dasanantaresu —between the teeth; sandrsyante —being seen;
curnitaih —smashed; uttama-ahgaih —by the head.
All the sons of Dhrtarastra along with their allied kings, and Bhlsma,
Drona and Karna, and all our soldiers are rushing into Your mouths,
their heads smashed by Your fearful teeth. I see that some are being
crushed between Your teeth as well.
वक्त्राणि ते त्वरमाणा विशन्ति दंष्ट्राकरालानि भयानकानि | केचिद्विलग्ना दशनान्तरेषु सन्दृश्यन्ते चूर्णितैरुत्तमाङ्गैः ||११-२७||
vaktrāṇi te tvaramāṇā viśanti daṃṣṭrākarālāni bhayānakāni . kecidvilagnā daśanāntareṣu sandṛśyante cūrṇitairuttamāṅgaiḥ ||11-27||
यथा नदीनां बहवोऽम्बुवेगाः समुद्रमेवाभिमुखा द्रवन्ति | तथा तवामी नरलोकवीरा विशन्ति वक्त्राण्यभिविज्वलन्ति ||११-२८||
yathā nadīnāṃ bahavo.ambuvegāḥ samudramevābhimukhā dravanti . tathā tavāmī naralokavīrā viśanti vaktrāṇyabhivijvalanti ||11-28||
yatha —as; nadmam —of the rivers; bahavah —many; ambu-vegah —waves
of the waters; samudram —ocean; eva —certainly; abhimukhah —towards;
dravand —gliding; tatha —similarly; tava —Your; ami —all those; nara-
lokavirah —the kings of human society; visanti —entering; vaktrani —into the
mouths; abhivijvaland —blazing.
As the rivers flow into the sea, so all these great warriors enter Your
blazing mouths and perish.
यथा प्रदीप्तं ज्वलनं पतङ्गा विशन्ति नाशाय समृद्धवेगाः | तथैव नाशाय विशन्ति लोकास्- तवापि वक्त्राणि समृद्धवेगाः ||११-२९||
yathā pradīptaṃ jvalanaṃ pataṅgā viśanti nāśāya samṛddhavegāḥ . tathaiva nāśāya viśanti lokāsa- tavāpi vaktrāṇi samṛddhavegāḥ ||11-29||
yatha —as; pradiptam —blazing; jvalanam —fire; patahgah —moths; visanti
— enters; nasaya —destruction; samrddha —full; vegah —speed; tatha eva
—similarly; nasaya —for destruction; visanti —entering; lokah —all people.
tava —unto You; api —also; vaktrani —in the mouths; samrddha-vegah —with
full speed.
I see all people rushing with full speed into Your mouths as moths dash
into a blazing fire.
लेलिह्यसे ग्रसमानः समन्ताल्- लोकान्समग्रान्वदनैर्ज्वलद्भिः | तेजोभिरापूर्य जगत्समग्रं भासस्तवोग्राः प्रतपन्ति विष्णो ||११-३०||
lelihyase grasamānaḥ samantāl- lokānsamagrānvadanairjvaladbhiḥ . tejobhirāpūrya jagatsamagraṃ bhāsastavogrāḥ pratapanti viṣṇo ||11-30||
lelihyase —licking; grasamanah —devouring; samantat —from all
directions; lokan —people; samagran —completely; vadanaih —by the mouth;
jvaladbhih —with blazing; tejobhih —by effulgence; apurya —covering; jagat
—the universe; samagram —all; bhasah —illuminating; tava —Your; ugrah —
terrible; pratapand —scorching; vzsno—O all-pervading Lord.
O Visnu, I see You devouring all people in Your flaming mouths and
covering the universe with Your immeasurable rays. Scorching the
worlds. You are manifest.
आख्याहि मे को भवानुग्ररूपो नमोऽस्तु ते देववर प्रसीद | विज्ञातुमिच्छामि भवन्तमाद्यं न हि प्रजानामि तव प्रवृत्तिम् ||११-३१||
ākhyāhi me ko bhavānugrarūpo namo.astu te devavara prasīda . vijñātumicchāmi bhavantamādyaṃ na hi prajānāmi tava pravṛttim ||11-31||
akhyahi —please explain; me —unto me; kah —who; bhavan —You; ugra-
rupah —fierce form; namah astu —obeisances; te —unto You; deva-vara —the
great one amongst the demigods; prasida —be gracious; vijnatum —just to
know; icchami —I wish; bhavantam —You; adyam —the original; na —never;
hi —certainly; prajanami —do I know; tava —Your; pravrtdm —mission.
O Lord of lords, so fierce of form, please tell me who You are. I offer
my obeisances unto You; please be gracious to me. I do not know what
Your mission is, and I desire to hear of it.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | कालोऽस्मि लोकक्षयकृत्प्रवृद्धो लोकान्समाहर्तुमिह प्रवृत्तः | ऋतेऽपि त्वां न भविष्यन्ति सर्वे येऽवस्थिताः प्रत्यनीकेषु योधाः ||११-३२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . kālo.asmi lokakṣayakṛtpravṛddho lokānsamāhartumiha pravṛttaḥ . ṛte.api tvāṃ na bhaviṣyanti sarve ye.avasthitāḥ pratyanīkeṣu yodhāḥ ||11-32||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Personality of Godhead said; kalah —time; asmi —
I am; loka —the worlds; ksaya-krt —destroyer; pravrddhah —to engage; lokan
—all people; samahartum —to destroy; iha —in this world; pravrttah —to
engage; rte api —without even; tvam —you; na —never; bhavisyanti —will be;
sarve —all; ye —who; avasthitah —situated; pratyamkesu —on the opposite
side; yodhah —the soldiers.
The Blessed Lord said: Time I am, destroyer of the worlds, and I have
come to engage all people. With the exception of you [the Pandavas], all
the soldiers here on both sides will be slain.
तस्मात्त्वमुत्तिष्ठ यशो लभस्व जित्वा शत्रून् भुङ्क्ष्व राज्यं समृद्धम् | मयैवैते निहताः पूर्वमेव निमित्तमात्रं भव सव्यसाचिन् ||११-३३||
tasmāttvamuttiṣṭha yaśo labhasva jitvā śatrūn bhuṅkṣva rājyaṃ samṛddham . mayaivaite nihatāḥ pūrvameva nimittamātraṃ bhava savyasācin ||11-33||
tasmat —therefore; tvam —you; uttistha —get up; yasah —fame; labhasva
—gain; jitva —conquering; satrun —enemies; bhunksva —enjoy; rajyam
—kingdom; samrddham —flourishing; maya —by Me; eva —certainly; ete —all
these; nihatah —already killed; purvam eva —by previous elements; nimitta-
matram —just become the cause; bhava —become; savyasacin —O
Savyasacin.
Therefore get up and prepare to fight. After conquering your enemies
you will enjoy a flourishing kingdom. They are already put to death by
My arrangement, and you, O Savyasacin, can be but an instrument in the
fight.
द्रोणं च भीष्मं च जयद्रथं च कर्णं तथान्यानपि योधवीरान् | मया हतांस्त्वं जहि मा व्यथिष्ठा युध्यस्व जेतासि रणे सपत्नान् ||११-३४||
droṇaṃ ca bhīṣmaṃ ca jayadrathaṃ ca karṇaṃ tathānyānapi yodhavīrān . mayā hatāṃstvaṃ jahi mavyathiṣṭhā yudhyasva jetāsi raṇe sapatnān ||11-34||
dronam ca —also Drona; bhismam ca —also Bhlsma; jayadratham ca — also
Jayadratha; karnam —also Kama; tatha —also; anyan —others; api — certainly;
yodha-viran —great warriors; mayci —by Me; hatan —already killed; tvam —
you; jahi —become victorious; ma —never; y yathisthah —be disturbed;
yudhyasva —just fight; jetasi —just conquer; rane —in the fight; sapatnan —
enemies.
The Blessed Lord said: All the great warriors—Drona, Bhlsma,
Jayadratha, Karna—are already destroyed. Simply fight, and you will
vanquish your enemies.
सञ्जय उवाच | एतच्छ्रुत्वा वचनं केशवस्य कृताञ्जलिर्वेपमानः किरीटी | नमस्कृत्वा भूय एवाह कृष्णं सगद्गदं भीतभीतः प्रणम्य ||११-३५||
sañjaya uvāca . etacchrutvā vacanaṃ keśavasya kṛtāñjalirvepamānaḥ kirīṭī . namaskṛtvā bhūya evāha kṛṣṇaṃ sagadgadaṃ bhītabhītaḥ praṇamya ||11-35||
sahjayah uvaca —Sanjaya said; etat —thus; srutva —hearing; vacanam —
speech; kesavasya —of Krsna; krtahjalih —with folded hands; vepamanah —
trembling; kiritT- —Arjuna; namaskrtva —offering obeisances; bhuyah —again;
eva —also; aha krsnam —said unto Krsna; sa-gadgadam —faltering; bhfta-
bhitah —fearful; pranamya —offering obeisances.
Sanjaya said to Dhrtarastra: O King, after hearing these words from
the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Arjuna trembled, fearfully offered
obeisances with folded hands and began, falteringly, to speak as follows:
अर्जुन उवाच | स्थाने हृषीकेश तव प्रकीर्त्या जगत्प्रहृष्यत्यनुरज्यते च | रक्षांसि भीतानि दिशो द्रवन्ति सर्वे नमस्यन्ति च सिद्धसङ्घाः ||११-३६||
arjuna uvāca . sthāne hṛṣīkeśa tava prakīrtyā jagatprahṛṣyatyanurajyate ca . rakṣāṃsi bhītāni diśo dravanti sarve namasyanti ca siddhasaṅghāḥ ||11-36||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; sthane —rightly; hrsTkesa —O master of all
senses; tava —Your; prakirtya —glories; jagat —the entire world; prahrsyati —
rejoicing; anurajyate —becoming attached; raksamsi —the demons; bhitani
—out of fear; disah —directions; dravanti —fleeing; sarve —all; namasyanti
—offering respect; ca —also; siddha-sanghah —the perfect human beings.
O HrsTkesa, the world becomes joyful upon hearing Your name and
thus everyone becomes attached to You. Although the perfected beings
offer You their respectful homage, the demons are afraid, and they flee
here and there. All this is rightly done.
कस्माच्च ते न नमेरन्महात्मन् गरीयसे ब्रह्मणोऽप्यादिकर्त्रे | अनन्त देवेश जगन्निवास त्वमक्षरं सदसत्तत्परं यत् ||११-३७||
kasmācca te na nameranmahātman garīyase brahmaṇo.apyādikartre . ananta deveśa jagannivāsa tvamakṣaraṃ sadasattatparaṃ yat ||11-37||
kasmat —why; ca —also; te —unto You; na —not; nameran —offer proper
obeisances; mahatman —O great one; garTyase —You are better than;
brahmanah —Brahma; api —although; adi-kartre —the supreme creator; ananta
—unlimited; devesa-God of the gods; jagat-nivasa —O refuge of the universe;
tvam —You are; aksaram —imperishable; sat-asat —cause and effect; tat-
param —transcendental; yat —because.
O great one, who stands above even Brahma, You are the original
master. Why should they not offer their homage up to You, O limitless
one? O refuge of the universe. You are the invincible source, the cause of
all causes, transcendental to this material manifestation.
त्वमादिदेवः पुरुषः पुराणस्- त्वमस्य विश्वस्य परं निधानम् | वेत्तासि वेद्यं च परं च धाम त्वया ततं विश्वमनन्तरूप ||११-३८||
tvamādidevaḥ puruṣaḥ purāṇasa- tvamasya viśvasya paraṃ nidhānam . vettāsi vedyaṃ ca paraṃ ca dhāma tvayā tataṃ viśvamanantarūpa ||11-38||
tvam —You; adi-devah —the original Supreme God; purusah —personality;
puranah —old; tvam —You; asya —this; visvasya —universe; param —
transcenddental; nidhanam —refuge; vetta —knower; asi —You are; vedyam ca
—and the knowable; param ca —and transcendental; dhama —refuge; tvaya —
by You; tatam —pervaded; visvam —universe; ananta-rupa —unlimited form.
You are the original Personality, the Godhead. You are the only
sanctuary of this manifested cosmic world. You know everything, and You
are all that is knowable. You are above the material modes. O limitless
form! This whole cosmic manifestation is pervaded by You!
वायुर्यमोऽग्निर्वरुणः शशाङ्कः प्रजापतिस्त्वं प्रपितामहश्च | नमो नमस्तेऽस्तु सहस्रकृत्वः पुनश्च भूयोऽपि नमो नमस्ते ||११-३९||
vāyuryamo.agnirvaruṇaḥ śaśāṅkaḥ prajāpatistvaṃ prapitāmahaśca . namo namaste.astu sahasrakṛtvaḥ punaśca bhūyo.api namo namaste ||11-39||
vayuh —air; yamah —controller; agnih —fire; varunah —water; sasankah —
moon; prajapatih —Brahma; tvam —You; prapitamahah —grandfather; ca —
also; namah —offering respects; namah te —again I offer my respects unto
You; astu —are being; sahasra-krtvah —a thousand times; punah ca —and
again; bhuyah —again; api —also; namah —offer my respects; namah te —
offering my respects unto You.
You are air, fire, water, and You are the moon! You are the supreme
controller and the grandfather. Thus I offer my respectful obeisances unto
You a thousand times, and again and yet again!
नमः पुरस्तादथ पृष्ठतस्ते नमोऽस्तु ते सर्वत एव सर्व | अनन्तवीर्यामितविक्रमस्त्वं सर्वं समाप्नोषि ततोऽसि सर्वः ||११-४०||
namaḥ purastādatha pṛṣṭhataste namo.astu te sarvata eva sarva . anantavīryāmitavikramastvaṃ sarvaṃ samāpnoṣi tato.asi sarvaḥ ||11-40||
namah —offering obeisances; purastat —from the front; atha —also;
prsthatah —from behind; te —You; namah astu —offer my respects; te —unto
You; sarvatah —from all sides; eva sarva —because You are everything;
ananta-virya —unlimited potency; amita-vikramah —unlimited force; tvam
—You; sarvam —everything; samapnosi —cover; tatah asi —therefore You are;
sarvah —everything.
Obeisances from the front, from behind and from all sides! O
unbounded power. You are the master of limitless might! You are all-
pervading, and thus You are everything!
सखेति मत्वा प्रसभं यदुक्तं हे कृष्ण हे यादव हे सखेति | अजानता महिमानं तवेदं मया प्रमादात्प्रणयेन वापि ||११-४१||
sakheti matvā prasabhaṃ yaduktaṃ he kṛṣṇa he yādava he sakheti . ajānatā mahimānaṃ tavedaṃ mayā pramādātpraṇayena vāpi ||11-41||
sakha —friend; iti —thus; matva —thinking; prasabham —temporary; yat —
whatever; uktam —said; he krsna —O Krsna; he yadava —O Yadava; he sakha
iti —O my dear friend, ajanata —without knowing; mahimanam —glories; tava
—Your; idam —this; maya —by me; pramadat —out of foolishness; pranayena
—out of love; va api —either; yat —whatever; ca —also; avahasartham —for
joking; asatkrtah —dishonor; asi —have been done; vihara —in relaxation;
sayya —in joking; asana —in a resting place; bhojanesu —or while eating
together; ekah —alone; athava —or; api —others; acyuta —O infallible one; tat-
samaksam —as Your competitor; tat —all those; ksamaye — excuse; tvam —
You; aham —I; aprameyam —immeasurable.
I have in the past addressed You as "O Krsna," "O Yadava," "O my
friend," without knowing Your glories. Please forgive whatever I may
have done in madness or in love. I have dishonored You many times while
relaxing or while lying on the same bed or eating together, sometimes
alone and sometimes in front of many friends. Please excuse me for all my
offenses.
यच्चावहासार्थमसत्कृतोऽसि विहारशय्यासनभोजनेषु | एकोऽथवाप्यच्युत तत्समक्षं तत्क्षामये त्वामहमप्रमेयम् ||११-४२||
yaccāvahāsārthamasatkṛto.asi vihāraśayyāsanabhojaneṣu . eko.athavāpyacyuta tatsamakṣaṃ tatkṣāmaye tvāmahamaprameyam ||11-42||
पितासि लोकस्य चराचरस्य त्वमस्य पूज्यश्च गुरुर्गरीयान् | न त्वत्समोऽस्त्यभ्यधिकः कुतोऽन्यो लोकत्रयेऽप्यप्रतिमप्रभाव ||११-४३||
pitāsi lokasya carācarasya tvamasya pūjyaśca gururgarīyān . na tvatsamo.astyabhyadhikaḥ kuto.anyo lokatraye.apyapratimaprabhāva ||11-43||
pita —father; asi —You are; lokasya —of all the world; cara —moving;
acarasya —nonmoving; tvam —You are; asya —of this; pujyah —worshipable;
ca —also; guruh —master; garTyan —glorious; na —never; tvat-samah —equal to
You; asti —there is; abhyadhikah —greater; kutah —how is it possible; anyah
—other; loka-traye —in three planetary systems; api —also; apratima
—immeasurable; prabhava —power.
You are the father of this complete cosmic manifestation, the
worshipable chief, the spiritual master. No one is equal to You, nor can
anyone be one with You. Within the three worlds. You are immeasurable.
तस्मात्प्रणम्य प्रणिधाय कायं प्रसादये त्वामहमीशमीड्यम् | पितेव पुत्रस्य सखेव सख्युः प्रियः प्रियायार्हसि देव सोढुम् ||११-४४||
tasmātpraṇamya praṇidhāya kāyaṃ prasādaye tvāmahamīśamīḍyam . piteva putrasya sakheva sakhyuḥ priyaḥ priyāyārhasi deva soḍhum ||11-44||
tasmat —therefore; pranamya —after offering obeisances; pranidhaya —
laying down; kayam —body; prasadaye —to beg mercy; tvam —unto you; aham
—I; Tsam —unto the Supreme Lord; Tdyam —who is worshipable; pita iva —
like a father; putrasya —of a son; sakha iva —like a friend; sakhyuh —of a
friend; priyah —lover; priyayah —of the dearmost; arhasi —You should; deva
—my Lord; sodhum —tolerate.
You are the Supreme Lord, to be worshiped by every living being. Thus
I fall down to offer You my respects and ask Your mercy. Please tolerate
the wrongs that I may have done to You and bear with me as a father with
his son, or a friend with his friend, or a lover with his beloved.
अदृष्टपूर्वं हृषितोऽस्मि दृष्ट्वा भयेन च प्रव्यथितं मनो मे | तदेव मे दर्शय देव रूपं प्रसीद देवेश जगन्निवास ||११-४५||
adṛṣṭapūrvaṃ hṛṣito.asmi dṛṣṭvā bhayena ca pravyathitaṃ mano me . tadeva me darśaya deva rūpaṃ prasīda deveśa jagannivāsa ||11-45||
adrsta-piirvam —never seen before; hrsitah —gladdened; asmi —I am; drstva
—by seeing; bhayena —out of fear; ca —also; pravyathitam —perturbed; manah
—mind; me —mine; tat —therefore; eva —certainly; me —unto me; darsaya —
show; deva —O Lord; rupam —the form; prasida —just be gracious; devesa —
O Lord of lords; jagat-nivasa —the refuge of the universe.
After seeing this universal form, which I have never seen before, I am
gladdened, but at the same time my mind is disturbed with fear.
Therefore please bestow Your grace upon me and reveal again Your form
as the Personality of Godhead, O Lord of lords, O abode of the universe.
किरीटिनं गदिनं चक्रहस्तं इच्छामि त्वां द्रष्टुमहं तथैव | तेनैव रूपेण चतुर्भुजेन सहस्रबाहो भव विश्वमूर्ते ||११-४६||
kirīṭinaṃ gadinaṃ cakrahastaṃ icchāmi tvāṃ draṣṭumahaṃ tathaiva . tenaiva rūpeṇa caturbhujena sahasrabāho bhava viśvamūrte ||11-46||
kiritinam —with helmet; gadinam —with club; cakra-hastam —disc in hand;
icchami —I wish; tv dm —You; drastum —to see; aham —I; tatha eva —in that
position; tena eva —by that; rupena —with form; catur-bhujena —four-handed;
sahasra-baho —O thousand-handed one; bhava —just become; visva-murte —
O universal form.
O universal Lord, I wish to see You in Your four-armed form, with
helmeted head and with club, wheel, conch and lotus flower in Your
hands. I long to see You in that form.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | मया प्रसन्नेन तवार्जुनेदं रूपं परं दर्शितमात्मयोगात् | तेजोमयं विश्वमनन्तमाद्यं यन्मे त्वदन्येन न दृष्टपूर्वम् ||११-४७||
śrībhagavānuvāca . mayā prasannena tavārjunedaṃ rūpaṃ paraṃ darśitamātmayogāt . tejomayaṃ viśvamanantamādyaṃ yanme tvadanyena na dṛṣṭapūrvam ||11-47||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; maya —by
Me; prasannena —happily; tava —unto you; arjuna —O Arjuna; idam —this;
rupam —form; param —transcendental; darsitam —shown; atma-yogat —by
My internal potency; tejomayam —full of effulgence; visvam —the entire
universe; anantam —unlimited; adyam —original; yat me —that which is Mine;
tvat-anyena —besides you; na drsta-purvam —no one has previously seen.
The Blessed Lord said: My dear Arjuna, happily do I show you this
universal form within the material world by My internal potency. No one
before you has ever seen this unlimited and glaringly effulgent form.
न वेदयज्ञाध्ययनैर्न दानैर्- न च क्रियाभिर्न तपोभिरुग्रैः | एवंरूपः शक्य अहं नृलोके द्रष्टुं त्वदन्येन कुरुप्रवीर ||११-४८||
na vedayajñādhyayanairna dānaira- na ca kriyābhirna tapobhirugraiḥ . evaṃrūpaḥ śakya ahaṃ nṛloke draṣṭuṃ tvadanyena kurupravīra ||11-48||
na —never; veda —Vedic study; yajna —sacrifice; adhyayanaih —studying;
na danaih —by charity; na —never; ca —also; kriyabhih —by pious activities;
na tapobhih —by serious penances; ugraih —severe; evam —thus; rupah —
form; sakyah —can be seen; aham —I; nrloke —in this material world; drastum
—to see; tvat —you; anyena —by another; kuru-pravfra —O best among the
Kuru warriors.
O best of the Kuru warriors, no one before you has ever seen this
universal form of Mine, for neither by studying the Vedas, nor by
performing sacrifices, nor by charities or similar activities can this form
be seen. Only you have seen this.
मा ते व्यथा मा च विमूढभावो दृष्ट्वा रूपं घोरमीदृङ्ममेदम् | व्यपेतभीः प्रीतमनाः पुनस्त्वं तदेव मे रूपमिदं प्रपश्य ||११-४९||
mā te vyathā mā ca vimūḍhabhāvo dṛṣṭvā rūpaṃ ghoramīdṛṅmamedam . vyapetabhīḥ prītamanāḥ punastvaṃ tadeva me rūpamidaṃ prapaśya ||11-49||
ma —let it not be; te —unto you; vyatha —trouble; ma —let it not be; ca —
also; vimudha-bhavah —bewilderment; drstva —by seeing; rupam —form;
ghoram —horrible; Tdrk —like this; mama —My; idam —as it is; vyapetabhih —
just become free from all fear; prita-manah —be pleased in mind; punah —
again; tvam —you; tat —that; eva —thus; me —My; rupam —form; idam —this;
prapasya —just see.
Your mind has been perturbed upon seeing this horrible feature of
Mine. Now let it be finished. My devotee, be free from all disturbance.
With a peaceful mind you can now see the form you desire.
सञ्जय उवाच | इत्यर्जुनं वासुदेवस्तथोक्त्वा स्वकं रूपं दर्शयामास भूयः | आश्वासयामास च भीतमेनं भूत्वा पुनः सौम्यवपुर्महात्मा ||११-५०||
sañjaya uvāca . ityarjunaṃ vāsudevastathoktvā svakaṃ rūpaṃ darśayāmāsa bhūyaḥ . āśvāsayāmāsa ca bhītamenaṃ bhūtvā punaḥ saumyavapurmahātmā ||11-50||
sahjayah uvaca —Sanjaya said; id —thus; arjunam —unto Arjuna;
vasudevah —Krsna; tatha —that way; uktva —saying; svakam —His own;
rupam —form; darsayamasa —showed; bhuyah —again; asvasayamasa —also
convinced him; ca —also; bhitam —fearful; enam —him; bhutva punah —
becoming again; saumya-vapuh —beautiful form; mahatma —the great one.
Sanjaya said to Dhrtarastra: The Supreme Personality of Godhead,
Krsna, while speaking thus to Arjuna, displayed His real four-armed
form, and at last He showed him His two-armed form, thus encouraging
the fearful Arjuna.
अर्जुन उवाच | दृष्ट्वेदं मानुषं रूपं तव सौम्यं जनार्दन | इदानीमस्मि संवृत्तः सचेताः प्रकृतिं गतः ||११-५१||
arjuna uvāca . dṛṣṭvedaṃ mānuṣaṃ rūpaṃ tava saumyaṃ janārdana . idānīmasmi saṃvṛttaḥ sacetāḥ prakṛtiṃ gataḥ ||11-51||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; drstva —seeing; idam —this; manusam —
human being; rupam —form; tava —Your; saumyam —very beautiful;
janardana —O chastiser of the enemies; idamm —just now; asmi —I am;
sarhvrttah —settled; sa-cetah —in my consciousness; prakrtim —my own;
gatah —I am.
When Arjuna thus saw Krsna in His original form, he said: Seeing this
humanlike form, so very beautiful, my mind is now pacified, and I am
restored to my original nature.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | सुदुर्दर्शमिदं रूपं दृष्टवानसि यन्मम | देवा अप्यस्य रूपस्य नित्यं दर्शनकाङ्क्षिणः ||११-५२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . sudurdarśamidaṃ rūpaṃ dṛṣṭavānasi yanmama . devā apyasya rūpasya nityaṃ darśanakāṅkṣiṇaḥ ||11-52||
sri bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; sudur-
darsana — very difficult to be seen; idam —this; rupam —form; drstavan asi —
as you have seen; yat —which; mama —of Mine; devah —the demigods; api
asya —also this; rupasya —of the form; nityam —eternally; darsana-
kahksinah —always aspire to see.
The Blessed Lord said: My dear Arjuna, the form which you are now
seeing is very difficult to behold. Even the demigods are ever seeking the
opportunity to see this form which is so dear.
नाहं वेदैर्न तपसा न दानेन न चेज्यया | शक्य एवंविधो द्रष्टुं दृष्टवानसि मां यथा ||११-५३||
nāhaṃ vedairna tapasā na dānena na cejyayā . śakya evaṃvidho draṣṭuṃ dṛṣṭavānasi māṃ yathā ||11-53||
na —never; aham —I; vedaih —by study of the Vedas; na —never; tapasa —
by serious penances; na —never; danena —by charity; na —never; ca —also;
ijyaya —by worship; sakyah —isit possible; evam-vidhah —like this; drastum
—to see; drstavan —seeing; asi —you are; mam —Me; yatha —as.
The form which you are seeing with your transcendental eyes cannot be
understood simply by studying the Vedas, nor by undergoing serious
penances, nor by charity, nor by worship. It is not by these means that
one can see Me as I am.
भक्त्या त्वनन्यया शक्य अहमेवंविधोऽर्जुन | ज्ञातुं द्रष्टुं च तत्त्वेन प्रवेष्टुं च परन्तप ||११-५४||
bhaktyā tvananyayā śakya ahamevaṃvidho.arjuna . jñātuṃ draṣṭuṃ ca tattvena praveṣṭuṃ ca parantapa ||11-54||
bhaktya —by devotional service; tu —but; ananyaya —without being mixed
with fruitive activities or speculative knowledge; sakyah —possible; aham —I;
evam-vidhah —like this; arjuna —O Arjuna; jnatum —to know; drastum —to
see; tattvena —in fact; pravestum —and to enter into; ca —also; parantapa —O
mighty-armed one.
My dear Arjuna, only by undivided devotional service can I be
understood as I am, standing before you, and can thus be seen directly.
Only in this way can you enter into the mysteries of My understanding.
मत्कर्मकृन्मत्परमो मद्भक्तः सङ्गवर्जितः | निर्वैरः सर्वभूतेषु यः स मामेति पाण्डव ||११-५५||
matkarmakṛnmatparamo madbhaktaḥ saṅgavarjitaḥ . nirvairaḥ sarvabhūteṣu yaḥ sa māmeti pāṇḍava ||11-55||
mat-karma-krt —engaged in doing My work; mat-paramah —concerning
Me, the Supreme; mat-bhaktah —engaged in My devotional service; sahga-
varjitah —freed from the contamination of previous activities and mental
speculation; nirvairah —without an enemy; sarva-bhutesu —to every living
entity; yah —one who; sah —he; mam —unto Me; eti —comes; pandava —O
son of Pandu.
My dear Arjuna, one who is engaged in My pure devotional service,
free from the contaminations of previous activities and from mental
speculation, who is friendly to every living entity, certainly comes to Me.
Глава 12
अर्जुन उवाच | एवं सततयुक्ता ये भक्तास्त्वां पर्युपासते | ये चाप्यक्षरमव्यक्तं तेषां के योगवित्तमाः ||१२-१||
arjuna uvāca . evaṃ satatayuktā ye bhaktāstvāṃ paryupāsate . ye cāpyakṣaramavyaktaṃ teṣāṃ ke yogavittamāḥ ||12-1||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; evam —thus; satata —always; yuktah
—engaged; ye —those; bhaktah —devotees; tv am —unto You; paryupasate
—properly worship; ye —those; ca —also; api —again; aksaram —beyond the
senses; avyaktam —unmanifested; tesam —of them; ke —who; yoga-vittamah
—the most perfect.
Arjuna inquired: Which is considered to be more perfect: those who
are properly engaged in Your devotional service, or those who worship
the impersonal Brahman, the unmanifested?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | मय्यावेश्य मनो ये मां नित्ययुक्ता उपासते | श्रद्धया परयोपेताः ते मे युक्ततमा मताः ||१२-२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . mayyāveśya mano ye māṃ nityayuktā upāsate . śraddhayā parayopetāḥ te me yuktatamā matāḥ ||12-2||
sri bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; mayi —
unto Me; avesya —fixing; manah —mind; ye —one who; mam —unto Me; nitya
—always; yuktah —engaged; upasate —worships; sraddhaya —with faith;
paraya —transcendental; upetah —engages; te —they; me —Mine; yuktatamah
—most perfect; matah —I consider.
The Blessed Lord said: He whose mind is fixed on My personal form,
always engaged in worshiping Me with great and transcendental faith, is
considered by Me to be most perfect.
ये त्वक्षरमनिर्देश्यमव्यक्तं पर्युपासते | सर्वत्रगमचिन्त्यञ्च कूटस्थमचलन्ध्रुवम् ||१२-३||
ye tvakṣaramanirdeśyamavyaktaṃ paryupāsate . sarvatragamacintyañca kūṭasthamacalandhruvam ||12-3||
ye —those; tu —but; aksaram —which is beyond the perception of the
senses; anirdesyam —indefinite; avyaktam —unmanifested; paryupasate
—completely engages; sarvatra-gam —all-pervading; acintyam —
inconceivable; ca —also; kutastham —in the center; acalam —immovable;
dhruvam —fixed; sanniyamya —controlling; indriya-gramam —all the senses;
sarvatra —everywhere; sama- buddayah —equally disposed; te —they;
prapnuvanti —achieve; mam —unto Me; eva —certainly; sarva-bhuta-hite —all
living entities` welfare; ratah —engaged.
But those who fully worship the unmanifested, that which lies beyond
the perception of the senses, the all-pervading, inconceivable, fixed, and
immovable—the impersonal conception of the Absolute Truth—by
controlling the various senses and being equally disposed to everyone,
such persons, engaged in the welfare of all, at last achieve Me.
सन्नियम्येन्द्रियग्रामं सर्वत्र समबुद्धयः | ते प्राप्नुवन्ति मामेव सर्वभूतहिते रताः ||१२-४||
sanniyamyendriyagrāmaṃ sarvatra samabuddhayaḥ . te prāpnuvanti māmeva sarvabhūtahite ratāḥ ||12-4||
क्लेशोऽधिकतरस्तेषामव्यक्तासक्तचेतसाम् | अव्यक्ता हि गतिर्दुःखं देहवद्भिरवाप्यते ||१२-५||
kleśo.adhikatarasteṣāmavyaktāsaktacetasām || avyaktā hi gatirduḥkhaṃ dehavadbhiravāpyate ||12-5||
klesah —trouble; adhikatarah —more troublesome; tesam —of them; avyakta
—unmanifested; asakta —being attached; cetasam —of those whose minds;
avyakta —unmanifested; hi —certainly; gatih duhkham —progress is
troublesome; dehavadbhih —of the embodiments; avapyate —achieve.
For those whose minds are attached to the unmanifested, impersonal
feature of the Supreme, advancement is very troublesome. To make
progress in that discipline is always difficult for those who are embodied.
ये तु सर्वाणि कर्माणि मयि संन्यस्य मत्परः | अनन्येनैव योगेन मां ध्यायन्त उपासते ||१२-६||
ye tu sarvāṇi karmāṇi mayi saṃnyasya matparaḥ . ananyenaiva yogena māṃ dhyāyanta upāsate ||12-6||
ye —one who; tu —but; sarvani —everything; karmani —activities; mayi —
unto Me; sannyasya —giving up; mat-parah —being attached to Me; ananyena
—without division; eva —certainly; yogena —by practice of such bhakti-yoga;
mam —unto Me; dhyayantah —meditating; upasate —worship; tesam —of them;
aham —I; samuddharta —deliverer; mrtyu —that; samsara —material existence;
sagarat —from the ocean; bhavami —become; na cirat —not a long time;
partha —O son of Prtha; mayi —unto Me; avesita —fixed; cetasam —of those
whose minds are like that.
For one who worships Me, giving up all his activities unto Me and
being devoted to Me without deviation, engaged in devotional service and
always meditating upon Me, who has fixed his mind upon Me, O son of
Prtha, for him I am the swift deliverer from the ocean of birth and death.
तेषामहं समुद्धर्ता मृत्युसंसारसागरात् | भवामि नचिरात्पार्थ मय्यावेशितचेतसाम् ||१२-७||
teṣāmahaṃ samuddhartā mṛtyusaṃsārasāgarāt . bhavāmi nacirātpārtha mayyāveśitacetasām ||12-7||
मय्येव मन आधत्स्व मयि बुद्धिं निवेशय | निवसिष्यसि मय्येव अत ऊर्ध्वं न संशयः ||१२-८||
mayyeva mana ādhatsva mayi buddhiṃ niveśaya . nivasiṣyasi mayyeva ata ūrdhvaṃ na saṃśayaḥ ||12-8||
mayi —unto Me; eva —certainly; manah —mind; adhatsva —fix; mayi — upon
Me; buddhim —intelligence; nivesaya —apply; nivasisyasi —you lead; mayi
—unto Me; eva —certainly; atah —therefore; urdhvam —up; na —never;
samsayah —doubt.
Just fix your mind upon Me, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and
engage all your intelligence in Me. Thus you will live in Me always,
without a doubt.
अथ चित्तं समाधातुं न शक्नोषि मयि स्थिरम् | अभ्यासयोगेन ततो मामिच्छाप्तुं धनञ्जय ||१२-९||
atha cittaṃ samādhātuṃ na śaknoṣi mayi sthiram . abhyāsayogena tato māmicchāptuṃ dhanañjaya ||12-9||
atha —if, therefore; cittam —mind; samadhatam —fixing; na —not; saknosi
—able; mayi —upon Me; sthiram —fixed; abhyasa —practice; yogena —by
devotional service; tatah —therefore; mam —Me; iccha —desire; aptum —to
get; dhananjaya —O Arjuna.
My dear Arjuna, O winner of wealth, if you cannot fix your mind upon
Me without deviation, then follow the regulated principles of bhakti-yoga.
In this way you will develop a desire to attain to Me.
अभ्यासेऽप्यसमर्थोऽसि मत्कर्मपरमो भव | मदर्थमपि कर्माणि कुर्वन्सिद्धिमवाप्स्यसि ||१२-१०||
abhyāse.apyasamartho.asi matkarmaparamo bhava . madarthamapi karmāṇi kurvansiddhimavāpsyasi ||12-10||
abhyase —in the practice of; api —even; asamarthah —unable; asi —you are;
mat-karma —My work; paramah —supreme; bhava —you become; mat-
artham —for My sake; api —even though; karmani —what; kurvan
—performing; siddhim —perfection; avapsyasi —achieve.
If you cannot practice the regulations of bhakti-yoga, then just try to
work for Me, because by working for Me you will come to the perfect
stage.
अथैतदप्यशक्तोऽसि कर्तुं मद्योगमाश्रितः | सर्वकर्मफलत्यागं ततः कुरु यतात्मवान् ||१२-११||
athaitadapyaśakto.asi kartuṃ madyogamāśritaḥ . sarvakarmaphalatyāgaṃ tataḥ kuru yatātmavān ||12-11||
atha —even though; etat —this; api —also; asaktah —unable; asi —you are;
kartum —to perform; mat —unto Me; yogam —devotional service; asritah —
refuge; sarva-karma —all activities; phala —result; tyagam —for renunciation;
tatah —therefore; kuru —do; yata-atmavan —self-situated.
If, however, you are unable to work in this consciousness, then try to
act giving up all results of your work and try to be self-situated.
श्रेयो हि ज्ञानमभ्यासाज्ज्ञानाद्ध्यानं विशिष्यते | ध्यानात्कर्मफलत्यागस्त्यागाच्छान्तिरनन्तरम् ||१२-१२||
śreyo hi jñānamabhyāsājjñānāddhyānaṃ viśiṣyate . dhyānātkarmaphalatyāgastyāgācchāntiranantaram ||12-12||
sreyah —better; hi —certainly; jnanam —knowledge; abhyasat —by practice;
jnanat —better than knowledge; dhyanam —meditation; visisyate —especially
considered; dhyanat —from meditation; karma-phala-tyagah —renunciation of
the results of fruitive action; tyagat —by such renunciation; santih —peace;
anantaram —thereafter.
If you cannot take to this practice, then engage yourself in the
cultivation of knowledge. Better than knowledge, however, is meditation,
and better than meditation is renunciation of the fruits of action, for by
such renunciation one can attain peace of mind.
अद्वेष्टा सर्वभूतानां मैत्रः करुण एव च | निर्ममो निरहङ्कारः समदुःखसुखः क्षमी ||१२-१३||
adveṣṭā sarvabhūtānāṃ maitraḥ karuṇa eva ca . nirmamo nirahaṅkāraḥ samaduḥkhasukhaḥ kṣamī ||12-13||
advesta —not envious; sarva-bhutanam —for all living entities; maitrah —
friendly; karunah —kindly; eva —certainly; ca —also; nirmamah —with no
sense of proprietorship; nirahankarah —without false ego; sama —equally;
duhkhah —distress; sukhah —happiness; ksamT —forgiving; santustah —
satisfied; satatam —satisfied; yogi —engaged in devotion; yata-atma
—endeavoring; drdhaniscayah —with determination; mayi —upon Me; arpita
—engaged; manah —mind; buddhih —intelligent; yah —one who; mat-bhaktah
—My devotee; sah me priyah —he is dear to Me.
One who is not envious but who is a kind friend to all living entities,
who does not think himself a proprietor, who is free from false ego and
equal both in happiness and distress, who is always satisfied and engaged
in devotional service with determination and whose mind and intelligence
are in agreement with Me—he is very dear to Me.
सन्तुष्टः सततं योगी यतात्मा दृढनिश्चयः | मय्यर्पितमनोबुद्धिर्यो मद्भक्तः स मे प्रियः ||१२-१४||
santuṣṭaḥ satataṃ yogī yatātmā dṛḍhaniścayaḥ . mayyarpitamanobuddhiryo madbhaktaḥ sa me priyaḥ ||12-14||
यस्मान्नोद्विजते लोको लोकान्नोद्विजते च यः | हर्षामर्षभयोद्वेगैर्मुक्तो यः स च मे प्रियः ||१२-१५||
yasmānnodvijate loko lokānnodvijate ca yaḥ . harṣāmarṣabhayodvegairmukto yaḥ sa ca me priyaḥ ||12-15||
yasmat —from whom; na —never; udvijate —agitates; lokah —persons; lokat
—persons; na —never; advijate —disturbed; ca —also; yah —anyone; harsa —
happiness; amarsa —distress; bhaya —fearfulness; udvegaih —with anxiety;
muktah —freed; yah —who; sah —anyone; ca —also; me —My; priyah —very
dear.
He for whom no one is put into difficulty and who is not dirturbed by
anxiety, who is steady in happiness and distress, is very dear to Me.
अनपेक्षः शुचिर्दक्ष उदासीनो गतव्यथः | सर्वारम्भपरित्यागी यो मद्भक्तः स मे प्रियः ||१२-१६||
anapekṣaḥ śucirdakṣa udāsīno gatavyathaḥ . sarvārambhaparityāgī yo madbhaktaḥ sa me priyaḥ ||12-16||
anapeksah —neutral; sucih —pure; daksah —expert; udasmah —free from
care; gata-vyathah —freed from all distress; sarva-arambha —all endeavors;
parityagi —renouncer; yah —anyone; mat-bhaktah —My devotee; sah —he; me
—Me; priyah —very dear
A devotee who is not dependent on the ordinary course of activities,
who is pure, expert, without cares, free from all pains, and who does not
strive for some result, is very dear to Me.
यो न हृष्यति न द्वेष्टि न शोचति न काङ्क्षति | शुभाशुभपरित्यागी भक्तिमान्यः स मे प्रियः ||१२-१७||
yo na hṛṣyati na dveṣṭi na śocati na kāṅkṣati . śubhāśubhaparityāgī bhaktimānyaḥ sa me priyaḥ ||12-17||
yah —one who: na —never; hrsyati —takes pleasure; na —never; dvesti —
grieves; na —never; socati —laments; na —never; kahksati —desires; subha —
auspicious; asubha —inauspicious; parityagT— renouncer; bhaktiman
—devotee; yah —one who; sah —he is; me —My; priyah —dear.
One who neither grasps pleasure or grief, who neither laments nor
desires, and who renounces both auspicious and inauspicious things, is
very dear to Me.
समः शत्रौ च मित्रे च तथा मानापमानयोः | शीतोष्णसुखदुःखेषु समः सङ्गविवर्जितः ||१२-१८||
samaḥ śatrau ca mitre ca tathā mānāpamānayoḥ . śītoṣṇasukhaduḥkheṣu samaḥ saṅgavivarjitaḥ ||12-18||
samah —equal; satrau —to the enemy; ca —also; mitre —to friends; ca —
also; tatha —so; mana —honor; apamanayoh —dishonor; sfta —cold; usna —
heat; sukha —happiness; duhkhesu —distress; samah —equiposed; saiiga-
vivarjitah — free from all association; tulya —equal; ninda —defamation; stutih
—repute; maum —silent; santustah —satisfied; yena —somehow; kena —or
other; cit —if; aniketah —having no residence; sthira —fixed; matih —
determination; bhaktiman —engaged in devotion; me —My; priyah —dear;
narah —a man.
One who is equal to friends and enemies, who is equiposed in honor
and dishonor, heat and cold, happiness and distress, fame and infamy,
who is always free from contamination, always silent and satisfied with
anything, who doesn`t care for any residence, who is fixed in knowledge
and engaged in devotional service, is very dear to Me.
तुल्यनिन्दास्तुतिर्मौनी सन्तुष्टो येन केनचित् | अनिकेतः स्थिरमतिर्भक्तिमान्मे प्रियो नरः ||१२-१९||
tulyanindāstutirmaunī santuṣṭo yena kenacit . aniketaḥ sthiramatirbhaktimānme priyo naraḥ ||12-19||
ये तु धर्म्यामृतमिदं यथोक्तं पर्युपासते | श्रद्दधाना मत्परमा भक्तास्तेऽतीव मे प्रियाः ||१२-२०||
ye tu dharmyāmṛtamidaṃ yathoktaṃ paryupāsate . śraddadhānā matparamā bhaktāste.atīva me priyāḥ ||12-20||
ye —one who; tu —but; dharmya —generosity; amrtam —understanding;
idam —this; yatha —as; uktam —said; paryupasate —completely engages;
sraddadhanah —with faith; mat-paramah —taking the Supreme Lord as
everything; bhaktah —devotees; te —such persons; ativa —very, very; me —
Me; priyah —dear.
He who follows this imperishable path of devotional service and who
completely engages himself with faith, making Me the supreme goal, is
very, very dear to Me.
Глава 13
अर्जुन उवाच | प्रकृतिं पुरुषं चैव क्षेत्रं क्षेत्रज्ञमेव च | एतद्वेदितुमिच्छामि ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं च केशव ||१३-१||
arjuna uvāca . prakṛtiṃ puruṣaṃ caiva kṣetraṃ kṣetrajñameva ca . etadveditumicchāmi jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ ca keśava ||13-1||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; prakrtim —nature; purusam —the enjoyer; ca
—also; eva —certainly; ksetram —body; ksetrajnam —knower of the body; eva
—certainly; ca —also; etat —all this; veditum —to understand; icchami —I wish;
jhanam —knowledge; jheyam —the object of knowledge; ca —also; kesava —O
Krsna; srT bhagavan uvaca —the Personality of Godhead said; idam —this;
sariram —body; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; ksetram —the field; iti —thus;
abhidhiyate —iscalled; etat —this; yah —anyone; vetti —knows; tarn —him;
prahuh —is called; ksetrajnah —knower of the body; iti —thus; tat- vidah —one
who knows.
Arjuna said: O my dear Krsna, I wish to know about prakrti [nature],
Purusa [the enjoyer], and the field and the knower of the field, and of
knowledge and the end of knowledge. The Blessed Lord then said: This
body, O son of KuntI, is called the field, and one who knows this body is
called the knower of the field.
श्रीभगवानुवाच | इदं शरीरं कौन्तेय क्षेत्रमित्यभिधीयते | एतद्यो वेत्ति तं प्राहुः क्षेत्रज्ञ इति तद्विदः ||१३-२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . idaṃ śarīraṃ kaunteya kṣetramityabhidhīyate . etadyo vetti taṃ prāhuḥ kṣetrajña iti tadvidaḥ ||13-2||
क्षेत्रज्ञं चापि मां विद्धि सर्वक्षेत्रेषु भारत | क्षेत्रक्षेत्रज्ञयोर्ज्ञानं यत्तज्ज्ञानं मतं मम ||१३-३||
kṣetrajñaṃ cāpi māṃ viddhi sarvakṣetreṣu bhārata . kṣetrakṣetrajñayorjñānaṃ yattajjñānaṃ mataṃ mama ||13-3||
ksetrajnam —the knower; ca —also; api —certainly; mam —Me; viddhi —
know; sarva —all; ksetresu —in bodily fields; bharata —O son of Bharata;
ksetra —field of activities (the body); ksetrajhayoh —the knower of the field;
jnanam —knowledge; yat —that which is taught; tat —that; jnanam —
knowledge; matam —opinion; mama —that.
O scion of Bharata, you should understand that I am also the knower
in all bodies, and to understand this body and its owner is called
knowledge. That is My opinion.
तत्क्षेत्रं यच्च यादृक्च यद्विकारि यतश्च यत् | स च यो यत्प्रभावश्च तत्समासेन मे शृणु ||१३-४||
tatkṣetraṃ yacca yādṛkca yadvikāri yataśca yat . sa ca yo yatprabhāvaśca tatsamāsena me śṛṇu ||13-4||
tat —that; ksetram —field of activities; yat —as; ca —also; yadrk —as it is; ca
—also; yat —what is; vikari —changes; yatah —from which; ca —also; yat —
one; sah —he; ca —also; yah —one; yat —which; prabhavah ca —influence
also; tat —that; samasena —in detail; me —from Me; srnu —understand.
Now please hear My brief description of this field of activity and how it
is constituted, what its changes are, whence it is produced, who that
knower of the field of activities is, and what his influences are.
ऋषिभिर्बहुधा गीतं छन्दोभिर्विविधैः पृथक् | ब्रह्मसूत्रपदैश्चैव हेतुमद्भिर्विनिश्चितैः ||१३-५||
ṛṣibhirbahudhā gītaṃ chandobhirvividhaiḥ pṛthak . brahmasūtrapadaiścaiva hetumadbhirviniścitaiḥ ||13-5||
rsibhih —by the wise sages; bahudha —in many ways; gitam —described; chandobhih
—Vedic hymns; vividhaih —in various; prthak —variously; brahma- sutra —the Vedanta;
padaih —aphorism; ca —also; eva —certainly; hetumadbhih —with cause and effect;
viniscitaih —ascertain.
That knowledge of the field of activities and of the knower of activities
is described by various sages in various Vedic writings—especially in the
Vedanta-sutra—and is presented with all reasoning as to cause and effect.
महाभूतान्यहंकारो बुद्धिरव्यक्तमेव च | इन्द्रियाणि दशैकं च पञ्च चेन्द्रियगोचराः ||१३-६||
mahābhūtānyahaṃkāro buddhiravyaktameva ca . indriyāṇi daśaikaṃ ca pañca cendriyagocarāḥ ||13-6||
maha-bhutani —great elements; ahahkarah —false ego; buddhih
—intelligence; avyaktam —the unmanifested; eva —certainly; ca —also;
indriyani — senses ; dasa ekam —eleven; ca —also; panca —five; ca —also;
indriya-gocarah — objects of the senses; iccha —desire; dvesah —hatred;
sukham —happiness; duhkham —distress; sahghatah —the aggregate; cetana
—living symptoms; dhrtih —conviction; etat —all this; ksetram —field of
activities; samasena —in summary; sa-vikaram —interaction; udahrtam
—exemplified.
The five great elements, false ego, intelligence, the unmanifested, the
ten senses, the mind, the five sense objects, desire, hatred, happiness,
distress, the aggregate, the life symptoms, and convictions—all these are
considered, in summary, to be the field of activities and its interactions.
इच्छा द्वेषः सुखं दुःखं संघातश्चेतना धृतिः | एतत्क्षेत्रं समासेन सविकारमुदाहृतम् ||१३-७||
icchā dveṣaḥ sukhaṃ duḥkhaṃ saṃghātaścetanā dhṛtiḥ . etatkṣetraṃ samāsena savikāramudāhṛtam ||13-7||
अमानित्वमदम्भित्वमहिंसा क्षान्तिरार्जवम् | आचार्योपासनं शौचं स्थैर्यमात्मविनिग्रहः ||१३-८||
amānitvamadambhitvamahiṃsā kṣāntirārjavam . ācāryopāsanaṃ śaucaṃ sthairyamātmavinigrahaḥ ||13-8||
amanitvam —humility; adambhitvam —pridelessness; ahimsa —
nonviolence; ksandh —tolerance; arjavam —simplicity; acarya-upasanam —
approaching a bona fide spiritual master; saucam —cleanliness; sthairyam
—steadfastness; atma-vinigrahah —control; indriya-arthesu —in the matter of
the senses; vairagyam —renunciation; anahahkarah —being without false
egoism; eva — certainly; ca —also; janma —birth; mrtyu —death; jara —old
age; vyadhi —disease; duhkha —distress; dosa —fault; anudarsanam —
observing; asaktih —without attachment; anabhisvaiigah —without association;
putra —son; dara —wife; grha-adisu —home, etc.; nityam —eternal; ca —also;
sama-cittatvam —equilibrium; ista —desirable; anistah —undesirable;
upapatbsu —having obtained; mayi —unto Me; ca —also; ananya-yogena —by
devotional service; bhaktih — devotion; avyabhicarinT —constant, unalloyed;
vivikta —solitary; desa —place; sevitvam —aspiring; aratih —without
attachment; jana —people in general; samsadi —mass; adhyatma —pertaining
to the self; jnana —knowledge; nityatvam —eternity; tattva-jnana —knowledge
of the truth; artha —the object; darsanam —philosophy; etat —all this; jhanam
—knowledge; id —thus; proktam —declared; ajnanam —ignorance; yat —that
which; atah —from this; anyatha — others.
Humility, pridelessness, nonviolence, tolerance, simplicity, approaching
a bona fide spiritual master, cleanliness, steadiness and self-control;
renunciation of the objects of sense gratification, absence of false ego, the
perception of the evil of birth, death, old age and disease; nonattachment
to children, wife, home and the rest, and evenmindedness amid pleasant
and unpleasant events; constant and unalloyed devotion to Me, resorting
to solitary places, detachment from the general mass of people; accepting
the importance of self-realization, and philosophical search for the
Absolute Truth—all these I thus declare to be knowledge, and what is
contrary to these is ignorance.
इन्द्रियार्थेषु वैराग्यमनहंकार एव च | जन्ममृत्युजराव्याधिदुःखदोषानुदर्शनम् ||१३-९||
indriyārtheṣu vairāgyamanahaṃkāra eva ca . janmamṛtyujarāvyādhiduḥkhadoṣānudarśanam ||13-9||
असक्तिरनभिष्वङ्गः पुत्रदारगृहादिषु | नित्यं च समचित्तत्वमिष्टानिष्टोपपत्तिषु ||१३-१०||
asaktiranabhiṣvaṅgaḥ putradāragṛhādiṣu . nityaṃ ca samacittatvamiṣṭāniṣṭopapattiṣu ||13-10||
मयि चानन्ययोगेन भक्तिरव्यभिचारिणी | विविक्तदेशसेवित्वमरतिर्जनसंसदि ||१३-११||
mayi cānanyayogena bhaktiravyabhicāriṇī . viviktadeśasevitvamaratirjanasaṃsadi ||13-11||
अध्यात्मज्ञाननित्यत्वं तत्त्वज्ञानार्थदर्शनम् | एतज्ज्ञानमिति प्रोक्तमज्ञानं यदतोऽन्यथा ||१३-१२||
adhyātmajñānanityatvaṃ tattvajñānārthadarśanam . etajjñānamiti proktamajñānaṃ yadato.anyathā ||13-12||
ज्ञेयं यत्तत्प्रवक्ष्यामि यज्ज्ञात्वामृतमश्नुते | अनादिमत्परं ब्रह्म न सत्तन्नासदुच्यते ||१३-१३||
jñeyaṃ yattatpravakṣyāmi yajjñātvāmṛtamaśnute . anādi matparaṃ brahma na sattannāsaducyate ||13-13||
jheyam —knowable; yat —that; tat —which; pravaksyami —I shall now
explain; yat —which; jhatva —knowing; amrtam —nectar; asnute —taste; anadi
—beginningless; mat-param —subordinate to Me; brahma —spirit; na —
neither; sat —cause; tat —that; na —nor; asat —effect; ucyate —is called.
I shall now explain the knowable, knowing which you will taste the
eternal. This is beginningless, and it is subordinate to Me. It is called
Brahman, the spirit, and it lies beyond the cause and effect of this
material world.
सर्वतः पाणिपादं तत्सर्वतोऽक्षिशिरोमुखम् | सर्वतः श्रुतिमल्लोके सर्वमावृत्य तिष्ठति ||१३-१४||
sarvataḥ pāṇipādaṃ tatsarvato.akṣiśiromukham . sarvataḥ śrutimalloke sarvamāvṛtya tiṣṭhati ||13-14||
sarvatah —everywhere; pani —hands; padam —legs; tat —that; sarvatah —
everywhere; aksi —eyes; sirah —head; mukham —face; sarvatah —everywhere;
srutimat —hearing; loke —in the world; sarvam —everywhere, avrtya —
covering; tisthati —exists.
Everywhere are His hands and legs. His eyes and faces, and He hears
everything. In this way the Supersoul exists.
सर्वेन्द्रियगुणाभासं सर्वेन्द्रियविवर्जितम् | असक्तं सर्वभृच्चैव निर्गुणं गुणभोक्तृ च ||१३-१५||
sarvendriyaguṇābhāsaṃ sarvendriyavivarjitam . asaktaṃ sarvabhṛccaiva nirguṇaṃ guṇabhoktṛ ca ||13-15||
sarve —all; indriya —senses; guna —qualities; abhasam —original source;
sarva —all; indriya —senses; vivarjitam —being without; asaktam —without
attachment; sarva-bhrt —maintainer of everyone; ca —also; eva —certainly;
nirgunam —without material qualities; guna-bhoktr —simultaneously master of
the gunas; ca —also.
The Supersoul is the original source of all senses, yet He is without
senses. He is unattached, although He is the maintainer of all living
beings. He transcends the modes of nature, and at the same time He is the
master of all modes of material nature.
बहिरन्तश्च भूतानामचरं चरमेव च | सूक्ष्मत्वात्तदविज्ञेयं दूरस्थं चान्तिके च तत् ||१३-१६||
bahirantaśca bhūtānāmacaraṃ carameva ca . sūkṣmatvāttadavijñeyaṃ dūrasthaṃ cāntike ca tat ||13-16||
bahih —outside; antah —inside; ca —also; bhutanam —of all living entities;
acaram —not moving; caram —moving; eva —also; ca —and; siiksmatvat —on
account of being subtle; tat —that; avijneyam —unknowable; durastham — far
away; ca antike —near also; ca —and; tat —that.
The Supreme Truth exists both internally and externally, in the moving
and nonmoving. He is beyond the power of the material senses to see or to
know. Although far, far away. He is also near to all.
अविभक्तं च भूतेषु विभक्तमिव च स्थितम् | भूतभर्तृ च तज्ज्ञेयं ग्रसिष्णु प्रभविष्णु च ||१३-१७||
avibhaktaṃ ca bhūteṣu vibhaktamiva ca sthitam . bhūtabhartṛ ca tajjñeyaṃ grasiṣṇu prabhaviṣṇu ca ||13-17||
avibhaktam —without division; ca —also; bhutesu —in every living being;
vibhaktam —divided; iva —as if; ca —also; sthitam —situated; bhuta-bhartr —
maintainer of all living entities; ca —also; tat —that; jheyam —to be understood;
grasisnu —devours; prabhavisnu —develops; ca —also.
Although the Supersoul appears to be divided, He is never divided. He
is situated as one. Although He is the maintainer of every living entity, it
is to be understood that He devours and develops all.
ज्योतिषामपि तज्ज्योतिस्तमसः परमुच्यते | ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं ज्ञानगम्यं हृदि सर्वस्य विष्ठितम् ||१३-१८||
jyotiṣāmapi tajjyotistamasaḥ paramucyate . jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ jñānagamyaṃ hṛdi sarvasya viṣṭhitam ||13-18||
jyotisam —in all luminous objects; api —also; tat —that; jyotih —source of
light; tamasah —of the darkness; param —beyond; ucyate —is said; jhanam —
knowledge; jheyam —to be known; jnana-gamyam —to be approached by
knowledge; hrdi —in the heart; sarvasya —of everyone; visthitam —situated.
He is the source of light in all luminous objects. He is beyond the
darkness of matter and is unmanifested. He is knowledge. He is the object
of knowledge, and He is the goal of knowledge. He is situated in
everyone`s heart.
इति क्षेत्रं तथा ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं चोक्तं समासतः | मद्भक्त एतद्विज्ञाय मद्भावायोपपद्यते ||१३-१९||
iti kṣetraṃ tathā jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ coktaṃ samāsataḥ . madbhakta etadvijñāya madbhāvāyopapadyate ||13-19||
iti —thus; ksetram —field of activities (the body); tatha —also; jhanam —
knowledge; jheyam —knowable; ca —also; uktam —describe; samasatah —in
summary; mat-bhaktah —My devotee; etat —all this; vijhaya —after
understanding; mat-bhavaya —My nature; upapadyate —attains.
Thus the field of activities [the body], knowledge, and the knowable
have been summarily described by Me. Only My devotees can understand
this thoroughly and thus attain to My nature.
प्रकृतिं पुरुषं चैव विद्ध्यनादी उभावपि | विकारांश्च गुणांश्चैव विद्धि प्रकृतिसम्भवान् ||१३-२०||
prakṛtiṃ puruṣaṃ caiva viddhyanādi ubhāvapi . vikārāṃśca guṇāṃścaiva viddhi prakṛtisambhavān ||13-20||
prakrtim —material nature; purusam —livingentities; ca —also; eva —
certainly; viddhi —must know; anadi —without beginning; ubhau —both; api
—also; vikaran —transformation; ca —also; gunan —three modes of nature; ca
—also; eva —certainly; viddhi —know; prakrti —material nature; sambhavan
—produced of.
Material nature and the living entities should be understood to be
beginningless. Their transformations and the modes of matter are
products of material nature.
कार्यकारणकर्तृत्वे हेतुः प्रकृतिरुच्यते | पुरुषः सुखदुःखानां भोक्तृत्वे हेतुरुच्यते ||१३-२१||
kāryakāraṇakartṛtve hetuḥ prakṛtirucyate . puruṣaḥ sukhaduḥkhānāṃ bhoktṛtve heturucyate ||13-21||
karya —effect; karana —cause; kartrtve —in the matter of creation; hetuh —
instrument; prakrtih —material nature; ucyate —is said to be; purusah —the
living entities; sukha —happiness; duhkhanam —of distresses; bhoktrtve —in
enjoyment; hetuh —instrument; ucyate —issaid to be.
Nature is said to be the cause of all material activities and effects,
whereas the living entity is the cause of the various sufferings and
enjoyments in this world.
पुरुषः प्रकृतिस्थो हि भुङ्क्ते प्रकृतिजान्गुणान् | कारणं गुणसङ्गोऽस्य सदसद्योनिजन्मसु ||१३-२२||
puruṣaḥ prakṛtistho hi bhuṅkte prakṛtijānguṇān . kāraṇaṃ guṇasaṅgo.asya sadasadyonijanmasu ||13-22||
purusah —the living entity; prakrti-sthah —being situated in the material
energy; hi —certainly; bhuhkte —enjoys; prakrti-jan —produced by the material
nature; gunan —modes of nature; karanam —cause; guna-sahgah —
association with the modes of nature; asya —of the living entity; sat-asat —
good and bad; yoni —species of life; janmasu —birth.
The living entity in material nature thus follows the ways of life.
enjoying the three modes of nature. This is due to his association with that
material nature. Thus he meets with good and evil amongst various
species.
उपद्रष्टानुमन्ता च भर्ता भोक्ता महेश्वरः | परमात्मेति चाप्युक्तो देहेऽस्मिन्पुरुषः परः ||१३-२३||
upadraṣṭānumantā ca bhartā bhoktā maheśvaraḥ . paramātmeti cāpyukto dehe.asminpuruṣaḥ paraḥ ||13-23||
upadrasta —overseer; anumanta —permitter; ca —also; bharta —master;
bhokta —supreme enjoyer; mahesvarah —the Supreme Lord; paramatma —
Supersoul; id —also; ca —and; api uktah —is said; dehe —in this body; asmin —
this; purusah —enjoyer; par ah —transcendental.
Yet in this body there is another, a transcendental enjoyer who is the
Lord, the supreme proprietor, who exists as the overseer and permitter,
and who is known as the Supersoul.
य एवं वेत्ति पुरुषं प्रकृतिं च गुणैः सह | सर्वथा वर्तमानोऽपि न स भूयोऽभिजायते ||१३-२४||
ya evaṃ vetti puruṣaṃ prakṛtiṃ ca guṇaiḥ saha . sarvathā vartamāno.api na sa bhūyo.abhijāyate ||13-24||
yah —anyone; evam —thus; vetti —understands; purusam —the living
entities; prakrtim —material nature; ca —and; gunaih —modes of material
nature; saha —with; sarvatha —by all means; vartamanah —situated; api — in
spite of; na —never; sah —he; bhuyah —again; abhijayate —takes his birth.
One who understands this philosophy concerning material nature, the
living entity and the interaction of the modes of nature is sure to attain
liberation. He will not take birth here again, regardless of his present
position.
ध्यानेनात्मनि पश्यन्ति केचिदात्मानमात्मना | अन्ये साङ्ख्येन योगेन कर्मयोगेन चापरे ||१३-२५||
dhyānenātmani paśyanti kecidātmānamātmanā . anye sāṅkhyena yogena karmayogena cāpare ||13-25||
dhyanena —by meditation; atmani —self; pasyanti —see; kecit —one;
atmanam —Supersoul; atmana —by the mind; anye —others; sankhyena —by
philosophical discussion; yogena —by the yoga system; karma-yogena —by
activities without fruitive desire; ca —also; apare —others.
That Supersoul is perceived by some through meditation, by some
through the cultivation of knowledge, and by others through working
without fruitive desire.
अन्ये त्वेवमजानन्तः श्रुत्वान्येभ्य उपासते | तेऽपि चातितरन्त्येव मृत्युं श्रुतिपरायणाः ||१३-२६||
anye tvevamajānantaḥ śrutvānyebhya upāsate . te.api cātitarantyeva mṛtyuṃ śrutiparāyaṇāḥ ||13-26||
anye —others; tu —but; evam —this; ajanantah —without spiritual
knowledge; srutva —by hearing; anyebhyah —from others; upasate —begin to
worship; te —they; api —also; ca —and; atitaranti —transcend; eva —certainly;
mrtyum —the path of death; sruti-parayanah —inclined to the process of
hearing.
Again there are those who, although not conversant in spiritual
knowledge, begin to worship the Supreme Person upon hearing about
Him from others. Because of their tendency to hear from authorities, they
also transcend the path of birth and death.
यावत्सञ्जायते किञ्चित्सत्त्वं स्थावरजङ्गमम् | क्षेत्रक्षेत्रज्ञसंयोगात्तद्विद्धि भरतर्षभ ||१३-२७||
yāvatsañjāyate kiñcitsattvaṃ sthāvarajaṅgamam . kṣetrakṣetrajñasaṃyogāttadviddhi bharatarṣabha ||13-27||
yavat —whatever; samjayate —takes place; kincit —anything; sattvam —
existence; sthavara —not moving; jangamam —moving; ksetra —the body;
ksetrajha —knower of the body; samyogat —union between; tat viddhi — you
must know it; bharatarsabha —O chief of the Bharatas.
O chief of the Bharatas, whatever you see in existence, both moving and
unmoving, is only the combination of the field of activities and the knower
of the field.
समं सर्वेषु भूतेषु तिष्ठन्तं परमेश्वरम् | विनश्यत्स्वविनश्यन्तं यः पश्यति स पश्यति ||१३-२८||
samaṃ sarveṣu bhūteṣu tiṣṭhantaṃ parameśvaram . vinaśyatsvavinaśyantaṃ yaḥ paśyati sa paśyati ||13-28||
samam —equally; sarvesu —in all; bhutesu —living entities; tisthantam —
residing; paramesvaram —the Supersoul; vinasyatsu —in the destructible;
avinasyantam —not destroyed; yah —anyone; pasyati —see; sah —he; pasyati
—actually sees.
One who sees the Supersoul accompanying the individual soul in all
bodies and who understands that neither the soul nor the Supersoul is
ever destroyed, actually sees.
समं पश्यन्हि सर्वत्र समवस्थितमीश्वरम् | न हिनस्त्यात्मनात्मानं ततो याति परां गतिम् ||१३-२९||
samaṃ paśyanhi sarvatra samavasthitamīśvaram . na hinastyātmanātmānaṃ tato yāti parāṃ gatim ||13-29||
samam —equally; pasyan —seeing; hi —certainly; sarvatra —everywhere;
samavasthitam —equally situated; Tsvaram —Supersoul; na —does not; hinasd
—degrade; atmana —by the mind; atmanam —the soul; tatah yad —then
reaches; param —the transcendental; gatim —destination.
One who sees the Supersoul in every living being and equal everywhere
does not degrade himself by his mind. Thus he approaches the
transcendental destination.
प्रकृत्यैव च कर्माणि क्रियमाणानि सर्वशः | यः पश्यति तथात्मानमकर्तारं स पश्यति ||१३-३०||
prakṛtyaiva ca karmāṇi kriyamāṇāni sarvaśaḥ . yaḥ paśyati tathātmānamakartāraṃ sa paśyati ||13-30||
prakrtya —material nature; eva —certainly; ca —also; karmani —activities;
kriyamanani —engaged in performing; sarvasah —in all respects; yah —
anyone who; pasyati —sees; tatha —also; atmanam —himself; akartaram —
non-doer; sah —he; pasyati —sees perfectly.
One who can see that all activities are performed by the body, which is
created of material nature, and sees that the self does nothing, actually
sees.
यदा भूतपृथग्भावमेकस्थमनुपश्यति | तत एव च विस्तारं ब्रह्म सम्पद्यते तदा ||१३-३१||
yadā bhūtapṛthagbhāvamekasthamanupaśyati . tata eva ca vistāraṃ brahma sampadyate tadā ||13-31||
yada —when; bhuta —living entities; prthak-bhavam —separated entities;
eka-stham —situated in one; anupasyati —tries to see through authority; tatah
eva —thereafter; ca —also; vistaram —expanded; brahma —the Absolute;
sampadyate —attains; tada —at that time.
When a sensible man ceases to see different identities, which are due to
different material bodies, he attains to the Brahman conception. Thus he
sees that beings are expanded everywhere.
अनादित्वान्निर्गुणत्वात्परमात्मायमव्ययः | शरीरस्थोऽपि कौन्तेय न करोति न लिप्यते ||१३-३२||
anāditvānnirguṇatvātparamātmāyamavyayaḥ . śarīrastho.api kaunteya na karoti na lipyate ||13-32||
anaditvat —due to eternity; nirgunatvat —due to transcendental; param —
beyond material nature; atma —spirit; ayam —this; avyayah —inexhaustable;
sarTra-sthah api —though dwelling in the body; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; na
karoti —never does anything; na lipyate —nor is he entangled.
Those with the vision of eternity can see that the soul is transcendental,
eternal, and beyond the modes of nature. Despite contact with the
material body, O Arjuna, the soul neither does anything nor is entangled.
यथा सर्वगतं सौक्ष्म्यादाकाशं नोपलिप्यते | सर्वत्रावस्थितो देहे तथात्मा नोपलिप्यते ||१३-३३||
yathā sarvagataṃ saukṣmyādākāśaṃ nopalipyate . sarvatrāvasthito dehe tathātmā nopalipyate ||13-33||
yatha —as; sarva-gatam —all-pervading; sauksmyat —due to being subtle;
akasam —the sky; na —never; upalipyate —mixes; sarvatra —everywhere;
avasthitah —situated; dehe —in the body; tatha —such; atma —the self; na —
never; upalipyate —mixes.
The sky, due to its subtle nature, does not mix with anything, although
it is all-pervading. Similarly, the soul, situated in Brahman vision, does
not mix with the body, though situated in that body.
यथा प्रकाशयत्येकः कृत्स्नं लोकमिमं रविः | क्षेत्रं क्षेत्री तथा कृत्स्नं प्रकाशयति भारत ||१३-३४||
yathā prakāśayatyekaḥ kṛtsnaṃ lokamimaṃ raviḥ . kṣetraṃ kṣetrī tathā kṛtsnaṃ prakāśayati bhārata ||13-34||
yatha —as; prakasayati —illuminates; ekah —one; krtsnam —the whole;
lokam —universe; imam —this; ravih —the sun, ksetram —this body; ksetrT —the
soul; tatha —similarly; krtsnam —all; prakasayati —illuminates; bharata —O
son of Bharata.
O son of Bharata, as the sun alone illuminates all this universe, so does
the living entity, one within the body, illuminate the entire body by
consciousness.
क्षेत्रक्षेत्रज्ञयोरेवमन्तरं ज्ञानचक्षुषा | भूतप्रकृतिमोक्षं च ये विदुर्यान्ति ते परम् ||१३-३५||
kṣetrakṣetrajñayorevamantaraṃ jñānacakṣuṣā . bhūtaprakṛtimokṣaṃ ca ye viduryānti te param ||13-35||
ksetra —body; ksetrajnayoh —of the proprietor of the body; evam — that;
antaram —difference; jnana-caksusa —by vision of knowledge; bhuta —living
entity; prakrd —material nature; moksam —liberation; ca —also; ye —one who;
viduh —knows; yanti —approaches; te —they; param —Supreme.
One who knowingly sees this difference between the body and the
owner of the body and can understand the process of liberation from this
bondage, also attains to the supreme goal.
Глава 14
श्रीभगवानुवाच | परं भूयः प्रवक्ष्यामि ज्ञानानां ज्ञानमुत्तमम् | यज्ज्ञात्वा मुनयः सर्वे परां सिद्धिमितो गताः ||१४-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . paraṃ bhūyaḥ pravakṣyāmi jñānānāṃ jñānamuttamam . yajjñātvā munayaḥ sarve parāṃ siddhimito gatāḥ ||14-1||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; param —
transcendental; bhuyah —again; pravaksyami —I shall speak; jnananam —of all
knowledge; jnanam —knowledge; uttamam —the supreme; yat —which; jhatva
—knowing; munayah —the sages; sarve —all; param —transcendental; siddhim
—perfection; itah —from this world; gatah —attain.
The Blessed Lord said: Again I shall declare to you this supreme
wisdom, the best of all knowledge, knowing which all the sages have
attained to supreme perfection.
इदं ज्ञानमुपाश्रित्य मम साधर्म्यमागताः | सर्गेऽपि नोपजायन्ते प्रलये न व्यथन्ति च ||१४-२||
idaṃ jñānamupāśritya mama sādharmyamāgatāḥ . sarge.api nopajāyante pralaye na vyathanti ca ||14-2||
idam —this; jhanam —knowledge; upasritya —taking shelter of; mama —
My; sadharmyam —nature; agatah —attain; sarge api —even in the creation;
na — never; upajayante —comes in; pralaye —in the annihilation; na —nor;
vyathanti —disturbed; ca —also.
By becoming fixed in this knowledge, one can attain to the
transcendental nature, which is like My own nature. Thus established,
one is not born at the time of creation nor disturbed at the time of
dissolution.
मम योनिर्महद् ब्रह्म तस्मिन्गर्भं दधाम्यहम् | सम्भवः सर्वभूतानां ततो भवति भारत ||१४-३||
mama yonirmahad brahma tasmingarbhaṃ dadhāmyaham . sambhavaḥ sarvabhūtānāṃ tato bhavati bhārata ||14-3||
mama —My; yonih —source of birth; mahat —the total material existence;
brahma —supreme; tasmin —in that; garbham —pregnancy; dadhami —create;
aham —I; sambhavah —possibility; sarva-bhutanam —of all living entities;
tatah —thereafter; bhavati —becomes; bharata —O son of Bharata.
The total material substance, called Brahman, is the source of birth,
and it is that Brahman that I impregnate, making possible the births of all
living beings, O son of Bharata.
सर्वयोनिषु कौन्तेय मूर्तयः सम्भवन्ति याः | तासां ब्रह्म महद्योनिरहं बीजप्रदः पिता ||१४-४||
sarvayoniṣu kaunteya mūrtayaḥ sambhavanti yāḥ . tāsāṃ brahma mahadyonirahaṃ bījapradaḥ pitā ||14-4||
sarva-yonisu —in all species of life; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; murtayah —
forms; sambhavanti —as they appear; yah —which; tasam —all of them;
brahma —supreme; mahatyonih —the source of birth in the material substance;
aham —Myself; bija-pradah —seed-giving; pita —father.
It should be understood that all species of life, O son of KuntI, are made
possible by birth in this material nature, and that I am the seed-giving
father.
सत्त्वं रजस्तम इति गुणाः प्रकृतिसम्भवाः | निबध्नन्ति महाबाहो देहे देहिनमव्ययम् ||१४-५||
sattvaṃ rajastama iti guṇāḥ prakṛtisambhavāḥ . nibadhnanti mahābāho dehe dehinamavyayam ||14-5||
sattvam —mode of goodness; rajah —mode of passion; tamah —mode of
ignorance; iti —thus; gunah —qualities; prakrti —material nature; sambhavah
—produced of; nibadhnanti —does condition; maha-baho —O mighty-armed
one; dehe —in this body; dehinam —the living entity; avyayam —eternal.
Material nature consists of the three modes-goodness, passion and
ignorance. When the living entity comes in contact with nature, he
becomes conditioned by these modes.
तत्र सत्त्वं निर्मलत्वात्प्रकाशकमनामयम् | सुखसङ्गेन बध्नाति ज्ञानसङ्गेन चानघ ||१४-६||
tatra sattvaṃ nirmalatvātprakāśakamanāmayam . sukhasaṅgena badhnāti jñānasaṅgena cānagha ||14-6||
tatra —thereafter; sattvam —mode of goodness; nirmalatvat —being purest in
the material world; prakasakam —illuminating; anamayam —without any
sinful reaction; sukha —happiness; sahgena —association; badhnati
—conditions; jhana —knowledge; sahgena —association; ca —also; anagha —
O sinless one.
O sinless one, the mode of goodness, being purer than the others, is
illuminating, and it frees one from all sinful reactions. Those situated in
that mode develop knowledge, but they become conditioned by the
concept of happiness.
रजो रागात्मकं विद्धि तृष्णासङ्गसमुद्भवम् | तन्निबध्नाति कौन्तेय कर्मसङ्गेन देहिनम् ||१४-७||
rajo rāgātmakaṃ viddhi tṛṣṇāsaṅgasamudbhavam . tannibadhnāti kaunteya karmasaṅgena dehinam ||14-7||
rajah —mode of passion; raga-atmakam —born of desire or lust; viddhi —
know; trsna —hankering; saiiga —association; samudbhavam —produced of; tat
—that; nibadhnati —is bound; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; karma-satigena
—association with fruitive activity; dehinam —of the embodied.
The mode of passion is born of unlimited desires and longings, O son of
KuntI, and because of this one is bound to material fruitive activities.
तमस्त्वज्ञानजं विद्धि मोहनं सर्वदेहिनाम् | प्रमादालस्यनिद्राभिस्तन्निबध्नाति भारत ||१४-८||
tamastvajñānajaṃ viddhi mohanaṃ sarvadehinām . pramādālasyanidrābhistannibadhnāti bhārata ||14-8||
tamah —mode of ignorance; tu —but; ajnana-jam —products of ignorance;
viddhi —knowing; mohanam —delusion; sarva-dehinam —of all embodied
beings; pramada —madness; alasya —indolence; nidrabhih —sleep; tat —that;
nibadhnati —binds; bharata —O son of Bharata.
O son of Bharata, the mode of ignorance causes the delusion of all
living entities. The result of this mode is madness, indolence and sleep,
which bind the conditioned soul.
सत्त्वं सुखे सञ्जयति रजः कर्मणि भारत | ज्ञानमावृत्य तु तमः प्रमादे सञ्जयत्युत ||१४-९||
sattvaṃ sukhe sañjayati rajaḥ karmaṇi bhārata . jñānamāvṛtya tu tamaḥ pramāde sañjayatyuta ||14-9||
sattvam —mode of goodness; sukhe —in happiness; sanjayati —develops;
rajah —mode of passion; karmani —fruits of activities; bharata —O son of
Bharata; jhanam —knowledge; avrtya —covering; tu —but; tamah —the mode
of ignorance; pramade —in madness; sanjayati —develops; uta —it is said.
The mode of goodness conditions one to happiness, passion conditions
him to the fruits of action, and ignorance to madness.
रजस्तमश्चाभिभूय सत्त्वं भवति भारत | रजः सत्त्वं तमश्चैव तमः सत्त्वं रजस्तथा ||१४-१०||
rajastamaścābhibhūya sattvaṃ bhavati bhārata . rajaḥ sattvaṃ tamaścaiva tamaḥ sattvaṃ rajastathā ||14-10||
rajah —mode of passion; tamah —mode of ignorance; ca —also; abhibhuya
—also surpassing; sattvam —mode of goodness; bhavati —becomes
prominent; bharata —O son of Bharata; rajah —mode of passion; sattvam —
mode of goodness; tamah —mode of ignorance; ca —also; eva —like that;
tamah —mode of ignorance; sattvam —mode of goodness; rajah —mode of
passion; tatha —as in this.
Sometimes the mode of passion becomes prominent, defeating the mode
of goodness, O son of Bharata. And sometimes the mode of goodness
defeats passion, and at other times the mode of ignorance defeats
goodness and passion. In this way there is always competition for
supremacy.
सर्वद्वारेषु देहेऽस्मिन्प्रकाश उपजायते | ज्ञानं यदा तदा विद्याद्विवृद्धं सत्त्वमित्युत ||१४-११||
sarvadvāreṣu dehe.asminprakāśa upajāyate . jñānaṃ yadā tadā vidyādvivṛddhaṃ sattvamityuta ||14-11||
sarva-dvaresu —all the gates; dehe asmin —in this body; prakasah —quality
of illumination; upajayate —develops; jnanam —knowledge; yada —when; tada
—at that time; vidyat —must know; vivrddham —increased; sattvam —mode of
goodness; id —thus; uta —said.
The manifestations of the mode of goodness can be experienced when
all the gates of the body are illuminated by knowledge.
लोभः प्रवृत्तिरारम्भः कर्मणामशमः स्पृहा | रजस्येतानि जायन्ते विवृद्धे भरतर्षभ ||१४-१२||
lobhaḥ pravṛttirārambhaḥ karmaṇāmaśamaḥ spṛhā . rajasyetāni jāyante vivṛddhe bharatarṣabha ||14-12||
lobhah —greed; pravrttih —hankering; arambhah —endeavor; karmanam —
of activities; asamah —uncontrollable; sprha —desire; rajasi —in the mode of
passion; etani —all this; jayante —develop; vivrddhe —when there is excess;
bharatarsabha —O chief of the descendants of Bharata.
O chief of the Bharatas, when there is an increase in the mode of
passion, the symptoms of great attachment, uncontrollable desire,
hankering, and intense endeavor develop.
अप्रकाशोऽप्रवृत्तिश्च प्रमादो मोह एव च | तमस्येतानि जायन्ते विवृद्धे कुरुनन्दन ||१४-१३||
aprakāśo.apravṛttiśca pramādo moha eva ca . tamasyetāni jāyante vivṛddhe kurunandana ||14-13||
aprakasah —darkness; apravrttih —inactivity; ca —and; pramadah
—madness; mohah —illusion; eva —certainly; ca —also; tamasi —of the mode
of ignorance; etani —these; jayante —are manifested; vivrddhe —is developed;
kuru-nandana —O son of Kuru.
O son of Kuru, when there is an increase in the mode of ignorance,
madness, illusion, inertia and darkness are manifested.
यदा सत्त्वे प्रवृद्धे तु प्रलयं याति देहभृत् | तदोत्तमविदां लोकानमलान्प्रतिपद्यते ||१४-१४||
yadā sattve pravṛddhe tu pralayaṃ yāti dehabhṛt . tadottamavidāṃ lokānamalānpratipadyate ||14-14||
yada —when; sattve —mode of goodness; pravrddhe —in development; tu
—but; pralayam —dissolution; yati —goes; deha-bhrt —embodied; tada —at that
time; uttama-vidam —of the great sages; lokan —the planets; amalan —pure;
pratipadyate —attains.
When one dies in the mode of goodness, he attains to the pure higher
planets.
रजसि प्रलयं गत्वा कर्मसङ्गिषु जायते | तथा प्रलीनस्तमसि मूढयोनिषु जायते ||१४-१५||
rajasi pralayaṃ gatvā karmasaṅgiṣu jāyate . tathā pralīnastamasi mūḍhayoniṣu jāyate ||14-15||
rajasi —in passion; pralayam —dissolution; gatva —attaining; karma-saiigisu
—in the association of fruitive activities; jayate —takes birth; tatha
—thereafter; pralTnah —being dissolved; tamasi —in ignorance; mudha
—animal; yonisu —species; jayate —take birth.
When one dies in the mode of passion, he takes birth among those
engaged in fruitive activities; and when he dies in the mode of ignorance.
he takes birth in the animal kingdom.
कर्मणः सुकृतस्याहुः सात्त्विकं निर्मलं फलम् | रजसस्तु फलं दुःखमज्ञानं तमसः फलम् ||१४-१६||
karmaṇaḥ sukṛtasyāhuḥ sāttvikaṃ nirmalaṃ phalam . rajasastu phalaṃ duḥkhamajñānaṃ tamasaḥ phalam ||14-16||
karmanah —of work; sukrtasya —in the mode of goodness; dhuh —said;
sattvikam —mode of goodness; nirmalam —purified; phalam —result; rajasah
—of the mode of passion; tu —but; phalam —result; duhkham —misery;
ajhanam —nonsense; tamasah —of the mode of ignorance; phalam —result.
By acting in the mode of goodness, one becomes purified. Works done
in the mode of passion result in distress, and actions performed in the
mode of ignorance result in foolishness.
सत्त्वात्सञ्जायते ज्ञानं रजसो लोभ एव च | प्रमादमोहौ तमसो भवतोऽज्ञानमेव च ||१४-१७||
sattvātsañjāyate jñānaṃ rajaso lobha eva ca . pramādamohau tamaso bhavato.ajñānameva ca ||14-17||
sattvat —from the mode of goodness; sahjayate —develops; jhanam —
knowledge; rajasah —from the mode of passion; lobhah —greed; eva —
certainly; ca —also; pramada —madness; mohau —illusion; tamasah —from the
mode of ignorance; bhavatah —develops; ajhanam —nonsense; eva —certainly;
ca —also.
From the mode of goodness, real knowledge develops; from the mode of
passion, grief develops; and from the mode of ignorance, foolishness,
madness and illusion develop.
ऊर्ध्वं गच्छन्ति सत्त्वस्था मध्ये तिष्ठन्ति राजसाः | जघन्यगुणवृत्तिस्था अधो गच्छन्ति तामसाः ||१४-१८||
ūrdhvaṃ gacchanti sattvasthā madhye tiṣṭhanti rājasāḥ . jaghanyaguṇavṛttisthā adho gacchanti tāmasāḥ ||14-18||
urdhvam —upwards; gacchand —goes; sattva-sthah —one who is situated in
the mode of goodness; madhye —in the middle; tisthanti —dwell; rajasah —
those who are situated in the mode of passion; jaghanya —abominable; guna
—quality; vrtd-sthah —occupation; adhah —down; gacchand —go; tamasah
—persons in the mode of ignorance.
Those situated in the mode of goodness gradually go upward to the
higher planets; those in the mode of passion live on the earthly planets;
and those in the mode of ignorance go down to the hellish worlds.
नान्यं गुणेभ्यः कर्तारं यदा द्रष्टानुपश्यति | गुणेभ्यश्च परं वेत्ति मद्भावं सोऽधिगच्छति ||१४-१९||
nānyaṃ guṇebhyaḥ kartāraṃ yadā draṣṭānupaśyati . guṇebhyaśca paraṃ vetti madbhāvaṃ so.adhigacchati ||14-19||
na —never; anyam —other than; gunebhyah —from the qualities; kartaram
—the performer; yada —when; drasta anupasyati —he who sees properly;
gunebhyah ca —from the modes of nature; param —transcendental; vetti —
know; mat-bhavam —My spiritual nature; sah —he; adhigacchati —is
promoted.
When you see that there is nothing beyond these modes of nature in all
activities and that the Supreme Lord is transcendental to all these modes,
then you can know My spiritual nature.
गुणानेतानतीत्य त्रीन्देही देहसमुद्भवान् | जन्ममृत्युजरादुःखैर्विमुक्तोऽमृतमश्नुते ||१४-२०||
guṇānetānatītya trīndehī dehasamudbhavān . janmamṛtyujarāduḥkhairvimukto.amṛtamaśnute ||14-20||
gunan —qualities; etan —all these; atitya —transcending; trm —three; dehT —
body; deha —body; samudbhavan —produced of; janma —birth; mrtyu — death;
jara —old age; duhkhaih —distresses; vimuktah —being freed from; amrtam
—nectar; asnute —enjoys.
When the embodied being is able to transcend these three modes, he
can become free from birth, death, old age and their distresses and can
enjoy nectar even in this life.
अर्जुन उवाच | कैर्लिङ्गैस्त्रीन्गुणानेतानतीतो भवति प्रभो | किमाचारः कथं चैतांस्त्रीन्गुणानतिवर्तते ||१४-२१||
arjuna uvāca . kairliṅgaistrīnguṇānetānatīto bhavati prabho . kimācāraḥ kathaṃ caitāṃstrīnguṇānativartate ||14-21||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; kaih —by which; lihgaih —symptoms; trin —
three; gunan —qualities; etan —all this; atitah —transcend; bhavati —become;
prabho —my Lord; kim —what; acarah —behavior; katham —what; ca —also;
etan —these; trin —three; gunan —qualities; ativartate —transcend.
Arjuna inquired: O my dear Lord, by what symptoms is one known
who is transcendental to those modes? What is his behavior? And how
does he transcend the modes of nature?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | प्रकाशं च प्रवृत्तिं च मोहमेव च पाण्डव | न द्वेष्टि सम्प्रवृत्तानि न निवृत्तानि काङ्क्षति ||१४-२२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . prakāśaṃ ca pravṛttiṃ ca mohameva ca pāṇḍava . na dveṣṭi sampravṛttāni na nivṛttāni kāṅkṣati ||14-22||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; prakasam
ca —and illumination; pravrtdm ca —and attachment; moham —illusion; eva ca
—also; pandava —O son of Pandu; na dvesti —does not hate; sampravrttani —
although developed; na nivrttani —nor stop development; kahksati —desires;
udasmavat —as if neutral; asmah —situated; gunaih —by the qualities; yah —
one who; na —never; vicalyate —is agitated; gunah —the qualities; vartante —
is situated; id evam —knowing thus; yah —one who; avadsthad —remains; na
—never; ihgate —flickering; sama —equally; duhkha —in distress; sukhah —in
happiness; svasthah —being situated himself; sama —equally; losta —a lump
of earth; asma —stone; kahcanah —gold; tulya —equally disposed; priya
—dear; apriyah —undesirable; dhirah —steadily; tulya —equally; ninda —in
defamation; atma-samstudh —in praise of himself; mana —honor; apamanayoh
— dishonor; tulyah —equally; tulyah —equally; mitra —friend; ari —enemy;
paksayoh —in party; sarva —all; arambhah —endeavor; parityagT —renouncer;
guna-atitah —transcendental to the material modes of nature; sah —he; ucyate
—is said to be.
The Blessed Lord said: He who does not hate illumination, attachment
and delusion when they are present, nor longs for them when they
disappear; who is seated like one unconcerned, being situated beyond
these material reactions of the modes of nature, who remains firm,
knowing that the modes alone are active; who regards alike pleasure and
pain, and looks on a clod, a stone and a piece of gold with an equal eye;
who is wise and holds praise and blame to be the same; who is unchanged
in honor and dishonor, who treats friend and foe alike, who has
abandoned all fruitive undertakings-such a man is said to have
transcended the modes of nature.
उदासीनवदासीनो गुणैर्यो न विचाल्यते | गुणा वर्तन्त इत्येवं योऽवतिष्ठति नेङ्गते ||१४-२३||
udāsīnavadāsīno guṇairyo na vicālyate . guṇā vartanta ityevaṃ yo.avatiṣṭhati neṅgate ||14-23||
समदुःखसुखः स्वस्थः समलोष्टाश्मकाञ्चनः | तुल्यप्रियाप्रियो धीरस्तुल्यनिन्दात्मसंस्तुतिः ||१४-२४||
samaduḥkhasukhaḥ svasthaḥ samaloṣṭāśmakāñcanaḥ . tulyapriyāpriyo dhīrastulyanindātmasaṃstutiḥ ||14-24||
मानापमानयोस्तुल्यस्तुल्यो मित्रारिपक्षयोः | सर्वारम्भपरित्यागी गुणातीतः स उच्यते ||१४-२५||
mānāpamānayostulyastulyo mitrāripakṣayoḥ . sarvārambhaparityāgī guṇātītaḥ sa ucyate ||14-25||
मां च योऽव्यभिचारेण भक्तियोगेन सेवते | स गुणान्समतीत्यैतान्ब्रह्मभूयाय कल्पते ||१४-२६||
māṃ ca yo.avyabhicāreṇa bhaktiyogena sevate . sa guṇānsamatītyaitānbrahmabhūyāya kalpate ||14-26||
mam —unto Me; ca —also; yah —person; avyabhicarena —without fail;
bhakti-yogena —by devotional service; sevate —renders service; sah —he;
gunan —all the modes of material nature; samatftya —transcending; etan —all
this; brahma-bhuyaya —to be elevated on the Brahman platform; kalpate — is
considered.
One who engages in full devotional service, who does not fall down in
any circumstance, at once transcends the modes of material nature and
thus comes to the level of Brahman.
ब्रह्मणो हि प्रतिष्ठाहममृतस्याव्ययस्य च | शाश्वतस्य च धर्मस्य सुखस्यैकान्तिकस्य च ||१४-२७||
brahmaṇo hi pratiṣṭhāhamamṛtasyāvyayasya ca . śāśvatasya ca dharmasya sukhasyaikāntikasya ca ||14-27||
brahmanah —of the impersonal brahmajyoti; hi —certainly; pratistha —the
rest; aham —I am; amrtasya —of the imperishable; avyayasya —immortal; ca
—also; sasvatasya —of eternal; ca —and; dharmasya —of the constitutional
position; sukhasya —happiness; aikantikasya —ultimate; ca —also.
And I am the basis of the impersonal Brahman, which is the
constitutional position of ultimate happiness, and which is immortal,
imperishable and eternal.
Глава 15
श्रीभगवानुवाच | ऊर्ध्वमूलमधःशाखमश्वत्थं प्राहुरव्ययम् | छन्दांसि यस्य पर्णानि यस्तं वेद स वेदवित् ||१५-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . ūrdhvamūlamadhaḥśākhamaśvatthaṃ prāhuravyayam . chandāṃsi yasya parṇāni yastaṃ veda sa vedavit ||15-1||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; urdhva-
mulam —with roots above; adhah —downwards; sakham —branches;
asvattham —banyan tree; prahuh —said; avyayam —eternal; chandamsi —
Vedic hymns; yasya —of which; parnani —the leaves; yah —anyone; tam —
that; veda —knows; sah —he; veda-vit —the knower of the Vedas.
The Blessed Lord said: There is a banyan tree which has its roots
upward and its branches down and whose leaves are the Vedic hymns.
One who knows this tree is the knower of the Vedas.
अधश्चोर्ध्वं प्रसृतास्तस्य शाखा गुणप्रवृद्धा विषयप्रवालाः | अधश्च मूलान्यनुसन्ततानि कर्मानुबन्धीनि मनुष्यलोके ||१५-२||
adhaścordhvaṃ prasṛtāstasya śākhā guṇapravṛddhā viṣayapravālāḥ . adhaśca mūlānyanusantatāni karmānubandhīni manuṣyaloke ||15-2||
adhah —downward; ca —and; urdhvam —upward; prasrtah —extended;
tasya —its; sakhah —branches; guna —modes of material nature; pravrddhah
—developed; visaya —sense objects; pravalah —twigs; adhah —downward; ca
—and; mulani —roots; anusantatani —extended; karma —according to work;
anubandhmi —bound; manusya-loke —in the world of human society.
The branches of this tree extend downward and upward, nourished by
the three modes of material nature. The twigs are the objects of the
senses. This tree also has roots going down, and these are bound to the
fruitive actions of human society.
न रूपमस्येह तथोपलभ्यते नान्तो न चादिर्न च सम्प्रतिष्ठा | अश्वत्थमेनं सुविरूढमूलं असङ्गशस्त्रेण दृढेन छित्त्वा ||१५-३||
na rūpamasyeha tathopalabhyate nānto na cādirna ca sampratiṣṭhā . aśvatthamenaṃ suvirūḍhamūlaṃ asaṅgaśastreṇa dṛḍhena chittvā ||15-3||
na —not; rupam —form; asya —of this tree; iha —in this; tatha —also;
upalabhyate —can be perceived; na —never; antah —end; na —never; ca —
also; adih —beginning; na —never; ca —also; sampratistha —the foundation;
asvattham —banyan tree; enam —this; suvirudha —strongly; mulam —rooted;
asanga-sastrena —by the weapon of detachment; drdhena —strong; chittva —
by cutting; tatah —thereafter; padam —situation; tat —that; parimargitavyam
—has to be searched out; yasmin —where; gatah —going; na —never;
nivartanti —comes back; bhuyah —again; tam —to him; eva —certainly; ca —
also; adyam — original; purusam —the Personality of Godhead; prapadye —
surrender; yatah —from whom; pravrttih —beginning; prasrta —extension;
purani —very old.
The real form of this tree cannot be perceived in this world. No one can
understand where it ends, where it begins, or where its foundation is. But
with determination one must cut down this tree with the weapon of
detachment. So doing, one must seek that place from which, having once
gone, one never returns, and there surrender to that Supreme Personality
of Godhead from whom everything has begun and in whom everything is
abiding since time immemorial.
ततः पदं तत्परिमार्गितव्यं यस्मिन्गता न निवर्तन्ति भूयः | तमेव चाद्यं पुरुषं प्रपद्ये | यतः प्रवृत्तिः प्रसृता पुराणी ||१५-४||
tataḥ padaṃ tatparimārgitavyaṃ yasmingatā na nivartanti bhūyaḥ . tameva cādyaṃ puruṣaṃ prapadye . yataḥ pravṛttiḥ prasṛtā purāṇī ||15-4||
निर्मानमोहा जितसङ्गदोषा अध्यात्मनित्या विनिवृत्तकामाः | द्वन्द्वैर्विमुक्ताः सुखदुःखसंज्ञैर्- गच्छन्त्यमूढाः पदमव्ययं तत् ||१५-५||
nirmānamohā jitasaṅgadoṣā adhyātmanityā vinivṛttakāmāḥ . dvandvairvimuktāḥ sukhaduḥkhasaṃjñaira- gacchantyamūḍhāḥ padamavyayaṃ tat ||15-5||
nir —without; maria —respect; mohah —illusion; jita —having conquered;
saiiga —association; dosah —faulty; adhyatma —spiritual; nityah —eternity;
vinivrtta —associated; kamah —lusts; dvandvaih —with duality; vimuktah —
liberated; sukha-duhkha —happiness and distress; samjhaih —named;
gacchanti —attains; amudhah —unbewildered; padam —situation; avyayam —
eternal; tat —that.
One who is free from illusion, false prestige, and false association, who
understands the eternal, who is done with material lust and is freed from
the duality of happiness and distress, and who knows how to surrender
unto the Supreme Person, attains to that eternal kingdom.
न तद्भासयते सूर्यो न शशाङ्को न पावकः | यद्गत्वा न निवर्तन्ते तद्धाम परमं मम ||१५-६||
na tadbhāsayate sūryo na śaśāṅko na pāvakaḥ . yadgatvā na nivartante taddhāma paramaṃ mama ||15-6||
na —not; tat —that; bhasayate —illuminates; suryah —sun; na —nor;
sasahkah —the moon; na —nor; pavakah —fire, electricity; yat —where; gatva
—going; na —never; nivartante —comes back; tat dhama —that abode;
paramam —supreme; mama —My.
That abode of Mine is not illumined by the sun or moon, nor by
electricity. One who reaches it never returns to this material world.
ममैवांशो जीवलोके जीवभूतः सनातनः | मनःषष्ठानीन्द्रियाणि प्रकृतिस्थानि कर्षति ||१५-७||
mamaivāṃśo jīvaloke jīvabhūtaḥ sanātanaḥ . manaḥṣaṣṭhānīndriyāṇi prakṛtisthāni karṣati ||15-7||
mama —My; eva —certainly; arhsah —fragmental particles; jiva-loke — world
of conditional life; jiva-bhutah —the conditioned living entities; sanatanah —
eternal; manah —mind; sasthani —six; indriyani —senses; prakrti — material
nature; sthani —situated; karsati —struggling hard.
The living entities in this conditioned world are My eternal, fragmental
parts. Due to conditioned life, they are struggling very hard with the six
senses, which include the mind.
शरीरं यदवाप्नोति यच्चाप्युत्क्रामतीश्वरः | गृहीत्वैतानि संयाति वायुर्गन्धानिवाशयात् ||१५-८||
śarīraṃ yadavāpnoti yaccāpyutkrāmatīśvaraḥ . gṛhitvaitāni saṃyāti vāyurgandhānivāśayāt ||15-8||
sarTram —body; yat —as much as; avapnoti —gets; yat —that which; ca —
also; api —virtually; utkramati —gives up; Tsvarah —the lord of the body;
grhitva —taking; etani —all these; samyati —goes away; vayuh —air; gandhan
— smell; iva —like; asayat —from the flower.
The living entity in the material world carries his different conceptions
of life from one body to another as the air carries aromas.
श्रोत्रं चक्षुः स्पर्शनं च रसनं घ्राणमेव च | अधिष्ठाय मनश्चायं विषयानुपसेवते ||१५-९||
śrotraṃ cakṣuḥ sparśanaṃ ca rasanaṃ ghrāṇameva ca . adhiṣṭhāya manaścāyaṃ viṣayānupasevate ||15-9||
srotram —ears; caksuh —eyes; sparsanam —touch; ca —also; rasanam —
tongue; ghranam —smelling power; eva —also; ca —and; adhisthaya —being
situated; manah —mind; ca —also; ayam —this; visayan —sense objects;
upasevate —enjoys.
The living entity, thus taking another gross body, obtains a certain type
of ear, tongue, and nose and sense of touch, which are grouped about the
mind. He thus enjoys a particular set of sense objects.
उत्क्रामन्तं स्थितं वापि भुञ्जानं वा गुणान्वितम् | विमूढा नानुपश्यन्ति पश्यन्ति ज्ञानचक्षुषः ||१५-१०||
utkrāmantaṃ sthitaṃ vāpi bhuñjānaṃ vā guṇānvitam . vimūḍhā nānupaśyanti paśyanti jñānacakṣuṣaḥ ||15-10||
utkramantam —quitting the body; sthitam —situated in the body; vapi —
either; bhunjanam —enjoying; va —or; guna-anvitam —under the spell of the
modes of material nature; vimudhah —foolish persons; na —never; anupasyanti
—can see; pasyanti —one can see; jnana-caksusah —one who has the eyes of
knowledge.
The foolish cannot understand how a living entity can quit his body,
nor can they understand what sort of body he enjoys under the spell of
the modes of nature. But one whose eyes are trained in knowledge can see
all this.
यतन्तो योगिनश्चैनं पश्यन्त्यात्मन्यवस्थितम् | यतन्तोऽप्यकृतात्मानो नैनं पश्यन्त्यचेतसः ||१५-११||
yatanto yoginaścainaṃ paśyantyātmanyavasthitam . yatanto.apyakṛtātmāno nainaṃ paśyantyacetasaḥ ||15-11||
yatantah —endeavoring; yoginah —transcendentalists; ca —also; enam —
this; pasyand —can see; atmani —in the self; avasthitam —situated; yatantah
—although endeavoring; api —although; akrta-atmanah —without self-
realization; na —does not; enam —this; pasyand —can see; acetasah —
undeveloped mind.
The endeavoring transcendentalist, who is situated in self-realization,
can see all this clearly. But those who are not situated in self-realization
cannot see what is taking place, though they may try to.
यदादित्यगतं तेजो जगद्भासयतेऽखिलम् | यच्चन्द्रमसि यच्चाग्नौ तत्तेजो विद्धि मामकम् ||१५-१२||
yadādityagataṃ tejo jagadbhāsayate.akhilam . yaccandramasi yaccāgnau tattejo viddhi māmakam ||15-12||
yat —that which; aditya-gatam —in the sunshine; tejah —splendor; jagat —
the whole world; bhasayate —illuminates; akhilam —entirely; yat —that which;
candramasi —in the moon; yat —that which; ca —also; agnau —in the fire; tat
—that; tejah —splendor; viddhi —understand; mamakam —from Me.
The splendor of the sun, which dissipates the darkness of this whole
world, comes from Me. And the splendor of the moon and the splendor of
fire are also from Me.
गामाविश्य च भूतानि धारयाम्यहमोजसा | पुष्णामि चौषधीः सर्वाः सोमो भूत्वा रसात्मकः ||१५-१३||
gāmāviśya ca bhūtāni dhārayāmyahamojasā . puṣṇāmi cauṣadhīḥ sarvāḥ somo bhūtvā rasātmakaḥ ||15-13||
gam —the planets; avisya —entering; ca —also; bhutani —living entities;
dharayami —sustaining; aham —I; ojasa —by My energy; pusnami —
nourishing; ca —and; ausadhfh —all vegetables; sarvah —all; somah —the
moon; bhutva — becoming; rasa-atmakah —supplying the juice.
I enter into each planet, and by My energy they stay in orbit. I become
the moon and thereby supply the juice of life to all vegetables.
अहं वैश्वानरो भूत्वा प्राणिनां देहमाश्रितः | प्राणापानसमायुक्तः पचाम्यन्नं चतुर्विधम् ||१५-१४||
ahaṃ vaiśvānaro bhūtvā prāṇināṃ dehamāśritaḥ . prāṇāpānasamāyuktaḥ pacāmyannaṃ caturvidham ||15-14||
aham —I; vaisvanarah —by My plenary portion as the digesting fire; bhutva
—becoming; praninam —of all living entities; deham —body; asritah —
situated; prana —outgoing air; apana —downgoing air; samayuktah —keep
balance; pacami —digest; annam —foodstuff; catur-vidham —four kinds of.
I am the fire of digestion in every living body, and I am the air of life,
outgoing and incoming, by which I digest the four kinds of foodstuff.
सर्वस्य चाहं हृदि सन्निविष्टो मत्तः स्मृतिर्ज्ञानमपोहनञ्च | वेदैश्च सर्वैरहमेव वेद्यो वेदान्तकृद्वेदविदेव चाहम् ||१५-१५||
sarvasya cāhaṃ hṛdi sanniviṣṭo mattaḥ smṛtirjñānamapohanañca . vedaiśca sarvairahameva vedyo vedāntakṛdvedavideva cāham ||15-15||
sarvasya —of all living beings; ca —and; aham —I; hrdi —in the heart;
sannivistah —being situated; mattah —from Me; smrtih —remembrance;
jnanam —knowledge; apohanam ca —and forgetfulness; vedaih —by the Vedas;
ca —also; sarvaih —all; aham —I am; eva —certainly; vedyah —knowable;
vedanta-krt —the compiler of the Vedanta; veda-vit —the knower of the Vedas;
eva —certainly; ca —and; aham —I.
I am seated in everyone`s heart, and from Me come remembrance,
knowledge and forgetfulness. By all the Vedas am I to be known; indeed I
am the compiler of Vedanta, and I am the knower of the Vedas.
द्वाविमौ पुरुषौ लोके क्षरश्चाक्षर एव च | क्षरः सर्वाणि भूतानि कूटस्थोऽक्षर उच्यते ||१५-१६||
dvāvimau puruṣau loke kṣaraścākṣara eva ca . kṣaraḥ sarvāṇi bhūtāni kūṭastho.akṣara ucyate ||15-16||
dvau —two; imau —in this (world); purusau —living entities; loke —in the
world; ksarah —fallible; ca —and; aksarah —infallible; eva —certainly; ca
—and; ksarah —the fallible; sarvani —all; bhutani —living entities; kutasthah
—in oneness; aksarah —infallible; ucyate —is said.
There are two classes of beings, the fallible and the infallible. In the
material world every entity is fallible, and in the spiritual world every
entity is called infallible.
उत्तमः पुरुषस्त्वन्यः परमात्मेत्युधाहृतः | यो लोकत्रयमाविश्य बिभर्त्यव्यय ईश्वरः ||१५-१७||
uttamaḥ puruṣastvanyaḥ paramātmetyudhāhṛtaḥ . yo lokatrayamāviśya bibhartyavyaya īśvaraḥ ||15-17||
uttamah —the best; purusah —personality; tu —but; anyah —another; param
—the Supreme; atma —Self; iti —thus; udahrtah —said; yah —one who; loka —
of the universe; trayam —the three divisions; avisya —entering; bibharti —
maintaining; avyayah —inexhaustible; Tsvarah —the Lord.
Besides these two, there is the greatest living personality, the Lord
Himself, who has entered into these worlds and is maintaining them.
यस्मात्क्षरमतीतोऽहमक्षरादपि चोत्तमः | अतोऽस्मि लोके वेदे च प्रथितः पुरुषोत्तमः ||१५-१८||
yasmātkṣaramatīto.ahamakṣarādapi cottamaḥ . ato.asmi loke vedeca prathitaḥ puruṣottamaḥ ||15-18||
yasmat —because; ksaram —the fallible; atftah —transcendental; aham —I;
aksarat —from the infallible; api —better than that; ca —and; uttamah —the
best; atah —therefore; asmi —I am; loke —in the world; vede —in the Vedic
literature; ca —and; prathitah —celebrated; purusottamah —as the Supreme
Personality.
Because I am transcendental, beyond both the fallible and the
infallible, and because I am the greatest, I am celebrated both in the
world and in the Vedas as that Supreme Person.
यो मामेवमसम्मूढो जानाति पुरुषोत्तमम् | स सर्वविद्भजति मां सर्वभावेन भारत ||१५-१९||
yo māmevamasammūḍho jānāti puruṣottamam . sa sarvavidbhajati māṃ sarvabhāvena bhārata ||15-19||
yah —anyone; mam —unto Me; evam —certainly; asammudhah —without a
doubt; janati —knows; purusottamam —the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
sah —he; sarva-vit —knower of everything; bhajati —renders devotional
service; mam —unto Me; sarva-bhavena —in all respects; bharata —O son of
Bharata.
Whoever knows Me as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, without
doubting, is to be understood as the knower of everything, and he
therefore engages himself in full devotional service, O son of Bharata.
इति गुह्यतमं शास्त्रमिदमुक्तं मयानघ | एतद्बुद्ध्वा बुद्धिमान्स्यात्कृतकृत्यश्च भारत ||१५-२०||
iti guhyatamaṃ śāstramidamuktaṃ mayānagha . etadbuddhvā buddhimānsyātkṛtakṛtyaśca bhārata ||15-20||
iti —thus; guhyatamam —the most confidential; sastram —revealed
scriptures; idam —this; uktam —disclosed; maya —by Me; anagha —O sinless
one; etat —this; buddhva —understanding; buddhiman —intelligent; syat —one
becomes; krta-krtyah —the most perfect; ca —and; bharata —O son of Bharata.
This is the most confidential part of the Vedic scriptures, O sinless one,
and it is disclosed now by Me. Whoever understands this will become
wise, and his endeavors will know perfection.
Глава 16
श्रीभगवानुवाच | अभयं सत्त्वसंशुद्धिर्ज्ञानयोगव्यवस्थितिः | दानं दमश्च यज्ञश्च स्वाध्यायस्तप आर्जवम् ||१६-१||
śrībhagavānuvāca . abhayaṃ sattvasaṃśuddhirjñānayogavyavasthitiḥ . dānaṃ damaśca yajñaśca svādhyāyastapa ārjavam ||16-1||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; abhayam
—fearlessness; sattva-samsuddhih —purification of one`s existence; jhana —
knowledge; yoga —of linking up; vyavasthidh —the situation; danam — charity;
damah ca —and controlling the mind; yajhah ca —and performance of
sacrifice; svadhyayah —study of Vedic literature; tapah —austerity; arjavam —
simplicity; ahimsa —nonviolence; satyam —truthfulness; akrodhah —freedom
from anger; tyagah —renunciation; santih —tranquility; apaisunam —aversion
to faultfinding; daya —mercy; bhutesu —towards all living entities; aloluptvam
—freedom from greed; mardavam —gentleness; hrih —modesty; acapalam
—determination; tejah —vigor; ksama —forgiveness; dhrtih —fortitude; saucam
—cleanliness; adrohah —freedom from envy; na —not; atimanita
—expectation of honor; bhavanti —become; sampadam —qualities; daivim —
transcendental; abhijatasya —one who is born of; bharata —O son of Bharata.
The Blessed Lord said: Fearlessness, purification of one`s existence,
cultivation of spiritual knowledge, charity, self-control, performance of
sacrifice, study of the Vedas, austerity and simplicity; nonviolence,
truthfulness, freedom from anger; renunciation, tranquility, aversion to
faultfinding, compassion and freedom from covetousness; gentleness,
modesty and steady determination; vigor, forgiveness, fortitude,
cleanliness, freedom from envy and the passion for honor—these
transcendental qualities, O son of Bharata, belong to godly men endowed
with divine nature.
अहिंसा सत्यमक्रोधस्त्यागः शान्तिरपैशुनम् | दया भूतेष्वलोलुप्त्वं मार्दवं ह्रीरचापलम् ||१६-२||
ahiṃsā satyamakrodhastyāgaḥ śāntirapaiśunam . dayā bhūteṣvaloluptvaṃ mārdavaṃ hrīracāpalam ||16-2||
तेजः क्षमा धृतिः शौचमद्रोहो नातिमानिता | भवन्ति सम्पदं दैवीमभिजातस्य भारत ||१६-३||
tejaḥ kṣamā dhṛtiḥ śaucamadroho nātimānitā . bhavanti sampadaṃ daivīmabhijātasya bhārata ||16-3||
दम्भो दर्पोऽभिमानश्च क्रोधः पारुष्यमेव च | अज्ञानं चाभिजातस्य पार्थ सम्पदमासुरीम् ||१६-४||
dambho darpo.abhimānaśca krodhaḥ pāruṣyameva ca . ajñānaṃ cābhijātasya pārtha sampadamāsurīm ||16-4||
dambhah —pride; darpah —arrogance; abhimanah —conceit; ca —and;
krodah —anger; parusyam —harshness; eva —certainly; ca —and; ajhanam —
ignorance; ca —and; abhijatasya —one who is born; partha —O son of Prtha;
sampadam —nature; asurim —demoniac.
Arrogance, pride, anger, conceit, harshness and ignorance—these
qualities belong to those of demonic nature, O son of Prtha.
दैवी सम्पद्विमोक्षाय निबन्धायासुरी मता | मा शुचः सम्पदं दैवीमभिजातोऽसि पाण्डव ||१६-५||
daivī sampadvimokṣāya nibandhāyāsurī matā . mā śucaḥ sampadaṃ daivīmabhijāto.asi pāṇḍava ||16-5||
daivT —transcendental; sampat —nature; vimoksaya —meant for liberation;
nibandhaya —for bondage; asurT —demoniac qualities; mata —it is considered;
ma —do not; sucah —worry; sampadam —nature; daivfm —transcendental;
abhijatah —born; asi —you are; pandava —O son of Pandu.
The transcendental qualities are conducive to liberation, whereas the
demonic qualities make for bondage. Do not worry, O son of Pandu, for
you are born with the divine qualities.
द्वौ भूतसर्गौ लोकेऽस्मिन्दैव आसुर एव च | दैवो विस्तरशः प्रोक्त आसुरं पार्थ मे शृणु ||१६-६||
dvau bhūtasargau loke.asmindaiva āsura eva ca . daivo vistaraśaḥ prokta āsuraṃ pārtha me śṛṇu ||16-6||
dvau —two; bhuta-sargau —created living beings; loke —in this world; asmin
—this; daivah —godly; asurah —demoniac; eva —certainly; ca —and; daivah
—divine; vistarasah —at great length; proktah —said; asuram —demoniac;
partha —O son of Prtha; me —from Me; srnu —just hear.
O son of Prtha, in this world there are two kinds of created beings. One
is called the divine and the other demonic. I have already explained to you
at length the divine qualities. Now hear from Me of the demoniac.
प्रवृत्तिं च निवृत्तिं च जना न विदुरासुराः | न शौचं नापि चाचारो न सत्यं तेषु विद्यते ||१६-७||
pravṛttiṃ ca nivṛttiṃ ca janā na vidurāsurāḥ . na śaucaṃ nāpi cācāro na satyaṃ teṣu vidyate ||16-7||
pravrttim —proper action; ca —also; nivrttim —improper action; ca —and;
janah —persons; na —never; viduh —know; dsurdh —in demoniac quality; na —
never; saucam —cleanliness; na —nor; api —also; ca —and; acarah —behavior;
na —never; satyam —truth; tesu —in them; vidyate —there is.
Those who are demoniac do not know what is to be done and what is
not to be done. Neither cleanliness nor proper behavior nor truth is found
in them.
असत्यमप्रतिष्ठं ते जगदाहुरनीश्वरम् | अपरस्परसम्भूतं किमन्यत्कामहैतुकम् ||१६-८||
asatyamapratiṣṭhaṃ te jagadāhuranīśvaram . aparasparasambhūtaṃ kimanyatkāmahaitukam ||16-8||
asatyam —unreal; apratistham —without foundation; te —they; jagat —the
cosmic manifestation; ahuh —is said; amsvaram —with no controller;
aparaspara —by mutual lust; sambhutam —caused; kim anyat —there is no
other cause; kama-haitukam —it is due to lust only.
They say that this world is unreal, that there is no foundation and that
there is no God in control. It is produced of sex desire, and has no cause
other than lust.
एतां दृष्टिमवष्टभ्य नष्टात्मानोऽल्पबुद्धयः | प्रभवन्त्युग्रकर्माणः क्षयाय जगतोऽहिताः ||१६-९||
etāṃ dṛṣṭimavaṣṭabhya naṣṭātmāno.alpabuddhayaḥ . prabhavantyugrakarmāṇaḥ kṣayāya jagato.ahitāḥ ||16-9||
etam —thus; drstim —vision; avastabhya —accepting; nasta —lost; atmanah
—self; alpa-buddhayah —less intelligent; prabhavanti —flourish; ugra-
karmanah —in painful activities; ksayaya —for destruction; jagatah —of the
world; ahitah —unbeneficial.
Following such conclusions, the demoniac, who are lost to themselves
and who have no intelligence, engage in unbeneficial, horrible works
meant to destroy the world.
काममाश्रित्य दुष्पूरं दम्भमानमदान्विताः | मोहाद्गृहीत्वासद्ग्राहान्प्रवर्तन्तेऽशुचिव्रताः ||१६-१०||
kāmamāśritya duṣpūraṃ dambhamānamadānvitāḥ . mohādgṛhītvāsadgrāhānpravartante.aśucivratāḥ ||16-10||
kamam —lust; asritya —taking shelter of; duspuram —insatiable; dambha —
pride; maria —false prestige; mada-anvitah —absorbed in conceit; mohat —by
illusion; grhTtva —taking; asat —nonpermanent; grahan —things; pravartante
—flourish; asuci —unclean; vratah —avowed.
The demoniac, taking shelter of insatiable lust, pride and false prestige,
and being thus illusioned, are always sworn to unclean work, attracted by
the impermanent.
चिन्तामपरिमेयां च प्रलयान्तामुपाश्रिताः | कामोपभोगपरमा एतावदिति निश्चिताः ||१६-११||
cintāmaparimeyāṃ ca pralayāntāmupāśritāḥ . kāmopabhogaparamā etāvaditi niścitāḥ ||16-11||
cintam —fears and anxieties; aparimeyam —unmeasurable; ca —and;
pralaya-antam —unto the point of death; upasritah —having taken shelter of
them; kama-upabhoga —sense gratification; paramah —the highest goal of life;
etavat —thus; id —in this way; niscitah —ascertain; asa-pasa —entanglement in
the network of hope; sataih —by hundreds; baddhah —being bound; kama
—lust; krodha —anger; parayanah —always situated in that mentality; Thante
—desire; kama —lust; bhoga —sense enjoyment; artham —for that purpose;
anydyena —illegally; artha —wealth; sahcayan —accumulate.
They believe that to gratify the senses unto the end of life is the prime
necessity of human civilization. Thus there is no end to their anxiety.
Being bound by hundreds and thousands of desires, by lust and anger,
they secure money by illegal means for sense gratification.
आशापाशशतैर्बद्धाः कामक्रोधपरायणाः | ईहन्ते कामभोगार्थमन्यायेनार्थसञ्चयान् ||१६-१२||
āśāpāśaśatairbaddhāḥ kāmakrodhaparāyaṇāḥ . īhante kāmabhogārthamanyāyenārthasañcayān ||16-12||
इदमद्य मया लब्धमिमं प्राप्स्ये मनोरथम् | इदमस्तीदमपि मे भविष्यति पुनर्धनम् ||१६-१३||
idamadya mayā labdhamimaṃ prāpsye manoratham . idamastīdamapi me bhaviṣyati punardhanam ||16-13||
idam —this; adya —today; maya —by me; labdham —gained; imam —this;
prapsye —I shall gain; manoratham —according to my desires; idam —this; asti
—there is; idam —this; api —also; me —mine; bhavisyati —will increase in the
future; punah —again; dhanam —wealth; asau —that; may a —by me; hatah
—has been killed; satruh —enemy; hanisye —I shall kill; ca —also; aparan
—others; api —certainly; Tsvarah —the lord; aham —I am; aham —I am; bhogi
—the enjoyer; siddhah —perfect; aham —I am; balavan —powerful; sukhT —
happy; adhyah —wealthy; abhijanavan —surrounded by aristocratic relatives;
asmi —I am; kah —who else; anyah —other; asti —there is; sadrsah —like; maya
—me; yaksye —I shall sacrifice; dasyami —I shall give in charity; modisye —I
shall rejoice; iti —thus; ajhana —ignorance; vimohitah —deluded by.
The demoniac person thinks: "So much wealth do I have today, and I
will gain more according to my schemes. So much is mine now, and it will
increase in the future, more and more. He is my enemy, and I have killed
him; and my other enemy will also be killed. I am the lord of everything, I
am the enjoyer, I am perfect, powerful and happy. I am the richest man,
surrounded by aristocratic relatives. There is none so powerful and happy
as I am. I shall perform sacrifices, I shall give some charity, and thus I
shall rejoice." In this way, such persons are deluded by ignorance.
असौ मया हतः शत्रुर्हनिष्ये चापरानपि | ईश्वरोऽहमहं भोगी सिद्धोऽहं बलवान्सुखी ||१६-१४||
asau mayā hataḥ śatrurhaniṣye cāparānapi . īśvaro.ahamahaṃ bhogī siddho.ahaṃ balavānsukhī ||16-14||
आढ्योऽभिजनवानस्मि कोऽन्योऽस्ति सदृशो मया | यक्ष्ये दास्यामि मोदिष्य इत्यज्ञानविमोहिताः ||१६-१५||
āḍhyo.abhijanavānasmi ko.anyo.asti sadṛśo mayā . yakṣye dāsyāmi modiṣya ityajñānavimohitāḥ ||16-15||
अनेकचित्तविभ्रान्ता मोहजालसमावृताः | प्रसक्ताः कामभोगेषु पतन्ति नरकेऽशुचौ ||१६-१६||
anekacittavibhrāntā mohajālasamāvṛtāḥ . prasaktāḥ kāmabhogeṣu patanti narake.aśucau ||16-16||
aneka —numerous; citta-vibhrantah —perplexed by anxieties; moha —of
illusions; jala —by a network; samavrtah —surrounded; prasaktah —attached;
kama —lust; bhogesu —sense gratification; patanti —glides down; narake —
into hell; asucau —unclean.
Thus perplexed by various anxieties and bound by a network of
illusions, one becomes too strongly attached to sense enjoyment and falls
down into hell.
आत्मसम्भाविताः स्तब्धा धनमानमदान्विताः | यजन्ते नामयज्ञैस्ते दम्भेनाविधिपूर्वकम् ||१६-१७||
ātmasambhāvitāḥ stabdhā dhanamānamadānvitāḥ . yajante nāmayajñaiste dambhenāvidhipūrvakam ||16-17||
atma-sambhavitah —self-complacent; stabdhah —impudent; dhana-mana
—wealth and false prestige; mada-anvitah —absorbed in pride; yajante
—perform sacrifices; nama —in name only; yajhaih —with such a sacrifice; te
—they; dambhena —out of pride; avidhi-purvakam —without following any
rules and regulations.
Self-complacent and always impudent, deluded by wealth and false
prestige, they sometimes perform sacrifices in name only without
following any rules or regulations.
अहंकारं बलं दर्पं कामं क्रोधं च संश्रिताः | मामात्मपरदेहेषु प्रद्विषन्तोऽभ्यसूयकाः ||१६-१८||
ahaṃkāraṃ balaṃ darpaṃ kāmaṃ krodhaṃ ca saṃśritāḥ . māmātmaparadeheṣu pradviṣanto.abhyasūyakāḥ ||16-18||
ahahkaram —false ego; balam —strength; darpam —pride; kamam —lust;
krodham —anger; ca —also; samsritah —having taken shelter of; mam —Me;
atma —one`s own; para-dehesu —in other bodies; pradvisantah —blasphemes;
abhyasiiyakah —envious.
Bewildered by false ego, strength, pride, lust and anger, the demon
becomes envious of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is situated
in his own body and in the bodies of others, and blasphemes against the
real religion.
तानहं द्विषतः क्रुरान्संसारेषु नराधमान् | क्षिपाम्यजस्रमशुभानासुरीष्वेव योनिषु ||१६-१९||
tānahaṃ dviṣataḥ krurānsaṃsāreṣu narādhamān . kṣipāmyajasramaśubhānāsurīṣveva yoniṣu ||16-19||
tan —those; aham —I; dvisatah —envious; kruran —mischievous; samsaresu
—into the ocean of material existence; naradhaman —the lowest of mankind;
ksipami —put; ajasram —innumerable; asubhan —inauspicious; asurTsu —
demoniac; eva —certainly; yonisu —in the wombs.
Those who are envious and mischievous, who are the lowest among
men, are cast by Me into the ocean of material existence, into various
demoniac species of life.
आसुरीं योनिमापन्ना मूढा जन्मनि जन्मनि | मामप्राप्यैव कौन्तेय ततो यान्त्यधमां गतिम् ||१६-२०||
āsurīṃ yonimāpannā mūḍhā janmani janmani . māmaprāpyaiva kaunteya tato yāntyadhamāṃ gatim ||16-20||
asurim —demoniac; yonim —species; apannah —gaining; mudhah —the
foolish; janmani janmani —in birth after birth; mam —unto Me; aprapya —
without achieving; eva —certainly; kaunteya —O son of KuntI; tatah —
thereafter; yanti —goes; adhamam —condemned; gatim —destination.
Attaining repeated birth amongst the species of demoniac life, such
persons can never approach Me. Gradually they sink down to the most
abominable type of existence.
त्रिविधं नरकस्येदं द्वारं नाशनमात्मनः | कामः क्रोधस्तथा लोभस्तस्मादेतत्त्रयं त्यजेत् ||१६-२१||
trividhaṃ narakasyedaṃ dvāraṃ nāśanamātmanaḥ . kāmaḥ krodhastathā lobhastasmādetattrayaṃ tyajet ||16-21||
nasanam —destructive; atmanah —of the self; kamah —lust; krodhah —anger;
tatha —as well as; lobhah —greed; tasmat —therefore; etat —these; trayam —
three; tyajet —must give up.
There are three gates leading to this hell-lust, anger, and greed. Every
sane man should give these up, for they lead to the degradation of the
soul.
एतैर्विमुक्तः कौन्तेय तमोद्वारैस्त्रिभिर्नरः | आचरत्यात्मनः श्रेयस्ततो याति परां गतिम् ||१६-२२||
etairvimuktaḥ kaunteya tamodvāraistribhirnaraḥ . ācaratyātmanaḥ śreyastato yāti parāṃ gatim ||16-22||
etaih —by these; vimuktah —being liberated; kaunteya —O son of KuntI;
tamah-dvaraih —the gates of ignorance; tribhih —three kinds of; narah —a
person; acarati —performs ; atmanah —self; sreyah —benediction; tatah
—thereafter; yati —goes; param —supreme; gatim —destination.
The man who has escaped these three gates of hell, O son of KuntI,
performs acts conducive to self-realization and thus gradually attains the
supreme destination.
यः शास्त्रविधिमुत्सृज्य वर्तते कामकारतः | न स सिद्धिमवाप्नोति न सुखं न परां गतिम् ||१६-२३||
yaḥ śāstravidhimutsṛjya vartate kāmakārataḥ . na sa siddhimavāpnoti na sukhaṃ na parāṃ gatim ||16-23||
yah —anyone; sastra-vidhim —the regulations of the scriptures; utsrjya
—giving up; vartate —remains; kama-karatah —acting whimsically in lust; na
— never; sah —he; siddhim —perfection; avapnoti —achieves; na —never;
sukham —happiness; na —never; param —the supreme; gadm —perfectional
stage.
But he who discards scriptural injunctions and acts according to his
own whims attains neither perfection, nor happiness, nor the supreme
destination.
तस्माच्छास्त्रं प्रमाणं ते कार्याकार्यव्यवस्थितौ | ज्ञात्वा शास्त्रविधानोक्तं कर्म कर्तुमिहार्हसि ||१६-२४||
tasmācchāstraṃ pramāṇaṃ te kāryākāryavyavasthitau . jñātvā śāstravidhānoktaṃ karma kartumihārhasi ||16-24||
tasmat —therefore; sastram —scriptures; pramanam —evidence; te —your;
karya —duty; akarya —forbidden activities; vyavasthitau —in determining;
jnatva —knowing; sastra —of scripture; vidhana —regulations; uktam —as
declared; karma —work; kartum —to do; iha arhasi —you should do it.
One should understand what is duty and what is not duty by the
regulations of the scriptures. Knowing such rules and regulations, one
should act so that he may gradually be elevated.
Глава 17
अर्जुन उवाच | ये शास्त्रविधिमुत्सृज्य यजन्ते श्रद्धयान्विताः | तेषां निष्ठा तु का कृष्ण सत्त्वमाहो रजस्तमः ||१७-१||
arjuna uvāca . ye śāstravidhimutsṛjya yajante śraddhayānvitāḥ . teṣāṃ niṣṭhā tu kā kṛṣṇa sattvamāho rajastamaḥ ||17-1||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; ye —those; sastra-vidhim —the regulations of
scripture; utsrjya —giving up; yajante —worships; sraddhaya —full faith;
anvitah —possessed of; tesam —of them; nistha —faith; tu —but; ka —what is
that; krsna —O Krsna; sattvam —in goodness; aho —said; rajah —in passion;
tamah —in ignorance.
Arjuna said, O Krsna, what is the situation of one who does not follow
the principles of scripture but worships according to his own
imagination? Is he in goodness, in passion or in ignorance?
श्रीभगवानुवाच | त्रिविधा भवति श्रद्धा देहिनां सा स्वभावजा | सात्त्विकी राजसी चैव तामसी चेति तां शृणु ||१७-२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . trividhā bhavati śraddhā dehināṃ sā svabhāvajā . sāttvikī rājasī caiva tāmasī ceti tāṃ śṛṇu ||17-2||
sri bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; tri-vidha —
three kinds; bhavati —become; sraddha —faith; dehinam —of the embodied; sa
—that; sva-bhava-ja —according to his mode of material nature; sattviki —
mode of goodness; rajasT —mode of passion; ca —also; eva —certainly; tamasT
—mode of ignorance; ca —and; iti —thus; tam —that; srnu —hear from Me.
The Supreme Lord said, according to the modes of nature acquired by
the embodied soul, one`s faith can be of three kinds-goodness, passion or
ignorance. Now hear about these.
सत्त्वानुरूपा सर्वस्य श्रद्धा भवति भारत | श्रद्धामयोऽयं पुरुषो यो यच्छ्रद्धः स एव सः ||१७-३||
sattvānurūpā sarvasya śraddhā bhavati bhārata . śraddhāmayo.ayaṃ puruṣo yo yacchraddhaḥ sa eva saḥ ||17-3||
sattva-anurupa —according to the existence; sarvasya —of everyone;
sraddha —faith; bhavati —becomes; bharata —O son of Bharata; sraddha —
faith; mayah —full; ayam —this; purusah —living entity; yah —anyone; yat —
that; sraddhah —faith; sah —that; eva —certainly; sah —he.
According to one`s existence under the various modes of nature, one
evolves a particular kind of faith. The living being is said to be of a
particular faith according to the modes he has acquired.
यजन्ते सात्त्विका देवान्यक्षरक्षांसि राजसाः | प्रेतान्भूतगणांश्चान्ये यजन्ते तामसा जनाः ||१७-४||
yajante sāttvikā devānyakṣarakṣāṃsi rājasāḥ . pretānbhūtagaṇāṃścānye yajante tāmasā janāḥ ||17-4||
yajante —worship; sattvikah —those who are in the mode of goodness;
devan —demigods; yaksa-raksamsi rajasah —those who are in the mode of
passion worship demons; pretan —dead spirits; bhuta-ganan —ghosts; ca anye
—and others; yajante —worship; tamasah —in the mode of ignorance; janah
—people.
Men in the mode of goodness worship the demigods; those in the mode
of passion worship the demons; and those in the mode of ignorance
worship ghosts and spirits.
अशास्त्रविहितं घोरं तप्यन्ते ये तपो जनाः | दम्भाहंकारसंयुक्ताः कामरागबलान्विताः ||१७-५||
aśāstravihitaṃ ghoraṃ tapyante ye tapo janāḥ . dambhāhaṃkārasaṃyuktāḥ kāmarāgabalānvitāḥ ||17-5||
asastra —not mentioned in the scriptures; vihitam —directed; ghoram —
harmful to others; tapyante —undergo penances; ye —those; tapah —
austerities; janah —persons; dambha —pride; ahahkara —egotism; sarhyuktah
—engaged; kama —lust; raga —attachment; bala —force; anvitah —impelled
by; karsayantah —tormenting; sarTra-stham —situated within the body;
bhutagramam —combination of material elements; acetasah —by such a
misled mentality; mam —to Me; ca —also; eva —certainly; antah —within;
sarTra-stham —situated in the body; tan —them; viddhi —understand; asura
—demons; niscayan —certainly.
Those who undergo severe austerities and penances not recommended
in the scriptures, performing them out of pride, egotism, lust and
attachment, who are impelled by passion and who torture their bodily
organs as well as the Supersoul dwelling within are to be known as
demons.
कर्षयन्तः शरीरस्थं भूतग्राममचेतसः | मां चैवान्तःशरीरस्थं तान्विद्ध्यासुरनिश्चयान् ||१७-६||
karṣayantaḥ śarīrasthaṃ bhūtagrāmamacetasaḥ . māṃ caivāntaḥśarīrasthaṃ tānviddhyāsuraniścayān ||17-6||
आहारस्त्वपि सर्वस्य त्रिविधो भवति प्रियः | यज्ञस्तपस्तथा दानं तेषां भेदमिमं शृणु ||१७-७||
āhārastvapi sarvasya trividho bhavati priyaḥ . yajñastapastathā dānaṃ teṣāṃ bhedamimaṃ śṛṇu ||17-7||
aharah —eating; tu —certainly; api —also; sarvasya —of everyone; trividhah
—three kinds; bhavati —there are; priyah —dear; yajhah —sacrifice; tapah
—austerity; tatha —also; danam —charity; tesam —of them; bhedam
—differences; imam —thus; srnu —hear.
Even food of which all partake is of three kinds, according to the three
modes of material nature. The same is true of sacrifices, austerities and
charity. Listen, and I shall tell you of the distinctions of these.
आयुःसत्त्वबलारोग्यसुखप्रीतिविवर्धनाः | रस्याः स्निग्धाः स्थिरा हृद्या आहाराः सात्त्विकप्रियाः ||१७-८||
āyuḥsattvabalārogyasukhaprītivivardhanāḥ . rasyāḥ snigdhāḥ sthirā hṛdyā āhārāḥ sāttvikapriyāḥ ||17-8||
ayuh —duration of life; sattva —existence; bala —strength; arogya —health;
sukha —happiness; priti —satisfaction; vivardhanah —increasing; rasyah —
juicy; snigdhah —fatty; sthirah —enduring; hrdyah —pleasing to the heart;
aharah —food; sattvika —goodness; priyah —palatable; katu —bitter; amla —
sour; lavana —salty; ad-usna —very hot; tiksna —pungent; ruksa —dry;
vidahinah —burning; aharah —food; rajasasya —in the mode of passion; istah
—palatable; duhkha —distress; soka —misery; amaya-pradah —causing
disease;; yata-yamam —food cooked three hours before being eaten; gata-
rasam —tasteless; pud —bad smelling; paryusitam —decomposed; ca —also;
yat —that which; ucchistam —remnants of food eaten by others; api —also; ca
—and; amedhyam —untouchable; bhojanam —eating; tamasa —to one in the
mode of darkness; priyam —dear.
Foods in the mode of goodness increase the duration of life, purify one`s
existence and give strength, health, happiness and satisfaction. Such
nourishing foods are sweet, juicy, fattening and palatable. Foods that are
too bitter, too sour, salty, pungent, dry and hot, are liked by people in the
modes of passion. Such foods cause pain, distress, and disease. Food
cooked more than three hours before being eaten, which is tasteless, stale,
putrid, decomposed and unclean, is food liked by people in the mode of
ignorance.
कट्वम्ललवणात्युष्णतीक्ष्णरूक्षविदाहिनः | आहारा राजसस्येष्टा दुःखशोकामयप्रदाः ||१७-९||
kaṭvamlalavaṇātyuṣṇatīkṣṇarūkṣavidāhinaḥ . āhārā rājasasyeṣṭā duḥkhaśokāmayapradāḥ ||17-9||
यातयामं गतरसं पूति पर्युषितं च यत् | उच्छिष्टमपि चामेध्यं भोजनं तामसप्रियम् ||१७-१०||
yātayāmaṃ gatarasaṃ pūti paryuṣitaṃ ca yat . ucchiṣṭamapi cāmedhyaṃ bhojanaṃ tāmasapriyam ||17-10||
अफलाङ्क्षिभिर्यज्ञो विधिदृष्टो य इज्यते | यष्टव्यमेवेति मनः समाधाय स सात्त्विकः ||१७-११||
aphalāṅkṣibhiryajño vidhidṛṣṭo ya ijyate . yaṣṭavyameveti manaḥ samādhāya sa sāttvikaḥ ||17-11||
aphala-kahksibhih —devoid of desire for result; yajhah —sacrifice; vidhi —
accordingly; drstah —direction; yah —anyone; ijyate —performs; yastavyam —
must be performed; eva —certainly; id —thus; manah —mind; samadhaya —
fixed in; sah —he; sattvikah —is in the mode of goodness.
Of sacrifices, that sacrifice performed according to duty and to
scriptural rules, and with no expectation of reward, is of the nature of
goodness.
अभिसन्धाय तु फलं दम्भार्थमपि चैव यत् | इज्यते भरतश्रेष्ठ तं यज्ञं विद्धि राजसम् ||१७-१२||
abhisandhāya tu phalaṃ dambhārthamapi caiva yat . ijyate bharataśreṣṭha taṃ yajñaṃ viddhi rājasam ||17-12||
abhisandhaya —desiring; tu —but; phalam —the result; dambha —pride;
artham —material benefits; api —also; ca —and; eva —certainly; yat —that
which; ijyate —worship; bharata-srestha —O chief of the Bharatas; tam — that;
yajnam —sacrifice; viddhi —know; rajasam —in the mode of passion.
But that sacrifice performed for some material end or benefit or
performed ostentatiously, out of pride, is of the nature of passion, O chief
of the Bharatas.
विधिहीनमसृष्टान्नं मन्त्रहीनमदक्षिणम् | श्रद्धाविरहितं यज्ञं तामसं परिचक्षते ||१७-१३||
vidhihīnamasṛṣṭānnaṃ mantrahīnamadakṣiṇam . śraddhāvirahitaṃ yajñaṃ tāmasaṃ paricakṣate ||17-13||
vidhi-hmam —without scriptural direction; asrsta-annam —without
distribution of prasadam; mantra-hmam —with no chanting of the Vedic
hymns; adaksinam —with no remunerations to the priests; sraddha —faith;
virahitam —without; yajnam —sacrifice; tamasam —in the mode of ignorance;
paricaksate —is to be considered.
And that sacrifice performed in defiance of scriptural injunctions, in
which no spiritual food is distributed, no hymns are chanted and no
remunerations are made to the priests, and which is faithless—that
sacrifice is of the nature of ignorance.
देवद्विजगुरुप्राज्ञपूजनं शौचमार्जवम् | ब्रह्मचर्यमहिंसा च शारीरं तप उच्यते ||१७-१४||
devadvijaguruprājñapūjanaṃ śaucamārjavam . brahmacaryamahiṃsā ca śārīraṃ tapa ucyate ||17-14||
deva —the Supreme Lord; dvija —the brahmana; guru —the spiritual master;
prajha —worshipable personalities; pujanam —worship; saucam —cleanliness;
arjavam —simplicity; brahma-caryam —celibacy; ahimsa —nonviolence; ca —
also; sarTram —pertaining to the body; tapah —austerity; ucyate —is said to be.
The austerity of the body consists in this: worship of the Supreme
Lord, the brahmanas, the spiritual master, and superiors like the father
and mother. Cleanliness, simplicity, celibacy and nonviolence are also
austerities of the body.
अनुद्वेगकरं वाक्यं सत्यं प्रियहितं च यत् | स्वाध्यायाभ्यसनं चैव वाङ्मयं तप उच्यते ||१७-१५||
anudvegakaraṃ vākyaṃ satyaṃ priyahitaṃ ca yat . svādhyāyābhyasanaṃ caiva vāṅmayaṃ tapa ucyate ||17-15||
anudvega —not agitating; karam —producing; vakyam —words; satyam
—truthful; priya —dear; hitam —beneficial; ca —also; yat —which; svadhyaya
—Vedic study; abhyasanam —practice; ca —also; eva —certainly; vanmayam —
of the voice; tapah —austerity; ucyate —is said to be.
Austerity of speech consists in speaking truthfully and beneficially and
in avoiding speech that offends. One should also recite the Vedas
regularly.
मनः प्रसादः सौम्यत्वं मौनमात्मविनिग्रहः | भावसंशुद्धिरित्येतत्तपो मानसमुच्यते ||१७-१६||
manaḥ prasādaḥ saumyatvaṃ maunamātmavinigrahaḥ . bhāvasaṃśuddhirityetattapo mānasamucyate ||17-16||
manah-prasadah —satisfaction of the mind; saumyatvam —without duplicity
towards others; maunam —gravity; atma —self; vinigrahah —control; bhava
—nature; samsuddhih —purification; id —thus; etat —that is; tapah — austerity;
manasam —of the mind; ucyate —is said to be.
And serenity, simplicity, gravity, self-control and purity of thought are
the austerities of the mind.
श्रद्धया परया तप्तं तपस्तत्त्रिविधं नरैः | अफलाकाङ्क्षिभिर्युक्तैः सात्त्विकं परिचक्षते ||१७-१७||
śraddhayā parayā taptaṃ tapastattrividhaṃ naraiḥ . aphalākāṅkṣibhiryuktaiḥ sāttvikaṃ paricakṣate ||17-17||
sraddhaya —with faith; paraya —transcendental; taptam —executed; tapah
—austerity; tat —that; tri-vidham —three kinds; naraih —by men; aphala-
akaiiksibhih —without desires for fruits; yuktaih —engaged; sattvikam —in the
mode of goodness; pari-caksate —is called.
This threefold austerity, practiced by men whose aim is not to benefit
themselves materially but to please the Supreme, is of the nature of
goodness.
सत्कारमानपूजार्थं तपो दम्भेन चैव यत् | क्रियते तदिह प्रोक्तं राजसं चलमध्रुवम् ||१७-१८||
satkāramānapūjārthaṃ tapo dambhena caiva yat . kriyate tadiha proktaṃ rājasaṃ calamadhruvam ||17-18||
satkara —respect; mana —honor; puja-artham —for worship; tapah —
austerity; dambhena —with pride; ca —also; eva —certainly; yat —which is;
kriyate — performed; tat —that; iha —in this world; proktam —is said; rajasam
—in the mode of passion; calam —flickering; adhruvam —temporary.
Those ostentatious penances and austerities which are performed in
order to gain respect, honor and reverence are said to be in the mode of
passion. They are neither stable nor permanent.
मूढग्राहेणात्मनो यत्पीडया क्रियते तपः | परस्योत्सादनार्थं वा तत्तामसमुदाहृतम् ||१७-१९||
mūḍhagrāheṇātmano yatpīḍayā kriyate tapaḥ . parasyotsādanārthaṃ vā tattāmasamudāhṛtam ||17-19||
11^ II
mudha-grahenatmanah yat
pidaya kriyate tapah
parasyotsadanartham va
tat tamasam udahrtam
mudha —foolish; grahena —with endeavor; atmanah —of one`s own self; yat
—which; pidaya —by torture; kriyate —is performed; tapah —penance;
parasya —to others; utsadanartham —causing annihilation; va —or; tat —that;
tamasam —in the mode of darkness; udahrtam —is said to be.
And those penances and austerities which are performed foolishly by
means of obstinant self-torture, or to destroy or injure others, are said to
be in the mode of ignorance.
दातव्यमिति यद्दानं दीयतेऽनुपकारिणे | देशे काले च पात्रे च तद्दानं सात्त्विकं स्मृतम् ||१७-२०||
dātavyamiti yaddānaṃ dīyate.anupakāriṇe . deśe kāle ca pātre ca taddānaṃ sāttvikaṃ smṛtam ||17-20||
datavyam iti yad danarh
dfyate `nupakarine
dese kale ca patre ca
tad danarh sattvikarh smrtam
datavyam —worth giving; iti —thus; yat —that which; danam —charity;
dTyate —given; anupakarine —to any person irrespective of doing good; dese
—in place; kale —in time; ca —also; patre —suitable person; ca —and; tat —that;
danam —charity; sattvikam —in the mode of goodness; smrtam — consider.
That gift which is given out of duty, at the proper time and place, to a
worthy person, and without expectation of return, is considered to be
charity in the mode of goodness.
यत्तु प्रत्युपकारार्थं फलमुद्दिश्य वा पुनः | दीयते च परिक्लिष्टं तद्दानं राजसं स्मृतम् ||१७-२१||
yattu pratyupakārārthaṃ phalamuddiśya vā punaḥ . dīyate ca parikliṣṭaṃ taddānaṃ rājasaṃ smṛtam ||17-21||
yat —that which; tu —but; prati-upakara-artham —for the sake of getting
some return; phalam —result; uddisya —desiring; va —or; punah —again; dTyate
—is given in charity; ca —also; pariklistam —grudgingly; tat —that; danam —
charity; rajasam —in the mode of passion; smrtam —is understood to be.
But charity performed with the expectation of some return, or with a
desire for fruitive results, or in a grudging mood, is said to be charity in
the mode of passion.
अदेशकाले यद्दानमपात्रेभ्यश्च दीयते | असत्कृतमवज्ञातं तत्तामसमुदाहृतम् ||१७-२२||
adeśakāle yaddānamapātrebhyaśca dīyate . asatkṛtamavajñātaṃ tattāmasamudāhṛtam ||17-22||
adesa —unpurified place; kale —unpurified time; yat —that which is; danam
—charity; apatrebhyah —to unworthy persons; ca —also; dTyate —is given;
asatkrtam —without respect; avajnatam —without proper attention; tat — that;
tamasam —in the mode of darkness; udahrtam —is said to be.
And charity performed at an improper place and time and given to
unworthy persons without respect and with contempt is charity in the
mode of ignorance.
ॐतत्सदिति निर्देशो ब्रह्मणस्त्रिविधः स्मृतः | ब्राह्मणास्तेन वेदाश्च यज्ञाश्च विहिताः पुरा ||१७-२३||
OMtatsaditi nirdeśo brahmaṇastrividhaḥ smṛtaḥ . brāhmaṇāstena vedāśca yajñāśca vihitāḥ purā ||17-23||
om —indication of the Supreme; tat —that; sat —eternal; id —that; nirdesah
—indication; brahmanah —of the Supreme; tri-vidhah —three kinds; smrtah
—consider; brahmanah —the brahmanas; tena —therefore; vedah — the Vedic
literature; ca —also; yajhah —sacrifice; ca —also; vihitah —sacrifice; pura
—formerly.
From the beginning of creation, the three syllables—om tat sat—have
been used to indicate the Supreme Absolute Truth [Brahman]. They were
uttered by brahmanas while chanting Vedic hymns and during sacrifices,
for the satisfaction of the Supreme.
तस्मादोमित्युदाहृत्य यज्ञदानतपःक्रियाः | प्रवर्तन्ते विधानोक्ताः सततं ब्रह्मवादिनाम् ||१७-२४||
tasmādomityudāhṛtya yajñadānatapaḥkriyāḥ . pravartante vidhānoktāḥ satataṃ brahmavādinām ||17-24||
tasmat —therefore; om —beginning with om; iti —thus; udahrtya —
indicating; yajha —sacrifice; dana —charity; tapah —penance; kriyah —
performances; pravartante —begins; vidhana-uktah —according to scriptural
regulation; satatam —always; brahma-vadinam —of the transcendentalists.
Thus the transcendentalists undertake sacrifices, charities, and
penances, beginning always with om, to attain the Supreme.
तदित्यनभिसन्धाय फलं यज्ञतपःक्रियाः | दानक्रियाश्च विविधाः क्रियन्ते मोक्षकाङ्क्षिभिः ||१७-२५||
tadityanabhisandhāya phalaṃ yajñatapaḥkriyāḥ . dānakriyāśca vividhāḥ kriyante mokṣakāṅkṣibhiḥ ||17-25||
tat —that; id —they; anabhisandhaya —without fruitive result; phalam
—result of sacrifice; yajha —sacrifice; tapah —penance; kriyah —activities;
dana —charity; kriyah —activities; ca —also; vividhah —varieties; kriyante
—done; moksa-kanksibhih —those who actually desire liberation.
One should perform sacrifice, penance and charity with the word tat.
The purpose of such transcendental activities is to get free from the
material entanglement.
सद्भावे साधुभावे च सदित्येतत्प्रयुज्यते | प्रशस्ते कर्मणि तथा सच्छब्दः पार्थ युज्यते ||१७-२६||
sadbhāve sādhubhāve ca sadityetatprayujyate . praśaste karmaṇi tathā sacchabdaḥ pārtha yujyate ||17-26||
sat-bhave —in the sense of the nature of the Supreme; sadhu-bhave —in the
sense of the nature of devotion; ca —also; sat —the Supreme; id —thus; etat —
this; prayujyate —is used; prasaste —bona fide; karmani —activities; tatha —
also; sat-sabdah —sound; partha —O son of Prtha; yujyate —is used; yajhe —
sacrifice; tapasi —in penance; dane —charity; ca —also; sthitih —situated; sat —
the Supreme; id —thus; ca —and; ucyate —pronounced; karma —work; ca
—also; eva —certainly; tat —that; arthiyam —are meant; sat —Supreme; id
—thus; eva —certainly; abhidhTyate —is practiced.
The Absolute Truth is the objective of devotional sacrifice, and it is
indicated by the word sat. These works of sacrifice, of penance and of
charity, true to the absolute nature, are performed to please the Supreme
Person, O son of Prtha.
यज्ञे तपसि दाने च स्थितिः सदिति चोच्यते | कर्म चैव तदर्थीयं सदित्येवाभिधीयते ||१७-२७||
yajñe tapasi dāne ca sthitiḥ saditi cocyate . karma caiva tadarthīyaṃ sadityevābhidhīyate ||17-27||
अश्रद्धया हुतं दत्तं तपस्तप्तं कृतं च यत् | असदित्युच्यते पार्थ न च तत्प्रेत्य नो इह ||१७-२८||
aśraddhayā hutaṃ dattaṃ tapastaptaṃ kṛtaṃ ca yat . asadityucyate pārtha na ca tatprepya no iha ||17-28||
asraddhaya —without faith; hutam —performed; dattam —given; tapah —
penance; taptam —executed; krtam —performed; ca —also; yat —that which;
asat —falls; id —thus; ucyate —is said to be; partha —O son of Prtha; na —
never; ca —also; tat —that; pretya —after death; no —nor; iha —in this life.
But sacrifices, austerities and charities performed without faith in the
Supreme are nonpermanent, O son of Prtha, regardless of whatever rites
are performed. They are called asat and are useless both in this life and
the next.
Глава 18
अर्जुन उवाच | संन्यासस्य महाबाहो तत्त्वमिच्छामि वेदितुम् | त्यागस्य च हृषीकेश पृथक्केशिनिषूदन ||१८-१||
arjuna uvāca . saṃnyāsasya mahābāho tattvamicchāmi veditum . tyāgasya ca hṛṣīkeśa pṛthakkeśiniṣūdana ||18-1||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; sannyasasya —renunciation; maha-baho —O
mighty-armed one; tattvam —truth; icchami —I wish; veditum —to understand;
tyagasya —of renunciation; ca —also; hrsTkesa —O master of the senses;
prthak —differently; kesi-nisudana —O killer of the KesI demon.
Arjuna said, O mighty-armed one, I wish to understand the purpose of
renunciation [tyaga] and of the renounced order of life [sannyasa], O
killer of the KesI demon, Hrslkesa.
* • •
श्रीभगवानुवाच | काम्यानां कर्मणां न्यासं संन्यासं कवयो विदुः | सर्वकर्मफलत्यागं प्राहुस्त्यागं विचक्षणाः ||१८-२||
śrībhagavānuvāca . kāmyānāṃ karmaṇāṃ nyāsaṃ saṃnyāsaṃ kavayo viduḥ . sarvakarmaphalatyāgaṃ prāhustyāgaṃ vicakṣaṇāḥ ||18-2||
srT bhagavan uvaca —the Supreme Personality of Godhead said; kamyanam
—with desire; karmanam —activities; nyasam —renunciation; sannyasam
—renounced order of life; kavayah —the learned; viduh —know; sarva —all;
karma —activities; phala —of results; tyagam —renunciation; prahuh —call;
tyagam —renunciation; vicaksanah —the experienced.
The Supreme Lord said. To give up the results of all activities is called
renunciation [tyaga] by the wise. And that state is called the renounced
order of life [sannyasa] by great learned men.
त्याज्यं दोषवदित्येके कर्म प्राहुर्मनीषिणः | यज्ञदानतपःकर्म न त्याज्यमिति चापरे ||१८-३||
tyājyaṃ doṣavadityeke karma prāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ . yajñadānatapaḥkarma na tyājyamiti cāpare ||18-3||
tyajyam —must be given up; dosavat —as an evil; id —thus; eke —one group;
karma —work; prahuh —said; mamsinah —of great thinkers; yajha — sacrifice;
dana —charity; tapah —penance; karma —work; na —never; tyajyam —is to be
given up; id —thus; ca —certainly; apare —others.
Some learned men declare that all kinds of fruitive activities should be
given up, but there are yet other sages who maintain that acts of sacrifice.
charity and penance should never be abandoned.
निश्चयं शृणु मे तत्र त्यागे भरतसत्तम | त्यागो हि पुरुषव्याघ्र त्रिविधः सम्प्रकीर्तितः ||१८-४||
niścayaṃ śṛṇu me tatra tyāge bharatasattama . tyāgo hi puruṣavyāghra trividhaḥ samprakīrtitaḥ ||18-4||
niscayam —certainly; srnu —hear; me —from Me; tatra —there; tyage —in
the matter of renunciation; bharata-sattama —O best of the Bharatas; tyagah
—renunciation; hi —certainly; purusa-vyaghra —O tiger among human beings;
tri-vidhah —three kinds; samprakirtitah —is declared.
O best of the Bharatas, hear from Me now about renunciation. O tiger
among men, there are three kinds of renunciation declared in the
scriptures.
यज्ञदानतपःकर्म न त्याज्यं कार्यमेव तत् | यज्ञो दानं तपश्चैव पावनानि मनीषिणाम् ||१८-५||
yajñadānatapaḥkarma na tyājyaṃ kāryameva tat . yajño dānaṃ tapaścaiva pāvanāni manīṣiṇām ||18-5||
yajha —sacrifice; dana —charity; tapah —penance; karma —activities; na —
never; tyajyam —to be given up; karyam —must be done; eva —certainly; tat —
that; yajhah —sacrifice; danam —charity; tapah —penance; ca —also; eva —
certainly; pavanani —purifying; mamsinam —even of the great souls.
Acts of sacrifice, charity and penance are not to be given up but should
be performed. Indeed, sacrifice, charity and penance purify even the
great souls.
एतान्यपि तु कर्माणि सङ्गं त्यक्त्वा फलानि च | कर्तव्यानीति मे पार्थ निश्चितं मतमुत्तमम् ||१८-६||
etānyapi tu karmāṇi saṅgaṃ tyaktvā phalāni ca . kartavyānīti me pārtha niścitaṃ matamuttamam ||18-6||
etani —all this; api —certainly; tu —must; karmani —activities; sahgam
—association; tyaktva —renouncing; phalani —results; ca —also; kartavyani —
as duty; iti —thus; me —My; partha —O son of Prtha; niscitam —definite;
matam —opinion; uttamam —the best.
All these activities should be performed without any expectation of
result. They should be performed as a matter of duty, O son of Prtha.
That is My final opinion.
नियतस्य तु संन्यासः कर्मणो नोपपद्यते | मोहात्तस्य परित्यागस्तामसः परिकीर्तितः ||१८-७||
niyatasya tu saṃnyāsaḥ karmaṇo nopapadyate . mohāttasya parityāgastāmasaḥ parikīrtitaḥ ||18-7||
niyatasya —prescribed duties; tu —but; sannyasah —renunciation;
karmanah —activities; na —never; upapadyate —is deserved; mohat —by
illusion; tasya — of which; parityagah —renunciation; tamasah —in the mode
of ignorance; parikfrtitah —declared.
Prescribed duties should never be renounced. If, by illusion, one gives
up his prescribed duties, such renunciation is said to be in the mode of
ignorance.
दुःखमित्येव यत्कर्म कायक्लेशभयात्त्यजेत् | स कृत्वा राजसं त्यागं नैव त्यागफलं लभेत् ||१८-८||
duḥkhamityeva yatkarma kāyakleśabhayāttyajet . sa kṛtvā rājasaṃ tyāgaṃ naiva tyāgaphalaṃ labhet ||18-8||
duhkham —unhappy; id —thus; eva —certainly; yat —that which; karma —
work; kaya —body; klesa —troublesome; bhayat —out of; tyajet —fear; sah —
that; krtva —after doing; rajasam —in the mode of passion; tyagam —
renunciation; na eva —certainly not; tyaga —renounced; phalam —results;
labhet —gain.
Anyone who gives up prescribed duties as troublesome, or out of fear, is
said to be in the mode of passion. Such action never leads to the elevation
of renunciation.
कार्यमित्येव यत्कर्म नियतं क्रियतेऽर्जुन | सङ्गं त्यक्त्वा फलं चैव स त्यागः सात्त्विको मतः ||१८-९||
kāryamityeva yatkarma niyataṃ kriyate.arjuna . saṅgaṃ tyaktvā phalaṃ caiva sa tyāgaḥ sāttviko mataḥ ||18-9||
karyam —must be done; id —thus; eva —thus; yat —that which; karma —
work; niyatam —prescribed; kriyate —performed; arjuna —O Arjuna; saiigam
—association; tyaktva —giving up; phalam —result; ca —also; eva — certainly;
sah —that; tyagah —renunciation; sattvikah —in the mode of goodness; matah
—in My opinion.
But he who performs his prescribed duty only because it ought to be
done, and renounces all attachment to the fruit—his renunciation is of the
nature of goodness, O Arjuna.
न द्वेष्ट्यकुशलं कर्म कुशले नानुषज्जते | त्यागी सत्त्वसमाविष्टो मेधावी छिन्नसंशयः ||१८-१०||
na dveṣṭyakuśalaṃ karma kuśale nānuṣajjate . tyāgī sattvasamāviṣṭo medhāvī chinnasaṃśayaḥ ||18-10||
na —never; dvesti —hates; akusalam —inauspicious; karma —work; kusale
—in auspicious; na —nor; anusajjate —becomes attached; tyagT —the
renouncer; sattva —goodness; samavistah —absorbed in; medhavT —intelligent;
chinna — cut up; samsayah —all doubts.
Those who are situated in the mode of goodness, who neither hate
inauspicious work nor are attached to auspicious work, have no doubts
about work.
न हि देहभृता शक्यं त्यक्तुं कर्माण्यशेषतः | यस्तु कर्मफलत्यागी स त्यागीत्यभिधीयते ||१८-११||
na hi dehabhṛtā śakyaṃ tyaktuṃ karmāṇyaśeṣataḥ . yastu karmaphalatyāgī sa tyāgītyabhidhīyate ||18-11||
na —never; hi —certainly; deha-bhrta —of the embodied; sakyam — possible;
tyaktum —to renounce; karmani —activities of; asesatah — altogether; yah tu
—anyone who; karma —work; phala —result; tyagT— renouncer; sah —he;
tyagT— the renouncer; id —thus; abhidhTyate —it is said.
It is indeed impossible for an embodied being to give up all activities.
Therefore it is said that he who renounces the fruits of action is one who
has truly renounced.
अनिष्टमिष्टं मिश्रं च त्रिविधं कर्मणः फलम् | भवत्यत्यागिनां प्रेत्य न तु संन्यासिनां क्वचित् ||१८-१२||
aniṣṭamiṣṭaṃ miśraṃ ca trividhaṃ karmaṇaḥ phalam . bhavatyatyāgināṃ pretya na tu saṃnyāsināṃ kvacit ||18-12||
anistam —leading to hell; istam —leading to heaven; misram ca —or
mixture; tri-vidham —three kinds; karmanah —work; phalam —result; bhavad
—becomes; atyaginam —of the renouncer; pretya —after death; na tu — but
not; sannyasinam —of the renounced order; kvacit —at any time.
For one who is not renounced, the threefold fruits of action—desirable,
undesirable and mixed—accrue after death. But those who are in the
renounced order of life have no such results to suffer or enjoy.
पञ्चैतानि महाबाहो कारणानि निबोध मे | साङ्ख्ये कृतान्ते प्रोक्तानि सिद्धये सर्वकर्मणाम् ||१८-१३||
pañcaitāni mahābāho kāraṇāni nibodha me . sāṅkhye kṛtānte proktāni siddhaye sarvakarmaṇām ||18-13||
panca —five; etani —all these; maha-baho —O mighty-armed one; karanani
—cause; nibodha —just understand; me —from Me; sankhye —in the Vedas;
krtante —after performance; proktani —said; siddhaye —perfection; sarva —all;
karmanam —actuated; adhisthanam —place; tatha —also; karta —worker;
karanam ca —and instruments; prthak-vidham —different kinds; vividhah ca
—varieties; prthak —separately; cestah —endeavor; daivam —the Supreme; ca
—also; eva —certainly; atra —here; pahcamam —five.
O mighty-armed Arjuna, learn from Me of the five factors which bring
about the accomplishment of all action. These are declared in sankhya
philosophy to be the place of action, the performer, the senses, the
endeavor, and ultimately the Supersoul.
अधिष्ठानं तथा कर्ता करणं च पृथग्विधम् | विविधाश्च पृथक्चेष्टा दैवं चैवात्र पञ्चमम् ||१८-१४||
adhiṣṭhānaṃ tathā kartā karaṇaṃ ca pṛthagvidham . vividhāśca pṛthakceṣṭā daivaṃ caivātra pañcamam ||18-14||
शरीरवाङ्मनोभिर्यत्कर्म प्रारभते नरः | न्याय्यं वा विपरीतं वा पञ्चैते तस्य हेतवः ||१८-१५||
śarīravāṅmanobhiryatkarma prārabhate naraḥ . nyāyyaṃ vā viparītaṃ vā pañcaite tasya hetavaḥ ||18-15||
sarTra —body; vak —speech; manobhih —by the mind; yat —anything; karma
—work; prarabhate —begins; narah —a person; nyayyam —right; va —or;
viparTtam —the opposite; va —or; pahca —five; ete —all these; tasya —its;
hetavah —causes.
Whatever right or wrong action a man performs by body, mind or
speech is caused by these five factors.
तत्रैवं सति कर्तारमात्मानं केवलं तु यः | पश्यत्यकृतबुद्धित्वान्न स पश्यति दुर्मतिः ||१८-१६||
tatraivaṃ sati kartāramātmānaṃ kevalaṃ tu yaḥ . paśyatyakṛtabuddhitvānna sa paśyati durmatiḥ ||18-16||
tatra —there; evam —certainly; sati —being thus; kartaram —of the worker;
atmanam —the soul; kevalam —only; tu —but; yah —anyone; pasyati —sees;
akrta-buddhitvat —due to unintelligence; na —never; sah —he; pasyati —sees;
durmatih —foolish.
Therefore one who thinks himself the only doer, not considering the five
factors, is certainly not very intelligent and cannot see things as they are.
यस्य नाहंकृतो भावो बुद्धिर्यस्य न लिप्यते | हत्वाऽपि स इमाँल्लोकान्न हन्ति न निबध्यते ||१८-१७||
yasya nāhaṃkṛto bhāvo buddhiryasya na lipyate . hatvā.api sa imā.Nllokānna hanti na nibadhyate ||18-17||
yasya —of one who; na —never; ahahkrtah —false ego; bhavah —nature;
buddhih —intelligence; yasya —one who; na —never; lipyate —is attached;
hatva api —even killing; sah —he; iman —this; lokan —world; na —never; hand
—kills; na —never; nibadhyate —becomes entangled.
One who is not motivated by false ego, whose intelligence is not
entangled, though he kills men in this world, is not the slayer. Nor is he
bound by his actions.
ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं परिज्ञाता त्रिविधा कर्मचोदना | करणं कर्म कर्तेति त्रिविधः कर्मसंग्रहः ||१८-१८||
jñānaṃ jñeyaṃ parijñātā trividhā karmacodanā . karaṇaṃ karma karteti trividhaḥ karmasaṃgrahaḥ ||18-18||
jhanam —knowledge; jneyam —objective; parijnata —the knower; tri-vidha
— three kinds; karma —work; codana —impetus; karanam —the senses; karma
—work; karta —the doer; id —thus; tri-vidhah —three kinds; karma —work;
sangrahah —accumulation.
Knowledge, the object of knowledge and the knower are the three
factors which motivate action; the senses, the work and the doer comprise
the threefold basis of action.
ज्ञानं कर्म च कर्ताच त्रिधैव गुणभेदतः | प्रोच्यते गुणसङ्ख्याने यथावच्छृणु तान्यपि ||१८-१९||
jñānaṃ karma ca kartāca tridhaiva guṇabhedataḥ . procyate guṇasaṅkhyāne yathāvacchṛṇu tānyapi ||18-19||
jnanam —knowledge; karma —work; ca —also; karta —worker; ca —also;
tridha —three kinds; eva —certainly; guna-bhedatah —in terms of different
modes of material nature; procyate —is said; guna-sahkhyane —in terms of
different modes; yathavat —as they act; srnu —hear; tani —all of them; api
—also.
In accordance with the three modes of material nature, there are three
kinds of knowledge, action, and performers of action. Listen as I describe
them.
सर्वभूतेषु येनैकं भावमव्ययमीक्षते | अविभक्तं विभक्तेषु तज्ज्ञानं विद्धि सात्त्विकम् ||१८-२०||
sarvabhūteṣu yenaikaṃ bhāvamavyayamīkṣate . avibhaktaṃ vibhakteṣu tajjñānaṃ viddhi sāttvikam ||18-20||
sarva-bhutesu —in all living entities; yena —by whom; ekam —one; bhavam
—situation; avyayam —imperishable; Tksate —does see; avibhaktam —
undivided; vibhaktesu —in the numberless divided; tat —that; jnanam —
knowledge; viddhi —knows; sattvikam —in the mode of goodness.
That knowledge by which one undivided spiritual nature is seen in all
existences, undivided in the divided, is knowledge in the mode of
goodness.
पृथक्त्वेन तु यज्ज्ञानं नानाभावान्पृथग्विधान् | वेत्ति सर्वेषु भूतेषु तज्ज्ञानं विद्धि राजसम् ||१८-२१||
pṛthaktvena tu yajjñānaṃ nānābhāvānpṛthagvidhān . vetti sarveṣu bhūteṣu tajjñānaṃ viddhi rājasam ||18-21||
prthaktvena —because of division; tu —but; yat jnanam —which knowledge;
nana-bhavan —multifarious situations; prthak-vidhan —differently; vetti —one
who knows; sarvesu —in all; bhutesu —living entities; tat jnanam —that
knowledge; viddhi —must be known; rajasam —in terms of passion.
That knowledge by which a different type of living entity is seen to be
dwelling in different bodies is knowledge in the mode of passion.
यत्तु कृत्स्नवदेकस्मिन्कार्ये सक्तमहैतुकम् | अतत्त्वार्थवदल्पं च तत्तामसमुदाहृतम् ||१८-२२||
yattu kṛtsnavadekasminkārye saktamahaitukam . atattvārthavadalpaṃ ca tattāmasamudāhṛtam ||18-22||
yat —that which; tu —but; krtsnavat —all in all; ekasmin —in one; karye —
work; saktam —attached; ahaitukam —without cause; atattva-arthavat —
without reality; alpam ca —and very meager; tat —that; tamasam —in the mode
of darkness; udahrtam —is spoken.
And that knowledge by which one is attached to one kind of work as
the all in all, without knowledge of the truth, and which is very meager, is
said to be in the mode of darkness.
नियतं सङ्गरहितमरागद्वेषतः कृतम् | अफलप्रेप्सुना कर्म यत्तत्सात्त्विकमुच्यते ||१८-२३||
niyataṃ saṅgarahitamarāgadveṣataḥ kṛtam . aphalaprepsunā karma yattatsāttvikamucyate ||18-23||
niyatam —regulative; sanga-rahitam —without attachment; araga-dvesatah
—without love or hatred; krtam —done; aphala-prepsuna —without fruitive
result; karma —acts; yat —that which; tat —that; sattvikam —in the mode of
goodness; ucyate —is called.
As for actions, that action in accordance with duty, which is performed
without attachment, without love or hate, by one who has renounced
fruitive results, is called action in the mode of goodness.
यत्तु कामेप्सुना कर्म साहंकारेण वा पुनः | क्रियते बहुलायासं तद्राजसमुदाहृतम् ||१८-२४||
yattu kāmepsunā karma sāhaṃkāreṇa vā punaḥ . kriyate bahulāyāsaṃ tadrājasamudāhṛtam ||18-24||
yat —that which; tu —but; kama-Tpsuna —with fruitive result; karma —
work; sahahkarena —with ego; va —or; punah —again; kriyate —performed;
bahula-ayasam —with great labor; tat —that; rajasam —in the mode of
passion; udahrtam —is said to be.
But action performed with great effort by one seeking to gratify his
desires, and which is enacted from a sense of false ego, is called action in
the mode of passion.
अनुबन्धं क्षयं हिंसामनपेक्ष्य च पौरुषम् | मोहादारभ्यते कर्म यत्तत्तामसमुच्यते ||१८-२५||
anubandhaṃ kṣayaṃ hiṃsāmanapekṣya ca pauruṣam . mohādārabhyate karma yattattāmasamucyate ||18-25||
anubandham —future bondage; ksayam —distracted; himsam —violence;
anapeksya —without consideration of consequences; ca —also; paurusam —
distressing to others; mohat —by illusion; arabhyate —begun; karma —work;
yat —that; tat —which; tamasam —in the mode of ignorance; ucyate —is said to
be.
And that action performed in ignorance and delusion without
consideration of future bondage or consequences, which inflicts injury
and is impractical, is said to be action in the mode of ignorance.
मुक्तसङ्गोऽनहंवादी धृत्युत्साहसमन्वितः | सिद्ध्यसिद्ध्योर्निर्विकारः कर्ता सात्त्विक उच्यते ||१८-२६||
muktasaṅgo.anahaṃvādī dhṛtyutsāhasamanvitaḥ . siddhyasiddhyornirvikāraḥ kartā sāttvika ucyate ||18-26||
mukta-sahgah —liberated from all material association; anaham-vadT —
without false ego; dhrti-utsaha —with great enthusiasm; samanvitah —
qualified in that way; siddhi —perfection; asiddhyoh —failure; nirvikarah —
without change; karta —worker; sattvikah —in the mode of goodness; ucyate
—is said to be.
The worker who is free from all material attachments and false ego,
who is enthusiastic and resolute and who is indifferent to success or
failure, is a worker in the mode of goodness.
रागी कर्मफलप्रेप्सुर्लुब्धो हिंसात्मकोऽशुचिः | हर्षशोकान्वितः कर्ता राजसः परिकीर्तितः ||१८-२७||
rāgī karmaphalaprepsurlubdho hiṃsātmako.aśuciḥ . harṣaśokānvitaḥ kartā rājasaḥ parikīrtitaḥ ||18-27||
ragT —very much attached; karma-phala —to the fruit of the work; prepsuh
—desiring; lubdhah —greedy; hirhsa-atmakah —and always envious; asucih —
unclean; harsa-soka-anvitah —complicated, with joy and sorrow; karta —such
a worker; rajasah —in the mode of passion; parikfrtitah — is declared.
But that worker who is attached to the fruits of his labor and who
passionately wants to enjoy them, who is greedy, envious and impure and
moved by happiness and distress, is a worker in the mode of passion.
अयुक्तः प्राकृतः स्तब्धः शठो नैष्कृतिकोऽलसः | विषादी दीर्घसूत्री च कर्ता तामस उच्यते ||१८-२८||
ayuktaḥ prākṛtaḥ stabdhaḥ śaṭho naiṣkṛtiko.alasaḥ . viṣādī dīrghasūtrī ca kartā tāmasa ucyate ||18-28||
ayuktah —without reference to the scriptural injunctions; prakrtah —
materialistic; stabdhah —obstinate; sathah —deceitful; naiskrtikah —expert in
insulting others; alasah —lazy; visadT —morose; dirgha-sutrT —procrastinating;
ca —also; karta —worker; tamasah —in the mode of ignorance; ucyate —is said
to be.
And that worker who is always engaged in work against the injunction
of the scripture, who is materialistic, obstinate, cheating and expert in
insulting others, who is lazy, always morose and procrastinating, is a
worker in the mode of ignorance.
बुद्धेर्भेदं धृतेश्चैव गुणतस्त्रिविधं शृणु | प्रोच्यमानमशेषेण पृथक्त्वेन धनञ्जय ||१८-२९||
buddherbhedaṃ dhṛteścaiva guṇatastrividhaṃ śṛṇu . procyamānamaśeṣeṇa pṛthaktvena dhanañjaya ||18-29||
buddheh —of intelligence; bhedam —differences; dhrteh —of steadiness; ca
—also; eva —certainly; gunatah —by the modes of material nature; tri-vidham
—the three kinds of; srnu —just hear; procyamanam —as described by Me;
asesena —in detail; prthaktvena —differently; dhananjaya —O winner of
wealth.
Now, O winner of wealth, please listen as I tell you in detail of the three
kinds of understanding and determination according to the three modes
of nature.
प्रवृत्तिं च निवृत्तिं च कार्याकार्ये भयाभये | बन्धं मोक्षं च या वेत्ति बुद्धिः सा पार्थ सात्त्विकी ||१८-३०||
pravṛttiṃ ca nivṛttiṃ ca kāryākārye bhayābhaye . bandhaṃ mokṣaṃ ca yā vetti buddhiḥ sā pārtha sāttvikī ||18-30||
pravrttim —deserving; ca —also; nivrttim —not deserving; karya —work;
akarye —reaction; bhaya —fearful; abhaye —fearlessness; bandham
—obligation; moksam ca —and liberation; yd —that which; vetti —knows;
buddhih — understanding; sa —that; partha —O son of Prtha; sattvikT —in the
mode of goodness.
O son of Prtha, that understanding by which one knows what ought to
be done and what ought not to be done, what is to be feared and what is
not to be feared, what is binding and what is liberating, that
understanding is established in the mode of goodness.
यया धर्ममधर्मं च कार्यं चाकार्यमेव च | अयथावत्प्रजानाति बुद्धिः सा पार्थ राजसी ||१८-३१||
yayā dharmamadharmaṃ ca kāryaṃ cākāryameva ca . ayathāvatprajānāti buddhiḥ sā pārtha rājasī ||18-31||
yaya —by which; dharmam —principles of religion; adharmam ca —and
irreligion; karyam —work; ca —also; akaryam —what ought not to be done;eva
—certainly; ca —also; ayathavat —not perfectly; prajanad —knows; buddhih
—intelligence; sa —that; partha —O son of Prtha; rajasT —in the mode of
passion.
And that understanding which cannot distinguish between the religious
way of life and the irreligious, between action that should be done and
action that should not be done, that imperfect understanding, O son of
Prtha, is in the mode of passion.
अधर्मं धर्ममिति या मन्यते तमसावृता | सर्वार्थान्विपरीतांश्च बुद्धिः सा पार्थ तामसी ||१८-३२||
adharmaṃ dharmamiti yā manyate tamasāvṛtā . sarvārthānviparītāṃśca buddhiḥ sā pārtha tāmasī ||18-32||
adharmam —irreligion; dharmam —religion; iti —thus; yd —which; manyate
—thinks; tamasa —by illusion; avrta —covered; sarva-arthan —all things;
viparitan —the wrong direction; ca —also; buddhih —intelligence; sa —that;
partha —O son of Prtha; tamasT —the mode of ignorance.
That understanding which considers irreligion to be religion and
religion to be irreligion, under the spell of illusion and darkness, and
strives always in the wrong direction, O Partha, is in the mode of
ignorance.
धृत्या यया धारयते मनःप्राणेन्द्रियक्रियाः | योगेनाव्यभिचारिण्या धृतिः सा पार्थ सात्त्विकी ||१८-३३||
dhṛtyā yayā dhārayate manaḥprāṇendriyakriyāḥ . yogenāvyabhicāriṇyā dhṛtiḥ sā pārtha sāttvikī ||18-33||
dhrtya —determination; yaya —by which; dharayate —is sustained; manah —
mind; prana —life; indriya —senses; kriyah —activities; yogena —by yoga
practice; avyabhicarinya —without any break; dhrtih —such determination; sa
—that; partha —O son of Prtha; sattvikT —in the mode of goodness.
O son of Prtha, that determination which is unbreakable, which is
sustained with steadfastness by yoga practice, and thus controls the mind,
life, and the acts of the senses, is in the mode of goodness.
यया तु धर्मकामार्थान्धृत्या धारयतेऽर्जुन | प्रसङ्गेन फलाकाङ्क्षी धृतिः सा पार्थ राजसी ||१८-३४||
yayā tu dharmakāmārthāndhṛtyā dhārayate.arjuna . prasaṅgena phalākāṅkṣī dhṛtiḥ sā pārtha rājasī ||18-34||
yaya —by which; tu —but; dharma-kama-arthan —for religiosity and
economic development; dhrtya —by determination; dharayate —in such terms;
arjuna —O Arjuna; prasahgena —for that; phala-akahksT —desiring fruitive
result; dhrtih —determination; sa —that; partha —O son of Prtha; rajasi —in
the mode of passion.
And that determination by which one holds fast to fruitive result in
religion, economic development and sense gratification is of the nature of
passion, O Arjuna.
यया स्वप्नं भयं शोकं विषादं मदमेव च | न विमुञ्चति दुर्मेधा धृतिः सा पार्थ तामसी ||१८-३५||
yayā svapnaṃ bhayaṃ śokaṃ viṣādaṃ madameva ca . na vimuñcati durmedhā dhṛtiḥ sā pārtha tāmasī ||18-35||
yaya —by which; svapnam —dream; bhayam —fearfulness; sokam —
lamentation; visadam —moroseness; madam —illusion; eva —certainly; ca —
also; na —never; vimuncati —is liberated; durmedhah —unintelligent; dhrtih —
determination; sa —that; partha —O son of Prtha; tamasT —in the mode of
ignorance.
And that determination which cannot go beyond dreaming, fearfulness,
lamentation, moroseness, and illusion—such unintelligent determination
is in the mode of darkness.
सुखं त्विदानीं त्रिविधं शृणु मे भरतर्षभ | अभ्यासाद्रमते यत्र दुःखान्तं च निगच्छति ||१८-३६||
sukhaṃ tvidānīṃ trividhaṃ śṛṇu me bharatarṣabha . abhyāsādramate yatra duḥkhāntaṃ ca nigacchati ||18-36||
sukham —happiness; tu —but; idamm —now; tri-vidham —three kinds; smu
—hear; me —from Me; bharatarsabha —O best amongst the Bharatas;
abhyasat —by practice; ramate —enjoyer; yatra —where; duhkha —distress;
antam —end; ca —also; nigacchati —gains; yat —that which; tat —that; agre —
in the beginning; visam iva —like poison; pariname —at the end; amrta —
nectar; upamam —compared to; tat —that; sukham —happiness; sattvikam — in
the mode of goodness; proktam —is said; atma —self; buddhi —intelligence;
prasada-jam —satisfactory.
O best of the Bharatas, now please hear from Me about the three kinds
of happiness which the conditioned soul enjoys, and by which he
sometimes comes to the end of all distress. That which in the beginning
may be just like poison but at the end is just like nectar and which
awakens one to self-realization is said to be happiness in the mode of
goodness.
यत्तदग्रे विषमिव परिणामेऽमृतोपमम् | तत्सुखं सात्त्विकं प्रोक्तमात्मबुद्धिप्रसादजम् ||१८-३७||
yattadagre viṣamiva pariṇāme.amṛtopamam . tatsukhaṃ sāttvikaṃ proktamātmabuddhiprasādajam ||18-37||
विषयेन्द्रियसंयोगाद्यत्तदग्रेऽमृतोपमम् | परिणामे विषमिव तत्सुखं राजसं स्मृतम् ||१८-३८||
viṣayendriyasaṃyogādyattadagre.amṛtopamam . pariṇāme viṣamiva tatsukhaṃ rājasaṃ smṛtam ||18-38||
visaya —objects of sense; indriya —senses; samyogat —combination; yat —
that; tat —which; agre —in the beginning; amrta-upamam —just like nectar;
pariname —at the end; visam iva —like poison; tat —that; sukham — happiness;
rajasam —in the mode of passion; smrtam —is considered.
That happiness which is derived from contact of the senses with their
objects and which appears like nectar at first but poison at the end is said
to be of the nature of passion.
यदग्रे चानुबन्धे च सुखं मोहनमात्मनः | निद्रालस्यप्रमादोत्थं तत्तामसमुदाहृतम् ||१८-३९||
yadagre cānubandhe ca sukhaṃ mohanamātmanaḥ . nidrālasyapramādotthaṃ tattāmasamudāhṛtam ||18-39||
yat —that which; agre —in the beginning; ca —also; anubandhe —by
binding; ca —also; sukham —happiness; mohanam —illusion; atmanah —of the
self; nidra —sleeping; alasya —laziness; pramada —illusion; uttham —
produced of; tat —that; tamasam —in the mode of ignorance; udahrtam —issaid
to be.
And that happiness which is blind to self-realization, which is delusion
from beginning to end and which arises from sleep, laziness and illusion is
said to be of the nature of ignorance.
न तदस्ति पृथिव्यां वा दिवि देवेषु वा पुनः | सत्त्वं प्रकृतिजैर्मुक्तं यदेभिः स्यात्त्रिभिर्गुणैः ||१८-४०||
na tadasti pṛthivyāṃ vā divi deveṣu vā punaḥ . sattvaṃ prakṛtijairmuktaṃ yadebhiḥ syāttribhirguṇaiḥ ||18-40||
na —not; tat —that; asti —there is; prthivyam —within the universe; va —or;
divi —in the higher planetary system; devesu —amongst the demigods; va —or;
punah —again; sattvam —existence; prakrti-jaih —under the influence of
material nature; muktam —liberated; yat —that; ebhih —by this; syat —so
becomes; tribhih —by three; gunaih —modes of material nature.
There is no being existing, either here or among the demigods in the
higher planetary systems, which is freed from the three modes of material
nature.
ब्राह्मणक्षत्रियविशां शूद्राणां च परन्तप | कर्माणि प्रविभक्तानि स्वभावप्रभवैर्गुणैः ||१८-४१||
brāhmaṇakṣatriyaviśāṃ śūdrāṇāṃ ca parantapa . karmāṇi pravibhaktāni svabhāvaprabhavairguṇaiḥ ||18-41||
brahmana —the brahmanas; ksatriya —the ksatriyas; visam —the vaisyas;
sudranam —the sudras; ca —and; parantapa —O subduer of the enemies;
karmani —activities; pravibhaktani —are divided; svabhava —own nature;
prabhavaih —born of; gunaih —by the modes of material nature.
Brahmanas, ksatriyas, vaisyas and sudras are distinguished by their
qualities of work, O chastiser of the enemy, in accordance with the modes
of nature.
शमो दमस्तपः शौचं क्षान्तिरार्जवमेव च | ज्ञानं विज्ञानमास्तिक्यं ब्रह्मकर्म स्वभावजम् ||१८-४२||
śamo damastapaḥ śaucaṃ kṣāntirārjavameva ca . jñānaṃ vijñānamāstikyaṃ brahmakarma svabhāvajam ||18-42||
samah —peacefulness; damah —self-control; tapah —austerity; saucam —
purity; ksantih —tolerance; arjavam —honesty; eva —certainly; ca —and;
jhanam —wisdom; vijnanam —knowledge; astikyam —religiousness; brahma —
of a brahmana; karma —duty; svabhava-jam —born of his own nature.
Peacefulness, self-control, austerity, purity, tolerance, honesty, wisdom,
knowledge, and religiousness-these are the qualities by which the
brahmanas work.
शौर्यं तेजो धृतिर्दाक्ष्यं युद्धे चाप्यपलायनम् | दानमीश्वरभावश्च क्षात्रं कर्म स्वभावजम् ||१८-४३||
śauryaṃ tejo dhṛtirdākṣyaṃ yuddhe cāpyapalāyanam . dānamīśvarabhāvaśca kṣātraṃ karma svabhāvajam ||18-43||
sauryam —heroism; tejah —power; dhrtih —determination; daksyam —
resourcefulness; yuddhe —in battle; ca —and; api —also; apalayanam —not
fleeing; danam —generosity; Tsvara —leadership; bhavah —nature; ca —and
ksatram-ksatriya; karma —duty; svabhava-jam —born of his own nature.
Heroism, power, determination, resourcefulness, courage in battle,
generosity, and leadership are the qualities of work for the ksatriyas.
कृषिगौरक्ष्यवाणिज्यं वैश्यकर्म स्वभावजम् | परिचर्यात्मकं कर्म शूद्रस्यापि स्वभावजम् ||१८-४४||
kṛṣigaurakṣyavāṇijyaṃ vaiśyakarma svabhāvajam . paricaryātmakaṃ karma śūdrasyāpi svabhāvajam ||18-44||
krsi —ploughing; go —cows; raksya —protection; vanijyam —trade; vaisya —
vaisya; karma —duty; svabhava-jam —born of his own nature; paricarya —
service; atmakam —nature; karma —duty; sudrasya —of the sudra; api —also;
svabhava-jam —born of his own nature.
Farming, cattle raising and business are the qualities of work for the
vaisyas, and for the sudras there is labor and service to others.
स्वे स्वे कर्मण्यभिरतः संसिद्धिं लभते नरः | स्वकर्मनिरतः सिद्धिं यथा विन्दति तच्छृणु ||१८-४५||
sve sve karmaṇyabhirataḥ saṃsiddhiṃ labhate naraḥ . svakarmanirataḥ siddhiṃ yathā vindati tacchṛṇu ||18-45||
sve —own; sve —own; karmani —in work; abhiratah —following;
samsiddhim —perfection; labhate —achieves; narah —a man; svakarma —by
his own duty; niratah —engaged; siddhim —perfection; yatha —as; vindati —
attains, tat —that; srnu —listen.
By following his qualities of work, every man can become perfect. Now
please hear from Me how this can be done.
यतः प्रवृत्तिर्भूतानां येन सर्वमिदं ततम् | स्वकर्मणा तमभ्यर्च्य सिद्धिं विन्दति मानवः ||१८-४६||
yataḥ pravṛttirbhūtānāṃ yena sarvamidaṃ tatam . svakarmaṇā tamabhyarcya siddhiṃ vindati mānavaḥ ||18-46||
yatah —from whom; pravrttih —emanation; bhutanam —of all living entities;
yena —by whom; sarvam —all; idam —this; tatam —is pervaded; svakarmana
—in his own duties; tam —Him; abhyarcya —by worshiping; siddhim —
perfection; vindati —achieves; manavah —a man.
By worship of the Lord, who is the source of all beings and who is all-
pervading, man can, in the performance of his own duty, attain
perfection.
श्रेयान्स्वधर्मो विगुणः परधर्मात्स्वनुष्ठितात् | स्वभावनियतं कर्म कुर्वन्नाप्नोति किल्बिषम् ||१८-४७||
śreyānsvadharmo viguṇaḥ paradharmātsvanuṣṭhitāt . svabhāvaniyataṃ karma kurvannāpnoti kilbiṣam ||18-47||
sreyan —better; sva-dharmah —one`s own occupation; vigunah —imperfectly
performed; para-dharmat —another`s occupation; svanusthitat — perfectly
done; svabhava-niyatam —prescribed duties according to one`s nature; karma
—work; kurvan —performing; na —never; apnoti —achieve; kilbisam —sinful
reactions.
It is better to engage in one`s own occupation, even though one may
perform it imperfectly, than to accept another`s occupation and perform
it perfectly. Prescribed duties, according to one`s nature, are never
affected by sinful reactions.
सहजं कर्म कौन्तेय सदोषमपि न त्यजेत् | सर्वारम्भा हि दोषेण धूमेनाग्निरिवावृताः ||१८-४८||
sahajaṃ karma kaunteya sadoṣamapi na tyajet . sarvārambhā hi doṣeṇa dhūmenāgnirivāvṛtāḥ ||18-48||
saha-jam —born simultaneously; karma —work; kaunteya —O son of KuntI;
sa-dosam —with fault; api —although; na —never; tyajet —to be given up;
sarva-arambhah —any venture; hi —is certainly; dosena —with fault; dhumena
—with smoke; agnih —fire; iva —as; avrtah —covered.
Every endeavor is covered by some sort of fault, just as fire is covered
by smoke. Therefore one should not give up the work which is born of his
nature, O son of KuntI, even if such work is full of fault.
असक्तबुद्धिः सर्वत्र जितात्मा विगतस्पृहः | नैष्कर्म्यसिद्धिं परमां संन्यासेनाधिगच्छति ||१८-४९||
asaktabuddhiḥ sarvatra jitātmā vigataspṛhaḥ . naiṣkarmyasiddhiṃ paramāṃ saṃnyāsenādhigacchati ||18-49||
asakta-buddhih —unattached intelligence; sarvatra —everywhere; jita-atma
—control of the mind, vigata-sprhah —without material desires; naiskarmya-
siddhim —perfection of non-reaction; paramam —supreme; sannyasena —by
the renounced order of life; adhigacchati —attains.
One can obtain the results of renunciation simply by self-control and by
becoming unattached to material things and disregarding material
enjoyments. That is the highest perfectional stage of renunciation.
सिद्धिं प्राप्तो यथा ब्रह्म तथाप्नोति निबोध मे | समासेनैव कौन्तेय निष्ठा ज्ञानस्य या परा ||१८-५०||
siddhiṃ prāpto yathā brahma tathāpnoti nibodha me . samāsenaiva kaunteya niṣṭhā jñānasya yā parā ||18-50||
siddhim —perfection; praptah —achieving; yatha —as; brahma —the
Supreme; tatha —so; apnoti —achieves; nibodha —try to understand; me —
from Me; samasena —summarily; eva —certainly; kaunteya —O son of Kunti;
nistha —stage; jnanasya —of knowledge; yd —which; para —transcendental.
O son of Kunti, learn from Me in brief how one can attain to the
supreme perfectional stage. Brahman, by acting in the way which I shall
now summarize.
बुद्ध्या विशुद्धया युक्तो धृत्यात्मानं नियम्य च | शब्दादीन्विषयांस्त्यक्त्वा रागद्वेषौ व्युदस्य च ||१८-५१||
buddhyā viśuddhayā yukto dhṛtyātmānaṃ niyamya ca . śabdādīnviṣayāṃstyaktvā rāgadveṣau vyudasya ca ||18-51||
buddhya —by the intelligence; visuddhaya —fully purified; yuktah —such
engagement; dhrtya —determination; atmanam —self; niyamya —regulated; ca
—also; sabdadin —the sense objects, such as sound, etc.; visayan —sense
objects; tyaktva —giving up; raga —attachments; dvesau —hatred; vyudasya —
having laid aside; ca —also; vivikta-sevT —living in a secluded place; laghu-asT
—eating a small quantity; yata-vak —control of speech; kaya — body;
manasah —control of the mind; dhyana-yoga-parah —always absorbed in
trance; nityam —twenty-four hours a day; vairagyam —detachment;
samupasritah —taken shelter of; ahankaram —false ego; balam — false
strength; darpam —false pride; kamam —lust; krodham —anger; parigraham
—acceptance of material things; vimucya —being delivered; nirmamah —
without proprietorship; santah —peaceful; brahma-bhuyaya —to become self-
realized; kalpate —is understood.
Being purified by his intelligence and controlling the mind with
determination, giving up the objects of sense gratification, being freed
from attachment and hatred, one who lives in a secluded place, who eats
little and who controls the body and the tongue, and is always in trance
and is detached, who is without false ego, false strength, false pride, lust,
anger, and who does not accept material things, such a person is certainly
elevated to the position of self-realization.
विविक्तसेवी लघ्वाशी यतवाक्कायमानसः | ध्यानयोगपरो नित्यं वैराग्यं समुपाश्रितः ||१८-५२||
viviktasevī laghvāśī yatavākkāyamānasaḥ . dhyānayogaparo nityaṃ vairāgyaṃ samupāśritaḥ ||18-52||
अहंकारं बलं दर्पं कामं क्रोधं परिग्रहम् | विमुच्य निर्ममः शान्तो ब्रह्मभूयाय कल्पते ||१८-५३||
ahaṃkāraṃ balaṃ darpaṃ kāmaṃ krodhaṃ parigraham . vimucya nirmamaḥ śānto brahmabhūyāya kalpate ||18-53||
ब्रह्मभूतः प्रसन्नात्मा न शोचति न काङ्क्षति | समः सर्वेषु भूतेषु मद्भक्तिं लभते पराम् ||१८-५४||
brahmabhūtaḥ prasannātmā na śocati na kāṅkṣati . samaḥ sarveṣu bhūteṣu madbhaktiṃ labhate parām ||18-54||
brahma-bhutah —being one with the Absolute; prasanna-atma —fully
joyful; na —never; socati —laments; na —never; kanksati —desires; samah —
equally disposed; sarvesu —all; bhutesu —living entity; mat-bhaktim —My
devotional service; labhate —gains; param —transcendental.
One who is thus transcendentally situated at once realizes the Supreme
Brahman. He never laments nor desires to have anything; he is equally
disposed to every living entity. In that state he attains pure devotional
service unto Me.
भक्त्या मामभिजानाति यावान्यश्चास्मि तत्त्वतः | ततो मां तत्त्वतो ज्ञात्वा विशते तदनन्तरम् ||१८-५५||
bhaktyā māmabhijānāti yāvānyaścāsmi tattvataḥ . tato māṃ tattvato jñātvā viśate tadanantaram ||18-55||
bhaktya —by pure devotional service; mam —Me; abhijanati —one can
know; yavan —as much as; yah ca asmi —as I am; tattvatah —in truth; tatah
—thereafter; mam —Me; tattvatah —by truth; jhatva —knowing; visate —
enters; tat —thereafter; anantaram —after.
One can understand the Supreme Personality as He is only by
devotional service. And when one is in full consciousness of the Supreme
Lord by such devotion, he can enter into the kingdom of God.
सर्वकर्माण्यपि सदा कुर्वाणो मद्व्यपाश्रयः | मत्प्रसादादवाप्नोति शाश्वतं पदमव्ययम् ||१८-५६||
sarvakarmāṇyapi sadā kurvāṇo madvyapāśrayaḥ . matprasādādavāpnoti śāśvataṃ padamavyayam ||18-56||
sarva —all; karmani —activities; api —although; sada —always; kurvanah —
performing; mat —under My; vyapasrayah —protection; mat —My; prasadat
—mercy; avapnod —achieves; sasvatam —eternal; padam —abode; avyayam —
—imperishable.
Though engaged in all kinds of activities. My devotee, under My
protection, reaches the eternal and imperishable abode by My grace.
चेतसा सर्वकर्माणि मयि संन्यस्य मत्परः | बुद्धियोगमुपाश्रित्य मच्चित्तः सततं भव ||१८-५७||
cetasā sarvakarmāṇi mayi saṃnyasya matparaḥ . buddhiyogamupāśritya maccittaḥ satataṃ bhava ||18-57||
cetasa —by intelligence; sarva-karmani —all kinds of activities; mayi —unto
Me; sannyasya —giving up; mat-parah —My protection; buddhi-yogam —
devotional activities; upasritya —taking shelter of; mat-cittah —consciousness;
satatam —twenty-four hours a day; bhava —just become.
In all activities just depend upon Me and work always under My
protection. In such devotional service, be fully conscious of Me.
मच्चित्तः सर्वदुर्गाणि मत्प्रसादात्तरिष्यसि | अथ चेत्त्वमहंकारान्न श्रोष्यसि विनङ्क्ष्यसि ||१८-५८||
maccittaḥ sarvadurgāṇi matprasādāttariṣyasi . atha cettvamahaṃkārānna śroṣyasi vinaṅkṣyasi ||18-58||
mat —My; cittah —consciousness; sarva —all; durgani —impediments; mat —
My; prasadat —My mercy; tarisyasi —you will overcome; atha —therefore; cet
—if; tvam —you; ahahkarat —by false ego; na —not; srosyasi —do not hear;
vinanksyasi —then lose yourself.
If you become conscious of Me, you will pass over all the obstacles of
conditional life by My grace. If, however, you do not work in such
consciousness but act through false ego, not hearing Me, you will be lost.
यदहंकारमाश्रित्य न योत्स्य इति मन्यसे | मिथ्यैष व्यवसायस्ते प्रकृतिस्त्वां नियोक्ष्यति ||१८-५९||
yadahaṃkāramāśritya na yotsya iti manyase . mithyaiṣa vyavasāyaste prakṛtistvāṃ niyokṣyati ||18-59||
yat —therefore; ahankaram —false ego; asritya —taking shelter; na —not;
yotsya —shall fight; iti —thus; manyase —think; mithya esah —this is all false;
y yavasayah te —your determination; prakrtih —material nature; tvam — you;
niyoksyati —will engage you.
If you do not act according to My direction and do not fight, then you
will be falsely directed. By your nature, you will have to be engaged in
warfare.
स्वभावजेन कौन्तेय निबद्धः स्वेन कर्मणा | कर्तुं नेच्छसि यन्मोहात्करिष्यस्यवशोपि तत् ||१८-६०||
svabhāvajena kaunteya nibaddhaḥ svena karmaṇā . kartuṃ necchasi yanmohātkariṣyasyavaśopi tat ||18-60||
sva-bhava-jena —by one`s own nature; kaunteya —O son of KuntI;
nibaddhah —conditioned; svena —by one`s own; karmana —activities; kartum
—to do; na —not; icchasi —like; yat —that; mohat —by illusion; karisyasi —
you will act; avasah —imperceptibly; api —even; tat —that.
Under illusion you are now declining to act according to My direction.
But, compelled by your own nature, you will act all the same, O son of
KuntI.
ईश्वरः सर्वभूतानां हृद्देशेऽर्जुन तिष्ठति | भ्रामयन्सर्वभूतानि यन्त्रारूढानि मायया ||१८-६१||
īśvaraḥ sarvabhūtānāṃ hṛddeśe.arjuna tiṣṭhati . bhrāmayansarvabhūtāni yantrārūḍhāni māyayā ||18-61||
Tsvarah —the Supreme Lord; sarva-bhutanam —of all living entities; hrd-
dese —in the location of the heart; arjuna —O Arjuna; tisthati —resides;
bhramayan —causing to travel; sarva-bhutani —all living entities; yantra —
machine; arudhani —being so placed; mayaya —under the spell of material
energy.
The Supreme Lord is situated in everyone`s heart, O Arjuna, and is
directing the wanderings of all living entities, who are seated as on a
machine, made of the material energy.
तमेव शरणं गच्छ सर्वभावेन भारत | तत्प्रसादात्परां शान्तिं स्थानं प्राप्स्यसि शाश्वतम् ||१८-६२||
tameva śaraṇaṃ gaccha sarvabhāvena bhārata . tatprasādātparāṃ śāntiṃ sthānaṃ prāpsyasi śāśvatam ||18-62||
tam —unto Him; eva —certainly; saranam —surrender; gaccha —go; sarva-
bhavena —in all respects; bharata —O son of Bharata; tat-prasadat —by His
grace; param —transcendental; santim —peace; sthanam —abode; prapsyasi —
you will get; sasvatam —eternal.
O scion of Bharata, surrender unto Him utterly. By His grace you will
attain transcendental peace and the supreme and eternal abode.
इति ते ज्ञानमाख्यातं गुह्याद्गुह्यतरं मया | विमृश्यैतदशेषेण यथेच्छसि तथा कुरु ||१८-६३||
iti te jñānamākhyātaṃ guhyādguhyataraṃ mayā . vimṛśyaitadaśeṣeṇa yathecchasi tathā kuru ||18-63||
iti —thus; te —unto you; jnanam —knowledge; akhyatam —described; guhyat
—confidential; guhyataram —still more confidential; maya —by Me; vimrsya
—by deliberation; etat —that; asesena —fully; yatha —as you; icchasi —you
like; tatha —that; kuru —perform.
Thus I have explained to you the most confidential of all knowledge.
Deliberate on this fully, and then do what you wish to do.
सर्वगुह्यतमं भूयः शृणु मे परमं वचः | इष्टोऽसि मे दृढमिति ततो वक्ष्यामि ते हितम् ||१८-६४||
sarvaguhyatamaṃ bhūyaḥ śṛṇu me paramaṃ vacaḥ . iṣṭo.asi me dṛḍhamiti tato vakṣyāmi te hitam ||18-64||
sarva-guhyatamam —the most confidential; bhuyah —again; smu —just
hear; me —from Me; paramam —the supreme; vacah —instruction; istah asi —
you are very dear to Me; drdham —very; iti —thus; tatah —therefore; vaksyami
—speaking; te —for your; hitam —benefit.
Because you are My very dear friend, I am speaking to you the most
confidential part of knowledge. Hear this from Me, for it is for your
benefit.
मन्मना भव मद्भक्तो मद्याजी मां नमस्कुरु | मामेवैष्यसि सत्यं ते प्रतिजाने प्रियोऽसि मे ||१८-६५||
manmanā bhava madbhakto madyājī māṃ namaskuru . māmevaiṣyasi satyaṃ te pratijāne priyo.asi me ||18-65||
man-manah —thinking of Me; bhava —just become; mat-bhaktah —My
devotee; mat-yaji —My worshiper; mam —unto Me; namaskuru —offer your
obeisances; mam —unto Me; eva —certainly; esyasi —come; satyam —truly; te
—to you; pratijane —I promise; prijah —dear; asi —you are; me —My.
Always think of Me and become My devotee. Worship Me and offer
your homage unto Me. Thus you will come to Me without fail. I promise
you this because you are My very dear friend.
सर्वधर्मान्परित्यज्य मामेकं शरणं व्रज | अहं त्वा सर्वपापेभ्यो मोक्षयिष्यामि मा शुचः ||१८-६६||
sarvadharmānparityajya māmekaṃ śaraṇaṃ vraja . ahaṃ tvāṃ sarvapāpebhyo mokṣyayiṣyāmi mā śucaḥ ||18-66||
sarva-dharman —all varieties of religion; parityajya —abandoning; mam —
unto Me; ekam —only; saranam —surrender; vraja —go; aham —I; tvam —you;
sarva —all; papebhyah —from sinful reactions; moksayisyami —deliver; ma —
not; sucah —worry.
Abandon all varieties of religion and just surrender unto Me. I shall
deliver you from all sinful reaction. Do not fear.
इदं ते नातपस्काय नाभक्ताय कदाचन | न चाशुश्रूषवे वाच्यं न च मां योऽभ्यसूयति ||१८-६७||
idaṃ te nātapaskāya nābhaktāya kadācana . na cāśuśrūṣave vācyaṃ na ca māṃ yo.abhyasūyati ||18-67||
idam —this; te —you; na —never; atapaskaya —one who is not austere; na —
never; abhaktaya —one who is not a devotee; kadacana —at any time; na —
never; ca —also; asusrusave —one who is not engaged in devotional service;
vacyam —to be spoken; na —never; ca —also; mam —unto Me; yah —anyone;
abhyasuyati —envious.
This confidential knowledge may not be explained to those who are not
austere, or devoted, or engaged in devotional service, nor to one who is
envious of Me.
य इदं परमं गुह्यं मद्भक्तेष्वभिधास्यति | भक्तिं मयि परां कृत्वा मामेवैष्यत्यसंशयः ||१८-६८||
ya idaṃ paramaṃ guhyaṃ madbhakteṣvabhidhāsyati . bhaktiṃ mayi parāṃ kṛtvā māmevaiṣyatyasaṃśayaḥ ||18-68||
yah —anyone; idam —this; paramam —most; guhyam —confidential; mat —
Mine; bhaktesu —amongst devotees of; abhidhasyati —explains; bhaktim —
devotional service; mayi —unto Me; param —transcendental; krtva —having
done; mam —unto Me; eva —certainly; esyati —comes; asamsayah —without
doubt.
For one who explains the supreme secret to the devotees, devotional
service is guaranteed, and at the end he will come back to Me.
न च तस्मान्मनुष्येषु कश्चिन्मे प्रियकृत्तमः | भविता न च मे तस्मादन्यः प्रियतरो भुवि ||१८-६९||
na ca tasmānmanuṣyeṣu kaścinme priyakṛttamaḥ . bhavitā na ca me tasmādanyaḥ priyataro bhuvi ||18-69||
na —never; ca —and; tasmat —therefore; manusyesu —among mankind;
kascit —anyone; me —My; priya-krttamah —more dear; bhavita —will become;
na —no; ca —and; me —My; tasmat —than him; anyah —other; priyatarah —
dearer; bhuvi —in this world.
There is no servant in this world more dear to Me than he, nor will
there ever be one more dear.
अध्येष्यते च य इमं धर्म्यं संवादमावयोः | ज्ञानयज्ञेन तेनाहमिष्टः स्यामिति मे मतिः ||१८-७०||
adhyeṣyate ca ya imaṃ dharmyaṃ saṃvādamāvayoḥ . jñānayajñena tenāhamiṣṭaḥ syāmiti me matiḥ ||18-70||
adhyesyate —will study; ca —also; yah —he; imam —this; dharmyam —
sacred; samvadam —conversation; avayoh —of ours; jhana —knowledge;
yajhena —by sacrifice; tena —by him; aham —I; istah —worshiped; syam —shall
be; iti —thus; me —My; matih —opinion.
And I declare that he who studies this sacred conversation worships Me
by his intelligence.
श्रद्धावाननसूयश्च शृणुयादपि यो नरः | सोऽपि मुक्तः शुभाँल्लोकान्प्राप्नुयात्पुण्यकर्मणाम् ||१८-७१||
śraddhāvānanasūyaśca śṛṇuyādapi yo naraḥ . so.api muktaḥ śubhā.Nllokānprāpnuyātpuṇyakarmaṇām ||18-71||
sraddhavan —faithful; anasuyah ca —and not envious; srnuyat —does hear;
api —certainly; yah —who; narah —man; sah api —he also; muktah —being
liberated; subhan —auspicious; lokan —planets; prapnuyat —attains; punya-
karmanam —of the past.
And one who listens with faith and without envy becomes free from
sinful reaction and attains to the planets where the pious dwell.
कच्चिदेतच्छ्रुतं पार्थ त्वयैकाग्रेण चेतसा | कच्चिदज्ञानसम्मोहः प्रनष्टस्ते धनञ्जय ||१८-७२||
kaccidetacchrutaṃ pārtha tvayaikāgreṇa cetasā . kaccidajñānasammohaḥ pranaṣṭaste dhanañjaya ||18-72||
kaccit —whether; etat —this; srutam —heard; partha —O son of Prtha; tvaya
—by you; ekagrena —with full attention; cetasa —by the mind; kaccit —
whether; ajhana —ignorant; sammohah —illusion; pranastah —dispelled; te —
of you; dhananjaya —O conqueror of wealth (Arjuna).
O conqueror of wealth, Arjuna, have you heard this attentively with
your mind? And are your illusions and ignorance now dispelled?
अर्जुन उवाच | नष्टो मोहः स्मृतिर्लब्धा त्वत्प्रसादान्मयाच्युत | स्थितोऽस्मि गतसन्देहः करिष्ये वचनं तव ||१८-७३||
arjuna uvāca . naṣṭo mohaḥ smṛtirlabdhā tvatprasādānmayācyuta . sthito.asmi gatasandehaḥ kariṣye vacanaṃ tava ||18-73||
arjunah uvaca —Arjuna said; nastah —dispelled; mohah —illusion; smrtih —
memory; labdha —regained; tvat-prasadat —by Your mercy; maya —by me;
acyuta —O infallible Krsna; sthitah —situated; asmi —I am; gata —removed;
sandehah —all doubts; karisye —I shall execute; vacanam —order; tava —Your.
Arjuna said, My dear Krsna, O infallible one, my illusion is now gone. I
have regained my memory by Your mercy, and I am now firm and free
from doubt and am prepared to act according to Your instructions.
सञ्जय उवाच | इत्यहं वासुदेवस्य पार्थस्य च महात्मनः | संवादमिममश्रौषमद्भुतं रोमहर्षणम् ||१८-७४||
sañjaya uvāca . ityahaṃ vāsudevasya pārthasya ca mahātmanaḥ . saṃvādamimamaśrauṣamadbhutaṃ romaharṣaṇam ||18-74||
sanjayah uvaca —Sanjaya said; id —thus; aham —I; vasudevasya —of Krsna;
parthasya —of Arjuna; ca —also; mahatmanah —two great souls; samvadam —
discussing; imam —this; asrausam —heard; adbhutam —wonder;
romaharsanam —hair standing on end.
Sanjaya said: Thus have I heard the conversation of two great souls,
Krsna and Arjuna. And so wonderful is that message that my hair is
standing on end.
व्यासप्रसादाच्छ्रुतवानेतद्गुह्यमहं परम् | योगं योगेश्वरात्कृष्णात्साक्षात्कथयतः स्वयम् ||१८-७५||
vyāsaprasādācchrutavānetadguhyamahaṃ param . yogaṃ yogeśvarātkṛṣṇātsākṣātkathayataḥ svayam ||18-75||
vyasa-prasadat —by the mercy of Vyasadeva; srutavan —heard; etat —this;
guhyam —confidential; aham —I; param —the supreme; yogam —mysticism;
yogesvarat —from the master of all mysticism; krsnat —from Krsna; saksat —
directly; kathayatah —speaking; svayam —personally.
By the mercy of Vyasa, I have heard these most confidential talks
directly from the master of all mysticism, Krsna, who was speaking
personally to Arjuna.
राजन्संस्मृत्य संस्मृत्य संवादमिममद्भुतम् | केशवार्जुनयोः पुण्यं हृष्यामि च मुहुर्मुहुः ||१८-७६||
rājansaṃsmṛtya saṃsmṛtya saṃvādamimamadbhutam . keśavārjunayoḥ puṇyaṃ hṛṣyāmi ca muhurmuhuḥ ||18-76||
rajan —O King; samsmrtya —remembering; samsmrtya —remembering;
samvadam —message; imam —this; adbhutam —wonderful; kesava —Lord
Krsna; arjunayoh —and Arjuna; puny am —pious; hrsyami —taking pleasure; ca
—also; muhuh muhuh —always, repeatedly.
O King, as I repeatedly recall this wondrous and holy dialogue between
Krsna and Arjuna, I take pleasure, being thrilled at every moment.
तच्च संस्मृत्य संस्मृत्य रूपमत्यद्भुतं हरेः | विस्मयो मे महान् राजन्हृष्यामि च पुनः पुनः ||१८-७७||
tacca saṃsmṛtya saṃsmṛtya rūpamatyadbhutaṃ hareḥ . vismayo me mahān rājanhṛṣyāmi ca punaḥ punaḥ ||18-77||
tat —that; ca —also; samsmrtya —remembering; samsmrtya —remembering;
rupam —form; ati —great; adbhutam —wonderful; hareh —of Lord Krsna;
vismayah —wonder; me —my; mahan —great; rajan —O King, hrsyami
—enjoying; ca —also; punah punah —repeatedly.
O King, when I remember the wonderful form of Lord Krsna, I am
struck with even greater wonder, and I rejoice again and again.
यत्र योगेश्वरः कृष्णो यत्र पार्थो धनुर्धरः | तत्र श्रीर्विजयो भूतिर्ध्रुवा नीतिर्मतिर्मम ||१८-७८||
yatra yogeśvaraḥ kṛṣṇo yatra pārtho dhanurdharaḥ . tatra śrīrvijayo bhūtirdhruvā nītirmatirmama ||18-78||
yatra —where; yogesvarah —the master of mysticism; krsnah —Lord Krsna;
yatra —where; parthah —the son of Prtha; dhanur-dharah —the carrier of the
bow and arrow; tatra —there; srih —opulence; vijayah —victory; bhutih —
exceptional power; dhruva —certainly; nftih —morality; matih mama —is my
opinion.
Wherever there is Krsna, the master of all mystics, and wherever there
is Arjuna, the supreme archer, there will also certainly be opulence,
victory, extraordinary power, and morality. That is my opinion.
Кришна © На все времена